Class |

Book

PRESENTED BY

See ee

ria

ae

on

ee

a

St ec Sao

L hl

2 ee oe

rerto dS. ante war?

¥ ee 122 C8 ee ma eL, owele al
Madera, ie ap:
yi Pay ¢ # % N € ese ays at x R:
vA ; Fiton Kocks Cece

Wa Forteveng,, “<4 Laltieet
C.4AN1RY TS ae y 2

‘ Le he Tlf ae
7 Caner:

——

DISCOVERY AND ADVENTURE

iN

AFRICA.

roa

os “

We =

me

YZ

a a
ee

AGS

J tj a Ws f WwW Z i, = Au
= ZI ZB
| ae — Ss LW
~ ee i, Zz
; ees & = nf = ————_ i LA
Z ———— weit : ;} —— "% yep
f ys W/ =

NEW-YORK:
HARPER & BROTHERS, 82 CLIFFST.

1836.

©

HH

mre

Te hr ey

we

e—

ome —

r i

BTS OC

MADETR. 7. iy

Cc

CIV neen
St: or G

NY Sy ee 3G

Lento Santo
Mespeco,

M ——
eile The Deserts

HAN ie
Fiton Books ce

A

C Cutis

Nur Tc ‘4

oS Vi MSC ES

| CBopades
Mongeatty

SR EAT Aes

/ ig
oes . 4
BED te
Sees
i. _ Pes
pi estrone

Wrevhound B
drgum

Sic
nh ne
sutle

a ta Weak’
NC

“Kone:

AN Aone:

Cin, be

CoM ay, sy,

v L

So dhaithen:

vw

one Iscenston

~ Stiielena

H

=|
g
5
°
*
A
a:
aI
=
i

Fadi
°

Lean

Malet

yAM b a 5
alia Jenite \

fos
ASTEANTE

10

ey 90 TT — —— 7 ot yg — 1

Riscaras i 4
henwdeaih 1

°
+ oO
y farina ©

OR TWAT
Mall L

© Miuggurt

Mjrou

200) A
Ayodes

nbucloo

iF

7
s
-.

on hie “

‘ PTA
aa nlY
Femando 1’

|
Livile

salon

on dames?

ae ZO
Bic

is 1

bY of ;
5 Soka,
Wadaue » wife

| Siale Teniessa

“thaw ip a

ivbeu 4 Virkec

Ziphian
‘utla

Gs ne

Salt Late

ay
S
2
s
>

y
=
~

ode, dyed aM i. hh, vd

©
6 B Maid

seousile my

>

Mors
° daca EB spary
’ Dunrova

ibhtofPannavia

y (lbo ngos
(ic

of PDomboa :

Uguatoe orFiquinoctial Line

40

ANE —— WINNT AN el

OW ARK TE |

mF

CORD:

a ¥
manne ‘4 A

AL

Vibra
De vert

LoShendkye—
May “tfo A

NY ;
«ees gd x Sha SSIN wud Som aul

S|
3s)
aS

May wuiba
>. Loangzo

Port Alexande :

I OANGO
lee

y, Lette, ot P, qul de

ye CoAMza

oy

<ttehy pe

doeRenstrel: 1

nBalearviearré,

o ay
fo ,yp™

ru
WY Lattakoo,

\

50 Lonottude West 20 from Greenwich 10
c

SUletena Basse ap
A KC?

se
Melita
°

Noinda
vomba va
Lembal

Phanibar 1

lonfia th
2. Duuloa E thiop.

N

Zanzibar
o

“Harrison Re Siam

ee lublishers.

Tropic of Cancer

D

aA DL

WY

N
y
AN Forerimd 4

Avehi
7

Delgado <
= Comore

= ComondNI she. Sw
Mavotta

Mong’allos

Copii t
nane ™

bol RPa

Lormientes
.

\, -
Bar p

Nurceohan
as

oMashow

pelago

Ihe Str Ls

Stidinher

Hemar B.

tone a

(0)
"Tamb TL.

50 Lon. Bast

60 from Greenwich

ee ai ae
6 ag ERS,
Sy ~- - -

Ts:

LTarper’s Stereotype Edition.

NARRATIVE

OF
DISCOVERY AND ADVENTURE

IN

AFRICA,

FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE PRESENT TIME:

WITH ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE

GEOLOGY, MINERALOGY, AND ZOOLOGY.
- me

— :
BY PROFESSOR JAMESON, JAME SQ. F.R.S.E.,
4 2 : :
AND HUGH MURRA -S.E.

j ee s

TES oF PARK, AND
WITH A MAP; PLANS OF THE ROU ES OF PARK, AND OF DENHAM AND
CLAPPERTON ; AND SEVERAL ENGRAVINGS.

— ie
“ >
7 2
2 > _

NEW-YORK:

PUBLISHED BY HARPER & BROTHERS,

no. 82 CLIFF-STREET

1839

Fe,
jie
Cee,
| gt
:
;
|
&

eH ba
eS |
Sap

_GIft from * gaia.

Miss Allce H. Bushee

Jan. 6 1932
oF

EE SS tO od: aa
| Y

PREFACE.

Tue object of this volume is to exhibit, within a
moderate compass, whatever is most interesting in
the adventures and observations of those travellers
who, from the earliest ages, and in various direc.
tions, have sought to explore Africa; and also tu
give a general view of the physical and social condi-
tion of that extensive continent at the present day.
This quarter of the globe has afforded more ample
scope than any other to the exertions of that class of
men whose enterprising spirit impels them, regard-
jess of toil and peril, to penetrate into unknown coun-
tries. Down to a comparatively recent period, the
greater part of its immense surface was the subject
only of vague report and conjecture. The progress
of those discoverers, by whom a very large extent of

its interior regions has at length been disclosed,

having been accompanied with arduous labours, and
achieved in the face of the most formidable obstacles,
presents a continued succession of striking incidents,
as well as of new and remarkable objects: and our
interest cannot fail to be heightened by the considera-

- tion, that Britain, by the intrepid spirit of her travel-

lers, her associations of distinguished individuals,
and her national patronage, has secured almost the
exclusive glory of the many important discoveries

which have been made within the last forty years.

The work now submitted to the public, and the
recent one on the Polar Regions, embrace two of
the most interesting fields of modern discovery. The
adventurers who traversed these opposite parts of
the world frequently found their efforts checked, and
their career arrested, by the operation of causes which,
although equally powerful, were yet extremely dif-

Vi PREFACE,

ferent in their nature. In the Northern Seas, they
suffered from that dreadful extremity of cold to which
high latitudes are exposed; in Africa, from the scorch-
ing heat and pestilential vapours peculiar to a tropical -
climate: there, they encountered the fury of oceans
and tempests ; here, the privations and fatigues which
oppress the traveller in parched and boundless de-
Serts. In the former they had less to endure from
that almost total absence of human life which ren-
ders the Arctic zone so drear , than they had to ex-
perience in the latter from the fierce, contemptuous,
and persecuting character of the people who occupy
the interior parts of the Libyan continent. In a
word, while exploring these remote regions, they
braved almost every species_of danger, and passed
through every variety of suffering, by which the
Strength and fortitude of man can be tried.

The Narrative of these successive Travels and
Expeditions has been contributed by Mr. Hugh Mur-
ray. The Geological Ulustrations have been fur-
nished by the justly celebrated Professor J ameson ;
and for the interesting and very ample account of its
Natural History the reader is indebted to Mr. James

. Wilson, author of “ Illustrations of Zoology,” and

the principal contributor in that branch of science to
the new edition of the Encyclopedia Britannica,
The present volume, having for its main object the
History of Discovery and Adventure, does not in-
clude the countries on the Mediterranean coast, which |
from the earliest ages have been well known to the
nations of Europe.—Egypt, again, from its high an-
tiquity, its stupendous monuments, and the memora-
ble revolutions through which it has passed, pre-
sented matter at once too interesting and ample to
-be comprehended within such narrow limits. The
history of that kingdom, therefore, has been reserveG
for a separate volume, which will contain also an
account of Nubia and Abyssinia.

EDINBURGH, 20th November, 1830.

CONTENTS.

j CHAPTER I.
GENERAL VIEW OF THE NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA
{Introductory Observations—its Situation on the Globe—Extensive De.

serts—Mountains and Rivers—Vegetable Life—-Animal Life—Social
Aspect—Striking Contrasts which it presents ....... ceeeees Page 13

CHAPTER II.
KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA AMONG THE ANCIENTS.

Northern Africa well known—-Obstacles opposed by the Deserf—De-
scription given by Herodotus—by Diodorus—by Strabo—Ancient Ac-
counts of the Nile—of Ethiopia—of Abyssinia—Expedition seut by
Necho—Journey of the Nasamones—Voyage of Sataspes—of Hanno—
Voyages of Hudoxus—Periplus of the Erythrean Sea ...... siaavens Be

CHAPTER III.
SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS,

* Their Influence on this Continent—Migration into Central Africa—
Ghana—Tocrur—Kuku— Wangara—Ulil—Eastern Africa—Travels of
Ibn Batuta—Description by Leo Africanus .......

CHAPTER IV.

PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES.

Rise of the Spirit of Discovery—Voyages along the Western Coast—The
Senegal—Prince Bemoy—Discovery of the Congo—Numerous Mis-
sionaries sent out—Superstitions of the Natives......... Me ytae eae

CHAPTER V.
EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES.

Decline of Portuguese maritime Power—Company formed in England to
explore the Gambia—Richard Thompson—His Death—Jobson’s. Voy-

age up the Gambia—Manners of the Native Africans—Vermuyden—
Stibbs e@eosecesee sense reece eeeesee 0208 8

eerne res eect esesresreseovesesevn 5
CHAPTER VI.

FRENCH DISCOVERIES.

French Settlement on the Senegal—Jannequin’s Voyage—Voyages of
Brue up the Senegal—Bambouk; Gold Mines—Saugnier—Gum-
trade..... aio 'e OOD een Oe Ne Saedcioee

seesescteeeeseeeessnesoen 6”

Vill CONTENTS. |

CHAPTER VII.
EARLY PROCEEDINGS OF THE AFRICAN ASSOCIATON.
Ledyard—Lucas—Information respecting the Interior—Houghton—His
| DSc aS OT rOAr < Sekar (ANA Oe Ne See te ARS Go oo ca naa 77

CHAPTER VIII.
PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY.

Park undertakes to explore Africa—Departure—Ill Treatment at Bon-
dou and Joag—Kooniakary—Captivity among the Moors—Escape
—The Niger—Sego—Sansanding—Silla—Obliged to return—Various
Misfortunes—Distressed State—Finds Relief at Kamalia—Arrival in
Pian t. ese ce. toes Sibley bees tee tS a 8s bie tenes eae ee 83

CHAPTER IX.
- PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY.

-Views under which he was sent out—Departure—Overtaken by the

Rainy Season—Great Sickness and Distress—Embarks on the Niger—
Negotiations with the King of Bambarra—Obtains Permission to build
a Vessel—Sansanding—Sets sail—Accounts of his Death........ 100

CHAPTER X.
VARIVUS TRAVELLERS.
Horneman—Nicholls—Roentgen—Adams—Riley ...-..cccscoesses 108

CHAPTER XI.
GOVERNMENT EXPEDITIONS.

Great Expedition planned under Tuckey and Peddie—Captain Tuckey
reaches the Congo—Difficuities encountered—Great Sickness—Disas -
trous issue—Major Peddie arrives at Kakundy—His Death—Captain
Campbell advances into the Foulah Territory—Obliged to return—His
Death—Gray—Laing—Ritchie and Lyon—Death of Ritchie...... 121

|
CHAPTER XII.

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON,

Arrangements with the Court of Tripoli~ The Travellers arrive there—
Journey to Mourzouk—Difficultics—Agreement with Boo Khalloom—
Departure—The Desert--Tibboos and Tuaricks—Arrive at the Lake
Tchad—The Yeou—Kouka—Visit to the Sheik—The Sultan—Descrip-
tion of Bornou—Denham’s Excursion to Mandara—Great Range of
Mountains—Disastrous Expedition—War against the Mungas—Ex-
cursion to Loggun—Expedition against the La Salas—Biddoomahs—
Clapperton’s Journey into Houssa— Appearance of that Country—
Kano—Sackatoo—Sultan Bello—Return of the Travellers......- - 126

CHAPTER XIII.
CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY, &¢.
Objects of this Journey—-Departure from Badagry—Death of Pearce and

CONTENTS. 1x

of Morrison—Kingdom of Yarriba—Eyeo—Kiama—Wawa—Boussa—
Particulars respecting Park—Nyffee— Koolfu—Zaria—Kano—NSiege of
- Coonia—Violent Conduct of Sultan Bello—Sickness and Death of
Clapperton at Sackatoo—His Servant Lander*returns, partly by a
new RKoute—Laing’s Expedition—He reaches Timbuctoo—Assassi-
nated—Waillié undertakes a Journey—Reaches Jenne—Timbuctoo—
Aroan—The Desert—Arrival at Tangier...........seseeeeeeeeee 176

CHAPTER XIV.
WESTERN AFRICA.

General View of this Coast—Dahomey; Norris and M‘Leod—Foota
Jallo; Watt and Winterbottom—<Ashantee ; Embassies of Bowdich
and Dupuis ; War—Adams’ Account of Benin and Waree....... 197

CHAPTER XV.
SOUTHERN AND EASTERN AFRICA.

The Cape—Settlement of the Dutch—Kolben— Hope, Sparrman, Le Vail-
lant—Barrow ; Caffres; Bosjesmans—Trutter and Sommerville—Dr.
Cowan and his Party—Their Assassination—Lichtenstein—Campbell’s
(the Missionary) First and Second Journeys—Burchell—Thompson—
Invasion of the Mantatees—Zoolas...........++ Bes ed ics eT,

CHAPTER XVI. __
SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

Distinction between Native and Foreign Tribes—Natives—Agriculture
—Manufactures —Trade— Domestic Accommodations — Intellectual
Character—Superstitions—War and Slavery—Some amiable Fea-
tures—Forms of Government—Foreign Races—Mohammedan Con-
verts—European Colonization—Cape of Good Hope—Albany District
PERE PAC - Ce Anes cans Roe sade snes sae bu ea snys ckvnw cus anh «Sed

CHAPTER XVII.
GEOLOGY OF AFRICA.

Form and Situation of Africa—Its great Natural Regions or Divisions. —
1. Geology of the Atlas or Northern Region—Age of the Atlas Moun-
tains.—2. Geology of the Sahara Region—Subterranean Villages near
Tripoli; in Spain and France—Tertiary Rocks of Benioleed—Soudan
or Black Mountains—Petrified Wood in the Desert-—-Horrid Conse-
quences of the Slave-trade—Human Skeletons in the Desert—Natron
and Salt Lakes—Desert of Bilma—Sultan of Fezzan and a Slave—On
what Formation does the Sand of the Desert rest?—Description of a
Trona or Natron Lake—Fulgurite and native Meteoric Iron in the
Desert—Observations on the Sand of the Desert—Moving Pillars of
Sand—Sand-wind—How the prevailing Winds affect the Sand of the
Desert—What is the Geognostical Age of the Sahara?—3. Geology
of the Region to the South of the Sahara, and to the North of the
Great Table-land—African Gold.—4. Geology of the Great Table-land
of Africa—Geology of the Coast from Sierra Leone to Cape Negro—
Cape of Good Hope District—Distribution of its Chains of Mountains,
Plains and Valleys, or Kloofs—Description of the Karroo Plains—

x CONTENTS.

Geognosy of the Peninsula of the Cape of Good Hope—The Lion’s
Rump—Lion’s Head—Table Mountain—Devil’s Peak—To what Class
of Rocks do those of the Cape Peninsula belong?!—At what Period
did the Cape Rocks rise above the Level of the Sea ?—Vegetables in-
erusted with Calcareous Sand confounded with Coral, and adduced as
a Proof of the very recent Emergence from, the Ocean of the Lands
supporting them—Geology of the Table-land, properly so called—Ac-
count of the Sibilo of the Africans—Geological Survey of the Karroe
Ground recommended—Rivers—South African Lakes—South African
Springs—Remarks on the Importance of a Knowledge of the Natural
History and Chemical Composition of Springs—Geology of Caffraria_
Natal, .¢.— CONCIUSION « « - .-)0,+..0)-,0, 0/0 ine savin eieiane elie ree |

CHAPTER XVIII.
NATURAL HISTORY OF THE QUADRUPEDS OF AFRICA.

introductory Observations — Orang-outang — Monkeys — Baboons—Le-
murs—Galagos—Bats—Shrew-mice—Cape Mole — Tenrec — Ratel —
Otter—Jackals and Wild Dogs—Civets—Lion—Panther and Leopard -
—Lynxes—Squirrels—Marmots—Sand Mole—Gerboa—Rats and Mice
—Dormice—Porcupines—Hares and Rabbits—Cape Ant-eater— Manis

, —Elephant—Rhinoceros—Ethiopian Hog—Hippopotamus — Zebra —
Quagga—Camel—Dromedary—Red Deer—Giraffe—Antelopes of vari-
ous kinds—Gnu—Cape Buffalo—Egyptian Goat and Sheep...... 290

CHAPTER XIX.
NATURAL HISTORY OF THE BIRDS OF AFRICA.

Introductory Observations—Vultures—Serpent-eater—Eagles—Hawks
—Owls—Butcher-birds—Thrushes—Buntings—Colius—Beef-eaters—
Rollers—Goat-suckers—Swallows—Hoopoes—Promerops — Creepers
—Bee-eater—King fishers—Hornbills— W oodpeckers—Cuckoos — Ho-
ney-guide—Parrots— Pogonias—Trogon—Musophaga— Touraco — Pi-
geons—Guinea Fowls—Quails—Partridges, &c.—Ostrich—Bustards
—Balearic Cranes—Flamingo—Gigantic Stork—Umber—Snipe and
Woodcock—Sandpiper—Courier—Plover—Penguin —Pelican—Plotus
—Tern—Gull—Albatross—Cape Petrel—Spur-winged Goose—Moun-

tain Goose—Egyptian Goose—Sheldrake—Musk-duck .......... - 323
CHAPTER XX.
NATURAL HISTORY OF THE REPTILES, FISHES, SHELLS, INSECTS, &c.
OF AFRICA.

Introductory Observations — Crocodiles — Lizards — Chameleon — Ser-
peuts—Frogs—General Observations on Fishes—Murena—Gobius—
Cottus—Scorpxna—Zeus—Remora—Labrus — Mackarel — Surmullet
—F lying Gurnard—Electric Silure—Salmon—Polypterus—Argentine
—F lying-fish—Polyneme—African Herring—Carp—Mormyrus—Ray
—Ostracion—Tetrodon—Pipe-fish — Fossil Fish — General Observa-
tions on Shells—Various African Species—Remarks on the Distribution
of Insects—-Goliathus, é&c.—Paussus—Mantis—Locusts—-Butterfly
Tribe — Bees—Scorpions—Centipedes—Zoophytes—Coral—Sponge—
GEUCE VV OLIN oe ieee eats 63) pen ee em, 2

eee eee eesene eee esses

ENGRAVINGS.

Map of Africa..... es cn de GS im wstn'g sheiale aiaiatn cial To face the Titlepage.
VicNETTE—Caravan in the Desert.
Group of Figures—Chief, Jillemen or es Musicians, and Gree-

eree Mam or-Macieiaiy oo. 0). oo ses ae hein ds ceedediesstle Page 63
Mamnwe Weary Manepries..). 00s doe 22S I0o AS. sie Sed lad ee man
Park’s Routes ........ TPS WE REET ae AME eo 6 a ne en a ar - 82

Tuarick on his Camel, with Male and Female Tibbco --........... 134
Denham and Clapperton’s Routes........-..0ssee cece eeee eee eeee 137

Seicaly Gf Barnow ©2325 os. . ose. oss eee BPR ud « Saale s 142
Mamemieinvalic River Means sede os coe 5s Wie ds de Dees lesen eel 145
Bornou Horseman, Kanemboo Spearman, and Munga Bowman.... 157
Timbuctoo according to Caillié ........ See pry ted 8 SIRE Fo See ee 195
Aeienice Warrior dnd Attendant ..... 65005. 2k bse oS vacanetintiese 202
Queen of Lattakoo, Lattakoo Warrior, and two Bosjesman Hotten-
SUES = 5.9 SER ow cles slods shied Gite idl Liste PLY Fase See eee ate 225
Negroes preparing the Manioc Root....... URS raee ners abbas tesa 230
Negro Palaver-house.. aes RE SR Sa god c Saree tel tee

Group of African Wala Mth front, i in oe hia: the ietiuiglocrtied :
—to the right, the Hippopotamus and Orang-outang. In the centre
background, the Giraffe ;—to the left, Antelopes and Zebra ...... 290

as

DISCOVERY AND ADVENTURE

IN

AFRICA.

CHAPTER I.

General View of the Natural Features of Africa.

Berore following the career of adventure and discovery
in Africa, and viewing its kingdoms and regions under their
varied aspects, it may be interesting to take a rapid survey
of this continent in its original state, as it came from the
hands of nature. Though immense, and abounding even
with the most striking and surprising contrasts, yet, on a
general view, a certain uniformity, approaching almost to
monotony, appears to pervade it. From one end to the
other, dreary wastes of almost boundless extent are spread
over its surface, alternating with bright intervals of the
most luxuriant vegetation. These arid tracts also have
their borders embellished by shrubs and flowers tinted with
the most brilliant hues ; while a profusion of animal life in
all its forms distinguishes the more temperate latitudes.

Africa, considered in relation to her place on the map,
forms an extensive continent, situated nearly in the centre
of the earth, and obstructing the great highway across the
ocean. Her coasts form the chief barrier to a direct mari-
time intercourse between the distant extremities of the
globe. To perform the vast circuit of her shores, and to
round her stormy capes, has tried the courage and hardi-
hood of the greatest navigators. Could Africa cease to
exist, great facilities would be afforded to the communica-
tion between the other continents, and many new chan-
nels of commerce would be opened up. As she, however,

14 NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA.

has an existence likely to be coeval with theirs, our concern
is with her actual condition, presenting as it does many pe-
culiar claims to interest in the eyes of the philosopher and
politician.

The physical peculiarities which distinguish Africa seem
to depend chiefly on the circumstance that almost her whole
territory is situated within the tropics. The other portions
of the earth’s surface which lie directly beneath the scolar
influence consist generally either of sea, or of narrow and
insular lands, refreshed by breezes from the ocean. But»
the greatest breadth of Africa is under the immediate power
and dominion of the sun; and most of her people see that
great planet, in its annual progress from tropic to tropic,
pass twice over their heads, and thus experience a repeti-
tion of its most intense and perpendicular rays. The high-
est blessings of this sublunary world, when carried beyond
a certain limit, become its deadliest bane. That parent
orb, which ghee and illumines the rest of the earth, glares
on Africa with oppressive and malignant beam, blasting the
face of nature, and covering her with barrenness and deso-
lation. Sometimes it converts the soil into a naked desert,
sometimes overspreads it with a noxious excess of animal
and vegetable life. The soil, when not watered by copious ©
rains or river inundations, is scorched and dried up till it
is converted into a dreary waste. Hence it is, that in Af-
rica plains of sand form a feature so truly alarming. The
Great Desert, with the exception of the narrow valley of
the Nile, reaches across the entire continent, exhibiting an
expanse of burning surface, where for many days the tra-
veller finds not a drop of water, nor sees the least vestige
of animal or vegetable nature. He pursues his dreary
route amid loose hills, continually shifting, and leaving no
marks to guide his course. Every breeze is filled with
dust, which enters the mouth and nostrils, and penetrates
between the clothes and skin. Sometimes it drives along
in clouds and whirlwinds, beneath which Hivvas once thought
that caravans and even armies had been buried; but it is
now ascertained that the numerous bones which whiten
the desert are merely those of travellers who have sunk
under famine, thirst, and fatigue; and that the sand, which
continually blows, has accumulated above them. Travel-
lers over these tracts of shingle have been impressed with

.NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA. £5

the idea of their being the bed of an ancient ocean. This
is not the place to enter into a speculation on the formation
of the earth. That every part of its surface lay once be-
neath the waters is sufficiently apparent; but there is at
least no historical proof that Africa emerged later than
other continents. The earliest records represent her deserts
~ to have been as extensive as they are in our days, and to
have pressed equally close upon the cultivated belt along
the northern coast, In general, all regions between the
tropics, when not copiously watered, moulder into sand, al-
ternating with a hard and impenetrable stratum of clay.
The central wastes of Asia, those of Arabia and of Sindetic
Hindostan, though inferior to those of Africa, are yet of si-
milar character, and of immense extent.

In order to obviate the extreme effects of the tropical sun,
which produces a desolation so dreadful, Nature has pro-
vided suitable remedies. Every country under this latitude
has its rainy season, when, amid the blaze of lightnings and
the noise of thunders rending the sky, heaven seems to open
all her windows to pour an unbroken flood upon the earth.
The ground is covered as with a deluge, and the dry beds
of the rivulets are converted into torrents ;- yet so intense
are the sun’s rays, that the moisture thus lavished upon the
surface is quickly dried up. Great rivers, which, savollen
by the rains, overflow their banks and lay the surrounding
country under water, or at least afford the means of artifi-
cial inundation, are the principal source of that luxuriant
fertility, that mighty growth of vegetable forms, which sin-
gularly characterize the tropical climates. It is to the
wa 8 which descend from the lofty precipices and eternal
snows of the Himmaieh, that the plains of Hindostan and
China owe their amazing fruitfulness. Africa, too, has
elevated mountain-chains, which give rise to several rivers
of great magnitude and most fertilizing influence. Atlas,
along its northern border, presents even in so hot a climate
pinnacles wrapped in everlasting snow. Still more extensive
is that central range, which, amid its various local names,
is most generally known under the poetical appellation of
‘© The Mountains of the Moon.” Yet these chains, besides
being not altogether so gigantic as those of the other con-
_tinents, labour under the peculiar disadvantage of extend-
ing across the breadth only of Africa. The Andes and the

16 NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA.

Himmaleh, those stupendous heights of America and Asta,
as they traverse these continents in the direction of their
length, cover a much greater surface, and thus create ferti-
lity in the more limited plains which intervene between the
mountains and the ocean. But the largest of the African
rivers, directing their course through a vast extent of low
land, reach the sea only by a very circuitous course. Se-
veral of them, too, diffusing their waters into lakes or
marshes, expire in the very heart of the continent. The
result is, that the enormous breadth of the Sahara, or Great
Desert, is scarcely irrigated even by astreamlet. It depends
entirely on the periodical rains; and these sink into the
sandy and porous surface, till being arrested at the depth of
eight or ten feet, they form that ‘sea under ground” which
has been traced over a large portion of the waste.
Vegetable life, in consequence of this absence of mois-
ture, is scantily diffused over a great extent of the conti-
nent. In the heart of the mountains, however, and in the
kingdoms along their border, the soil is most profusely wa-
tered, and, under the influence of a tropical sun, produces,
perhaps, beyond any other part of the world, that luxuriant
growth and those gigantic vegetable forms, which distin-
guish the equatorial regions. ‘The baobab, or great cala-
bash, appears to be the most enormous tree on the face of
the earth. Adanson assures us, that the circumference in
some cases is equal to thirteen fathoms, as measured by
his arms clasped round the trunk, that is, varying from
seventy-four to seventy-seven feet. Branches extending
horizontally from the trunk, each equal to a large tree, make
the baobab a forest as it were in itself. The mangrove,
too, which rises on the borders of rivers, or inundated spots,
diffuses itself in a manner truly remarkable. 'The branches,
dropping down upon the watery bank, strike root and grow ;
hence the original plant, spreading farther and farther,
forms over the stream a species of natural arcade. ‘These
mighty trees do not stand alone, but have their interstices
filled up by numberless shrubs, canes, creeping and pa-
rasitical plants, which intersect and entwine with each
other till they form a thick and impenetrable mass of un-
derwood. ‘'T'o cut even a narrow path through these dense
forests is a laborious process; and as shoots are continually
protruding inwards on each side, the track, without constant

NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA. 17

travelling, and the diligent use of the axe, soon becomes
impassable.
__ As we approach the confines of the Desert these giants
of the wood disappear, and vegetation presents a different
and more pleasing aspect. It exhibits now the light and
gay form of.the acacia, whole forests of which rise amid
the sand, distilling those rich gums that afford an important
-material of African commerce. The lotus, a celebrated and
classica] shrub, the tamarisk, and other smail and elegant
trees, afford agreeable and nutritive berries; which constitute
the food of several nations. Various flowering shrubs of
the most delicate tints, rising in wild and spontaneous beau-
ty, embellish the precincts of the waste. ‘Thus the Desert,
in its first approaches, and before vegetable life begins to ex-
pire, does not assume its sternest character, but wears even
a peculiarly pleasing and smiling aspect.

The animal world* in Africa changes equally its nature
as it passes from one to another of these opposite regions.
In those plains which are‘ inundated by the great rivers, it
multiplies at an extraordinary rate, and often assumes huge
and repulsive forms. ‘Throughout all this continent the wild
tribes exist in large and formidable numbers, and there is
scarcely a tract which they do not either hold in full posses-
sion, or fiercely dispute with man. Even the most densely-
peopled countries border on wide forests and wastes, whose
savage tenants find their prey occasionally in man himself,
as well as in the domestic animals which surround him;
and when the scent of human slaughter is wafted on the
breeze, bands of hungry monsters hasten from every side to
the feast of blood. These ferocious creatures hold, indeed,
so commanding a position, that the colonist scarcely makes
_ any attempt to extirpate them, or even to keep down their
numbers. He wages against them only a defensive war,
and employs his courage and skill chiefly in hunting the ele- .
phant, the antelope, and other peaceful species, by whose
spoil he may be enriched.

The lion, that king of the desert, that mightiest among
the tribes which have the wilderness for their abode, abounds
in Africa, and causes all her forests to re-echo his midnight

* In the present chapter we allude only to a few of the more conspi-
euous and peculiar characteristics of African zoology. The subject i
areated of at greater length in a oo part of this volume.

2

18 NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA.

roar. Yet both his courage and fierceness have, it is said,
been overrated; and the man who can undauntedly face
him, or evade his first dreadful spring, rarely falls his victim.
Wider ravages are committed by the hyena, not the strong-
est, but the most ferocious and untameable of all the beasts
of prey. These creatures, by moving in numerous bands,
achieve what is beyond the single strength of the greater
animals; they burst with mighty inroad into the cities, and
have even carried by storm fortified enclosures. The ele-
phant roams in vast herds through the densely-wooded
tracts of the interior, disputing with the lion the rank of
king of the lower creation; matchless in bulk and strength,
yet tranquil, majestic, peaceful, led in troops under the
guidance of the most ancient of the number, having a social
and almost moral existence. He attacks neither man nor
beast. The human being is more frequently the aggressor,
not only with the view of protecting the fruits of the earth,
but also in order to obtain the bony substance composing
his tusks, which, under the name of ivory, forms one of the
most valued articles of African trade. The prodigious
strength of the elephant, his almost impenetrable hide, his
rapid though unwieldy movements, render him a most peril-
ous object of attack, even to the boldest hunters; so that
pits and snares of various kinds are the usual modes by
which his capture is effected. Instead of the tiger, Africa
has the leopard and the panther; belonging, however, only
to certain of its districts.

In the large and broad rivers of Africa, and through the
immense forests which overshadow them, a race of amphi-
bious animals of monstrous form and size display their un-
wieldy figures. 'The rhinoceros, though not strictly amphi-
bious, slowly traverses marshes and swampy grounds, and
almost equals the elephant in strength and defensive pow-
ers, but wants his stature, his dignity, and his wisdom.
The single or dovble horn with which he defends himself is
an article of commerce in the East, though not valued in
Europe. A still huger shape is that of the hippopotamus,
or river-horse, fitted alike to stalk on land, to march along
the bottom of the waters, or to swim on eheit surface. He
is slow, ponderous, gentle; yet when annoyed, either by de-
sion or accident, his wrath is terrible; he rushes up from
his watery retreat, and Ly merely striking with his enor-

NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA. 19

mous tusks, can overset or sink a loaded canoe. But the
most dreaded of all the inhabitants of the African rivers is
the crocodile, the largest and fiercest of the lizard tribe. He
lies like a log upon the waters watching for his prey, at-
' tacking men, and even the strongest animals, which, how-
ever, engage with him in obstinate and deadly encounters.

We have not yet done with all the monstrous and prodi-
gious forms which Africa generates. She swarms with the
serpent brood, which spread terror, some by their deadly
poison, others by their mere bulk and strength. In this last
respect the African serpents have struck the world with
amazement; ancient history records that whole provinces
were overrun by them, and that one, after disputing the
passage of a river with a Roman army, was destroyed only
by the use of a battering engine.

Emerging from these dank regions, where the earth, un-
der the united influence of heat and moisture, teems ‘with
such a noxious superabundance of life, we approach the
Desert. Here a change takes place equally smmgular and
pleasing as in the vegetable world. Only light, airy, and
fantastic forms trip along the sandy border; creatures in-
nocent, gentle, and beautiful,—the antelope of twenty dif-
ferent species, all swift, with bright eyes, erect, and usually
elegant figures, preying neither on men nor animals, but
pursued by all on account of the delicate food which they
afford. Here, too, roams the zebra, with its finely-striped
skin wrapped around it like a robe of rich cloth; and the
camelopard, the tallest and most remarkable of animal
forms, with its long fore-legs and high-stretching neck of
singular and fantastic beauty, crops the leaves of the African
forest. Though a rare species, he is seen occasionally
straying over a great proportion of that continent.

Nature, sporting as it would seem in the production of
extraordinary objects, has filled Africa with a. wonderful
multitude of those animals which bear the closest alliance
to “the human form divine.”” The orang-outang appears to
constitute the link between man and the lower orders of
living things. Standing erect, without a f’il, with flat
face, and arms of not greatly disproportioned length, it
displays in every particular a deformed resemblance to the
lord of the creation. It seems even to make a nearer ap-
proach than any other animal to the exercise of reason. It

~

20 NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA.

has been taught to make its own bed, to sit at table, to eat
with a knife and fork, and to pour out tea. M. Degrandpré
mentions one kept on board a French vessel, which lighted
and kept the oven at a due temperature, put in the bread at
a given signal, and even assisted in drawing the ropes.
There was a strong suspicion among the sailors that it
would have spoken, but for the fear of being put to
harder work. The Laboons, again, are a large, shapeless,
brutal species, ugly and disgusting in their appearance, yet
not without some kind of union and polity. The monkey
tribe, now familiar in Europe, and attracting attention by
their playful movements, fill with sportive cries all the fo-
rests of tropical Africa.

The insect race, which in our climate is generally | harm-
less, presents here many singular and even formidable cha-
racteristics. The flying tribes, in particular, through the
action of the sun on the swampy forests, rise up in terrible
and destructive numbers.. ‘They fill the air and darken the
sky; they annihilate the labour of nations; they drive even”
armies before them. The locust, when its bands issue im
close and dark array from the depths of the Desert, commits
ravages surpassing those of the most ferocious wild beasts,
or even the more desolating career of human warfare. In
vain do the despairing inhabitants seek with fire and other
means to arrest their progress; the dense and irresistible
mass continues to move onward, and soon baffles every at-
tempt to check its course. Whole provinces, which at
at their entrance are covered with rich harvests and brilliant
verdure, are left without a leaf or a blade. Even when
destroyed by famine or tempest, they cover immense tracts,
exhaling the most noxious stench. Yet they may be used
as food, and are even relished by certain native tribes.
The mosquito and its allies do not spread such a fearful de-
solation; yet by their poisoned and tormenting stings they
render life miserable, and not very unfrequently lead to its
extinction. Even a swarm of wild bees, in the solitary
woods of Western Africa, has put a whole caravan to flight.
wounding severely some of its members. But perhaps the
most extraordinary of all the insect races are the termites,
or white ants, which display on a greater scalé the arts
and social organization for which their species have been
so famed in Europe. They cover the plains with their

NATURAL FEATURES OF AFRICA. i

conical huts from ten to twelve feet in height; they are
regularly distributed mto labourers and soldiers, with others
holding the rank of king and queen. This latter person-
age, when she is about to add to the numbers of the tribe,
presents a most extraordinary spectacle, being then swelled
to many times the amount of her natural dimensions; and
when the critical period arrives, instead of a progeny of two
or three, she produces as many thousands. These ants
are far from being of the same harmless description as the
corresponding insects of this quarter of the world. On
finding their way into a house, they devour every thing,
clothes, furniture, food, not even it is said sparing the in-
mates, who are compelled to make a speedy retreat.

Such are the evils to which the people of this continent
are perpetually exposed from the lower creation; and yet
they experience in full force the truth of the pathetic la-
mentation of the poet, that “‘man is to man the surest,
deadliest foe.” Africa from the earliest ages has been the
most conspicuous theatre of crime and of wrong; where
social life has lost the traces of primitive simplicity, with-
out rising to order, principle, or refinement; where fraud
and violence are formed into national systems, and man
trembles at the sight of his fellow-man. For centuries this
continent has seen thousands of her unfortunate children
dragged in chains over its deserts and across the ocean, to
spend their lives in foreign and distant bondage. Supersti-
tion, tyranny, anarchy, and the opposing interests of num-
berless petty states, maintain a constant and destructive
warfare in this sufferme portion of the earth.

Nevertheless, compelled as we have thus been to describe
the ills of Africa, we should err very widely did we repre-
sent her as pervaded by one deep monotonous gloom.
Throughout the picture there are bright lights interspersed,
which shine more conspicuously from the vast blanks and
deep shadows with which they are surrounded. In the
heart of the most dreary and sandy wastes, there emerges
many a little oasis, or verdant islet, which to the wanderer
of the desert appears almost an earthly paradise. These
spots have been painted in colours that belong not to the
imperfect abodes of earth; as gardens of the gods, fairy-
seats, islands destined to be the future mansions of the
blessed, In like manner, in the bosom of its wildest woods

il ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA.

and mountains, there lurk, in many an unsuspected retreaty:. -
scenes of the most soft and pastoral beauty. Even amid ~ ,
its moral darkness there shine forth virtues which would
do honour to human society in its most refined and exalted
state. A tender flow of domestic affection generally per-
vades African society. Signal displays, too, have been
made of the most generous hospitality; and travellers,
who were on the point of perishing, have been befriended
and saved by absolute strangers, and even by enemies.
These varieties of nature and of character, these alterna-
tions of wildness and of beauty, of lawless violence and of
the most generous kindness, render the progress of the tra-
veller through this continent more interesting and eventful,
more diversified by striking scenes and incidents than in
- any other quarter of the globe.

CHAPTER II.
On the Knowledge of Africa among the Ancients.

Arrica, so far as it extends along the Mediterranean,
was not only well known to the nations of antiquity, but
constituted an integral part of their political and social sys-
tem. ‘This coast forms, indeed, only a comparatively small
portion of that great continent; but while the sphere of
civilization and the geographical knowledge of the Greeks
were nearly comprised within the circuit of the Mediterra-
nean shores, Northern Africa held in their view no incon-
siderable importance. ‘This region, which is now covered
with thick darkness, and left so far behind in all the arts
and attainments which exalt and adorn human nature, had
at that early period taken the lead in these very particulars
‘of all other nations. It included Egypt and Carthage,
which, as the first seats of government and commerce, were
the admiration of the ancient world. In the patriarchal
ages, when Scripture history represents the Mesopotamian
Plain, the scene of the future empires of Babylon and As-
syria, as little more than a wide and open common, Egypt

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. 23

appears regularly organized, and forming a great and pow-
erful kingdom; and whsn Greece was under the tumultuary
sway of a multitude of petty chieftains, Homer already
celebrates the hundred gates of Thebes, and the mighty
hosts which in warlike array issued from them to battle.
Egypt was illustrious also among the ancients as producing
the first elements of learning and abstract science,—the
first approach to alphabetical writing by hieroglyphic em-
blems,—the first great works in sculpture, painting, and
architecture; and travellers even now find that country co-
vered with magnificent monuments, erected at an era when
the faintest dawn of science had not yet illumined the re-
gions of Europe. While Egypt was thus pre-emment in
science and art, Carthage equally excelled in commerce and
in the wealth which it produces; by means of which she
rose to such a degree of power as enabled her to hold long
suspended between herself and Rome the scales of univer-
salempire. In that grand struggle Carthage sunk amid a
blaze of expiring glory; while Egypt, after having passed
through many ages of alternate splendour and slavery, was
also at length included in the extended dominion of Rome
Yet, though all Mediterranean Africa thus merged into a
province of the Roman world, it was still an opulent and
enlightened one; boasting equally with others its sages, its
saints, its heads and fathers of the church; and exhibiting
Alexandria and Carthage on a footing with the greatest
cities of the empire. rh ;
While, however, the region along the Nile and the Me-
diterranean was thus not only well known, but formed a
regular part of the ancient civilized world, the progress of
science did not extend beyond the tract bordering on the
coast and the river. After proceeding a few journeys into
the interior, the traveller found himself among wild and
wandering tribes, who exhibited human nature under its
rudest and most repulsive forms. On his advancing scme
what farther still, there appeared a barrier vast and awful
—endless plains of moving sand, without a shrub, a blade
of grass, or a single object by which human life could be
cheered or supported. This appalling boundary, which
stopped the victorious career of Cambyses and of Alexan-
der, arrested much more easily every attempt at civilization
and settlement. It secured to the wild and roaming tribes

24 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA.

of the Desert the undisturbed possession of those insulated
spots of verdure, which were scattered at intervals amid the
desolation of the interior waste.

Meantime, although these causes prevented the civiliza-
tion, and even the knowledge of the ancients, from ever
penetrating deeply beyond the Mediterranean border, yet
between it and the measureless Desert there intervened a
wide tract of alternate rock, valley, and plain, presenting a
varied, and often a picturesque landscape. ‘This region,
intermediate between the known and the unknown, between
civilized and savage existence, excited ina somewhat pecu-
liar degree the curiosity of the ancients; to whom, how-
ever, it always appeared dimly as through a cloud, and
tinged with a certain fabulous and poetical colouring.

Herodotus, the earliest and most interesting of Greek
historians, when endeavouring to collect information respect-
ing the whole of the known world, was obliged, in the ab-
sence of written records, to have recourse to travelling ; and
his narrative is almost entirely the record of what he saw
and heard during his various peregrinations. By meansof
a long stay in Egypt, and an intimate. communication with
the native priests, he learned much that was accurate, as
well as somewhat that was incorrect and exaggerated, re-
specting the wide region which extends from the Nile to the
Atlantic. He justly describes it as much inferior in ferti-
lity to the cultivated parts of Europe and Asia, and suffer-
ing severely from drought ; yet there ‘were a few spots, as
Cinyps and the high tracts of Cyrene, which being finely
irrigated, might stand a comparison with the richest portions
of the globe. Generally, however, in quitting the northern
coast, which he terms the forehead of Africa, the country
became more and more arid. Hills of salt arose, out of
which the natives coristructed their houses, without any
fear of their melting beneath a shower, in a region where
rain wasunknown. ‘The land became almost a desert, and
- was filled with such multitudes of wild beasts, as to be con-
sidered their proper inheritance, and scarcely disputed with
them by the human race. Farther to the south, the soil no
longer afforded food even to these wild tenants; there was
not the trunk of a tree nor a drop of water; total silence
and desolation reigned. Such is the general picture which
Herodotus draws of this northern boundary of the great

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. 25

African desert, which must be acknowledged to be at once
accurate and just.

In the tract westward from Egypt, behind the great ‘“ Af-
ican forehead,” the first object was the celebrated and
sacred shrine of Ammon, dedicated to the Theban Jove,
and to which the Greeks ascribed a higher prophetic power
than even to their own Delphic Oracle. This temple, situ-
ated in the midst of almost inaccessible deserts, was distin-
guished for a fountain, which, warm at midnight, became
always colder and colder tillnoon. ‘Ten days’ journey be-
yond Ammon lay Aigila, occupied by the Nasamones, a
numerous people, who in winter fed their flocks on the ‘sea-
coast, and in summer repaired to collect and store up the
dates here growing on extensive forests of palm-trees. To
this people are ascribed various singular customs, among
which was their mode of foreseeing the future by laying
themselves to sleep on the tombs of their ancestors, watch-
ing the dreams which arose in this position, ard treasuring
them up as oracles. Bordering upon them had formerly
been the Psylli, famous for the charming of serpents, an art
not yet wholly lost in this region; but that tribe, suffering
once under a severe drought, had been so ill informed as to

roceed southward in hope of finding water, where, being
involved in those vast and burning deserts, they entirely
perished, and their place was taken by the Nasamones.
Beyond them, the Macae inhabited a beautiful region wa-
tered by the river Cinyps, on whose bank rose “ the hill of
the Graces,” covered with a profusion of the finest foliage.
Such is still the gay and brilliant aspect which the neigh-
bourhood of Bengazi presents. To the south of the Na-
samones, in a region almost resigned to wild beasts, the
Garamantes inhabited an extensive valley, now called Fez-
zan. They are represented under characters of which the
present natives retain no trace,—as a solitary and timid
people, shunning the intercourse and society of men, desti-
tute of arms, and not even attempting to defend themselves
against foreign aggression.

After the Gindanes and the Lotophagi, who ate the lotus

- and made wine from its fruit, came the Machlyes and the

}

Auses, dwelling round the lake of Tritonis; the scene of

the reported birth and oracle of Minerva, with which were

connected many celebrated fables of ancient mythology. It
C

26 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA,

is with reluctance that reference is here made to what the
venerable father of history has related respecting the con-
duct of the young ladies in this region; and we should
hope that scandal on this subject may have been as busy
in the coteries of Sais and of On, as in some modern cir-
cles. Can it be believed, that among the Gindanes they
should form threads of skin, and tie a knot on it for every
lover who had sought and won their favour, measuring their
importance by the number of these knots; or is it probable
that, at the marriage of the Nasamones, the favour of the
bride should have been shared by all the guests equaily with
the husband? Wor is there much to admire in the annual
festival celebrated by the virgins of the “Auses, when their
fair hands were employed in throwing stones against each.
other with such fury, that several were commonly left dead
on the spot. The fate of these sufferers was peculiarly
hard, since it was supposed to justify the most unfavour-
able suspicions respecting their previous life. After all,
this rough sport of the Libyan belles is not much ruder
than one which we shall find still practised among the most
distinguished dames of Bornou.

Proceeding farther westward, Herodotus finds’a tribe of
the Auses, called Maxyes, who cultivated the ground; and
he is now on the border of the Carthaginian territory, of
which, for reasons that Major Rennel cannot fully compre-
hend, he forbears to treat. He follows the direction of the
interior, from the Garamantes, beyond whem were Ethio-
pians dwelling in caves, and running so swiftly that the
former people were obliged to hunt them in chariots,—a
proceeding very unsuitable to the meek character elsewhere
ascribed to them, and which, we fear, may have been prac-
tised with the evil intent of carrying off these poor victims .
as slaves. Our author comes next to the Atlantes, and re-
lates several things which with better knowledge he would
probably have omitted. He pretends, for example, that
none of them bear proper names; that they neither eat ani-
mal food nor dream dreams; and, what is not quite so im-
probable, that on seeing the sun rise, they pour reproaches
and execrations on him for the manner in which he burns
and destroys their land. Behind them rises the long and
lofty range of Atlas, whose head is said to remain for ever
invisible and wrapped in clouds, and which the natives believe

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE’ OF AFRICA. 27

to be the pillar of heaven,—a creed adopted, or perhaps
invented, by the Greeks and Romans. Herodotus here
stops, frankly owning that his information did not enable
him to go farther. The only other accounts which had
reached him respected a nation beyond the Pillars of Her-
cules, with whom the Carthaginians carried on trade in a
very peculiar manner. This wild and timid race would
not approach or hold parley with the strangers, who, on
drawing near to the shore, kindled a fire, uttered loud cries,
and laid on the sand acertain quantity of goods. The na-
tives, hearing them, and seeing the smoke, came down, sur-
veyed the deposite, placed beside it a certain portion of gold,
the precious article of their traffic, and withdrew. The Car-
thaginians approached to examine the tender thus made,
and, according to their estimate of its value, either carried
away the gold or left the whole untouched; in which last
case, the natives understood that more of the precious metal
was expected. ‘Thus the parties went backwards and for-
wards till the exchange was adjusted.

If the accounts given by Herodotus of this western region
be tinctured with fable, the narrative of Diodorus shows
still more that the ancients had made it one of the grand
theatres of their mythology. . To it they refer the ancient
and early reign of Saturn, under the appellation of Ouranus,
or Heaven; the birth of Jupiter, and his nursin'g by Amal-
thea; the impious race of the Titans, and their wars with
the sky; Cybele, with her doting love for Atys, and frantic
grief for his fate. Diodorus represents the Atlantic people
as claiming these objects for themselves; but it seems much
more probable that the warm imagination of the Greeks,
attracted by the mysterious grandeur of the region, trans-

ported thither the creations of their own fancy. Our au-
thor, however, makes a positive averment as to the exist-
ence of a race of Amazons there, still more warlike and
formidable than those on the banks of the Thermodon.
They did not, like these last, positively exterminate or expel
the male sex from their confines; but, reserving to them-
selves all the high cares of war and government, employed
their lords in keeping the house, tending the children, and
performing all the functions which are elsewhere exclu-
sively assigned to females. As soon as the wife had gone
through the necessary trouble of bearing a child, she handed

28 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA.

it to the husband to be nursed, and immediately resumed
her own high and arduous occupations. These gallant vi-
ragoes, it is said, not only ravaged all this part of Africa,
but passed the Isthmus of Suez, and carried their victorious
arms into Syria and Asia Minor. What foundation there
may be in fact for this story of the Western Amazons, it is
not easy to conjecture; but the Tuaricks, a numerous na-
tive race still found in those regions, treat their females
with greater respect and allow them more liberty than is
usually granted among their neighbours. ‘These were not
. the only fierce and warlike females who spread terrorthrough
Africa. Diodorus places here the Gorgons, who caused
death by the mere hideousness of their aspect, and the ser-
pents hissing in the hair of Medusa. Yet, amid all these
terrible fables, he gives a just description of the back settle-
ments of Northern Africa; representing them as thinly in-
habited by wandering tribes, as bounded by an extensive
uniform plain resembling the ocean, covered with piles of
sand of which the termination was unknown, and which,
instead of any object that could cheer the eye or refresh the
senses, swarmed with serpents of huge form and magni-
tude, that inflicted instant death on the unwary traveller.
These reptiles were even reported to have once invaded
Egypt, and driven before them a crowd of its terrified inha-
bitants. |

Strabo, who wrote after the Roman sway was fully esta-
blished over Africa, gives a much more sober report of its
western regions. Extending his view beyond the Atlas,
he describes the Mauri, peopling a rich territory on the At-
lantic coast capable of yielding the most copious harvests ;
but nothing could wean the nation from the wandering life
in which they delighted, moving continually with their tents
from place to place, wrapped in the skins of wild beasts, riding
without saddle, and often without bridle, on small, swift, ac-
tive horses. He represents them as fighting with sword and
spear, not with the poisoned arrows imputed to them by Ho-
race, which, however, are really used at present in Centra]
Africa. Eastward, around Carthage, he finds the Massa-
syli, who followed once the same wandering life, and were
called Nomades or Numidians; but Masinissa had already
inured them to the practice of agriculture, and to some of
the refinements of polished life. Carthage at its first sub-

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. 29

jection was razed to the ground and left long desolate; but
the Romans, at length attracted by the view of the fine re-
gion which surrounds it, sent thither a colony, who soon

elevated it to its former rank as the greatest city of Africa. —

Another territory, of which the ancients had considerable
knowledge, was that which extended upwards along the
Nile, the immediate borders of which have always been not
only habitable but fertile. Nothing astonished them more
than to see this great river, which, after flowing through a
region where there did not fall « drop of rain, and where it
was not fed by a single rivulet, began to swell at a certain
season, rose always higher and higher, till at length it over-
fiowed its banks, and spread like a sea over Lower Egypt.
“Some of the hypotheses formed to account for this inunda-
' tion deserve to be noticed. The most prevalent opinion
ascribed it te the Etesian winds blowing from the north pe-
riodically, and so violently, that the waters of the Nile,
thereby prevented from reaching the sea, necessarily spread
over the land; but Diodorus clearly shows, besides the rea-
son being itself imsufficient, that there was no correspond-
ence in the periods; observing also, that the Etesian winds
blew up many other rivers without producing this effect.
The philosophers of Memphis, it seems, followed even by
Mela, the great Latin geographer, surmised that the un-
known and inaccessible fountains of the Nile lay on the
opposite side of the globe, where during our summer it was
winter; consequently, the greatest rains then fell, and the
swollen waters, flowing across the whole breadth of the
torrid zone, acquired that soft and mellow taste which made
them so agreeable. But the most singular hypothesis is
that of Ephorus, who thought that Egypt is full of gaps
or chinks which in winter absorb the water, but sweat it out
under the influence of the summer heat. Diodorus takes
superfluous pains to show that this theory, so absurd in it-
self, had no correspondence with the facts of the case. The
real cause, arising from the rains which fall on the high
mountains in the interior and tropical regions, was. men-
tioned and strongly supported by Agatharchides, who wrote
a learned work on the, Red Sea; which, however, was far
from attaining the favourable reception. that it merited.

The name of Ethiopia was very generally applied by the
ancients to the south of Africa, and even of Arabia, and

C2

a

ff

30 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE -OF AFRICA.

generally.to all countries inhabited by black people. The
region, however, which extends for several hundred miles
along the Nile above Egypt, formed the ancient Ethiopia,
a sacred realm, in which the priests placed the most revered
objects of their mythology. Here Jove repaired to hold his
annual festival; and here was spread the table of the sun,
which, when exposed to the rays of that great luminary,
was believed of its own accord to take fire and be consumed.
Hence, according to some, Egypt derived all the sciences
and arts which rendered her illustrious in that early age.
Diodorus even asserts that the learned language of Egypt
was the same spoken by the yulgar in Ethiopia; but we
should much rather believe with Herodotus, that the latter
country derived from Egypt all which she possessed of art
and civilization. The sovereigns of Ethiopia are said to
have received a wild and peculiar homage, in being attended
to the tomb by a number of their wives, courtiers, and ser-
vants, all eagerly canvassing for this honour,—a practice
of savage life still extensively prevalent in pagan Africa.
According to Diodorus, this veneration was carried to so
singular a pitch, that if the king lost a leg or an arm, each
of his courtiers presently severed from himself the same
member. The priests, however, whose influence in this
sealm of superstition was always paramount, appear at one
time to have become quite supreme; reducing the sovereign
to a state of entire dependence. . Lastly, it may be inferred,
both from classic and sacred writers, that Ethiopia, in the
first century, was governed by a female monarch, who ap-
pears to have borne the hereditary name of Candace.

The Greeks settled in Egypt, especially during the wise
and able government of the Ptolemies, carried on a consi-
derable navigation along the eastern coast of the Red Sea,
which, as they held the continent to be bounded by the
Nile, they aceounted scarcely African; but upon this sub-
ject we must follow modern ideas. Ptolemy Euergetes
seems to have conquered part of Abyssinia, forming it into
a kingdom, of which Axum was the capital; and fine re-
mains of Grecian architecture still attest the fact of this
city having been a great and civilized metropolis. Every
ancient description, however, represents the native inha-
bitants of these shores as existing in a state of the most
extreme barbarity and wretchedness, They are classed by

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. 31

Diodorus and Strabo, according to the miserable food on
which they usually subsisted; some as eaters of fish,
of elephants, and of turtles; while ,others are said to
have fed on locusts, on roots, and even on the tender
branches of trees. Many sought shelter also in places
which had no regular claim to be considered as human ha-
bitations. These were either cavities dug out of the rock,
with an opening to the north for coolness, or they were
formed by twisting together the branches of several large
shrubs, and constructing thus a species of shady arbour;
while some tribes, still more forlorn, merely climbed the
trees to seek safety and shelter among the branches. ‘These
representations were once deemed fabulous, and might still
have been thought so, had not Bruce and other modern tra-
vellers proved the existence of similar rudeness among the
Shangalla and other tribes that border on Abyssinia.

The districts now surveyed form the whole of Africa
respecting which the Greeks had obtained any precise and
determinate knowledge. It comprised a wide extent of
shore, but extended a very short distance inland; being
bounded on each side by two unknown coasts, which
- stretched so far that it was not possible to conjecture their
termination. ‘Two tempestuous oceans, a desert the most
dreary on the face of the earth, and infested by multitudes
of huge and ferocious animals, were the barriers that
hemmed in so closely the ancient settlers, and could scarcely
in any instance be passed with impunity. Yet the prin-
ciple of curiosity cannot be extinguished in the human
breast, and is even rendered more‘ardent by the greatest
obstacles. To lift up a portion of that veil within which
the vast mysteries of unknown Libya were shrouded, ap-
peared an achievement rivalling the glories of conquest, and
promised to confer immortal renown. The most active and
adventurous spirits accordingly, who sought to acquire ce-
lebrity by exploring the earth, looked to Africa as affording
the grandest theatre of fame and adventure.

Two expeditions of discovery, the earliest known, and
perhaps that ever existed, are related by Herodotus. One
of the most illustrious of the native kings of Egypt was
Necho, whose name ranks second only to that of Sesostris,
and who lived about two hundred years before the histo-
tian. The habits and prejudices of the ancient Egyptians »

i

32 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA.

were unfavourable to maritime enterprises; yet Necho,
endowed with the spirit of a great. man, which raised him
superior to the age in which he lived, eagerly sought the
solution of the grand mystery that involved the form and
termination of Africa. He was obliged to employ, not. na-
tive, but Pheenician navigators, of whose proceedings He-
rodotus received an account from the Egyptian priests.
‘Proceeding down the Red Sea, they entered the Indian
Ocean; and in a voyage of three years made the complete
circuit of the continent, passing through the Pillars of Her-
cules (Straits of Gibraltar), and up the Mediterranean to
igypt. ‘They related, that in the course of this very long
voyage they had repeatedly drawn their boats on land,
sowed grain in a favourable place and .season, waited till
the crop grew and ripened under the influence of a tropical
heat, then reaped it, and continued their progress. ‘They
added, that in passing the most southern coast of Africa,
they were surprised by observing the sun on their right,
hand,—a statement which the historian himself rejects as
impossible. Such is all the account transmitted to us of this
extraordimary voyage, which has given rise to a learned
and voluminous controversy. Rennel in his Geography —
of Herodotus, Vincent in his Periplus of the Erythrean
Sea, and Gosselin in his Geography of the Ancients,
have exhausted almost every possible argument; the
first in its favour, the two latter to prove that it never did
or could take place. ‘To these last it appears impossible
that ancient mariners, with their slender resources, creeping
in little row-galleys along the coast, steering wuhout the
aid of the compass, and unable to venture to any distance
from land, could have performed so immense a circuit.
All antiquity, they observe, continued to grope in doubt
and darkness respecting the form of Africa, which was
only fully established several thousand years afterward by
the expedition of Gama. On the other side, Major Rennel
urges, that, immense as this voyage was, it was entirely
along a coast of which the navigators never required tu
lose sight even for a day; that their small barks were well
equipped, and better fitted than ours for coasting nayiga-
tion; and which, drawing very little water, could be kept
quite close to the shore, and even be drawn on land, when-
ever an emergency made this step indispessable. The

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. 33

statement, that at the extremity of Africa they saw the sun
on the right, that is, to the north of them,—a fact which
causes Herodotus peremptorily to reject their report,—
affords the strongest confirmation of it to us, who know
that to the south of the equator this must have really taken
place, and that his unbelief arose entirely from ignorance
of the real figure of the earth.

- The other expedition had its origin in the country of the
Nasamones, whom we have already mentioned as occupy-
ing the district southward of Cyrene. Five young men of
distinction formed themselves into an African association,
personally to explore what was still unknown in the vast
interior of this continent. They passed first the region
inhabited by man; then that which was tenanted by wild
beasts ; lastly, they reached the immeasurable sandy
waste. Having laid in a good stock of water and provi-
sions, they travelled many days partly in a western direc-
tion, and attained at length one of the oases or verdant
islands which bespangle the desert. Here they saw trees
laden with agreeable fruit, and had begun to pluck, when
there suddenly appeared a band of little black men, who
seized and carried them off as captives. They were led
along vast lakes and marshes, to a town situated on a
large river flowing from west to east, and inhabited by a
nation all of the same size and colour with the strangers,
and strongly addicted to the arts of necromancy. It is not
said how or by what route they returned; but, since they
supplied this relation, they must by some means have
reached home. Herodotus concludes this great river to be
the Nile flowing from the westward; while*Major Rennel
conceives it to be the Niger of Park, and the city to be
Timbuctoo; but since the late discoveries of Denham and
Clapperton, it has appeared more probable that the stream
was the Yeou or river of Bornou. The distance from
Cyrene thither is not so great; and nowhere but in the
Tchad can we find those mighty lakes which make so pro-
minent a figure in the narration. On the whole, it must
appear truly wonderful that these efforts, made at so early
an era, should have led to discoveries, respecting both the
maritime outline and the interior of the continent, which
Europeans could not regain for thousands of years, and
one of which, at the present day, is still entirely new to us.

04 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA.

The next. expedition on record was made under less
pleasing auspices. Sataspes, a Persian nobleman, had
been condemned by Xerxes to crucifixion, on account of
some crime of which he had been guilty; but his mother,
by earnest entreaty, obtained a commutation of the sen-
tence into one which she represented as still more severe,
—that of sailing round Africa. Under this heavy neces-
sity, Sataspes coasted along the Mediterranean, passed the
western point of the continent, and,» began a southward
course. But he who undertook to explore this vast country
with no interest in the subject, buoyed up by no gay en-
thusiasm, and urged only by the fear of death behind, was
ill prepared for achieving so mighty an enterprise. Satas-
pes sailed southward for a considerable space; but when
he saw the Atlantic waves beating against the dreary shore
of the Sahara, that scene of frequent and terrible ship
wreck, it probably appeared to him that any ordinary form
of death was preferable to the one which here menaced
him. He returned, and presented himself before Xerxes,
giving a dolefu: description of the hardships which he had
encountered, declaring that the ship at last stood still of
itself, and could by no exertion be made to proceed. That
proud monarch, ‘refusing to listen to such an explanation,
ordered the original sentence to be immediately executed.

_ Such appears to have been the only African voyage under-

taken by the Persians, to whom the sea was an object of
aversion, and even of superstitious dread.

Carthage, the greatest maritime and commercial. state
of antiquity, and which considered Africa and the Atlantic
coast as her peculiar domain, must have made several ex-
ploratory voyages before she could establish those extensive
connexions upon which her trade was founded. Of all
such attempts, however, the record of one only remains.
It consisted of an expedition on a very large scale, sent out,
about 570 years before the Christian era, for the joint pur-
poses of colonization and discovery, under an admiral
named Hanno.. He carried with him, in sixty large vessels,
emigrants of both sexes to the number of thirty thousand.
At the distance of two days’ sail beyond the Pillars of Her-
cules, the Carthaginians founded the city of Thymioterium,
and afterward, on the wooded promontory of Soloeis,
erected a stately temple to Neptune. They then built

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. 33

successively four other cities; after which they came to
the great river Lixus, flowing from Libya and the high
boundary of the Atlas. Its banks were infested by num-
bers of wild beasts, and inhabited only by savage Ethio-
pians, living in caves, and repelling every friendly overture.
Proceeding three days along a desert coast, the navigators
reached an island, which they named Cerne, situated in a
recess of the sea, where they established their last colony.
Sailing onward still for a number of days, they saw a large
river full of crocodiles and hippopotami, and containing
various islands. 'The inhabitants were timid, and fled at
their approach ; but the coast presented some remarkable
phesomena. During the day deep silence reigned ; but as
soon as the sun set, fires blazed om the shore, and the shouts
of men were mingled with the varied sounds of cymbals,
trumpets, and other musical instruments. This scene,
being new to the Carthaginians, struck them with a sort
of terror; but in fact it must have arisen from the custom
prevalent over native Africa, where the inhabitants rest
during the oppressive heat of the day, and spend great part
of the night in dancing and festivity. On another shore
the navigators were astonished to see the land all on fire,
_ and torrents of flame rushing into the sea,—an appearance
doubtless owing to one of those conflagrations frequently
occasioned in such couniries by the practice of setting fire
to the grass at the end of autumn. Next appeared an
island in a bay, where they found a most singular race,
bearing the human form, indeed, but covered with shaggy
hair, resembling those satyrs and sylvan deities with which
pagan mythology peopled the woods. These monsters,
whom they call Gorille, and who seem evidently to have
been orang-outangs, ran off on their approach, climbed
rocks, and threw down stones on their pursuers; yet three
females were caught, and their skins carried to Carthage.
At length, the coast becoming desolate,-and no longer
affording either provisions or water, it was found necessary
to return.

How far this voyage extended, and what proportion of
the African coast it surveyed, has been the subject of long
and learned controversy. The only two disputants who
now appear on the field are Major Rennel and M. Gosse-
lin; the former of whom believes that Hanno passed Sierra

‘

36 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA.

Leone, and that the bay and island of the Gorillae were
Sherbro’ Island and Sound; while the other terminates the
voyage on the frontier of Morocco, at the entrance of the
river Nun. The one supposes a run of about 600 miles,
the other one of nearly 3000; and yet each theory is sup-
ported by profound and able arguments. In such a case
who shall decide? I really have made some attempts to do
so, without being able to come to so clear a decision as
would justify me in interposing between two such mighty
champions. But he who will undertake the study of the
original works will be gratified by finding all the resources
of learning, ingenuity, and acuteness exhausted by these
two great writers on this curious subject.

The individual who in that early age made the most re-
solute and persevering efforts to explore Africa was Eu-
doxus, a native of the city of Cyzicus, who lived about 130
years before Christ. Alexandria was then the centre of
naval enterprise, and her Greek princes the most zealous
patrons of all useful undertakings. Eudoxus, happening to
visit that city, was introduced to Ptolemy Euergetes, whom
he ably assisted in prosecuting those schemes of discovery
on which this monarch’s mind appears to have been deeply
intent. Where so much was unknown on every side, it
Was a subject of grave deliberation in what direction he
should first proceed; and an expedition to trace the upper
- course and fountain of the Nile was at one time contem-
plated. But the spirit of adventure was soon turned towards
another object by the arrival of a native of India, whom
one of the king’s vessels had saved from shipwreck, and
who offered to act as pilot in leading Eudoxus to that opu-
lent and celebrated region. The latter performed the voy-
age to India prosperously, and returned laden with wealth.
Though not quite satisfied with the manner in which he
was treated by the king, he yet undertook another expedi-
tion to the same quarter. On emerging from the Red Sea,
he was driven by a storm upon the eastern coast of Africa,
where he observed the land taking such a direction as in-
spired the idea that it might, by no vast circuit, lead round
to the Straits of Gibraltar. To be the circumnavigator of
Africa became from that moment the object to which the life
of Eudoxus was devoted. On his return to Alexandria,
Euergetes was dead, and the succeeding sovereign gave him

i

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. ae

still greater cause of complaint; so that he determined to
trust no more to the precarious patronage of princes, but to
make a general appeal to the commercial! public. The mer-
chants of Cadiz were thought most likely to embrace his
views; and on his way thither he passed through Rhodes,
“Marseilles, and other great maritime states, calling upon all
who were animated with the generous spirit of enterprise
to accompany or to aid him in his undertaking. An extraor-
dinary sensation seems to have been created in these com-
mercial cities. EZudoxus easily assembled round him a con-
siderable band of volunteers, and was enabled to equip
amply, and even splendidly, two vessels furnished with me-
dical men and artisans of various descriptions, and even en-
livened by a band of youthful musicians. In this array he
passed the Straits, and turned his prow as he imagined to-
wards India. But his gay crew, inspired by himself pro-
bably with too flattermg hopes, seem to have anticipated
only a smooth and holyday excursion. When, therefore,
they saw themselves ranging along an unknown and dreary
shore, against which the waves of the mighty Atlantic were
beating, they were seized with panic. In vain did Eudoxus
urge the necessity of standing out to sea, as the only mode
of successfully navigating his large .and heavily-loaded
ships; they obstinately insisted on his keeping close to
land. ‘The consequence was, as he had distinctly foretold,
that the principal vessel was stranded upon one of those
dangerous sand-banks which abound on the coast. The
crew were so fortunate, however, as to convey ashore not
only the cargo, but the timbers; out of which Eudoxus,
with zeal that nothing could damp, contrived to put toge-
ther another and smaller bark, in which he pursued the
- voyage. He came then to nations speaking a language
which his fancy flattered him was the same that he had
heard on the eastern coast of Africa. But at this moment,
when he seemed on the eve of accomplishing his most san-
guine hopes, the shattered state of his armament obliged
him to return; retaining still the fullest confidence, that if
the means could be found of equipping another, all his most
brilliant hopes would be realized. Disgusted, however,
with his band of timrd volunteers, he overcame his reluc-
tance to royal patronage. He sought the precarious aid of
Bocchus, king of er who received him well, and

38 ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA.

ordered an expedition to be prepared; but Eudoxus wag
privately warned that this treacherous prince, instead of
forwarding him on his voyage, intended that his people
should land and leave him to perish on an uninhabited
island. It does not appear what motive the king could
have for so base a design; however, the Greek, who had
better means of judging than we have, believed it and fled.
He made his next attempt in Spain, where he found no dif-
ficulty in equipping two other vessels, on board of which
he placed seed-corn and materials for building, that in case
of necessity he might land and raise a crop on a fertile
little island which he had observed at an advanced point of
his fermer voyage. Here, very unluckily, Posidonius,.
Strabo’s informant, stops short, and refers to. the Spaniards.
and Gaditanians for farther information; but profound si-
lence reigns on their part, and the world probably must
remain for ever in darkness as to the issue of this last ex-
pedition. It must not be concealed, that authors of great
name, not excepting Strabo himself, have branded Eudoxus
as a decided impostor; a reproach which many of the most
eminent discoverers have ,been: destined to bear. This
geographer is a most merciless critic; but though his au-
thorities are admitted to be good, his long objections, drawn
from the internal evidence, do not appear at all conclusive.
Antiquity has put sundry fables into the narrative of Eu-
doxus, by which his reputation has severely suffered. Ac-
cording to certam works, he pretended to have really made
the circuit of Africa; to have visited some nations that
were dumb; others without tongues; and one people who
had no mouths, but received all their food by the nose.
These are the wild exaggerations which, in a credulous age,
a story undergoes in passing from one person to another.
The descriptions of Strabo, collected from the best sources,
with severe and even malignant scrutiny, contain none of
those suspicious wonders, nor any event which at all ex-
ceeds the common course of nature.

A line of navigation along the eastern coast of Africa is
described in a work of later date, written apparently after
the establishment of the Roman power in Egypt. It is
termed the Periplus of the Erythrean or Indian Sea, by an
author whose name was Arrian; but it comprises not so
much the result of any individual adventure as a general

ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE OF AFRICA. 39

wiew of the commercial voyage regularly made thither
from Alexandria. After passing Abyssinia, the navigators
sailed along a coast (that of the modern Berbera) which
abounded in a remarkable degree with myrrh, frankincense,
and other odoriferous plants. They then reached Cape
“Aromata (Guardafui), which forms the termination of the
Red Sea and the entrance into the Indian Ocean. The
coast of Africa, in this latitude, afforded ivory in abun-
dance, rhinoceros’ horns, and tortoise-shell, the latter of
which was extremely fine; and in return for these, arms,
Wine, and corn were the most acceptable commodities.
The voyage terminated at a promontory and port called
Rhapta, a fact which of itself would show the extent cf an-
cient navigation in this direction, could the learned agree
where that town was situated; but all the names being
changed, and no observations of latitude having been made,
It is impossible to fix with certainty any one position.
Rhapta, according to Gosselin, was Magadoxo; according
to Vossius and Vincent it was at or near Quiloa, a position
more than double the distance of the first from Cape Guar-
dafui. On this point Dr. Vincent seems clearly in the
right. ‘The names are all changed, but the natural features
necessarily remain the same. Now the navigator is in one
place represented as passing successively the seven mouths
of a large river at short distances from each other; and
these cannot possibly be found any where but in the series
ef estuaries on which Patta and Melinda are built, the prin-
cipal of which is that of the Quillimane,—a conclusion
which necessarily carries the situation of Rhapta southward
to Quiloa. Ptolemy, who wrote probably a century later,
gives the more remote position of Prasum as a promontory,
port, and city, to which in his time navigators were accus-
tomed to sail. We have no fact to guide us to the locality
of that town, except that it was two or three hundred miles
south-east from Rhapta. Gosselin makes it Brava; but
this is still short of the mouths of the seven rivers which
afford the test of this chain of positions. Dr. Vincent,
again, would have Prasum to be Mozambique; but though
the coast runs south-east from Quiloa to Cape Delegado,
from this last point to Mozambique the direction is south,
and even a little south-west. At or near Cape Delegado,
therefore, must, it appears, be fixed the boundary of ancient
aavigation along the eastern co st of Africa.

40 SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS. -

CHAPTER III.
Settlements of the Arabs.

THE rise and triumph of the followers of Mohammed,
who in fifty years spread their arms and their creed over
half the eastern world, produced an immense change in the
social system of Asia, and a still greater in that of Africa.
Their ascendency at first was by no means imauspicious,
and portended little of that deep darkness and barbarism in
which it has since involved these two continents. After
the first violences to which fanaticism had prompted the
more ardent converts, the Saracen sway assumed a milder
aspect, and their princes cultivated the arts, and even the
sciences, with a zeal which had expired among the effemi-
nate and corrupted descendants of the Greeks and Romans.
Even the remote Mauritania, which seemed doomed to be
the inheritance of a barbarous and nomadic race, was con-
verted by them into a civilized empire ; and its capital, Fez,
became a distinguished school of learning. Their love of
improvement reached even the most distant regions. 'They
introduced the camel, which, though a native of the sandy
wastes of Arabia, was equally adapted to the still more im-
mense and awful deserts that stretch so wide over Africa.
Paths were opened through wilds which had hitherto defied
all human efforts to penetrate. An intercourse by means
of caravans was formed with the interior countries, to ob-
tain a supply of gold and slaves; and, amid the sanguinary
disputes which arose among the descendants of the pro-
phet, many, whose ill fortune exposed them to the enmity
of successful rivals, sought refuge on the opposite side of
the Great Desert. By successive migrations, they not only
became numerous in Central Africa, but, from superior skill
in the art of war, rose to be the ruling power. They
founded several flourishing kingdoms in that part of the
continent which Europeans vainly sought to reach, till they
were recently explored by our enterprising countrymen.
Of these states Ghana was the most flourishing, forming
the great market for that gold in search of which merchants

SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS. 4]

came from the remotest regions. Its sovereign was ac-
knowledged as supreme by all the neighbouring princes ;
while his court displayed a splendour, and was adorned
with objects, hitherto unexampled in Central Africa.
Among its ornaments were painting, sculpture, and glass
windows, which, being before unknown, excited the sur-
prise and admiration of the natives. The king is said to
have rode out attended by elephants and camelopards,
tamed by an art then first introduced, and since lost. The
natives were also dazzled by the display of a mass of solid
gold, weighing thirty pounds, with which the throne was
embellished. ‘This prince is reported to nave made a great
profession of justice, going out twice every day, and. pre-
senting himself to all who wished to offer petition or com-
plaint. The vicissitudes of fortune have subverted the
kingdom of Ghana, and made its territory successively sub-
ject to Timbuctoo, Kashna, and Sackatoo; but our late
travellers found it, under the changed name, or rather or-
thography, of Kano, still extensive and populous, and con-
tinuing to be the chief seat of the interior commerce of
Africa.

Tocrur, about twenty-four days’ journey north-west of
Ghana, was a kingdom inferior indeed to the other, yet
a and independent. It carried on an extensive

raffic with the people of the “remotest west,” who brought

shells (cowries?) and brass, for which they received gold
and ornaments. Mention is made of the fine cotton cloths
which still form the staple manufacture. Tocrur appears
evidently to be Sackatoo or Soccatoo, now the capital of
an empire which comprehends Ghana and all the neigh-
bouring countries. Indeed, in an official document com-
municated by Major Denham, we find this called the empire
of Takror.

Kuku, to the eastward of Ghana, forms another kingdom,
on whose power and extent the Arabian writers largely
dilate. The sovereign is said to have a very numerous
train of attendants, and the people to be uncommonly war-
like, though rude in their manners and attire. The mer-
chants, however, are represented as very richly dressed, and
accustomed to visit and converse with the governors and
nobility. This country is manifestly Bornou, named from
its capital, which bears still i same appellation. Twenty

2

42 SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS.

days’ journey to the south was Kaugha, a city famous for
industry and useful arts, and the women of which were
skilled in the secrets of magic. ‘Though the resemblance
of name is rather imperfect, this seems. to be Denham’s
Loggum, much celebrated by him for its ingenious labours
and fine manufactures, as well as for the intelligence of its
females; and, among a rude people, wit and witchery are
always imagined to have a close connexion. |

To the south of Ghana lay Wangara, a district that is
said to have contained gold, the commodity for which
African commerce was so much prized. This region is
described as intersected and overflowed during the rainy
season by the branches of the Nile (of the Negroes, or
Niger), which impregnate the earth with the sand, it is
said, whence this precious metal was extracted. As soon
as the waters have retired, the inhabitants eagerly dig the
ground, and every one finds more or less, ‘according to
the gift of God.” There seems to be some confusion of
ideas about this country and its golden products. A dis-
trict in the southern part of Soudan is called Oongoroo, or
Ungura ; but it no longer furnishes gold; nor is Ghana, at
the present day, the market for that valuable staple of
Central Africa. In the mountainous countries to the south-
west this metal is still collected abundantly, in the very
manner described by the Arabian writers.

The whole range of alpine territory to the southward of
the regions now described was called Lamlam, and pre-
sented a continued scene of barbarous violence. It was
branded as the land of the infidels,—of a people to whom
mone of the charities of life were due, and against whom
the passions of cruelty and of avarice might be gratified
without remorse. Expeditions or slave-hunts were there-
fore made into these unfortunate countries; when, after a:
bloody conflict, numerous victims were seized, carried off,
and sold to the merchants of Northern Africa, who con-
veyed them to all parts of the eastern world. The same
cruel and iniquitous traffic is carried on in a similar manner,
and with unabated activity, at the present day.

Respecting Western Africa, the Arabians do not seem to
have been very accurately informed. They describe the
Atlantic as only about five hundred miles beyond Tocrur,
although two thousand would have been nearer the truth;

‘

SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS. 43

perhaps they mistook the great lake Dibbie for the sea.
They mention the island of Ulil, whence were brought great
quantities of salt, an article which i is in constant demand
throughout Soudan. Ulil, though called an island, was
probably Walet, the great interior market for that mineral :
but all the features of the country around and beyond it
seem to have been confusedly blended together by the Mo-
hammedan authors.

At the time when the Arabian geographers flourished,
the Christian religion was professed, not only in Abyssinia,
but even in Nubia, to its northern frontier at Syene. The
bigotry and dislike produced by hostile creeds, not only de-
prived these writers of the means of information, but led
them to view with contempt every thing relating to coun-
tries accounted infidel. Their notices, therefore, of the re-
gions in the Upper Nile, and along the western shores of
the Red Sea, are exceedingly meager. It was otherwise,
indeed, with the eastern coast of Africa on the Indian
Ocean. The people of Southern Arabia, who were then
actively employed in commerce and navigation, had not only
explored, but formed establishments at Mombaza, Melinda,
Mozambique, and at all the leading points on that coast;
which were still found in their possession by the early Por-
tuguese navigators.

For this general view of Central Africa in the twelfth
century, we are indebted to Edrisi, Abulfeda, Ibn-al-Vardi,
and other writers, who do not however pretend to have
visited in person the regions which they describe. Arabic
literature has, notwithstanding, been also enriched by the
productions of some eminent travellers. Wahab and Abu-
zaid, in the ninth century, penetrated into China, and com-
municated to the western world the first distinct idea of that
remarkable empire and people. ‘Their career, however, was
far surpassed in the fourteenth century by Ibn Batuta, 2
learned Mohammedan, who traversed the continents of Asia
and Africa from the eastern ocean to the banks of the Niger.
For a knowledge of his narrative the English public have
just been indebted to the learned labours of Professor Lee
of Cambridge, as a member of the Society for Oriental
Translation. Unfortunately, he could only procure the work
ma very abridged form, which renders it more an object of
curiosity than as fitted to convey full information of the state
of the world at that early per‘od.

44 SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS.

It was from Fez that Ibn Batuta commenced his peregri-
nation through Interior Africa. He went first to Segil-
missa, which he describes as a handsome town, situated in
a territory abounding with date-trees. Having joined a ca-
ravan, he came, after a journey of twenty-five days, to
Thargari, which some manuscripts make Tagaza, and is
therefore evidently the Tegazza of Leo, supposed by Major
Rennel to be the modern Tishect, containing the mine
whence Timbuctoo is chiefly supplied with salt. To our
traveller the place appeared to contain no object desirable or
agreeable: there was nothing but salt; the houses were
built with slabs of that mineral, and roofed with the hides
of camels. It even appeared to him that nature had lodged
this commodity in regular tables in the mine, fitted for being
conveyed to a distance ; but he probably overlooked an arti-
ficial process by which it is usually brought into this form.
From Thargari he went in twenty days to Tashila, three
days beyond which commenced a desert of the most dreary
aspect, where there was neither water, beast, nor bird,
“nothing but sand and hills of sand.” In ten days he
came to Abu Latin, a large commercial town, crowded with
merchants from various quarters of the continent. ‘The
manners of the people, as is indeed too common in the
scenes of inland traffic throughout Africa, appeared to him
very licentious, and wholly destitute of that decorum which
usually marks a Mussulman residence. ‘The women main-
tained a greater share of respectability than the other sex ;
yet this did not prevent them from hiring themselves as tem-
porary wives to those whom the pursuits of trade induced
to visit Abu Latin.. The editor has not hazarded a conjec-
ture what place this is; but on finding it in one manuscript
called Ayulatin, and in another Ewelatin, I think there is
no doubt of its being Walet, which lay completely in the
route of our traveller, and is the only great city in that
quarter of Africa.

From Abu Latin the adventurer proceeded in twenty-four
days to Mali, then the most flourishing country and city in
that part of the continent. This Mali is evidently the Melli
of Leo, who described it as situated on a river to the south
of Timbuctoo ; but it is not so easy to identify it with any
modern position. Our traveller makes heavy complaints of
the cold reception and narrow bounty of an African poten-
tate in this district. After waiting upon his majesty, he

-

SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS. 45

was informed that a present was on its way to him, and he
feasted his imagination on the idea of some rich dress or
golden ornament; instead of which, the whole consisted of
a crust of bread, a dried fish, and sour milk. He had the
boldness to remonstrate with the king on this donation, de-
claring, that in course of travelling over the whole world,
he had never received the like; and his majesty, instead of
being incensed, began to extend to him some measure of
bounty. Ibn Batuta, however, was disgusted by the abject
homage paid to this monarch, as it still is to the native
princes of Africa; the courtiers, as they approached, cast-
ing dust on their heads, throwing themselves prostrate and
grovelling on the earth,—a degradation which he had never
witnessed in the most despotic courts of the East. Yet
justice is admitted to have been most strictly administered,
and property to be perfectly secure; as a proof of which,
merchants from the most distant country, who died at Mali,
were as assured of leaving their inheritance to their poste-
rity as if it had been deposited at home. The traveller
was astonished by the immense bulk of the trees of this re-
gion, in the hollow trunk of one of which he observed a
weaver plying his trade.

Ibn Batuta on this part of his journey saw the Niger ;
and the view necessarily led to a conclusion opposite to that
hitherto entertained by his countrymen, who considered it
as flowing westward to the ocean. Destitute of all oppor-
tunity of complete observation, he fell into the opposite
error, since prevalent in Northern Africa, and identified it
with the Nile. He supposed it to flow by Timbuctoo, Ka-
kaw (Kuku?), Yuwi (seemingly the Yeou, or river of Bor-
nou), and then by Nubia to Egypt. .

From Mali our traveller turned northward to Timbuctoo.
This city was then subject to the former, governed by a
negro viceroy, and far from possessing the celebrity and
importance which it has since attained. The town is de-
scribed as being chiefly peopled by merchants from Latham,
but what particular country that was it appears now impos-
sible to conjecture. He next proceeded eastward by Ka-
kaw, Bardama, and Nakda, where he seems to have been
ee Nubia, but gives no farther details till he again arrived
at fez.

About two centuries after Ibn Batuta, a very full de-

46 SETTLEMENTS OF THE ARABS.

scription of Africa was furnished by a geographer named
Leo, who was even honoured with the surname of Africa-
nus. He was a native of Granada, but after the capture of
that city by Ferdinand, repaired to Fez; and in that oncé
eminent school, applied himself to acquire a knowledge of
Arabic learning and of the African continent. He after-
ward travelled through a great part of the interior, and,
having repaired to Rome, wrote his description of Africa
under the auspices of Leo X. It appears, that since the
time of Edrisi, one of those revolutions to which barbarous
states are liable had greatly changed the aspect of these
countries. 'Timbuctoo, which at the former period either
did not exist, or was not thought worthy of mention, had
now risen to be the most powerful of the interior kingdoms,
and the great centre of commerce and wealth. Ghana, once
possessed of imperial greatness, had already changed its
name to Kano, and was ranked as tributary to Timbuctoo.
Bornou appears under its old appellation; and several
kingdoms which have since held a conspicuous place are
mentioned for the first time,—Casena or Cassina (Kashna),
Zegzeg, Zanfara, and Guber. Gago, represented as being
four hundred miles south-east of Timbuctoo, is evidently
Eyeo, lately visited by Clapperton. Ghinea, or Gheneoa,
described as a city of great commerce and splendour, has
been supposed to be Ghana; but I think it is evidently
Jenne, which Park found to be the largest and most flou-
rishing city of Bambarra. At Timbuctoo many of the mer-
chants were extremely opulent, and two of them had ob-
tained princesses in marriage. Literature was cultivated
with ardour, and manuscripts bore a higher price than any
other commodity. Izchia, the king, who had been success-
ful in subduing all the neighbouring countries, maintained
an army of 3000 horse, and a numerous infantry, partly
armed with poisoned arrows. Gold, for which 'Timbuctoo
had now become the chief mart, was lavishly employed in
the ornament of his court and person. He displayed solid
masses, larger even than the one at Ghana, and some of
his ornaments weigehd 1300 ounces. The royal palace and
several mosques were handsomely built of stone; but the
ordinary habitations here, as in all Central Africa, were
_ merely bell-shaped huts, the materials of which were stakes,
clay, and reeds.

PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES. 47

‘CHAPTER IV.

Portuguese Discoveries.

Evroprs, for ten centuries, during the decline of the Ro-
man empire, the irruption of the barbarous nations, and the
operation of the rude systems of feudal polity, remained
sunk in profound apathy. respecting all objects relating to
science, discovery, and distant commerce. The splendour
of the Crescent for a short interval outshone all that was
brightest in the Christian world; andthe courts of Bagdad,
of Fez, and of Cordova were more refined and more en-
lightened than those of London and Paris. At a somewhat
early period, it is true, the Hanse Towns and the Italian
_ republics began to cultivate manufactures and commerce,
and to lay the foundation of a still higher prosperity ; but
they carried on chiefly an inland or coasting trade. The
naval efforts even of Venice and Genoa extended no far-
ther than to bring from Alexandria and the shores of the
Black Sea the commodities of India, which had been con-
veyed thither chiefly by caravans overland. Satisfied with
the wealth and power to which they had been raised by this
local and limited commerce, these celebrated republics made
no attempt to open a more extended path over the ocean.
Their pilots, indeed, guided most of the vessels which were
eng ged in the’early voyages of discovery; but they were
employed, and the means furnished, by the great monarchs
whose ports were situated upon the shores of the At-
lantic.

About the end of the fifteenth century, the human mind
began to make a grand movement in every direction; in re-
figion, science, freedom, and industry. It eagerly sought,
not only to break loose from that thraldom in which it had
been bound for so many ages, but to rival and even surpass
all that had been achieved during the most brilliant eras of
antiquity. These high aims were peculiarly directed to
the department of maritime discovery. The invention of
the compass, the skill of the Venetian and Genoese pilots,
and the knowledge transmitted from former times, inspired

| ae PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES. ;

mankind with the hope of being able to pass all the ancient
barriers, and to throw light upon regions hitherto unknown.
A small power, long sunk in apathy and political degrada-
tion, started first in this career, and took the lead for a cer-
tain time of all the European states. Portugal, during the
reign of its kings John and Emmanuel, stood pre-eminent
in enterprise and intelligence. Prince Henry, in particular,
a younger son of John I., devoted all his thoughts and-his
whole life to the promotion of naval undertakings. No
idea, however, was yet entertained of the new worlds which
were afterward discovered by the daring spirit of Columbus.
The local position of Portugal, its wars and expeditions
against Morocco, led to the idea that the western border of
Africa was the best field for discovery. The information
respecting this coast was still very limited; so that the
passage of' Cape Bojador by Gilianez, in 1433, caused a
surprise and admiration almost equal to what were after-
ward excited by the discovery of America. A rapid pro-
gress was afterward made along the shore of the Sahara,
and the Portuguese navigators were not long in reaching
the fertile regions watered by the Senegal and the Gambia.

The early part of this progress was dreary in the ex-
treme. ‘The mariners saw only naked rocks and burning
sands, stretching immeasurably into the interior, and afford-
ing no encouragement to any project of settlement. Be-
yond Cape Blanco, however, Nuno Tristan, in 14438, dis-
covered the island of Arguin; and notwithstanding the
disaster of Gonzalo da Cintra, who, in 1445, was killed by
a party of Moors, the Portuguese made it for some time
their principal establishment. The country was far from
presenting a brilliant aspect, though it was visited by cara-
vans of the “ Brabariis and Luddaias” (the people of
Bambarra and Ludamar), who gave a very favourable re«
port of the interior regions. Besides the expected accession
to the power and splendour of the monarchy, the Portu-
guese cherished another object still more fondly. They
hoped to open an intercourse with a prince, or person, of
whom they had heard much under the mysterious appella-
tion of Prester John. This singular name seems to have
been first introduced by travellers from Eastern Asia,
where it had been applied to some Nestorian bishop, who
held there @ species of sovereignty; and as soon as rus

”

PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES. 49

mours arrived of the Christian king of Abyssinia, he was
concluded to be the real Prester John. His dominions
being reported to stretch far inland, and as the ureadth of
the African continent was very imperfectly understood, the
conclusion was formed, that a mission from the western
coast might easily reach his capital. What were the pre-
cise €xpectations formed from an intercourse with this per-
sonage does not fully appear; but it seems to have been
thoroughly rooted in the minds of the Portuguese, that
they would be raised to a matchless height of glory and
felicity, if they could by any means arrive at the court of
Prester John. The principal instruction given to all offi-
cers employed in African service was, that, in every quarter
and by every means, they should endeavour to effect this
grand discovery. ‘They accordingly never failed to put the
question to all the wanderers of the desert, and to every
. caravan that came from the interior; but in vain—the
name of Prester John had never been heard. The Portu-
guese then besought the natives, at all events, into what-
ever region their journeys might lead them, studiously to
inquire if Prester John was there, or if any one knew
where he was to be found; and, on the promise of a
splendid reward in case of success, this was readily under-
taken.

In 1446, Diniz Fernandez discovered Cape Verd, and in
the following year Lancelot entered the Senegal. The
Portuguese found in this neighbourhood fertile and popu-
lous regions, that promised to reward their exertions much
more effectually than the visionary name after which they
had so eagerly inquired. A circumstance occurred, also,
most convenient for monarchs who contemplate an exten-
sion of dominion. Bemoy, a prince of the Jaloff nation,
came to Arguin, complaining that he had been driven from
the throne, and entreating the aid of the Portuguese to
restore to him his crown, which he was willing to wear as
their ally, and even as their vassal. Bemoy was received
with open arms, and conveyed to Lisbon. Here he expe-
Haiieed a brilliant reception, and his visit was celebrated
by all the festal exhibitions peculiar to that age,—bull-
fights, puppet-shows, and even feats of dogs. On this oc-
casion Bemoy made a display of tne agility of his native
attendants, who, on foot, kept pace with the swiftest horses,

7)

e
50 PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES.

mounting and alighting from these animals at full gallop.
After being instructed in the Christian religion, he was
baptized, and did homage to the king and to the Pope for
the crown which was to be placed on his head; for which
purpose a powerful armament, under the command of Pero
Vaz d’Acunha, was sent out with him to the banks of the
Senegal.

The conclusion of this adventure was extremely tragical.
A quarrel having arisen between Bemoy and the com-
mander, the latter stabbed the prince on board of his vessel.
Whether this violent deed was prompted by the heat of
passion, or by well-grounded suspicions of Bemoy’s fidelity,
was never fully investigated; but the king learned the
event with deep regret, and even, in consequence, gave up
his design of building a fort on the Senegal. He made,
however, no pause in his indefatigable efforts to trace the
abode of Prester John. Ambassadors were sent into the
interior, and, according to De Barros, even as far as Tim-
buctoo. All endeavours were vain as to the primary object ;
but the Portuguese thereby gained a more complete know-
ledge of this part of Interior Africa than was afterward
attained in Europe till a very recent period. Most of this
intelligence, however, has either perished, or still remains
locked up in the archives of the Lusitanian monarchy.

The Portuguese continued to prosecute African disco-
very, till, in 1471, they reached the Gold Coast, when,
dazzled by the importance and splendour of the commodity,
the commerce of which gave name to that region, they
built Elmina (the mine), making it the capital of their pos-
sessions in this continent. Pushing onward to Benin, they’
received a curious account of an embassy said to be sent,
at the accession of every new monarch, to the court of a
sovereign called Ogane, resident seven or eight hundred
miles in the interior. When the ambassadors were intro-
duced, a silk curtain shrouded the monarch from their view,
till the moment of their departure, when the royal foot was
graciously put forth from under the veil, and “reverence
done to it as toa holy thing.” This statement greatly
excited the curiosity of the Portuguese, to whom this mys-
terious monarch appeared, more likely than any they had
yet heard of, to be Prester John. Who this Ogane really
was has been a subject of much doubtful discussion.

PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES. 451

The Portuguese had for some time been desirous to
frame a title to this extensive coast, part of which they
had now discovered. They appealed chiefly to the reli-
gion, or rather to the superstition, of the age. The maxim
had been early established, that whatever country should
be conquered from infidel nations was to be held the pro-
perty of the victors. This claim was rendered available
by a grant obtained from the Pope, assigning to them in
full dominion all lands which should be discovered beyond
Cape Bojador, and in their farther progress eastward.
Hence, after the establishment at Elmina, the king no
longer hesitated to assume the pompous title of Lord of
Guinea, and instructed his commanders that, instead of
the wooden cross hitherto erected in sign of conquest, they
should raise pillars of stone double the height of a man,
with suitable inscriptions, surmounted by crucifixes inlaid
with lead. In 1484, Diego Cam sailed from Elmina in
quest of new shores on which this emblem of Portuguese
dominion might be planted. After passing Cape St. Ca-
therine, he found himself involved in a very strong current
setting out from the land, which was still distant ; though
the water, when tasted, was found to be fresh. It was
conjectured, therefore, that he was near the mouth of a
great river, which proved to be the fact. It has since been
celebrated under the name of the Zaire or Congo. Diego,
on reaching its southern bank, erected his first pillar,—an
event considered so memorable, that the stream itself has
often, by Portuguese writers, been termed the “ River of
the Pillar.’ He ascended its borders, opened an inter-
course with the natives, and inquired after the residence
of their sovereign. They pointed to a place at a consi-
derable distance in the interior, and undertook to guide
thither a mission, which they pledged themselves, within
a stipulated period, to lead back in safety. As the natives
meantime passed and repassed on the most intimate footing,
Diego took advantage of a moment when several of the
principal persons were on board his ship, weighed anehor,
and stood out to sea. He soothed the alarm visible in the
countenances of their countrymen on shore, by signs, inti-
mating that this step was taken solely to gratify the anx-
ious desire of his sovereign to see and converse with these
African chiefs ; that in fifteen moons they should certainly

:

52 PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES.

be brought back again; and that, meanwhile, a number of
his people should be left as hostages. Diego then sailed
to Jasbon, where he introduced with triumph these living
trophies of his discovery. The king was highly gratified,
and held many conversations with the Congo princes,
whom he loaded with honours, and caused to be conveyed
back at the appointed period to the shores of the Zaire.
On Diego’s arrival at that river, it was highly gratifying to
see, waiting on the bank, the part of his crew whom he
had left as pledges, and respecting whom he had felt some
anxiety. He was invited to court, where the king not
only received him with kindness, but agreed to embrace
Christianity, and to send several of his principal lords to
Europe, to be instructed in its principles. ‘They sailed,
accordingly, and this new arrival of Congo leaders of the |
first rank gave fresh satisfaction at Lisbon. They re-
mained two years, experiencing the very best treatment ;
and on their being considered ripe for baptism, the king
stood godfather to the principal envoy, and his chief no-
bles to others; on which occasion the Africans received
the names of the persons by whom they had been thus
honoured.

In 1490, a new armament, guided by Ruy de Sousa,
conveyed back the Congo nobles to their native country.
- ‘The Portuguese, on their arrival, were received by the king
in full pomp. The native troops approached in three
lines, making so prodigious a noise with horns, kettledrums,
and other instruments, and raising shouts so tremendous,
as to surpass all that the Europeans had ever witnessed in
Catholic processions and invocations to the saints. The
king himself was seated in the midst of a large park, upon
an ivory chair raised on a platform. He was dressed in
rich and glossy skins of wild beasts, a bracelet of brass
hanging from his left arm, a horse’s tail from his shoulder,
and on his head a bonnet of fine cloth woven from the
palm-tree. He gave full permission to erect a church
and, when murmurs were heard from a few of his attend-
ants, he instantly offered to put them to death on the spot -
but the Portuguese laudably dissuaded him from so violent
a step. He himself and all his nobles were baptized; and
free scope was allowed to the exertions of the Catholic
missionaries. These churchmen seem to have been really

=

PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES. | 53

amimated with a very devoted and persevering zeal; but
they had, unfortunately, conceived an incorrect idea of what
they came to teach, and,. instead of inculcating the pure
doctrines and precepts of Christianity, merely amused the
people with empty and childish pageantry. ‘The presenta-
tion of beads, Agni Dei, images of the Madonna and
saints; the splendid processions; the rich furniture and
solemn ceremonies of the church, dazzled the eyes of the
savage natives, and made them view Christianity only as
a gay and pompous pageant, in which it would be an
amusement to join. The sacrament of baptism, to which
the Catholics attach such pre-eminent importance, was
chiefly recommended by a part of the ritual that consisted
in putting into the mouth a certain quantity of salt, which,
im Congo, is an extremely rare and valued commodity ; and
the missionaries were not a little disconcerted to find that
he very form by which the natives expressed baptism was
“to eat salt.” Thus an immense body of the people were
very speedily baptized and called Christians, but without
any idea of the duties and obligations which that sacred
name imposes. There was, however, one point which the
missionaries soon began very conscientiously, and perhaps
im rather too hasty and peremptory a manner, to enforce.
Appalled by the host of wives that surrounded every Afri-
can prince or chief, who fulfilled for him every purpose
of state and domestic service, and whom it had been his con-
stant study and pride to multiply, the missionaries made a
call on their converts to select one, and to make a sweeping
dismissal of all the others. This was considered an un-
warrantable inroad on one of the most venerated institutions
of the realm of Congo. To the aged monarch the privation
appeared so intolerable that he thereupon renounced his
Christian profession, and plunged again into the abyss of
pagan superstition. Happily, Alphonso, the youthful heir-
apparent, saw nothing so dreadful in the sacrifice; he
cheerfully submitted to it, and, braving his father’s dis-
pleasure, remained attached to the Portuguese. The old
king dying soon after, the zealous. convert became entitled
to reign; but his brother, Panso Aquitimo, supported by
the nobles and almost the whole nation, raised the standard
of rebellion in support of polygamy and paganism. A civil
war ensued, in which the eee had little more than a
4 2

54 PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES.

handful of Portuguese to oppose to the innumerable host of
his rebel countrymen ; however, in consequence, as his ad=
herents believed, of the appearance in the clouds, at ono
time of St. James, and at another of the Virgin Mary, he
always came off victorious. Doubtless the better arms and
discipline of the Portuguese rendered them superior in the
field to the tumultuary host of their rude assailants. |
Alphonso being thus firmly seated on his throne, the
missionaries for a time secured a safe and comfortable esta-
blishment in Congo. Being reinforced by successive bo-
dies of their brethren, they spread over the neighbouring
countries, Sundi, Pango, Concobella, Maopongo, many
tracts of which were rich and populous, though the state
of society was often extremely rude. Every where their
career was nearly similar. ‘The people gave them the most
cordial reception, flocked in crowds to witness and to share
in the pomp of their ceremonies, accepted with thankful-
ness their sacred gifts, and received by thousands the rite
of baptism. They were not, however, on this account pre-
ared to renounce their ancient habits and superstitions.
he inquisition, which was speedily instituted among their
ecclesiastical arrangements, caused a sudden revulsion ;
and the missionaries thenceforth maintained only a precas
rious and even a perilous position. ‘They were much re-
proached, it appears, for the rough and violent methods
employed to effect their pious purposes; and though they
treat the accusation as most unjust, some of the proceed-
ings of which they boast with the greatest satisfaction
tend not a little to countenance the charge. When, for ex-
ample, they could not persuade the people to renounce their
idols, they used a large staff with which they threw them
down and beat them in pieces; they even sometimes stole
secretly into the temples and set them on fire. A mission-
ary at Maopongo having met one of the queens, and finding
her mind inaccessible to all his instructions, determined to use
sharper remedies, and, seizing a whip, began to apply it to
her majesty’s person. The effect he describes as most au-
Spicious ; every successive blow opened her eyes more and
more to the truth, and she at length declared herself wholly
unable to resist such affecting arguments in favour of the
Catholic doctrine. It was found, however, that she had
hastened to the king with loud complaints respecting this

PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES. 55

mode of spiritual illumination, and the missionaries thence
forth lost all favour both with that prince and the ladies of
his court, being allowed to remain solely through dread of
the T’ortuguese. In only one other instance were they
permitted to employ this mode of conversion. The smith,
in consequence of the skill, strange in the eyes of a rude
people, with which he manufactured various arms and im-
plements, was viewed by them as possessing a measure of
, Superhuman power; and he had thus been encouraged to
advance pretensions to the character of a divinity, which
were very generally admitted. The missionaries appealed
to the king respecting this impious assumption; and that
prince, conceiving it to interfere with the respect due to
himself, agreed to deliver into their hands the unfortunate
smith, to be converted into a mortal in any manner they
might judge efficacious. After a short and unsuccessful
argument, they had recourse to the above potent instrument
of conversion; yet Vulcan, deserted in this extremity by all
his votaries, made still a firm stand for his celestial dignity,
till the blood began to stream from his back and shoulders,
when he finally yielded, and renounced all pretensions to a
divine origin.

Farther acquaintance discovered other irregularities,
against which a painful struggle was to be maintained. It
Was a prevailing practice, that before marriage the two par-
ties should live together for some time, and make trial of
each other’s tempers and inclinations, before they formed
the final engagement. To this system of probation the .
people were most obstinately attached, and the missionaries
in vain denounced it, calling upon them at once either to
marry or to separate. ‘The young ladies were always the
most anxious to have the full benefit of this experimental
process; and the mothers, on being referred to, refused to
incur responsibility, and expose themselves to the reproaches
of their daughters, by urging them to an abridgment of
the trial, of which they might afterward repent. The mis-
sionaries seem to have been most diligent in the task, as
they call it, of “reducing strayed souls to matrimony.”
Father Benedict succeeded with no less than six hundred ;
but he found it such “laborious work,” that he fell sick
and died in consequence. Another subject of deep regret
respected the many superstitious practices still prevalent,

bcd
‘66 PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES,

even among those who exhibited some sort of Christian
profession. Sometimes the children brought for baptism
proved to be bound with magic cords, to which the mothers,
as an additional security trom evil, had fastened beads,
relics, and figures of the Agnus Dei. The chiefs, in like
manner, while they gladly availed themselves of the protec
tion promised from the wearing of crucifixes and images of
the Virgin, were unprepared to part with the enchanted
rings, and other pagan amulets, with which they had been
accustomed to form a panoply around their persons. In
case of dangerous illness, sorcery had been always contem- |
plated as the main or sole remedy ; and those who rejected
its use were reproached as rather allowing their sick rela-
tions to die than incur the expense of a conjurer. But the
most general and most pernicious application of magic
was made in judicial proceedings. When a charge was
advanced against any individual, no one ever thought of in-
quiring into the facts, or of collecting evidence; every case
was decided by preternatural tests. The magicians pre-
pared a beverage, which produced on the guilty person, ac-
cording to the measure of his iniquity, spasm, fainting, or
death, but left the innocent quite free from harm. It seems
a sound conclusion of the missionaries, that the draught was
qodified according to the good or ill will of the magicians,
or the liberality of the supposed culprit. This trial, called
the bolungo, was indeed renounced by the king, but only te
substitute another, in which the accused was made to bent
over a large basin of water, when, if he fell in, he was con- —
cluded guilty. At other times, a bar of red-hot iron was
passed along the leg, or the arm was thrust into scalding
water; and if the natural effects followed, the person’s
head was immediuately struck off. Snail-shells, applied to
the temples, if they stuck, inferred guilt. When a dispute
arose between man and man, the plan was to place a shell
on the head of each, and make them stoop; when he from
off whose head the shell first dropped had a verdict found
against him. While we wonder at the deplorable ignorance
on which these practices were founded, we must not forget
that the “judgments of God,” as they were termed, em-
ployed by our sage ancestors during the middle ages, were
founded on the same unenlightened views, and were in some
cases absolutely identical. Pew:

EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES. 57

Other powers of still higher name held sway over the de-
luded minds of the people of Congo. Some ladies of rank
went about beating a drum before them, with dishevelled
hair, and pretending to work magical cures. There was
also a race of mighty conjurers, called Scingilli, who had
the power of giving and withdrawing rain at pleasure; and
they had a king called Ganja Chitorne, or God of the Earth,
to whom its first-fruits were regularly offered. This per-
son never died; but when tired of his sway on earth, he
nominated his successor and killed himself,—a step doubt-
less prompted by the zeal of his followers, when they saw
any danger of his reputation for immortality being compro-
mised. This class argued strongly in favour of their vo-
cation, as not only useful, but absolutely essential; since
without it the earth would be deprived of those influences by
which alone it was enabled to minister to the wants of man.
The people accordingly viewed with the deepest alarm any
idea of giving offence to beings whose wrath might be dis-
played in devoting the land to utter sterility.

We do not possess any record of the period or the manner
in which the Portuguese and their missionaries were ex-
pelled from Congo; but a late expedition did not find on
the banks of the Zaire any trace or even recollection of
either.

CHAPTER V.

Early English Discoveries. ,

Tue Portuguese, while they bore away the palm of mari-
time enterprise from all other nations, considered Africa
most especially as a region which they had won for them-
selves, and had covered with trophies of discovery and vic-
tory. But after being subjected to the cruel and degrading
yoke of Philip II. of Spain, they lost all their spirit and
energy. Under the same influence, they became involved
in hostility with the Dutch, who had risen to the first rank as
2 naval people, and whose squadrons successively stripped

58 EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES.

them of their most important possessions in this continent as
well as in the East Indies. In 1637, Elmina itself, their
capital, fell into the hands of these bold and successful
rivals; and at present, the boasted lords and rulers of
Guinea have not an acre left of their extensive dominions
along the whole western coast; they retain only the Ma-
deiras, Canaries, and other islands, which certainly are not
destitute of beauty, and even of some degree of political and
commercial value.

The Dutch did not remain long undisputed masters of
the seas. The glorious and splendid results which had
arisen from the discovery of the East and West Indies
caused the ocean to be generally viewed as the grand theatre
where wealth and glory were to be gained. ‘The French
and English nations, whose turn it was to take the lead in
European affairs, pressed eagerly forward in this career,
endeavouring at once to surpass their predecessors and each
other. Many of their African settlements were formed
with the view of securing a supply of slaves for their West
India possessions. But a more distant, more innocent,
and more brilliant object also attracted their attention.
Flattering reports had reached Europe of the magnitude of
the gold trade carried on at Timbuctoo and along the Niger.
- Letters were even received from Morocco, representing its
treasures as surpassing those of Mexico and Peru. On that
side, indeed, the immense Desert and its barbarous inha-
bitants rendered these central regions almost inaccessible ;
but there was another channel which appeared to —_ the
fairest and most tempting prospects. According to all the
geographical systems of that age, the great river Niger,
which flowed through the interior of the continent, and by
whose alluvion its plains were covered with gold, was un-
derstood to empty itself into the Atlantic either by the Se-
negal or Gambia, or, as was. more commenly supposed, by
both these rivers, imagined to be branches proceeding from
the great stream. By ascending either the Senegal or Gam-
bia, it therefore seemed possible to reach Timbuctoo and the
country of Gold; and this became a favourite object with
several European nations.

In 1618, a company was formed in England for the pur-
pose of exploring the Gambia. They sent out, that same
year, Richard Thompson, a person of spirit ané exterprise

EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES. 59

in charge of the Catherine of 120 tons, with a cargo worth
nearly two thousand pounds sterling. In the month of
December he entered the river; and proceeding as high as
Kassan, a fortified town, where he left most of his crew,
he pushed on in boats. The Portuguese, who were still
numerous in that district, and retained all their lofty claims,
were seized with bitter jealousy at this expedition made
by a foreign and rival power. Led on by Hector Nunez,
they furiously attacked the party which had been left at
Kassan, and succeeded in making a general massacre of
the English. Thompson, on learning these dreadful
tidings, although unable to make any effort to avenge the
slaughter of his countrymen, still maintained his station on
the river, and sent home encouraging accounts of the ge-
neral prospects of the undertaking. The company listened
to his statement, and sent out another vessel, which unfor-
tunately arrived at an a season, and lost most of the
crew by sickness. Even yet they were not dismayed, but,
retaining their ardour unabated, fitted out a third and larger
expedition, consisting of the Sin of 200 tons, and the St.
John of 50, and gave the command to Richard Jobson, to
whom we are indebted for the first satisfactory account of
the great river-districts of Western Africa.

Jobson entered the Gambia in November, 1620 ; but
what was his dismay on receiving the tidings that Thomp-
son had perished by the hands of his own men! Mutiny
was then a frequent occurrence on these hard and distant
services; but how it arose in this case, or who was to
blame, was never dury investigated. ‘The crew are said to
have been unanimous in representing the conduct of their
leader as oppressive and intolerable; but, in regard to a
man of undoubted spirit and enterprise, ahd who fell the
first of so muny victims in the cause of African discovery,
we should not receive too readily the report of those who
had so deep an interest in painting his character in the
darkest colours.

Jobson, notwithstanding the shock caused by this intelli-
gence, did not.suffer himself to be discouraged, but pushing
briskly up the river, soon arrived at Kassan. The Portu-
_ guese inhabitants in general had fled before his arrival,
while the few who remained professed, in respect to Hector
Nunez and the massacre ofthe English crew, an ignorance,

60 EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES.

and even a horror, for which he gave them very little credit.’
He had reason, on the contrary, to believe that they were
forming a scheme of attack, and even urging the natives to
rise against the English ; and such was the dread of their
machinations that scarcely any one could be prevailed on to
act as his pilot. Notwithstanding these suspicions and
alarms, he still pursued his course; but after passing the
falls of Barraconda he found himself involved in great diffi-
culties. The ascent was to be made against.a rapid cur-
rent: the frequency of hidden rocks made it dangerous to
sail in the night ; and the boat often struck upon sand-banks
and shallows, when it was necessary for the crew to strip
and go into the water, in order to push it over these ob-
stacles. They were once obliged to carry it a mile anda
half, till they found a deeper channel.

The English now beheld an entirely new world, and a
new aspect of nature. On every side there were immense
forests of unknown trees, while both the land and the water
were inhabited by multitudes of savage animals, whose
roarings every night filled the air. Sometimes twenty cro-
codiles were seen together in the stream, and their voices,
calling as it were to each other, resembled the “sound of a
deep well,” and might be heard at the distance of a league.
Sea-horses also were observed tossing and snorting in every
pool; while elephants appeared in huge herds on the shore:
at one place there were sixteen in a single troop. These
last animals were an object of great terror to the natives, of
whom only a few durst attack them with their long poisoned
lances and assagays; but whenever \he English made, a
movement against them, they fled like forest-deer, while, by
their swiftness, they eluded all pursuit. Three balls were
lodged in one individual, yet he made off, but was afterward
found dead by the negroes. Lions, ounces, and leopards
were also seen at a little distance; but, amid the alarms in-
spired by these formidable creatures, the sailors were
arnused by observing the various evolutions of the monkey
tribe. The baboons marched along, sometimes in herds of
several thousands, with several of the tallest in front, under
the guidance of a principal leader, the lesser following be-
hind, while a band of larger size brought up the rear.
“ Thus do they march on, and are very bold.” At night, ag
they took their stand upon the hills, filling the air with con-

— ~ 2 ee
i ———— __

EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES. 61

fused cries, ‘ one great voice would exalt itself, and the rest
were all hushed.” They mounted the trees to look at the
English, the sight of whom seemed to inspire dissatis-
faction ; they grinned, shook the boughs violently, uttered
angry cries, and when any overtures were made towards ac-
quaintance, ran off at full speed. The crew shot one; but
before they could reach the spot, the rest had carried it off.
‘On tracing these creatures to their haunts in the depths of
the forest, recesses were found, where the foliage had been
so intertwined above, and the ground beaten so smooth be-
neath, as made it difficult to believe that these ‘‘ bowers for
dancing and disport” had not been framed by human hands.

Amid these difficulties and adventures, the party ar-
rived at Tenda on the 26th January, 1621, where they ex-
pected to meet with Buckar Sano, the chief merchant on
the Gambia. This personage accordingly waited on them ;
but being treated with brandy, used it so immoderately that
he lay all night dead drunk in the boat. However, he seems
on this occasion to have been merely off his guard, as he
acted ever after a very discreet and prudent part. He not
only carried on traffic himself, but was employed as an
agent in managing all the transactions of others. His good
faith, however, seems to have been rendered somewhat
doubtful by the accounts which he gave to Jobson of a city
four months’ journey in the interior, the roofs of which were
covered with gold.

The report 6f a vessel come up to trade caused a great
resort from the neighbouring districts; and the natives,
rearing temporary hovels, soon formed a little village on each
side of the river. Speedily there appeared five hundred of
a ruder race, covered with skins of wild animals, “ the
tails hanging as from the beasts.” The women, who had
never before seen a white man, ran away; but the sight of
a few beads soon allured them to return. Unluckily, the
universal cry was for salt,—a commodity deficient and much
desired through all Central Africa; but Jobson, not duly
apprized of this, had not laid in a sufficient stock. Every
thing else was lightly prized in comparison ; and many who
were coming to swell the market, on learning this omission,
instantly turned back. He obtained in exchange gold and
ivory, and could have got hides in abundance, had they not
been too bulky a commodity to bear the expense of conveyance.

jail g

62 EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES.

Buckar Sano undertook to introduce the English at the
court of Tenda. On reaching the king’s presence, they
witnessed an example of the debasing homage usually paid
to negro princes, and of which Clapperton, in Eyeo, after-
ward saw several striking instances. The great and wealthy
merchant, on appearing in the presence of the king, first fell
on his knees, then throwing off his shirt, extended himself
naked and flat on the ground, while his attendants almost
buried him beneath dust and mud. After grovelling for
some time in this prone position, he started up, shook off the
earth, which two of his wives assisted in clearing from his
person, and he was then speedily equipped in his best attire,
with bow and quiver. He and his attendants, after having
made a semblance of shooting at Jobson, laid their bows at
his feet, which was understood as a token of homage; the
king even assured the English captain that the country and
every thing in it were thus placed at his disposal. In return
for gifts so magnificent, it was impossible to refuse a few
bottles of excellent brandy; the value of which, however,
Jobson never expected to realize from these regal dona-
tions.

The English commander soon found himself in the middle
of the dry season, and the river sinking lower and lower ;
vet he still made‘a hard struggle to ascend, animated by the
deceitful or inflated reports of Buckar Sano concerning the
city of gold. At thedistance of a few days’ journey he heard
of Tombaconda, which he conjectured to be Timbuctoo.
The conclusion was most erroneous, that city being distant
nearly a thousand miles ; but Europeans had formed as yet
no adequate idea of the dimensions of Africa. At length
the stream became so shallow that Jobson found it in vain
to attempt ascending higher. He began his voyage down-
ward on the 10th February, proposing to make a fresh
attempt during the season when the periodical rains should
have filled the channel. This purpose was never executed.
Both he and the company became involved in quarrels with
the merchants, against whom he bitterly inveighs as persons
who entirely disregarded every object beyond their own im-
mediate profit.

Jobson earlier, perhaps, than any other Englishman, had
an opportunity of observing the manners and superstitions
which are peculiar to native Africa. He found each prince

‘|

X

So

ee

: |

AN \

HL

Hy

a EEE

A}

SSS ‘l

f, Jillemen or Native Musicians, and

nee
8
es)
eu
sil
5
or
oO
emt
eh
Ss
=)
ro)

o&

om

Se

Oy»
| @

2 op

ep VY

s ha

aS

<3)

$

Som

ro)

=

5

i

Re}

EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES. 63

or chief attended by bands of musical bards, whom he digni-
fies with the title of ‘‘juddies or fiddlers,” and compares
them to the Irish rhymesters. ‘These are called, as we
learn from other authors, Jelle, or Jillemen, and perform on
several instruments rudely formed of wood, making a very
loud noise. These minstrels, with the Greegree men, or
magicians, most fantastically attired, often form singular
groups, as exhibited in the accompanying plate. The two

chief festivals were those of circumcision and of funeral. The

former, performed in a very rough manner, attracted the
whole country; the forest blazed with fires, while loud
music, shouts, and dancing resounded throughout the night.
At the funeral of chiefs there was much crying and lament-
ation, conducted in a somewhat mechanical manner, which
reminded him of the Irish howl. Flowers of the sweetest
scent were buried along with the deceased, and much gold
was deposited for his service in the other world; but there
is no mention of those human sacrifices which form so foul
a blot on some of the most civilized African nations. At all
festivals a conspicuous place was acted by a personage
called Horey, which name our author interprets “the Devil.”
This being took his station in the adjoining woods, whence
he sent forth tremendous sounds, supposed to be of sinister
portent to. all within hearing. The only remedy was to de-
posite, as near to the spot as any one would venture, a large
supply of “ belly-timber,” the speedy disappearance of which
authenticated to the villagers both the existence of this su-
pernatural being and the fact of his having been appeased.
To Jobson, on the contrary, this very circumstance, com-
bined with the severe hoarseness with which sundry of the
natives were afflicted, afforded a clew to the origin of this
extraordinary roaring. Of this he had soon ocular demon-
stration. Happening, in company with a marabout, to hear
the Horey in full cry from a neighbouring thicket, he seized
a loaded musket, declaring aloud his resolution forthwith to
discharge the contents at his infernal majesty. The mara-
bout implored him to stop; the tremendous sound was_
changed into a low and fearful tone; and Jobson, on run-
ning to the spot, found this mighty demon in the shape of a
huge negro, extended on the ground in such agonies of fear
that he was unable even to ask for mercy.

The company, amid the divisions already alluded to, do

64 EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES.

not appear to have prosecuted farther their designs of dis- ,
covery. The next attempt was made about 1660 or 1665, by
Vermuyden, a rich’merchant on the Gambia, who fitted out
a boat well stored with beef, bacon, biscuit, rice, strong wa-
ters, and other comfortable supplies ; which, however, when
he arrived at the flats and shallows, were found materially
to impede the movement of the vessel. He came first to a
wide expanse which he compares to Windermere lake, where
the only difficulty was to find the main branch amid several
that opened from different quarters. “Up the buffing
stream,” says he, ‘with sad labour we wrought ;” and when
they ascended higher, it became necessary often to drag the
boat over the flats ; for which purpose they were frequently
obliged to strip naked and walk through the water. They
were rather rudely received by the only tenants of these
upper tracts, the crocodiles and river-horses, ‘ill pleased or
unacquainted with any companions in these watery regions.”
One of the latter struck a hole in the boat with his teeth, an
accident which proved very inconvenient, from the absence
of any one skilled in carpentry; but by hanging a lantern
at the stern, they induced these monsters, which are afraid
of light shining in the dark, to maintain a respectful dis-
tance. On landing to search for gold, they were assailed
by an incredible number of huge baboons, on which it is
complained that no oratory except guns could produce any
impression ; and even after two or three of them had been
killed, they attacked with increased and alarming fury, till
successive discharges at length compelled them to retreat.
The sole object in this voyage was the discovery of gold..
The adventurer landed at various points, washed the sand,
and examined the rocks. He had carried out not only mer-
cury, aqua regia, and large melting pots, but ulso a divining
rod, which was not found to exhibit any virtue; however,
on being laughed at by his companions for his delusive ex-
pectations from it, he persuaded himself that this potent in-
strument had lost its qualities by being dried up during the
voyage from England. On one oeeasion he found a large
mass of apparent gold, which proved to be mere spar. ‘The
real metal, he observes, is never found in low, fertile, and
woody spots, but always on naked and barren hills, imbedded
m a reddish earth. At one place, by twenty days’ labour,
he succeeded in extracting twelve pounds. At length he

the a he ee Ce ae ee ae

EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES. - 65

declares, that he arrived ‘at the mouth of the mine itself,
and saw gold in such abundance as surprised him with joy
and adiniration.”” However, he gives no notice of the posi-
tion of this famous mine, the existence of which has not
been confirmed by any subsequent observer.

It was not till 1720 that the spirit of African discovery
again revived in England. The Duke of Chandos, then
director of the African Company, concerned at the declining
state of their affairs, entertained the idea of retrieving them
by opening a path into the golden regions still reported to
exist in the interior of Africa. At his suggestion, the com-
pany, in 1723, furnished Captain Bartholomew Stibbs with
the usual means for sailing up the Gambia. On the 7th
October this navigator arrived at James Island, the English
settlement, about thirty miles from the mouth of the river,
whence he immediately wrote to Mr. Willy, the governor,
who happened to be then visiting the factory of Joar, more

than a hundred miles distant, asking him to engage canoes.

He received for answer that there were none to be had, and
was almost distracted to learn that Mr. Willy was giving
himself no concern about the affair. Some days after, how-
ever, a boat brought down the dead body of the governor,
who had fallen a victim to the fever of the climate, which
had previously affected his bram. Thus, notwithstanding
every exertion of Orfeur, who succeeded him, the equip-
ment of the boats was delayed till the 11th December, when
the unfavourable season was fast approaching. Stibbs had
assigned to him a crew of nineteen white men, of whom one
indeed was as black as coal, but being a Christian, ranked
as white, and served as interpreter; likewise twenty-nine
grumettas, or hired negroes, with three female cooks; and
he afterward took on board a balafeu, or native musician, to
enliven the spirits of the party.

Stibbs set out on the 26th of December, and the voyage
proceeded for some time very agreeably. ‘The English were
every where well received, and at one place even a saphie,
or charm, had been laid wpon the bank for the purpose of
drawing them on shore. The captain had endeavoured to
conceal} his object, but in vain; he found himself every
where pointed out as the person who was come to bring
down the gold. The native crew, however, predicted the
most fearful disaster if he should attempt to proceed above

F2

66 EARLY ENGLISH DISCOVERIES.

the falls of Barraconda. As the boats approached that fatal
boundary, the Africans came in a body, and stated their
firm determination on no account to proceed any farther.
No one, they said, had ever gone beyond Barraconda,—
Barraconda was the end of the world,—or if there existed
any thing beyond, it was a frightful and barbarous region
where life would be in continual danger. A Jong palaver
and a bottle of Stibbs’s very best brandy were necessary ere
they would agree to accompany him beyond this dreaded
boundary of the habitable universe.

The falls of Barraconda were not found so formidable as
rumour had represented; they were narrows rather than
falls, the channel being confined by rocky ledges and frag-
ments, between which there was only one passage, where
the canoes rubbed against the rock on each side. In this
region of the Upper Gambia, the natives, belying all slan-
derous rumours, proved to be a harmless, good-humoured
people, who, wherever the crew landed, met them with pre-
sents of fowls and provisions. | |

The severest exertion now became necessary in order to
pass the flats and quicksands, which multiplied in proportion
as they ascended, and over which the boats in some instances
could only be dragged by main force. The wild and huge
animals that occupy these regions appeared still more dan-
gerous to the present adventurers than to their predecessors.
The elephants, which had fled precipitately before Jobson,
struck the greatest terror into this party; one of them on a
certain occasion putting to flight the whole crew. They
were even seen in bands crossing from one side of the water
to the other. The river-horses also presented themselves
every where in numerous herds; and though this animal
generally moved in a sluggish and harmless manner, yet in
the shallow places, when walking along the bottom of the
river, he occasionally came into collision with the boat; in-
censed at which, he was apt to strike a hole through it with.
his huge teeth, so as to endanger its sinking. If the’ cou-
rage of the crew against these mighty animals was not very
conspicuous, their exertions in dragging the boat over the
flats and shallows appear to have been most strenuous; yet
so extremely unfavourable was the season, that at the end
of two months Stibbs found himself, on the 22d February,
when he had reached fifty-nine miles above Barraconda,

FRENCH DISCOVERIES. 67

obliged to stop short even of Tenda, and consequently of the
point to which Jobson had formerly attained.

The commander, on his return, after making every allow-
ance for the inauspicious season and circumstances, could
not forbear expressing deep disappointment in regard to the
expectations with which he had ascended the Gambia. He
saw no appearance of that mighty channel which was to
lead into the remote interior of Africa, and through so many
great kingdoms. He declared his conviction that “its ori-
ginal or head is nothing near so far in the country as by the
geographers has been represented.” It did not of course
appear to him to answer in any respect the descriptions
given of the Niger,—it nowhere bore that name—it did not
come out of any lake that he could hear of—it had no
communication with the Senegal or any other great river.
The natives reported that at twelve days’ journey above
Barraconda it dwindled into a rivulet, and “ fowls walked
over it.”” ‘These statements were received most reluctantly
and skeptically by Moore, now the company’s factor on the
Gambia, and a man of spirit and intelligence. He had even
acquired some learning on the subject, and endeavoured to
overwhelm Stibbs with quotations from Herodotus, Leo,
Edrisi, and other high authorities. The mariner, though
quite unable to cope with him in this field of discussion, did
not the less steadily assert the plain facts which he had seen
with his own eyes; and a degree of discouragement was
felt, which prevented any other exploratory voyage from
being undertaken for a considerable time into that part of
the African continent.

CHAPTER VI.
French Deadbiarive.

France did not embark so early as some of the other
powers in African discovery. Louis XIV., aided by his
minister Colbert, was the first prince who studied to raise
his kingdom to a high rank as 2 commercial and maritime

68 FRENCH DISCOVERIES.

power. But, unfortunately, according to the spirit of the
time, the only mode in which he ever thought of promoting
any branch of trade, was by vesting it in an exclusive com-
pany; and when, according to the usual fate of such asso-
ciations, one was involved in bankruptcy, another immedi-
ately supplied its place. Thus four successive companies
rose and fell, till at length they all merged in that greatest
and most fatal delusion, the Mississippi scheme. However,
these copartneries, at their first formation, attracted many
individuals of opulence and talent, and generally opened

with a spirited career of enterprise and discovery. While . .

the English sought to ascend the Gambia, the Senegal was
the Niger to the French—the stream by which they hoped
to penetrate upwards to Timbuctoo and the regions of gold.
At the mouth of this river, about the year 1626, was founded
the settlement of St. Louis, which has ever since continued
to be the capital of the French possessions in Africa.

The first person who brought home any accounts of
French Africa was Jannequin, a young man of some rank,
who, seeing, as he walked along the quay at Dieppe, a vessel
bound for this unknown continent, took a sudden fancy to
embark and make the voyage. The adventurers sailed on
the 5th November, 1637, and touched at the Canaries; but
the first spot on the continent where they landed was a part
of the Sahara, near Cape Blanco, Jannequin was struck,
in an extraordinary degree, with the desolate aspect of this
region. It consisted wholly of a plain of soft sand, in which ,
the feet were buried at every step; and a man, after walk-
ing fifty paces, was overwhelmed with fatigue. At Senegal
the colony was found in so imperfect a state that the sailors
were obliged to rear huts for their own accommodation ; and,
slight as these were, the labour under a burning sun was
very severe. In ascending the river, however, he was de-
lighted with the brilliant verdure of the banks, the majestic
beauty of the trees, and the thick impenetrable underwood.
Amid the deep solitude which distinguished the country, all
the forests were filled with echoes. The natives received
him hospitably, and he was much struck by their individual
strength and courage, decidedly surpassing, as appeared to
him, the similar qualities in Europeans. Hesaw a Moorish
chief, called the Kamalingo, who, mounting on horseback,
and brandishing three javelins and a cutlass, engaged a lion

FRENCH DISCOVERIES. 69

in single combat, and vanquished that mighty king of the
desert. Flat noses and thick lips, so remote from his own
ideas of the beautiful, were considered on the Senegal as
forming the perfection of the human visage; nay, he even
fancies that they were produced by artificial processes. He
was surprised by the enormous number of greegrees, or
charms, in which the chiefs were enveloped. All the perils,
of water, of wild beasts, and of battle, had an appropriate
charm, by which the owner was secured against them.
These potent greegrees were merely slips of paper, which
the marabouts, or Mussulman doctors, had inscribed with
Arabic characters ; and being then enclosed in cases of thick |
cloth, or even of gold and silver, were hung round the per-
son in such profusion that they actually formed a species of
armour. In some instances they composed such a load that
the possessor was unable to mount on horseback without as-
sistance. |

The Sieur Brue, who, in 1697, was appointed director-
general of the company’s affairs, was the person who did

_ most for their prosperity, and made the greatest efforts to

penetrate into the interior. In that year he embarked ona
visit to the Siratik, or king of the Foulahs, whose territory
lay about 400 miles up the Senegal. In ascending that
river he was struck, like Jannequin, by the magnificent
forests, and the profuse and luxuriant verdure with which
they were clothed; while it was amusing to observe the
numberless varieties of the monkey tribe, which were conti-
nually leaping from bough tobough. Elephants marched
in bands of forty or fifty; and large herds of cattle fed on
the rich meadows, though, during the season of inundation,
they withdrew to the more elevated spots. At Kahayde, he ,
was received by a chief belonging to the Siratik, accom-
panied by numerous attendants, among whom were his wife,
daughters, and some female slaves, all mounted upon asses.
He was cordially welcomed ; yet the reflection suggested by
his dealings with this gay and fair train was, that European
beggars, however great their effrontery, might learn much
from the example of the higher circles in Africa. When
they can no longer ask, they begin to borrow, with the firm
resolution of never repaying; and, what is worst of all,
when they make a present, they hold it a deadly offence
not to receive at least double the value in return. |

70 FRENCH DISCOVERIES.

Brue sailed up the river, and landed at the port of
Ghiorel ; then, with a party of armed attendants, set out for
Gumel, about ten leagues in the interior, where the Siratik
resided. At Ghiorel he was visited by Bukar Siré, one of

the young princes, and afterward by the Kamalingo or ge-
neral, and the Bouquenet, a venerable and aged negro, who |
filled an office similar to that of treasurer or prime minister.
These two latter personages assured the director of the

hearty welcome which awaited him at court; intimating,
at the same time, their readiness to receive the presents
which he was understood to have brought to the Siratik.
These accordingly were spread forth, and consisted of scar-
let cloths, coloured worsteds, copper kettles, pieces of coral
and amber, brandy, spices, and a few coins, in portions re-
spectively destined for the king, his wives, and the illus-
trious messengers; yet these liberal gifts, though they.
amply satisfied the great personages who received them,
did not drain the finances of the company, since the entire
cost did not exceed sixty or seventy pounds. ‘The country
was found level, well cultivated, and filled with such nu-
merous herds that the French with difficulty made their
way throughthem. At a village called Buksar, the Siré
and his attendants again met them, brandishing their lances
or assagayes, as if in the act to strike. This being ex-
plained as meant for the greatest possible compliment,
Brue, in return, cocked his pistol at the young prince, with
whom he then spent the evening. After being introduced
to several ladies of the court, he was entertained with sup-
per, consisting of fruits, kouskous, and other simple pro-
ducts of African cookery. Then followed the folgar or
dance, the favourite amusement of the negroes; but while

‘ all the youth of the village were tripping it gayly upon the
green, amid songs and music, he found more gratification in
the kalder, or conversation carried on by the old men seated
on mats inacircle. 'Their manners were noble and digni-
fied ; they showed retentive memories and quick apprehen-
sions respecting the objects which came within their limited
range of observation.

He set out next morning for the residence of the Si-
ratik, being met and escorted thither by the Kamalingo,
He found that prince surrounded by none of those circum-

stances which constitute in Europe the pomp of royalty,
i

FRENCH DISCOVERIES. 41

His palace was merely a cluster of mud cabins surrounded
by a hedge of reeds. In one of these huts he reclined on a
couch, while several of his wives and daughters sat round
him on mats spread on the ground. ‘The reception was
perfectly friendly, and Brue even obtained permission to
erect forts,—a privilege of which African princes are usually
and indeed naturally jealous. The director was allowed
full liberty to converse with the female circle, who were by
no means held in that state of austere seclusion which gives
such a gloom to Mussulman society. The ladies began to
talk in the most lively and familiar manner; and as Brue
was thought to eye with admiration a handsome young
princess of seventeen, she was tendered to him in marriage.
He excused himself as one already joined in the bonds of
matrimony; but the ladies professed themselves quite un-
able to conceive how this could form an objection, their
young relative being of course prepared to share the honour
with any reasonable number of rivals. It then behooved the
director to explain the matrimonial system of Europe, which
furnished, as it always does in Africa, ample ground for
wonder and speculation. The lot of the French ladies was
pronounced to be truly enviable ; but Brue’s own situation
was much commiserated, especially in his present state of
separation from his only wife.

The court being obliged to remove by the annoyance
arising from a species of flying insect, Brue had an oppor-
tunity of observing the royal procession travelling in order.
First came a numerous body of mounted musicians, who,
performing on various instruments, produced a noise at
once deafening and discordant. Next followed the royal
ladies, mounted on the backs of camels in large osier
baskets, which so completely enveloped their persons that —
their heads only were seen peeping above. ‘Their female
domestics, riding by their side on asses, endeavoured to en-
liven them by incessant talk. The baggage behind was
borne by a long train of camels and asses; while horsemen,
in military array, with the king and his principal nobles at
their head, closed the procession. The director and his
party, while all this gay train passed by, exchanged with
them mutual courtesies and salutations. Having satisfac-
torily accomplished the immediate object of his journe
Brue returned to St. Louis. p, %

73% FRENCH DISCOVERIES.

In 1698, the same gentleman undertook another voyage,
in which he aimed not merely at the limited objects above
stated, but sought to ascend the Senegal as high as possible,
and to open a commercial intercourse with the interior. In
this voyage he had gained an amicable interview with the
Siratik, and employed four of his negroes in destroying an
enormous lion which had infested the neighbourhood. Far-
ther on he observed some peculiar forms of the animal crea-
tion. ‘The air for two hours was darkened by the passage
of a cloud of locusts, andthe boats were covered with their
filth. Lions and elephants roamed in vast numbers; but
the latter were quite tame and harmless unless when at-
tacked. Monkeys swarmed in their usual multitudes; and
in one place there was a species of a red colour, which ap- |
peared extremely surprised at the view of the strangers, and
used to come in successive parties to gaze at them; on.
which occasion they conversed with each other, and even
threw down dry branches upon the boats. ‘The French, we
know not why, fired and killed several; upon which they
raised an extraordinary commotion, and sought, ‘by throw-
ing stones and sticks, to avenge the fall of their comrades ;
but, soon finding the contest unequal, they retired for safety
into the woods. The navigators were also introduced to a
personage called “‘'The King of the Bees,” who, by the use
of a particular charm, came tothe boat surrounded by thou-
sands of these insects, over which he exercised an absolute
sway, guiding them as a shepherd does his sheep, and com-
pletely securing all his friends against their formidable
stings. | | rl a

On reaching Gallam, Brue found himself in a somewhat
delicate position. Two rival princes disputed the throne,
each holding, at his respective residence, a certain sway 5
but each also claiming for himself the entire homage, and
all the presents brought by the director. The legitimate
prince, in particular, sent his son to remonstrate that his un-
doubted claim ought not to be set aside for that of an ephe-
meral usurper. ‘The European, however, acting steadily on
the principle of self-interest, endeavoured to ascertain which
of the two sovereigns could most benefit the company;
and, finding the real power chiefly in the hands of the rebel,

stowed on him the larger portion of good things. The

ether party was thereby so incensed that he even threatened

FRENCH DISCOVERIES. 73

an attack; but the determined language of Brue, and the
sight of the great guns which the French had on board,
made him relinquish all hostile intentions.

The director now reached Dramanet, a thriving town, in-
habited by several rich merchants, who traded as far as Tim-
buctoo, which, according to their computation, was five hun-
dred leagues in the interior. This position was therefore
thought the most convenient place for a fort, which was
called St. Joseph, and continued long to be the principal seat
of French commerce on the Upper Senegal. Brue then
went up to Felu, where a large rock, crossing the river,
forms a cataract, which it is almost impossible for vessels to
pass. Quitting his boats, he proposed to ascend to the falls
of Govinea, about forty leagues higher; but the water was

‘getting so low, that, fearing the navigation downward should

be interrupted, he returned to St. Louis.

Brue, in reply to numerous inquiries made by him on this
journey, received accounts of the kingdom of Bambarra, of
the Lake Maberia (Dibbie of Park), of Timbuctoo, of the
caravans which came thither from Barbary, and even of
masted vessels which were seen on the waters beyond. But
the grand object of his research was the course of the Ni-
ger, concerning which he received two quite opposite an-
swers. According to some it flowed westward from the Lake
Maberia, till it separated into the two channels of the Gam-
bia and Senegal; but other and juster reports represented
it as being distinct from both these rivers, and as passing
eastward beyond Timbuctoo. The testimonies transmitted
to France in favour of this last opinion must have greatly
9 em since both the great geographers, Delille and

*Anville, adopted this delineation; and yet the popular
opinion in that country, as well as through Europe in
general, long continued to regard the Niger and Senegal as
one and the same river.

Beyond Gallam lay another more tempting region, Bam-
bouk, which contains mines of gold, the most productive of
all that are to be found in the interior of Western Aftica.
The difficulty of penetrating thither, however, was extreme,
the natives having completely barred the frontier against
white men, in consequence of the tyranny exercised by the
Portuguese, who had ruled and oppressed the district till
they were cut off or expelled by a general msurrection

G

74 FRENCH DISCOVERIES.

Many adventurers, after being induced by high bribes to ure
dertake the journey, successively declined the enterprise.
At length one Compagnon, laden with valuable presents,
ventured’ to pass the boundary, and by his address succeeded
in conciliating the inhabitants of the nearest village. A
general alarm, however, spread through the country, when
it was known that there was a white man within its pre-
cincts; and representations were sent, that, according to
the ancient salutary laws, he should forthwith be put to
death ;—yet Compagnon, by presents and address, suc-
ceeded in making his way from village to village. He con-
trived to visit the principal districts, and even to carry off a
portion of the ghingan, or golden earth, which forms the
ee and wealth of Bambouk. Brue then transmitted to

rance various projects, and among others that of conquer-
ing the country, which he undertook to effect with 1200
men; but such a degree of apathy prevailed at home, that
none of these propositions made any impression, noth
quent governors, however, directed their attention to the
same subject: two of them, Levens and David, even visited
Bambouk in person; but no attempt was ultimately made
either to conquer or to form settlements in that part of Africa.
Indeed, though either step might have been successful in the
first instance, the possession of such a territory would in the
end have proved both costly and precarious.

From the accounts thus received, and which have been
collected by Mr. Golberry, Bambouk appears to consist of a
mass of lofty, naked, and barren mountains, and to contain
scarcely any treasures, except those which are hid in the
bowels of the earth. Besides, it is in the most arid and
dreary spot of this gloomy region that the gold is found.
Several hills in different quarters, not very high, but of con-
siderable extent, have the same metallic substance distri-
buted throughout, under the form of grains, spangles, and
even of small lumps, which are always found larger in pro-
portion to the depth of the bed. In the mine of Natakon
the ore is mixed with earth, from which the precious dust is
extracted by continued agitation in water; or it adheres to
fragments of iron, emery, and lapis lazuli, whence it is
easily detached. In the mine of Semayla, on the contrary,
it is imbedded in a hard reddish loam, mixed with other sub-
stances still harder, from which it can be extracted only by

nn cc

*

i. . i

FRENCH DISCOVERIES. 75

reducing them allto a powder. This is effected by pound-
ing them with a pestle of hard wood, which is soon worn
away by the resistance of the mineral substances. This
mine, therefore, though richer than the other, is less valuable.
The Farims, who are absclute chiefs of Bambouk, allow the
mining operations only at certain seasons, when they them-
selves attend to levy a proportion of the proceeds. ‘Two
men, or two women,—for they are promiscuously employed
in this occupation,—dig out the earth or other substances,
which they hand to those who are to extract from it the
gold. This metal they imagine to be a capricious being de-
lighting to sport with their eager pursuit ; and when they
find a rich vein suddenly become unproductive, they call out
“He is off.” The pit which is six feet in diameter, is dug
to the depth of thirty or forty, when the workers are usually
arrested by an impenetrable bed of reddish-coloured marble,
which, from certain indications, Golberry is led to consider
as only the covering of much more abundant veins. These
pits or shafts, by means of ladders, are carried down with
perpendicular sides, which often fall in and bury the unfor-
tunate workmen. ‘This, however, does not at all discom-
pose the survivors. ‘They apprehend that the Devil, or ra-
ther a certain subterranean deity, having occasion for la-
bourers to conduct his own operations underneath, seizes in
this manner the best miners he can find on the surface of
the earth. Nor do they feel the least surprise, though they
cannot conceal their regret, when, in the course of working,
they light upon the skeletons of the victims. The Devil,
they fancy, has then found himself mistaken in his choice,
and has rudely thrown them back to the place whence he
had withdrawn them. |

The trade to Gallam appears, by the report of M. Sau-
gnier, who undertook a voyage thither, to have been very
profitable when carried on with success. Gold, ivory, and
slaves could be purchased on easy terms; and the natives,
called Serawoolies, were intelligent and active, though in-
clined to be thievish. The voyage, however, is liable to
many vicissitudes, the navigation uften dangerous, and the
natives on shore perpetually on the watch for plunder, espe-
cially the princes or robbers; which terms in Africa are
nearly synonymous. The French government, also, had
issued instructions not to proceed to great extremities

ae ll

76 | FRENCH DISCOVERIES.

against these high-born pilferers ; and hence Saugnier com-
plains, that though he had at one time eight royal person-
ages on board of his vessel as prisoners, he durst not turn
them to any account. In this way the adventure was
almost as likely to ruin as to enrich the person who under-
took it.
The chief prosperity of the French settlements on the
Senegal was derived from the gum-trade, of which Gol-
berry has given a lively description. 'To the north of this
river, where its fertile borders pass into the boundless de-
serts of the Sahara, grow large forests of that species of
acacia from which the gum distils. It is crooked and
stunted, resembling rather a bush or shrub than a tree. No
incision is necessary ; for under the influence of the hot
winds the bark dries and cracks in various places. se
liquor exudes, but by its tenacity remains attached in the
form of drops, which are as clear and transparent as the
finest rock-crystal. ‘The Moorish tribes, to whom these
woods belong, break up about the beginning of December
from their desert encampments, and proceed'to the gum
district in a tumultuous crowd; the rich mounted on horses
and camels, while the poor perform the journey on foot,
Six weeks are spent in collecting the material ; after which
it is conveyed to the great annual fair held on the banks of
the Senegal. The scene of this merchandise is an im-
mense plain of white and moving sand, the desolate mono-
tony of which is not broken by a single herb or a shrub.
Here the French take their stand to await the arrival of the
Moors. On the appointed morning they hear at a distance
‘the confused noise of their armies in motion. Towards
noon this vast and solitary plain appears covered with men,
women, and animals innumerable, enveloped in clouds of
dust. The chiefs ride beautiful horses ; while the females
of rank are seated on the backs of camels, elegantly capa-
risoned, in baskets covered with an awning. An incessant
murmur pervades this barbarous assemblage, till, the whole
having arrived, the camp is pitched, and a cannon fired as a
signal for beginning the fair. The French relate, that
every species of artifice and even threats are employed by
these rude traffickers to enhance the price of their goods ;
yet they themselves, it would appear, have little nght to”
complain, inasmuch as they confess that they have insen-

tn, ll

«Me

AFRICAN ASSOCIATION. 77

sinly, and without attracting the notice of their barbarous
customers, raised the kantar, by which the gum is measured,
from five hundred to two thousand pounds weight.

a it,

CHAPTER VII.

Early Proceedings of the African Association—Ledyard,
Lucas, Houghton, ‘ ’

THe preceding narrative of French and English dis-
coveries proves the imperfect success with which the earlier
attempts to penetrate into the interior of Africa, though
made by the most powerful nations of Europe, were at-
tended. While the remotest extremities of land and sea in
other quarters of the globe had been reached by British en-
terprise, this vast region remained an unseemly blank in the
map of the earth. Such a circumstance was felt as dis-
creditable to a great maritime and commercial nation, as
well as to the sciences upon which the extension of geogra-
phical knowledge depends. To remove this reproach, a
body of spirited ES themselves into what

3 ;

wm.

78 ,

was termed the African Association. ‘They subscribed the
necessary funds, and sought out individuals duly qualified
and possessed of sufficient courage to undertake such dis-
fant and adventurous missions. A committee, composed of
Lord Rawdon, afterward Marquis of Hastings, Sir Joseph
Banks, the Bishop of Landaff, Mr. Beaufoy, and Mr. Stuart,
were nominated managers. It seemed scarcely probable
that the mere offer to defray travelling expenses, which was. .
all the society’s finances could afford should induce persons
with the requisite qualifications to engage in journeys so
long and beset with so many perils; yet such is the native
enterprise of Britons, that men eminently fitted for the task
presented themselves, even in greater numbers than the
society could receive. |
The first adventurer was Mr. Ledyard, who, born a tra-
veller, had spent his life in passing from one extremity of the
earth to another, He had sailed round the world with Cap-
tain Cook, had lived for several years among the American
Indians, and had made a journey with the most scanty
means from Stockholm round the gulf of Bothnia, and
thence to the remotest parts of Asiatic Russia, On his re-
turn he presented himself to Sir Joseph Banks, to whom he
owed many obligations, just as that eminent person was
looking out for an African discoverer. He immediately pro-
nounced Ledyard to be the very man he wanted, and re-
commended him to Mr. Beaufoy, who was struck with his
fine countenance, frank conversation, and an eye expressive
of determined enterprise. Ledyard declared this scheme to
*° quite in unison with his own wishes ; and on being asked
how soon he could set out, replied, ** To-morrow.” Affairs
were not yet quite so matured; but he was soon after pro-
vided with a passage to Alexandria, with the view of first
proceeding southward from Cairo to Sennaar, and thence
traversing the entire breadth of the African continent. He
arrived at Cairo on the 19th August, 1788, and while pre
paring for his journey into the interior, transmitted some
bold, original, though somewhat fanciful observations upon
Egypt. He represents the Delta as an unbounded plain of
excellent land miserably cultivated; the villages as most
wretched assemblages of poor mud-huts, full of dust, fleas,
flies, and ail the curses of Moses; and the people as below
the rank of any savages he ever saw, wearing only a blue

=—

PAN xi oS =? eal

hy. Og

LUCAS. 79
shirt and drawers, and tattooed as much as the South Sea
islanders. He bids his correspondents, if they wish to see
Egyptian women, to look at any group of gipsies behind a
hedge in Essex. The Mohammedans he describes as a
trading, enterprising, superstitious, warlike set of vaga-
bonds, who, wherever they are bent upon going, will and
do go; but he complains that the condition of a Frank is
rendered most humiliating and distressing by the furious
bigotry of the Turks. It seemed inconceivable that such
enmity should exist among men, and that beings of the
same species should think and act in a manner so opposite.
By conversing with the jelabs, or slave-merchants, he
learned a good deal respecting the caravan-routes and coun-
tries of the interior. Every thing seemed ready for his
departure, and he announced that his next communication
would be from Sennaar; but, on the contrary, the first
tidings received were those of his death. Some delays in
the departure of the caravan, working upon his impatient
spirit, brought on a bilious complaint, to which he applied
rash and violent remedies, and thus reduced himself to a
state from which the care of Rossetti, the Venetian consul,
and the skill of the best physicians of Cairo, sought in vain
to deliver him.

The society had, at the time they engaged Ledyard, en-
tered into terms with Mr. Lucas, a gentleman who, being ©
captured in his youth by a Sallee rover, had been three
years a slavé at the court of Morocco, and after his deliver-
ance had been employed as vice-consul in that empire.
Having spent sixteen years there, he had acquired an inti-
mate knowledge of Africa and its languages. He was sent,
by way of Tripoli, with instructions to accompany the ca-
ravan, which is understood to take the most direct route into
the interior of the continent. Being provided with letters
from the Tripolitan ambassador, he obtained the bey’s per-
mission, and even promises of assistance, for this expedi-
tion. At the same time he made an arrangement with two
Shereefs, or descendants of the prophet, under which cha-
racter their persons are sacred, to join a caravan of which
they intended to make a part. He proceeded with them to
Mesurata; but the Arabs in the neighbourhood, being in a
state of rebellion, refused to furnish camels and guides,
which, indeed, could scarcely be expected, as the bey had

)

- ad
80 HOUGHTON.

declined to grant them a safe-conduct through his territo-
ries. Mr. Lucas was therefore obliged to return to Tripoli,
without being able to penetrate farther into the continent.
He learned, however, from Imhammed, one of the Shereefs,
who had been an extensive traveller, a variety of particu-
lars respecting the interior regions. The society had at
the same time made very particular inquiries of Ben Ali, a |
Morocco caravan trader, who happened to be in London.
From these two sources Mr. Beaufoy was enabled to draw
up a view of Central Africa; very imperfect indeed, yet su-
perior to any that had ever before appeared.

According to the statements thus obtained, Bornou and
Kashna were the most powerful states in that part of the
continent, and formed even empires holding sway over a
number of tributary kingdoms ;—a statement at that time
correct, though affairs have since greatly changed. The
Kashna caravan often crossed the Niger, and went onwards
to great kingdoms beyond the Gold Coast, Gongah or
Kong, Asiente or Ashantee, Yarba or Yarriba, through
which last Clapperton recently travelled. Several exten-
sive routes across the Desert were also delineated. In re-
gard to the Niger, the report of Imhammed revived the
error which represented that river as flowing westward to-
wards the Atlantic. The reason on which this opinion
-was founded will appear when we observe, that it was in
Kashna that Ben Ali considered himself as having crossed
that river. His Niger, then, was the Quarrama or river of
Zirmie, which flows westward through Kashna and Sac-
katoo, and is only a tributary to the Quorra or great river,
which we call the Niger. He describes the stream as very
broad and rapid, probably from having seen it during the
rainy season, when all the tropical rivers that are of any
magnitude assume an imposing appearance.

Mr. Lucas made no farther effort to penetrate into Africa.
The next expedition was made by a new agent, and from
a different quarter. Major Houghton, who had resided for
some time as consul at Morocco, and afterward in a mili-
tary capacity at Goree, undertook the attempt to reach the
Niger by the route of the Gambia, not, like Jobson and
_ Stibbs, ascending its stream in boats, but travelling singly

and by Jand. He seems to have been endowed with a gay,
active, and sanguine spirit, fitted to carry him through the

HOUGHTON. 81

boldest undertakings, but without that cool and calculating
temper which is necessary for him who endeavours to make
his way amid scenes of peril and treachery. Hebegan his
journey early in 1791, and soon reached Medina, the ca-
pital of Woolli, where the venerable chief received him
with extreme kindness, promised to furnish guides, and as-
sured him that he might go to Timbuctoo with his staff in
his hand. The only evil that befell him at Medina arose
from a fire which broke out there, and spreading rapidly
through buildings roofed with cane and matted grass, con-
verted in an hour a town of a thousand houses into a heap
of ashes. Major Houghton ran out with the rest of the
people into the fields, saving only such few articles as could
be carried with him. He writes, that by trading at Fatta-_
tenda a man may make S00 per cent., and may live in plenty
on ten pounds a-year. Quitting the Gambia, he took the
road through Bambouk, and arrived at Ferbanna on the
Faleme. Here he was received with the most extraordi-
nary kindness by the king, who gave him a guide and
money to defray his expenses. A note was afterward re-
ceived from him, dated Simbing, and which contained
merely these words,— Major Houghton’s compliments to
Dr. Laidley ; is in good health on his way to Timbuctoo ;
robbed of all his goods by Fenda Bucar’s son.”” ‘This was
the last, communication from him; for soon afterward the
negroes brought down to Pisania the melancholy tidings of
his death, of which Mr. Park subsequently learned the par-
ticulars. Some Moors had persuaded the Major to accom-
pany them to Tisheet, a place in the Great Desert, fre-

“quented on account of its salt-mines. In alluring him

thither, their object, as appears from the result, was to rob
him; efor it was very much out of the direct route to Tim-
buctoo. Of this in a few days he became sensible, and in-
sisted upon returning; but they would not permit him to
leave their party until after they had stripped him of every
article in his possession. He wandered about for some
time through the Desert without food or shelter, till, at
length, quite exhausted, he sat down under a tree and ex-
pired. Mr. Park was shown the very spot where his ree
mains were abandoned to the fowls of the air.

PARK'S ROUTES.

62

ee

“*eoqraymoog™=<

a e

EE —

en, coe
%. elLoogy PL
: EN ao SI” “eee. . r a e SHIOTVA
Se = : ( =
3 z S SaIJO1VE =
rs sinoy is ‘If A= |

6
3S
Lt 5)
i>]
S
2

——_ -

a

PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY. 83

CHAPTER VIII.
Park’s First Journey.

As soon as the Association were informed of the fate of
Major Houghton, they accepted the offered services of Mr.
Mungo Park, a native of Scotland, regularly bred to the
medical profession, and just returned from a voyage to
India. The committee were satisfied that Mr. Park pos-
sessed the requisite qualifications, though they could not
yet be aware of the full extent of his courage and perse-
verance, nor of the unrivalled eminence to which, as a tra
veller, he was destined to rise under their auspices.

He set sail from Portsmouth on the 22d May, 1795, and
on the 21st June arrived at Jillifree on the Gambia. He
then proceeded to Pisania, in the fertile kingdom of Yani,
where he was detained five months by illness under the hos-
pitable roof of Dr. Laidley. While suffering from the fever
of the climate, he acquired the Mandingo language, and ob-
tained considerable information from the negro traders re-
specting the interior countries. The Gambia at this station
was deep and muddy, overshadowed with impenetrable
thickets of mangrove, and the stream filled with crocodiles
and river-horses. :

On the 2d of December, Mr. Park took his departure,
attended only by a few negro servants. On the 5th, he ar-
rived at Medina, where the good old king received him with
the same hospitality he had so liberally shown to Major —
Houghton; but earnestly exhorted him to take warning
from the fate of that too adventurous traveller, and go no
farther. Mr. Park was not to be thus discouraged ; but im-
mediately proceeded to enter the great forest or wilderness
which separates this country from Bondou. He conformed
to the example of his companions in hanging a charm or
shred of cloth upon a tree at its entrance, which was com-
pletely covered with those guardian symbols. In two days
he had passed the wood, and found Bondou a fine cham-
paign country, watered by the 'aleme. Hehad soon, how-
ever, to encounter the perils which cannot but await every

¥

a =" e

| | &
\ a ‘

»

84 PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY.

single and defenceless traveller who, loaded with valuable
goods, passes througli a succession of petty kmgdoms where
law is unknown. At Fatteconda, which he reached on the
21st December, he was obliged to wait upon Almami the
king, who had already disgraced himself by the plunder of
Major Houghton. Being desirous to preserve a good new blue
coat, Mr. Park deemed it the wisest plan to wear it on his per-
son, fondly hoping that it would not be actually stripped off
his back. However, after the introductory ceremonial, the
king began a warm panegyric on the wealth and generosity of
the whites, whence he proceeded to the praises of the coat
and its yellow buttons, concluding with expressing the de-
light with which he should wear it for the sake of his guest.
He did not add, that if these hints were disregarded, it would
be seized by foree ; but our traveller, being thoroughly con-
vinced that such was his intention, pulled off the coat, of
which he humbly requested his majesty’s acceptance. The
king then abstained from farther spoil, and introduced him
as a curiosity to his female circle. The ladies, after a care-
ful survey, approved of his external appearance, with the
exception of the two deformities of a white skin and a high
nose; but for these they made ample allowance, being
blemishes produced by the false taste of his mother, who
had bathed him in milk when young, and, by pinching his
nose, elevated it into its present absurd height. Park flat-
tered them on their jet-black skins and beautifully flattened
noses ; but was modestly warned that honey-mouth was not
esteemed in Bondou.

Another forest intervened between that kingdom and Ka-

jaaga, which he crossed by moonlight, when the deep

silence of the woods was interrupted only by the howling of
wolves and hyenas, which glided like shadows through
the thickets. Scarcely was he arrived at Joag, in Kajaaga,
when a party from Bacheri the king surrounded him, and
declared his property forfeited, in consequence of having
entered the country without payment of the duties. Thus
he was stripped of all his goods except a small portion
which he contrived to hide. Unable to procure a meal, he
was sitting disconsolate under a bentang tree, when an aged
female slave came up and asked if he had dined. Being
told thet he had not, and had been robbed of every thing,
she presented several handfuls of nuts, and went off before

~

PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY. 85

he could retuen thanks. Demba Sego, nephew to the king
of Kasson, and who happened to be then at Joag endea-
vouring to negotiate a peace between his uncle and Bacheri,
who were at variance, now undertook to guide him into that
country, and did so; but exacted so many duties and pre-
sents, that Mr. Park was stripped of half his remaining
stock. Kasson was found a level, fertile, and beautiful
country. At Kooniakary, the capital, our traveller was
well received by the king; and forwarded to Kemmoo, the
principal town of Kaarta. Daisy, the sovereign of this
last, likewise received him with the utmost kindness; but
on learning his intention of taking the route to Timbuctoo
through Bambarra, he stated this to be impossible, as he
himself was then at war with the latter kingdom, and as-
sured him that he would at once be killed if he attempted
to enter it from Kaarta. ‘There remained, therefore, no
alternative but to go by way of the Moorish kingdom of
Ludamar, a perilous and fatal route, in which Major
Houghton had already perished. Mr. Park, however, hoped,
by proceeding along the southern frontier, to reach Bam-
barra without coming: much into contact with the barbarous
and bigoted Moors by whom it was peopled.

On his arrival at Jarra, a large town chiefly inhabited by
negroes, but entirely under the power of the Moors, he

sent to Benowm, the capital, a messenger loaded with pre-

sents to negotiate with Ali, their chief, for a passage through
his territories. After waiting a fortnight in great anxiety,
he received a safe-conduct to Goombo, a place on the fron-
tier of Bambarra. He first proceeded to Deena, a town in
the possession of the Moors, who insulted and plundered
him in the grossest manner, so that he was happy to escape
by setting out at two in the morning of 3d March. He
passed next through Sampaka and Dalli, where he was re-
ceived by the negro inhabitants with the usual kindness and
hospitality of that race; he was even induced to stop a day
at Dalli under promise of an escort; but this was a fatal
pause. At Sami, on the 7th March, a party of Moorish
horsemen appeared, for the purpose of telling him that Fa-
tima, the favourite wife of Ali, had been struck with curi«
osity to see what kind of creature a Christian was; that he
must therefore come and ey himself; but was assured

-

86 PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY.

that he would be well treated, and on satisfying her ma:
jesty’s wish, would even be forwarded on his journey.
Benowm, the Moorish capital, to which Park was then
conveyed, proved to be a mere camp composed of a number
of dirty tents, intermingled with herds of ‘camels, horses,
and oxen. He was surrounded by crowds actuated partly

.by curiosity and partly by that malignant feeling which al-

ways inflames the Moors against Christians. ‘They snatched
off his hat, made him unbutton his clothes to show the
whiteness of his skin, and counted his fingers and toes to
see if he were really of the same nature with themselves.
After being kept for some time in the sun, he was lodged
in a hut made of cornstalks, supported by posts, to one of
which was tied a wild hog, evidently in derision, and to in-
timate that they were fit associates for each other. The
hog, indeed, would have been the most harmless part of the
affair, had not idle boys taken delight in tormenting and
working up the animal to aconstant state of fury. Crowds
of men and women incessantly poured in to see the white
man, and he was obliged to continue the whole day but-
toning and unbuttoning his clothes, to show his skin, and
the Evropean manner of dressing and undressing. When
curiosity was satistied, the next amusement was to plague
the Christian, and he became the sport of Bt meanest and
most vulgar members of this rude community. The Moorish
horsemen took him out and galloped round him, baiting him
as if he had been a wild beast, twirling their swords in his
face to show their skill in horsemanship. Repeated at-
tempts were made to compel him to work. One of Ali’s
sons desired him to mend the lock of a double-barrelled
gun, and could scarcely be persuaded that all Europeans
did not ply the trade of a smith. He was also installed as
barber, and directed to shave the head of a young prince;
but not relishing this function, he contrived to give his
highness such a cut that Alitook the alarm and discharged
him as incapable. ‘That chief, under pretence of securing
him against depredation, seized for himself all that re-
mained of the traveller’s property. Having examined the
instruments, he was greatly astonished at the compass, and
Gece ar at its always pointing towards the Great Desert.

‘ark, thinking it vain to attempt any scientific exposition,

Ph)

.

PARK § FIRST JOURNEY. 87

said that its direction was always to the place where his
mother dwelt; whereupon Ali, struck with superstitious
dread, desired it to be taken away.

Amid these insults, Park’s sufferings were the more se-
vere from the very scanty measure of food with which he
was supplied. At midnight only he received a small mess
of kouskous, not nearly enough to satisfy nature. Hehad
been invited, indeed, to kill and dress his companion the
hog; but this he considered as a snare laid for him, believ-
ing that the Mohammedans, had they seen him feasting on
this impure and hated flesh, would have killed him on the
spot. As the dry season advanced, water became scarce
and precious, and only a very limited quantity was allowed
to reach the infidel, who thus endured the pangs of the most
tormenting thirst. On one occasion, a Moor who was
drawing water for his cows, yielded to his earnest entreaty
that he might put the bucket to his mouth; then, struck
with sudden alarm at such a profanation of the vessel, seized
it, and poured the liquid into the trough, desiring him to
share with the cattle. Park overcame the risings of pride,
plunged his head into the water, and enjoyed a delicious
draught.

During this dreadful period he contrived, nevertheless,
to obtain some information. FEiven the rudest of his tor-
mentors took pleasure in teaching him the Arabic charac-
ters, by tracing them upon the sand. Two Mohammedan
travellers came to Benowm, from whom he obtained routes
to Morocco, Walet, and Timbuctoo ; but they gave the most
discouraging report as to the prospects of reaching the
latter city. He was told it would not do; the Moors were
there entirely masters, and viewed all Christians as chil-
dren of the Devil and enemies of the prophet.

Fatima, the wife of Ali, whose curiosity to see a Chris-
tian he had been brought hither to gratify, was absent all.
this time and not like to arrive, while the rancour of the
Moors, by whom Park was surrounded, became always
more imbittered. A party even proposed that he should be
condemned to death, though Ali’s sons only recommended
to put out his eyes, alleging that they resembled those of a
cat. Hereupon he began seriously to consider the possibi-
lity of escape ; but besides his being closely watched, the
Desert was now so entirely destitute of water, that he must

§8 PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY.

have perished on the road with thirst. He was therefore —
obliged to await the rainy season, however unfavourable for
travelling through the negro territories. |
Ali, on the 30th April, having occasion to move his quar-
ters, came to Bubaker, the residence of Fatima, and Park
was introduced to that favourite princess. The beauty of
a Moorish female is measured entirely by her circumference ;
and to bestow this grace on their daughters, the mothers
stuff them with enormous quantities of milk and kouskous,
the swallowing of which is enforced even with blows, till
they attain that acmz of beauty which renders them a load
for a camel.. The dimensions by which Fatima had capti-
vated her royal lover were very enormous; she added to
them Arab features and long black hair. This queen at
first shrunk back with horror at seeing before her that mon-
ster, a Christian ; but after putting various questions, be-
gan to see in him nothing so wholly different from the rest
of mankind. She presented to him a bowl of milk, and
continued to show him the only kindness he met with during
this dreadful captivity. At length her powerful intercession
induced Ali to take Park with him to Jarra, where our tra-
veller hoped to find the means of proceeding on his journey.
At Jarra a striking scene occurred. Ali, through ava-
rice, had involved himself in the quarrel between the mo-
narchs of Kaarta and Bambarra, and news arrived that
Daisy was in full march to attack the town. The troops,
who ought to have defended the place, fled at the first on-
set, and nothing remained for the inhabitants but to aban-
don it and escape from slaughter or slavery, the dreadful
alternatives of African conquest. The scene was affecting.
‘The local attachments of the African are strong; and the
view of this disconsolate crowd quitting perhaps for ever
their native spot, the scene of their early life, and where
they had fixed all their hopes and desires, resented a strik-
ing picture of human calamity. Park would now very
gladly have presented himself before his friend Daisy; but
being afraid that in the confusion he would be mistaken for
a Moor, and killed as such, he thought it a safer course to
join the retreat. He found more difficulty in escaping than
he had expected, being seized by three Mohammedans, who
threatened to carry him back to Ali, but finally contented
themselves with robbing him of his cloak, In flying from

“

PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY. 89 |

savage man, he soon found himself involved in a danger
still more alarming. He was in the midst of an immense
desert, in which was neither food nor a drop of water.
Having ascended the loftiest tree within his reach, he could
see no boundary to the scene of desolation. The pangs of
thirst became intolerable, a dimness spread over his eyes,
and he felt as if this life, with all its mingled joys and mi-
series, was about to close,—as if all the hopes of glory by
which he had been impelled to this adventurous career had
vanished, and he was to perish at the moment when a few
days more would have brought him to the Niger. Sud-
denly he saw a flash of lightning, and eagerly hailed it as a
portent of rain; the wind then began to blow among the
bushes, but it was a sand-wind which continued for an hour
to fill the air. At last there burst forth a brighter flash,
followed by a refreshing shower, which being received upon
his clothes, and the moisture wrung ort, gave him new life.
He travelled onwards, passing, but carefully shunning, a
village of the Moors, when thirst, imperfectly satisfied, be-
gan again to torment him. Then he heard a heavenly
sound—the croaking of frogs; and soon reached the muddy
pools which they inhabited, when the thirst both of himself
and his horse was thoroughly quenched. He came to a
Foulah village, called Sherillah, where the dooty, or chief
magistrate, shut the door in his face, and refused him a
handful of corn; however, in passing the suburbs, a poor
woman, who was spinning cotton in front of her hut, in-
vited him to enter, and set before him a dish of kouskous.
Next day he was hospitably received by a negro shepherd,
who regaled him with dates and boiled corn; but happen-
ing to pronounce the word Nazarani (Christian), the wife
and children screamed and ran out of the house, to which
nothing could induce them to return.

At Wawra, Park considered himself beyond the reach of.
the Moors; and, being kindly received, determined to rest
two or three days. When he was known to he on his way
to Sego, the capital, several women came and besought him
to ask the king about their sons, who had been taken away
to the army. Qne had neither seen nor heard of hers for
several years; she declared he was no heathen, but said
his prayers daily, and that he was often the subject of her
dreams. J,eaving this plage he came to Dingyee,, where

2

90 PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY:

he seemed invested with a sacred character,—a man ear-
nestly entreating a lock of his hair to be used as a saphie
or charm ; and receiving permission to cut it off, he con-
trived to crop completely one side of the head. Proceeding
towards Sego, he joined on the road several small negro
parties ; but, as the country became more populous, hospi-
tality waslesscommon. In Moorja, however, though mostly
a by Mohammedans, he found gayety and abundance.

e next passed through several towns and villages, which,
in the late war, had been systematically destroyed; the
large bentang tree under which the inhabitants used to
meet had been cut down, the wells were filled up, and every
thing done which could render the neighbourhood uninha-
bitable. He passed also a coffle, or caravan, of about se-
venty slaves tied together by the neck with thongs of-bul-
locks’ hide, seven slaves upon each thong. His horse was
now so completely worn out, that, instead of attempting to
ride, he was content to drive it before him. Being also
barefooted, and in the most miserable plight, he afforded a
subject of merriment to the natives, who asked if he had
been travelling to Mecca, and made ironical proposals for
the purchase of his horse; even the slaves were ashamed
to be seen in his company.

At length, the near approach to Sego was indicated by
crowds hastening to its market ; and Mr. Park wastold that
on the following day, the 21st July, that primary object of
his search, the Joliba or Great Water, would appear before
him. “He passed.a sleepless night, but, starting before day-
break, he had the satisfaction, at eight o’clock, to see the
smoke rising over Sego. He overtook some former fellow-
travellers, and, in riding through a piece of marshy ground,
one of them called out, geo affill: (see the water), and look-
ing forwards, “I saw,” says he, “ with infinite pleasure,
the great object of my mission, the long-sought-for majestic
Niger, glittering to the morning sun, as broad as the
Thames at Westminster, and flowing slowly to the eastward.
I hastened to the brink, and having drunk of the water,
lifted up my fervent thanks in prayer to the Great Ruler of
all things, for having thus far crowned my endeavours with
success.” |

Mr. Park now saw before him Sego, the capital of the

kingdom of Bambarra. It consisted of four separate towns,

PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY. 9]

two on each side of the river, surrounded with high mud- —

‘walls,—the houses, though only of clay, neatly white-
washed,—the streets commodious, with mosques rising in
every quarter. The place was estimated to contain about
thirty thousand inhabitants. ‘The numerous canoes on the
river, the crowded population, and the cultivated state of
the surrounding country, presented altogether an appear-
ance of civilization and magnificence little expected in the
bosom of Africa. The traveller sought a passage to Sego-
-see-Korro, the quarter where the king resided ; but, owing
to the crowd of passengers, he was detained two hours ;
during which time his majesty was apprized that a white
man, poorly equipped, was about to pass the river to seek
an audience. A chief was immediately sent, with an ex-
press order that the traveller shouid not cross without his ma-
jesty’s permission, and pointed to a village at some distance,
where it was recommended that the stranger should pass
the night. Park, not a little disconcerted, repaired to the
village ; but as the order had not been accompanied with
any provision for his reception, hg found every door shut.
Turning his horse loose to graze, he was preparing, as a se-
curity from wild beasts, to climb a tree and sleep among the
branches, when a beautiful and affecting incident occurred,
which gives a most pleasing view of the negro character.
An old woman, returning from the labours of the field, cast
on him a look of compassion, and desired him to follow her.
She led him to an apartment in-her hut, procured a fine fish,
which she broiled for his supper, and spread a mat for him
to sleep upon. She then desired her maidens, who had
been gazing in fixed astonishment at the white man, to re-
sume their tasks, which they continued to ply through a
great part of the night. They cheered their labours with
a song which must have been composed extempore, since
Mr. Park, with deep emotion, discovered that he himself
was the subject of it. It said,in a strain of affecting sim-
plicity,—‘‘ The winds roared, and the rains fell. The poor
white man, faint and weary, came and sat under our tree.
He has no mother to bring him milk, no wife to grind his
corn.—Chorus—Let us pity the white man, no mother has
he,” &c. Our traveller was much affected, and next morn-
ing could not depart without requesting his landlady’s ac-
ceptance of the only gift he had left, two out of the four
brass buttons that still remained on his waistcoat.

92 PARK'S FIRST JOURNEY.

He remained two days in this village, during which he
understood that he was the subject of much deliberation
at court, the Moors and slave-merchants giving the most

unfavourable reports of his character and purposes. A

messenger came and asked if he had any present, and
seemed much disappointed on being told that the Moors had
robbed him of every thing. On the second day appeared
another envoy, bearing an injunction from Mansong that |
the stranger should not enter Sego, but proceed forthwith
on his journey; to defray the expenses of which, a bag,
containing 5000 cowries, was delivered to him. Mr. Park
estimates this sum at only twenty shillings; but according
to the rate of provisions, it was worth touch more, being
sufficient to maintain, for fifty days, himself and his horse.

Two days brought our traveller to Sansanding, a large
town with 10,000 inhabitants. He hoped to enter unno-
ticed, finding himself mistaken by the negroes for a Moor.
Being taken, however, before Counti Mamadi, the dooty, or
chief magistrate, he found a number of Mohammedans,
who denied the supposed national connexion, and regarded
him with their usual hatred and suspicion. Several even
pretended they had seen him before, and one woman
swore that she had kept his house three years at Gallam.
The dooty put a negative on their proposition of dragging
him by force to the mosque; but they climbed over in great
numbers into the court where he had taken up his quarters
for the night, insisting that he should perform his evening
devotions, and eat eggs. The first proposal was positively de-
clined ;_ but the second he professed his utmost readiness to
eomply with. ‘The eggs were accordingly brought, but raw,
as the natives imagined it a part of European depravity to
be fond of them in that state. His reluctance to eat raw
egos exalted him in the eyes of his sage visitants ; his host
accordingly killed a sheep, and gave him a plentiful supper.

His route now lay through woods, grievously infested
with all kinds of wild animals. His guide suddenly wheeled
his horse round, calling out “ Wara billi bills /—a very large
lion!” Mr. Park’s steed was ill fitted to convey him from
the scene of danger; but, seeing nothing, he supposed his
guide mistaken, when the latter exclaimed, “‘ God preserve
me !” and the travelier then saw a very large red lion, with
the head couched between the fore-paws. His eyes were
fixed as by fascination on this sovereisén of the beasts, and he

PARK’s FIRST JOURNEY. 93

expected every moment the fatal spring; but the savage
animal, either not pressed by hunger or struck with some
mysterious awe, remained immoveable, and allowed the
party to pass unmolested. Real misery arose from a meaner
cause, namely, the amazing swarms of mosquitoes which
ascend from the swamps and creeks, and to whose attack,
from the ragged state of his garments, he was exposed at
every point. He was covered all over with blisters, and at
night could get no rest. An affecting crisis next arrived.
His horse, the faithful and suffering companion of his jour-

ney, had been daily becoming weaker. At length, stumbling

over some rough ground, he fell: all his master’s efforts
were insufficient to raise him, and no alternative remained
but to leave the poor animal; which, after collecting some
grass and laying it before him, Mr. Park did, not without a
sad presentiment that, ere long, he himself might in like
manner lie down and perish with hunger and fatigue.

He now resolved to hirea boat, in which he was conveyed
up the riyerto Silla, another large town, where his reception
was so inhospitable that the dooty reluctantly permitted
him to take shelter from the rain in a damp shed. Half-
naked, worn down by fatigue and sickness, and foreseeing
the approach of the rains by which the whole country
would be inundated, Mr. Park began seriously to contem-
plate his situation. All the obstacles now stated were
small, when compared to the fact, that, im proceeding east-
ward, he would still be within the range of Moorish. influ-
ence. He learned, that at Jenne, though included in Bam-
barra, the municipal power was chiefly in the hands of
these savage and merciless fanatics, who, at Timbuctoo
also, held the entire sway. On these grounds he felt con-
vinced that certain destruction awaited him in his progress
eastward ; that all his discoveries would perish with himself ;
and that his life would be sacrificed in vain. His only hope,
and it was but faint, of ever reaching England, depended
upon his return westward, and on his proceeding by the
most direct route to the coast. On this course he deter-
mined,—a decision which was fully approved both by his

employers and by the public.
During his stay at Silla, he used every effort to obtain
information respecting the more eastern countries, particu-
larly the kingdom of Timbuctoo, and the course of the

94 PARK S FIRST JOURNEY.

Niger. He was told that the next great city along that river
was Jenne, which was represented as very flourishing, and
larger than Sego or any other place in Bambarra. Lower
down, the river spread into an expanse, called Dibbie or the
Dark Lake, so extensive that, in crossing it, the canoes fora
whole day lost sight of land. On the eastern side the Niger
issued out of this lake in two large branches, enclosing the

alluvial country of Jinbala, when they again united in one

channel, which flowed on to Kabra, the port of 'Timbuctoo.
That town, situated a day’s journey north from the Niger,

was described to Mr. Park as the great centre of the com-

merce carried on between the Moors and negroes, by means
of which the former people had filled it with Mohammedan
converts ; it was added, that the king and his principal offi-
cers belonged to this faith, which was professed there with
even more than the usual bigotry. An old negro related,
(hat, on his entering a public inn, the landlord laid on the
floor a mat and a rope, saying, “If you are a Mussulman,
you are my friend, sit down on this mat; if not, you are
my slave, and with this rope I will lead you to market.”
The king, named Abu Abrahima, was clothed in silk, lived
in great pomp, and possessed immense riches. There has
since appeared reason to suspect that, in these reports, both .
the bigotry and the splendour of Timbuctoo were some-
what exaggerated. Beyond this city, eastward, there was
said to be a great kingdom called Houssa, with a capital
of the same name, situated on the Niger. This also was
somewhat inaccurate. ‘There is no city called Houssa;
and the term is applied, not to a kingdom, but to an ex-
tensive region comprehending many principalities, and
through which the Niger does not pass. |
Having formed his resolution, he forthwith began his re-
turn to the westward, and at Modiboo met with an unex-
pected and rather pleasing occurrence. While he was con-
versing with the dooty, a horse was heard to neigh; upon
which the magistrate asked, smiling, if he knew who was
speaking to him—and presently going out, led in the travel-
ler’s own horse, greatly recruited by rest.~ Mr. Park at first
drove the animal before him, but afterward mounted, and
found him of great benefit in passing the swamps and swollen
rivulets which obstructed his route. He soon learned that
dangers, even greater. than he was aware of, had beset his

PARK'S FIRST JOURNEY. 95

path. The king of Bambarra had been at last so worked
upon by Moorish counsellors, that, repenting even his for-
mer stinted kindness, he had sent messengers to apprehend
Park, and to bring him a prisoner to Sego; from which fate

he escaped only by the retrograde direction he had taken. |

Thenceforth every door was resolutely shut against him ;
at Sansanding his best friend Counti Mamadi privately paid
him a visit, and advised him to leave the city early next
morning, and to make no delay-in the vicinity of the capital.

Accordingly, at a village near that city, he obtained a con-

firmation of the above tidings, and was exhorted to lose no
time if he wished to get safe out of Bambarra. He then
quitted the road, and struck off through fields and swamps.
He once intended to swim across the Niger, and push to-
wards the Gold Coast, but afterward resolved to pursue his

course westward along the river, and thus ascertain its pre-

cise line. He had now nothing to subsist on except what

charity bestowed, which was only an occasional handful

of raw corn. ‘There was also the greatest difficulty in find-
ing a way through the swampy and inundated grousds.

Once his horse and he sunk together to the neck in mud,
and came out so completely besmeared, that they were com-

pared by the natives to two dirty elephants. At another

time, when he had stripped, and was leading his horse

through a river that took him up to the neck, a friendly

African called out, that he would perish if he went on, and

undertook to procure a canoe; but when he came out, and
his white skin was distinctly seen, the stranger put his
hand to his mouth, exclaiming, in a low tone of amazement,
“(Jod preserve me! what is this?’ He continued his
kindness, however, and at Taffaro, where our traveller was
shut out fromevery house, and obliged to sleep under a tree,
brought him some supper. One of his most disagreeable
encounters was at Souha, where the dooty, after a surly
refusal of every refreshment, called upon a slave, whom he

ordered to dig a pit, uttering, at the same time, expressions:

of anger and vexation. The hole became always deeper
and deeper, till it assumed the appearance of a grave; and
Park, who saw no one but himself likely to be put into it,
began to think it was high time to be moving off. At
length the slave went away, and returned, holding by the
leg and arm the naked corpse of a boy about nine years old,

x

0 ae a ee ae

a ; vr ® . Oe oe wi. | ee

96 PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY.

which he threw in with an air of savage unconcern, the
docty exclaiming, “naphula attiniata ! money lost, money
lost!” Mr. Park withdrew in the deepest disgust at this
display of brutal and selfish avarice. ‘The only hearty meal
he obtained for many days was from a Moslem converty
who, presenting a board, entreated him to write a saphie
upon it, the return for which would be a good supper of
rice and salt. This was too important an offer to be re-
jected from nice scruples. He therefore covered the board
with the Lord’s Prayer, which his host carefully washed
off and drank, afterward licking the wood with his tongue.
For this, in addition to his good rice supper, he received
next morning a breakfast of meal and milk. -

Our traveller now arrived at Bammakoo, where the level
country on this side of the Niger terminates; but, on wish-
ing to cross to the other bank, he was informed that the
river would not be fordable for several months, and that no
canoe could be procured large enough to transport himself
and his horse. At length there was pointed out a path,
rocky and difficult, but through which he might contrive to
pick a way under the direction of a Jilli-kea, or singing
man, who was going to Sibidooloo. The track, however,
proved excessively rough and perilous; when his tuneful
conductor, finding himself mistaken in the way, sprang up
among the cliffs, and quickly disappeared. Mr. Park was
obliged to return and search among a number of glens, till
he found a track marked by the tread of horses, which led
him to Kooma, a beautiful sequestered village in the heart
of those barren mountains, where, on the produce of a small
fertile valley, the inhabitants lived in peaceful abundance.
They showed that kind hospitality which had been be-
stowed only seantily and occasionally in the still more
Truitful rections below. Mr. Park set out next day for Si-
bidooloo; but on this route his last and greatest disaster
awaited him. In passing a rivulet he found a shepherd,
who had been wounded by a party of banditti, and soon.
after saw a man sitting on the stump of a tree, while from
among the grass appeared the heads of six or seven others,
with muskets in their hands. Seeing it impossible to
escape, he resolved to put the best face he could on his situa-
tion. Pretending to take them for elephant-hunters, he
went up and asked if their chase had been successful,

PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY. 97

Instead of answering, one of them ordered him to dismount ;
but then, as if recollecting himself, waved with his hand
to proceed. The traveller had not gone far when he heard
voices behind, and, looking round, saw them all in full pur-
suit, calling to hin that they were sent to carry himself and
his horse before the king of the Foulahs at Fooladoo. He
did not attempt a vain resistance, but accompanied them till
they came to a dark spot in the depth of the wood, when
one of them said, ‘ This place will do.” The same man
snatched off Mr. Park’s hat; another instantly detached
the last remaining button from his waistcoat; the rest
searched his pockets, and investigated, with the most scru-
pulous accuracy, every pertion of his apparel; at last they
determined to make sure work by stripping him to the
skin. As he pointed to his pocket-compass with earnest
entreaty, one of them cocked a pistol, threatening, if he
should touch it, to shoot him through the head. As they
were carrying off every thing, they were seized with a feel«
ing of remorse, and threw to him his worst shirt, a pair of
trowsers, and his hat, in the crown of which he kept his
memorandums. ;

After this blow Mr. Park felt a deeper depression than
he had experienced under any former disaster. Naked and
alone, in a vast wilderness, 500 miles from any settlement,
surrounded by savage beasts and by men still more savage,
he saw no prospect before him but to lie down and perish.
From this depth of despondency his mind was suddenly re-
vived by a mingled impression of nature and of religion.. A
small moss, in a state of fructification, struck his eye, the
delicate conformation of whose roots, leaves, and capsule,
could not be contemplated without admiration. He then
bethought himself,—‘“Can that Being who planted, wa-
tered, and brought to perfection, in this obscure corner of
the world, a thing which appears of so small importance,
look with unconcern upon the situation and sufferings of
creatures formed after his own image?” Inspired by these
just and pious reflections, he started up and.went on, de-.
spite of fatigue ; and he soon found deliverance to be nearer
than he had any reason to anticipate.

_ Having arrived at Sibidooloo, he waited on the mansa,
or chief ruler of the town, and related his misfortune; wher
the latter, taking his pipe ss his mouth, and tossing up

—*

98 PARK S FIRST JOURNEY.

his sleeve, said, with an indignant air, “ Sit down, you shall
have every thing restored to you; I have sworn it.” He
then ordered several of his people to go by daybreak next
morning over the hills, and obtain the assistance of the
dooty of Bammakoo in pursuing the robbers. Thus re-
lieved, Mr. Park remained two days in this hospitable vil-
lage, but found it pressed by so severe a famine that he
could not think of tasking their kindness any longer, and
went on to a town called Wonda. Here the mansa, who
was at once chief magistrate and schoolmaster, received
him with kindness; but the famine was felt there with
equal severity. Remarking five or six women who eame
daily to receive an allowance of corn from the dooty, he
took leave to ask an explanation. ‘Look at that boy,”
said the magistrate ; ‘‘ his mother has sold him to me for
fifty days’ subsistence for herself and family.” Our tra-
veller, having during his stay become very unwell, heard
the hospitable landlord and his wife lamenting to them-
selves the necessity of supporting him till he should either
recover or die. ,
At the end of nine days messengers arrived from Sibi-
dooloo with Mr. Park’s horse, harness, clothes, and even
the pocket compass, though broken ; all of which had been

recovered by the exertions of the mansa. The horse, being

reduced to a skeleton, and quite unfit for a journey over the
flinty roads, was presented to his landlord; the saddle and
bridle were sent to his generous friend at Sibidooloo.
Then, sick as he was, our traveller took leave, and went
through several towns in the mountain territory of Mand-
ing, where he was, on the whole, hospitably treated. His
arrival at Kamalia formed a most important era. There he
met Karfa Taura, a negro, who was collecting a coffle of
slaves for the Gambia. Karfa told him it was impossible
at this season to traverse the Jallonka wilderness, in which
there were eight rapid rivers to be crossed ; but he offered
to support him in the interval, and conduct him at the pro-
per season to the Gambia, asking unly a reasonable com-

nsation, which was fixed at the value of a prime slave.
Mr. Park was thus seasonably delivered from all his trou-
bles, and obtained a more certain prospect of reaching home
in safety.

He no longer encountered those difficulties and vieissi-

PARK’S FIRST JOURNEY. 99

tudes which had rendered the former part of his journey so
full of interest and adventure. In traversing the high coun-
tries of Manding, Konkodoo, and Dindikoo, the chief object
which attracted his attention was the mode of extracting
gold. This precious metal did not occur in the form of ore,
or in large masses, but its grains were mingled with a spe-
cies of dust or sand. This golden earth appears to be
chiefly washed down by torrents from the summit of the
neighbouring chain of mountains; but it is collected with
most advantage after the ground is dry and the harvest re- -
moved. Being indicated by its reddish tinge, it is put intc
large baskets, called calabashes, and agitated with a rotatory
motion, so that at every turn a portion of light sand mixed
with water flies over the brim. The weightier parts then
remaining are mixed with pure water, stirred, and carefully
examined ; and it is considered satisfactory if three or four
grains are found in the whole basket. The dust is pre-
served in quills, which are often stuck in the hair as orna-
ments.

The most formidable part of the journey homeward was
through the Jallonka wilderfiess, a vast and very dense
forest, in which the caravan travelled during five days with-
out seeing a human habitation. They marched in close and
regular order, to protect the party against the attack of wild
beasts, whose roarings were heard continually around them,
and to which every one who straggled was sure to fall a
victim. Such, too probably, was the lot of Nealee, a female
slave, who, either from obstinacy or from excessive fatigue,
refused to proceed any farther; and after vain attempts to
compel her by the whip, she was abandoned to her fate.
On emerging from this forest, they had no difficulty in pass-
ing through the fine open country of Dentila, and the
smaller wilderness of Tenda. Mr. Park was again on the
Gambia; and on the 10th June, 1797, reached Pisania,
where he was received as one risen from the dead; for all
the traders from the interior had believed and reported, that,
like Major Houghton, he was murdered by the Moors of Lu-
damar. Karfa, his benefactor, received double the stipu-
lated price, and was overpowered with gratitude; but when
he saw the commodious furniture, the skilful manufactures,
the superiority in all the arts of life, displayed by the Eu-
ropeans, when compared with the attainments of his coun-

a

100 PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY.

trymen, he was deeply mortified, and exclaimed, ‘“ Black
men are nothing !”” expressing his surprise that Park could
find any motive for coming to so miserable a land as Africa.

Mr. Park had some difficulty in reaching home. He was
obliged to embark, on the 15th June, in a vessel bound to
America, and was afterward driven by stress of weather
into the island of Antigua, whence he sailed on the 24th
November, and on the 22d December arrived at Falmouth.
He reached London before dawn on the morning of Christ-
mas-day, and, in the garden of the British Museum, acci- |
dentally met his brother-in-law, Mr. Dickson. ‘The interval
of two years having elapsed since any tidings of him reached
England, had caused him to be given up for lost, so that his
friends and the public were equally astonished and delighted
by his reappearance. ‘The report of his unexpected return,
after making such splendid discoveries, kindled throughout
the nation a higher enthusiasm than had perhaps been ex-
cited by the result of any former mission of the same nature.
To satisfy the public impatience, an outline was drawn up
by Mr. Bryan Edwards, accompanied with learned and able
geographical illustrations by Major Rennel. The entire
narrative was published early in 1799, and besides the in-
terest inseparable from the remarkable events which it de-
scribes, the merit of being written in a pleasing and animated
style has rendered it one of the most popular books in the
English language.

CHAPTER IX.
Park’s Second Journey. !

THE discoveries of Park, in his first journey, though the
most splendid made by any modern traveller, rather excited
than satisfied the national curiosity. 'The Niger had been
seen flowing eastward into the interior of Africa; and
hence a still deeper interest and mystery were suspended
over the future course and termination of this great central
stream. Kingdoms had been discovered, more flourishing and

*

' PARK S SECOND JOURNEY. 101

more populous than any formerly known in that continent ;
but other kingdoms, still greater and more wealthy, were
reported to exist in regions which he had vainly attempted
to reach. The lustre of his achievements had diffused
among the public in general an ardour for discovery, which
was formerly confined toa few enlightened individuals. It
was evident, however, that the efforts of no private asso-
ciation could penetrate the depths of this vast continent,
and overcome the obstacles presented by its distance, its de-

serts, and its barbarism. Thus it became necessary for

George III., the patron and employer of Cook, to come for-
ward as the promoter of discovery in this new sphere. In
October, 1801, accordingly, Mr. Park was invited by govern-
ment to undertake an expedition on a larger scale into the
interior of Africa. Having in the mean time married the
daughter of Mr. Anderson, with whom he had served his
apprenticeship as a surgeon, and having entered with some
success on the practice of his profession in the neighbouring
town of Peebles, it was supposed that, content with laurels
so dearly earned, he had renounced a life of peril and ad-
venture. But none of these ties could detain him, when
the invitation was given to renew and complete his splendid
career. His mind had: been brooding on the subject with
enthusiastic arduur. He had held much intercourse with
Mr. Maxwell, a gentleman who had long commanded a ves-
sel in the African trade, by whom he was persuaded that
the Zaire, or Congo, which, since its discovery by the Per-
tuguese, had been almest lost sight of by Europeans, would
prove to be the channel by which the Niger, after watering
all the regions of Interior Africa, enters the Atlantic. The
scientific world were very mueh disposed to adopt Park’s
views on this subject ; and accordingly the whole plan of the
expedition was adjusted with an avowed reference to them.
The agitation of the public mind, by the change of ministry
and the war with France, delayed farther proceedings till
1804, when he was desired by Lord Camden, the colenial
secretary, to form his arrangements, with an assurance of
being supplied with every means necessary for their accom-
plishment. ‘The course which he now suggested was, that
he should no longer travel as a single and unprotected wan-

derer; his experience decided him against such a mode of.

preceeding. [le proposed to take with him a small party,
I2

102 PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY.

who, being well armed and disciplined, might face almost
any force which the natives could oppose to them; with
these to proceed direct to Sego; to build there two boats 40
feet long, and from thence to sail downwards to the estuary

of the Congo. Instructions were sent out to Goree that he.
should be furnished liberally with men, and with every thing.

else of which he might stand in need.

Mr. Park sailed from Portsmouth in the Crescent trans-
‘port on the 30th January, 1805. About the 8th March he
arrived at the Cape Verd Islands; and on the 28th reached
Goree. There he provided himself with an officer and
thirty-five soldiers, and with a large stock of asses from the
islands, where the breed of these animals is excellent, and
which appeared well fitted for traversing the rugged hills of
the high country whence issue the sources of the Senegal
and Niger. He took with him also two sailors and four ar-
tificers, who had been sent from England. But before all
these measures could be completed a month had elapsed,
and it was then evident that the rainy season could not be
far distant,—a period in which travelling is very difficult,
and extremely trying to European constitutions. It is clear,
therefore, that it would have been prudent to remain at
Goree or Pisania till that season had passed; but, in Mr.
Park’s elevated and enthusiastic state of mind, it would
have been extremely painful to have lingered so long on the
eve of his grand and favourite undertaking. He hoped, and
it seemed possible, that before the middle of June, when
the rains usually begin, he might reach the Niger, which
could then be navigated without any very serious toil or ex-
posure. He departed, therefore, with his little band from
Pisania, on the 4th May, and proceeded through Medina,
along the banks of the Gambia. With so strong a party,
he was no longer dependent on the protection of the petty
kings and mansas; but the Africans, seeing him so well
provided, thought he had no longer any claim on their hospi-
tality ; on the coutrary, they eagerly seized every opportunity
to obtain some portion of the valuable articles which they
saw in his possession. ‘Thefts were common; the kings
drove a hard bargain for presents: at one place the women,
with immense labour, had emptied all the wells, that they
might derive an advantage from selling the water. Submit-

ting quietly to these little annoyances, Mr. Park proceeded

&

PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY. 103

along the Gambia, till he saw it flowing from the south be-
tween the hills of Foota Jalla and a high mountain called

~~ Muianta. Turning his face almost due west, he passed the
streams of the Ba Lee, the Ba Fing, and the Ba Woollima,
the three principal tributaries of the Senegal. This change
of direction led him through a tract much more pleasing
than that which he passed in his dreary return through Jal-
lonka and its wilderness. The villages, built in delightful
mountain-glens, and looking from their elevated precipices
over a great extent of wooded plain, appeared romantic be-
yond any thing he had ever seen. The rocks near Sullo
assumed every possible diversity of form, towering like
ruined castles, spires, and pyramids. One massof granite
so strongly resembled the remains of a Gothic abbey, with
‘its niches and ruined staircase, that it required some time
to satisfy him that it was composed wholly of natural stone.
The crossing of the rivers, now swelled to a considerable
magnitude, was attended with many difficulties ; and in one
of them Isaaco the guide was nearly devoured by a cro-
codile.

It was near Satadoo, soon after passing the Falene, that
the party experienced the first tornado, which, marking the
commencement of the rainy season, proved for them “the
beginning of sorrows.” In these tornadoes, violent storms

_ of thunder and lightning are followed by deluges of rain,
which cover the ground three feet deep, and have a pecu-
liarly malignant influence on European constitutions. In
three days twelve men were on the sick list. The natives,
as they saw the strength of the expedition decline, became
more bold and frequent in their predatory attacks. At Gim-
bia attempts were made to overpower, by main force, the
whole party, and seize all they possessed ; but the assault
was repelled without bloodshed, by their merely presenting
their muskets. At Maniakarro the whole population hung
on their rear for a considerable time, headed by thirty of the —

_ king’s sons; and great delicacy was felt as to the mode of
dealing with these august thieves, so long as their proceed-
ings were not quite intolerable. One of them came up, and
engaged Mr. Park in conversation, while another ran off
with his fowling-piece ; and, on his attempting pursuit, the
first took the opportunity of seizing his great coat. Orders
were now given to fire on all depredators, royal or plebeian ;

104. PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY.

and, after a few shots had been discharged without proe
ducing any fatal effects, the thieves hid themselves among
the rocks, and were merely seen peeping through the cre-
vices. :

The expedition continued to melt away beneath the deadly
influence of an African climate. Every day added to the
list of sick or dead, or of those who declared themselves
unable to proceed. Near Bangassi, four men lay down at
once ; it was even with difficulty that Mr. Park dragged for-
ward his brother-in-law, Mr. Anderson, while he himself
felt very sick and faint. His spirits were about to sink en-
tirely, when, coming to an eminence, he obtained a distant
view of the mountains, the southern base of which he knew
to he watered by the Niger. ‘Then indeed he forgot his
fever, and thought only of climbing the blue hills which
delighted his eyes. )

But three weeks, during which he experienced the
greatest difficulty and suffering, elapsed before he could
arrive at that desired point. At length he reached the
summit of the ridge which divides the Senegal from the
Niger, and coming to the brow of the hill, saw again this
majestic river rolling its immense stream along the plain,
Yet his situation and prospects were gloomy indeed, when
compared to those with which he had left the banks of the
Gambia. Of thirty-eight men whom he then had with
him, there survived only seven, all suffering from severe
sickness, and some nearly at the last extremity. Still his
mind was full of the most sanguine hope, especially when,
on the 22d August, he felt himself floating on the waters
of the Niger, and advancing towards the ultimate object of
his ambition. He hired canoes to convey his party to
Marraboo; and the river, here a mile in breadth, was so
full and.so deep, that its current carried him easily over the
rapids, but with a rapidity which was even in a certain de-
gree painful, |

At Marraboo he sent forward the interpreter Isaaco to
Mansong with part of the presents, and to treat with that
monarch for protection, as well as for permission to build
ahoat. This envoy was absent several days, during
which great anxiety-was felt, heightened by several unfa-
vourable rumours, among which was, that the. king had
Killed him with his own hand and announced his purpose

"

PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY: 105

to do the same to every white man that should come within
his reach. These fears were dispelled by the appearance
of the royal singing man, who brought a message of wel-
come, with an invitation to repair to Sego, and deliver in
person the remaining presents intended for the monarch.
At Samee the party met Isaaco, who reported that there

was something very odd in the reception which he had re-.

ceived from Mansong. ‘That prince assured him, in ge-
neral, that the expedition would be allowed to pass down
the Niger; tut whenever the latter came to particulars,
and proposed an interview with Mr. Park, the king began
to draw squares and triangles with his finger on the sand ;
and in this geometrical operation his mind seemed wholly
absorbed. Isaaco suspected that he laboured under some
superstitious dread of white men, and sought by these
figures to defend himself against their magic influence. It
was finally arranged that the presents should be delivered,
not to Mansong in person, but to Modibinne, his prime
minister, who was to come to Samee for that purpose. He
accordingly appeared, and began by requiring, in the king’s
name, an explanation why Park had come to Bambarra
with so great a train from so distant a country,—allowing
him a day to prepare his reply. Next morning the tra-
veller gave an answer in form, representing his mission as
chiefly commercial, and holding forth the advantages which
Bambarra might reap by receiving European goods directly
from the coast, instead of circuitously, as now, through
Morocco, the Desert, Timbuctoo, and Jenne, having a profit
levied upon them at every transfer. Modibinne expressed
satisfaction both with the reasons and with the presents ;
and on his return next day offered, on the part of Man-
song, the option of building a boat either at Samee, Sego,
Sansanding, or Jenne. Park chose Sansanding, thus en-
abling the king to avoid a personal interview with the Eu-
ropeans, of which he seemed to entertain so mysterious a
dread.

The voyage down the river was distressing ; for, though
the fatigue of travelling was avoided, the heat was so in-
tense that it was thought sufficient to have roasted a sirloin:
and the sick had thus no chance of recovery. Sansanding
was found a prosperous and flourishing town, with a crowded
market remarkably well-arranged. The leading articles,

106 PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY.

which were cloth of Houssa or Jenne, antimony, beads,
and indigo, were each arranged in stalls, shaded by mats:
from the heat of the sun. There was a separate market
for salt, the main staple of their trade. The whole pre-
sented a scene of commercial order and activity totally un-
looked for in the interior of Africa.

Mansong had promised to furnish two boats; but they
were late in arriving, and proved very defective. In order
to raise money, it was necessary to sell a considerable
quantity of goods. Nor was it without much trouble that
the two skiffs were finally converted into the schooner Jo-
liba, forty feet long, six broad, and drawing only one foot
of water, the fittest form. for navigating the Niger down-
ward to the ocean. .

During Park’s stay at Sansanding he had the misfortune
to lose his. brother-in-law, Mr. Anderson, to whom his at-
tachment was so strong as to make him say,—‘ No event
which took place during the journey ever threw the
smallest gloom over my mind till I laid Mr. Anderson in
the grave. I then felt myself asif left a second time lonely
and friendless amid the wilds of Africa,” Though the
party was now reduced to five Europeans, one of whom
was deranged, and though the most gloomy anticipations
could not fail to arise in the mind of our traveller, his firm-.
ness was in no degree shaken. He announced to Lord
Camden his fixed purpose to discover the termination of the ©
Niger, or to perish in the attempt; adding, “Though all
the Europeans who are with me should die, and though I
were myself half-dead, I would still persevere.” To Mrs..
Park he announced the same determination, combined with
an undoubting confidence of success; and the commence-
ment of his voyage down the Niger, through the vast un-—
known regions of Interior Africa, he called ‘ turning his
face towards England.”

It was on the 17th November, 1804, that Park set sail
on his last and fatal voyage. A long interval elapsed with-
owt any tidings, which, considering the great distance and
the many causes of delay, did not at first excite alarm in
his friends. As the following year, however, passed on,
rumours of an unpleasant nature began to prevail. Alarmed
oy these, and feeling a deep interest in his fate, Governor
Maxwell of Sierra Leone engaged Isaaco the guide, whe

PARK’S SECOND JOURNEY. 10?

had been sent to the Gambia with despatches from the
Niger, to undertake a fresh journey to inquire after him.
At Sansanding, Isaaco was so far fortunate as to meet
Amadi Fatouma, who had been engaged to sticceed him
self as interpreter. From him he received a journal put-
porting to contain the. narrative of the voyage down the
river, and of its final issue. The party, it would appear,
had purchased three slaves, who, with the five Europeans
and Fatouma, increased their number to nifié. They
passed Silla and Jenne in a friendly manner; but at Rak-
bara (Kabra) and Timbuctoo several armed parties came
out to attack them, who were repelled only by a smart and
destructive fire. No particulars are given of any of those
important places; nor of Kaffo, Gotoijege, and others,
which the discoverers are represented as having afterward
passed. At length they came to the village (more properly
city) of Yaour, where Amadi Fatouma left the party, his
services having been engaged only to that point. He had,
however, scarcely taken his leave, when he was summoned
before the king, who bitterly complained that the white
men, though they brought many valuable commodities with
them, had passed without giving him any presents. He
therefore ordered that Fatouma should be thrown into
irons, and a body of troops sent in pursuit of the English.
These men reached Boussa, and took possession of a passy
where rocks, hemming in the river, allow only a narrow
channel for vessels to descend. When Park arrived, he
found the passage thus obstructed, but attemipted, never-
theless, to push his way through. ‘ The people began to
attack him, throwing lances, pikes, arrows, and stones. He
defended himself for a long time; when two of his slaves
at the stern of the canoe were killed. The crew threw
every thing they had into the river, and kept firing;
but being overpowered by nutnbers and fatigue, and unable
to keep up the canoe against the current, and seeing no
probability of escaping, Mr. Park took hold of one of the
white men, and jumped ifito the water. Martyn did the
same, and they were all drowned in the stream in attempt-
ing to escape. The only slave that remained in the boat,
seeing the natives persist in throwing weapons into it
without ceasing, stood up anid said to them,—‘ Stop throw-
ing now; you see nothing in the canoe, and nobody but

108 WORNEMAN.

myself; therefore cease. Take me and the canoe, but
don’t kill me.” They took possession of both, and carried
them to the king.”’ |

These sad tidings, conveyed in course to England, were
not for a long time received with general belief. ‘The state-
ment, being sifted with care, was thought to contain incon-
sistencies, as well as such a degree of improbability as left
some room for hope. But, as year after year elapsed, this
hope died away; and Denham and Clapperton, in their
late expedition, received accounts from various quarters
which very nearly coincided with those of Amadi Fatouma.
Park’s adventures, they found, had excited the deepest in-
terest throughout Africa. Clapperton in his last journey
even saw the spot where he perished, which, allowing for
some exaggeration, did not ill correspond with the deserip-
tion just given. Nay, he received notice, as we shall here-
after see, that Park’s manuscripts were in the possession
of the king or chief of Yaour or Youri, who offered to de-
liver them up on condition that the captain would pay him
a visit, which he unfortunately was never able to perform.:

CHAPTER X.

Various Travellers—Horneman, Nicholls, Roentgen, Adams,
Riley. |

Ir has been thought advisable to trace without interrup-
tion the interesting career of Park from its commencement
to its close. Between his two expeditions, however, there
intervened another, which appeared to open under very
favourable auspices. Frederic Horneman, a student of the
university of Gottingen, communicated to Blumenbach, the
celebrated professor of natural history, his ardent desire to
explore the interior of Africa under the auspices of the As-
sociation. Blumenbach transmitted to that body a strong
recommendation of Horneman, as a young man, active,
athletic, temperate, knowing sickness only by name, and
of respectable literary and scientific attainments. Sir

HORNEMAN. 109

Joseph Banks immediately wrote, “If Mr. Horneman be
really the character you describe, he is the very person
whom we are in search of.” On receiving this encourage-
ment, Horneman immediately applied his mind to the study
of natural history and the Arabic language, and otherwise
sought to fit himself for supporting the character, which he
intended to assume, of an Arab and a Moslem, under which
he hoped to escape the effects of that ferocious bigotry
which had opposed so fatal a bar to the progress of his pre-
decessors.

In May, 1797, Horneman repaired to London, where his
appointment was sanctioned by the Association; and hav-
ing obtained a passport from the Directory, who then
governed France, he visited Paris, and was introduced
to some leading members of the National Institute. He
reached Egypt in September, spent ten days at Alexan-
dria, and set out for Cairo, to wait the departure of the
Rashna caravan. The interval was employed in acquiring
the language of the Mograbin Arabs, a tribe bordering on
Egypt. While he was at Cairo, tidings arrived of Buona-
parte’s having landed in that country, when the just indig-
nation of the natives vented itself upon all Europeans, and
among others on Horneman, who was arrested and con-
fined in the castle. He was relieved upon the victorious
entry of the French commander, who immediately set him
at liberty, and very liberally offered money and every other
supply which might contribute to the success of his mission.

It was the 5th of September, 1798, before Horneman
could find a caravan proceeding to the westward, when he
joined the one destined for Fezzan. The travellers soon
passed the cultivated land of Egypt, and entered on an ex-
panse of sandy waste, such as the bottom of the ocean
might exhibit if the waters were to retire. This desert
was covered with the fragments, as it were, of a petrified
forest; large trunks, branches, twigs, and even pieces of
bark, being scattered overit. Sometimes these stony remains
were brought in by mistake as fuel. When the caravan halted
for the night, each individual dug a holein the sand, gathered
a few sticks, and prepared his victuals after the African
fashion of kouskous, soups, or puddings. Horneman, ac-
cording to his European habits, at first employed the ser-
vices of another; but sete ean thus exposed to con-

V0 HORNEMAN.

tempt or suspicion, he soon followed the example of the
rest, and became his own cook.

There are as usual oases, or a cvaeiet spots, in this im-
mense waste. ‘Ten days brought the caravan to Ummeso-
geir, a village situated on a rock, with a hundred and twenty
inhabitants, who, separated by such immense deserts from
the rest of the world, pass a peaceful and hospitable life,
subsisting on dates, the chief produce of their arid soil.

Another day’s journey brought them to Siwah, a much
more extensive oasis, the rocky border of which is estimated
by Horneman to be fifty miles in circumference. It yields,
with little culture, various descriptions of grain and vege-
tables; but its wealth consists chiefly in large gardens of
dates, baskets of which fruit form here the standard of va-
lue. The government is vested in a very turbulent aristo-
cracy of about thirty chiefs, who meet in council in the vi-
cinity of the town-wall, and, in the contests which frequently
arise, make violent and sudden appeals to arms. The chief
question in respect to Siwah is, whether it does or does not
comprise the site of the celebrated shrine of Jupiter Ammon
—that object of awful veneration to the nations of antiquity,
and which Alexander himself, the greatest of its heroes,
underwent excessive toil and peril to visit and to associate
with his name. ‘This territory does in fact contain springs,
a small edifice with walls six feet thick, partly painted and
adorned with hieroglyphics. There are also antique tombs
in the neighbouring mountains ; but as the subsequent dis-
coveries of Belzoni and Edmonston have proved that all
these features exist in other oases scattered in different di-
rections along the desert borders of Egypt, some uncer-
tainty must perhaps for ever rest on this curious question.

The route now passed through a region still indeed bar-
ren, yet not presenting such a monotonous plain of sand as
intervenes between Egypt and Siwah. It was bordered by
precipitous limestone rocks, often completely filled with
shells and marine remains. The caravan, while proceeding
along these wild tracts, were alarmed by a tremendous
braying of asses; and, on looking back, saw several hun-
dreds of the people of Siwah armed and in full pursuit,
mounted on these useful animals. The scouts, however,
soon brought an assurance that they came with intentions
perfectly peaceable, having merely understood that in the

HORNEMAN. 111

caravan there were two Christians from Cairo; on being
allowed to kill whom, they would permit the others to pro-
ceed unmolested. All Horneman’s address and firmness
were required in this fearful crisis. He opposed the most
resolute denial to the assertions of the Siwahans; he
opened the Koran, and displayed the facility with which he
could read its pages ; he even challenged his adversaries to
answer him on points of Mohammedan faith. His compa-
nions in the caravan, who took a pride in defending one of
their members, insisted that he had cleared himself tho-
roughly from the imputation of being an infidel; and as
they were joined by several of the Siwahans, the whole
body finally renounced their bloody purpose, and returned
home.

The travellers next passed through Augila, a town so
ancient as to be mentioned by Herodotus; but now small,
dirty, and supported solely by the passage of the mland
trade. They then entered the Black Harutsch, a long
range of dreary mountains (Mons Ater of the ancients),
through the successive defiles of which they found only a
narrow tract enclosed by rugged steeps and obstructed by
louse stones. Every valley, too, and ravine into which
they looked appeared still more wild and desolate than
the road itself. A gayer scene succeeded when they en-
tered the district of limestone mountains called the White
Harutsch. The rocks and stones here appeared as if
glazed, and abounded in shells and other marine petrifac-
tions, which, on being broken, had a vitrified appearance.

After a painful route of sixteen days through this solitary
region, the travellers were cheered by seeing before them
the Great Oasis, or small kingdom of Fezzan. Both at
Temissa, the first frontier town, and at Zuila, the ancient
capital, which is still inhabited by many rich merchants,
they were received with rapturous demonstrations of joy.
The arrival of a caravan is the chief event which diversifies
the existence of the Fezzaners, and diffuses through the
country animation and wealth. At Mourzouk, the modern
capital, the reception was more solemn and pompous. The
sultan himself awaited their arrival on a small eminence,
seated in an arm-chair ornamented with cloth of various

colours, and forming a species of throne. Each pilgrim,

on approaching the royal seat, took off his sandals, kissed

}

112 ' HORNEMAN.

the sovereign’s hand, and took his station behind, where the
whole assembly joined in a chant of pious gratitude.
Fezzan, according to Horneman, has a length of 300 and

a breadth of 200 miles, and is much the largest ‘of all the
oases which enliven the immense desert of northern Africa.
It relieves however, in only an imperfect degree, the parched
appearance of the surrounding region. It is not irrigated
by a river or even a streamlet of any dimensions; the grain
produced is insufficient for its small population, supposed
to amount to 70,000 or 75,000 inhabitants ; and few animals
are reared except the ass, the goat, and thecamel. Dates,
as in all this species of territory, form the chief article of
land produce ; but Fezzan derives its main importance from
being the centre of that mmense traffic which gives activity
and wealth to Interior Africa. Mourzouk, in the dry sea-
son, forms a rendezvous for the caravans proceeding frem
Egypt, Morocco,. and Tripoli to the great countries wa-
tered by the western rivers. Yet the trade is carried on
less by the inhabitants themselves than by the Tibboos, the
Tuaricks, and other wandering tribes of the desert, con-
cerning whom our traveller collected some information, but
less ample than Lyon and Denham afterward obtained
from personal observation. Of 'Timbuctoo he did not learn
much, Moroeco being the chief quarter whence cara-
vans proceed to that celebrated seat of African commerce.
But respecting the eastern part of Soudan he received in-
telligence more accurate than had hitherto reached Europe.
Houssa was for the first time understood to be, not a single
country or city, but a region comprehending many king- -
doms, the people of which are said to be the handsomest,
most industrious, and most intelligent in that part of Africa,
being particularly distinguished for their manufacture of
fine cloths. Among the states mentioned were Kashna,
Kano, Daura, Solan, Noro, Nyffee, Cabi, Zanfara, and
Guba. Most or all of these were tributary to Bornou,
which is decidedly the most powerful kingdom in Central
Africa; and it was so regarded even before the rise of the
Fellatah empire, which has caused, in this respect, a re-
markable change. The Niger, according to the unanimous
belief in the northern provinces, was described as flowing
from Timbuctoo eastward through Houssa, and holding the
same direction till it joined or rather becarne the Bahr-el-

HORNEMAN. 113

Abiad, the main stream of the Egyptian Nile. Prevalent
as this belief is among the Arabs, late discoveries have
proved it to be entirely erroneous ; the river or rivers which
water Houssa being wholly distinct from that great stream
which flows through Bambarra and Timbuctoo.
Horneman, after remaining some time at Mourzouk, had
resolved to join a caravan which was about to proceed south-
wards into the interior; when, observing that the cavalcade
consisted almost wholly of black traders, any connexion or
intercourse with whom was likely to afford him little favour
im the eyes of the Moors, he was induced to forego this pur-
pose,—more especially as there was the greatest reason to
apprehend obstruction in passing through the country of
the Tuaricks, who were then at war with Fezzan. He was
informed, besides, that caravans from Bornou occasionally
terminated their journey at Mourzouk, again returning
south; by which, at a future period and under more propi-
tious circumstances, he hoped to have an opportunity of
accomplishing his object. ‘These considerations determined
him to postpone his departure into the interior, resolving in
the mean while, with the view of forwarding his despatches
to the Association, to visit Tripoli; where, however, he did
not arrive till the 19th August, 1799, having been detained
a considerable time by sickness. After remaining in this
city about three months, he again returned to Mourzouk;
nor was it till the 6th April, 1800, that he departed thence
for the southward, in company with two shereefs, or de-
scendants of Mohammed, who had given him assurances of
friendship and protection. His letters were filled with the
most sanguine hopes of success. But the lapse of two
years without any tidings threw a damp on the cheering
expectations thus raised in the, Association and the public.
In September, 1803,-a-Fezzan merchant informed Mr. Nis-
sen, the Danish consul at Tripoli, that Yussuph, as Horne-
man had chosen to designate himself, was seen alive and
well on his way to Gondasch, with the intention of pro-
ceeding to the coast and of returning to Europe. Another
Moorish merchant afterward informed Mr. M‘Donough,
British consul at Tripoli, that Yussuph was in safety at
Kashna in June, 1803, and was there highly respected as a
Mussulman marabout or saint. Major eateee afterward
learned that he had penetrated across Africa as faras Nyfie
K 2

.

114 NICHOLLS —ROENTGEN.

on the Niger, where he fell a victim, not to any hostility on
the part of the natives, but to disease and the climate. A
young man was even met with, who professed to be his son,
though there was some doubt as to the grounds of his claim
to that character. ~ . (Ati ; .

The Association, when their hopes from Horneman had
failed, began to look round for other instruments ; and there
was still a number of active and daring spirits ready to
brave the dangers with which this undertaking was sur-
rounded. Mr. Nicholls, in 1804, repaired to Calabar, in
the Gulf of Benin, with the view of penetrating into the
interior by this route, which appeared shorter than any
other. He was well received by the chiefs on that coast,
but could not gain much intelligence respecting the Niger,
being informed that most of the slaves came from the west,
and that the navigation of the river, at no great distance,
was interrupted by an immense waterfall, beyond which the
surface of the country became very elevated. Unfortu-—
nately, of all the sickly climates of Africa this is perhaps
the most pestilential ; and Mr. Nicholls, even before he had
commenced his journey fell a victim to the epidemic fever.

Another German, named Roentgen, recommended also
by Professor Blumenbach, undertook to penetrate into the
interior of Africa by the way of Morocco. He was de-
scribed as possessing an unblemished character, ardent zeal
in the cause, with great strength both of mind and body.
Like Horneman, he made himeelf master of Arabic, and
proposed to pass for a Mohammedan. Having, in 1809,
arrived at Mogadore, he hired two guides, and set out to
join the Soudan caravan. But his career was short indeed ;
for soon afterward his body was found at a little distance
from the place whence he set out. No information could
ever be obtained as to the particulars of his death; but it

“was, too probably, conjectured that his guides had murdered

him with the view of seizing his property.

The public mind, meantime, continued fixed with intense
interest on Africa, and every channel by which even the
most imperfect information respecting it could be obtained
was carefully examined. Much attention was at one time
excited by tidings derived even from a foreign and rather
doubtful source. The African coast from Morocco to the
Senegal is singularly perilous, beset with numerous sand-

ADAMS. 115

banks, and without either port or shelter. On one of these
banks the American ship Charles struck on the morning
of 11th October, 1810, and was so surrounded by breakers
as to leave no hope of escaping a total wreck. ‘The sailors
swam ashore, but soon after daybreak were attacked by a
band of Moors, a race ever on the watch for plunder. The
captain was killed, apparently in consequence of rash and
violent behaviour; but the crew were taken prisoners, and
divided among the captors. Adams, one of the sailors, ac-
cording to his own statement, was carried to the border of
Bambarra, where the Moors, who, by the practice of slave-
stealing, had roused the hostility of the natives, were sur-
prised, made captive, and, after four days’ confinement,
marched to Timbuctoo. The companions of Adams, after
being presented to the king, were thrown into prison; but
he himself, being regarded as a curiosity, was retained in
the palace, where he became a particular favourite of the
queen, who used to sit gazing at him for hours. He re-
mained there six months, well treated, and even caressed,
when a party of Moorish traders arrived, ransomed their
countrymen, and Adams along with them. The caravan
reached Taudeny in thirteen days; after which it was
obliged to march twenty-nine days over a tract of desert,
where there was neither plant nor shrub, a blade of grass,
nor a drop of water. Finding the spring dry, the prospect
of which had sustained their hope, they gave way to the
deepest despair; some perished, and the rest dispersed in
search of water. Adams, having reached Ved Duleem, fell
again under the power of the wild wanderers of the desert,
and was carried from place to place, suffering extreme hard-
ships ; but at length he found, at Wedinoon, three of his
old shipmates, who, like himself, were immediately libe-
rated by the humane interposition of M. Dupuis, British
consul at Mogadore. He proceeded thence to London, in
the view of obtaining a passage for America, and was found
in the streets of that capital by a gentleman who took a
deep interest in African affairs, and who communicated the
fact to Mr. Cox, secretary to the Association. Adams was
then strictly examined, and his statements taken down in
writing; while M. Dupuis, the consul, who happened to be
in London, confirmed the general fact of the shipwreck and
captivity. Hence there appeared little room to doubt the

116 ADAMS.

correctness of his relation. . The remarks, however, of
M. Graberg de Hemso, Swedish consul at Tripoli, lately
given in the Foreign Review, seem to justify the suspicion
that this narrative was in the main fictitious; that though
Adams was cast ashore on the Sahara, it was in 1811 in-
stead of 1810, as he asserted ; that he never was south of
Cape Blanco, and could not therefore have known Tim-
buctoo except by report. His real name, besides, was
Benjamin Rose. At all events, he appears to have made
diligent inquiries as to the state of the country; and his
details, accordingly, as corrected by M. Dupuis, have en-
abled the public to form a pretty accurate opinion respect-
ing Timbuctoo. :

The picture drawn by him of this city was different from,
and in many respects quite the reverse of, that hitherto
presented to Europeans. There is said to exist nothing
of that uncontrolled sway and fierce intolerance of the
Moors, the belief of which was so strongly impressed upon
Park. On the contrary, the king, and all his principal offi-
cers were negroes; the few religious ceremonies observed
were pagan; and the Moors were allowed to enter the town
only in small numbers, and under very rigid restrictions.
This statement, which appeared at first improbable, has,
however, been confirmed by subsequent accounts. The
rumours that intolerance prevailed to such an extent in
this seat of trade were, we may presume, exaggerated from
the very first; but L’Hagi Mohammed, a resident at the
well of Aroan, told M. Cahill of Rabat, that, subsequently
to Mr. Park’s first journey, the king of Bambarra had con-
quered Timbuctoo, and established there a negro govern-
ment. This is confirmed by Mr. Jackson, and agrees also
with the report which we shall find to be given by Riley.
The description of that city, again, corresponded very little
with the ideas formerly entertained of its pomp and splen-
dour. The most spacious mansions could scarcely rank
above huts, being composed of timber frames filled with
earth, and only one story high; while the habitations of
the lower orders were formed by putting together branches
of trees, and covering them with mats made of the pal-
mettv. Even the king’s palace, or citadel, was represented
as only a collection of apartments on the ground floor, en-
-elosed by a mud wall. This, in fact, is an exact descrip-

RILEY, 117

tion of all the African cities, where lofty structures of solid
stone, in which consists the magnificence of European ca-
pitals, are totally unknown. The queen, immensely fat,
was rather splendidly dressed in blue nankeen (the fine cot-
ton cloth of the country dyed with indigo) edged with gold
lace, and was lavishly ornamented with necklaces and ear-
rings of gold. The inhabitants, like most negroes, were
good-humoured, extremely gay, somewhat dissolute, and
passionately fond of dancing, in which they spent great
part of the night. Yet they had furious quarrels, in de-
ciding which they employed, with desperation, not the fist
only, but even the teeth. Slaves, the commodity always
most eagerly sought after by the Moors, were procured by
those marauding expeditions which are the disgrace and
scourge of Central Africa. The citizens were accustomed
to set out monthly in parties of from one to five hundred,
and usually returned with a large supply. Slavery is,
moreover, the punishment for all offences of great magni-
tude, though it is not very frequently inflicted.

James Riley, supercargo of the American brig Commerce,
sailing from Gibraltar to the Cape de Verd Islands, found
himself suddenly involved in fog and tempest. On the 28th
August, 1815, the vessel ran aground in the neighbourhood
of Cape Bojador. The crew, on landing, were assailed by
a small band of armed natives, whose appearance indicated
the utmost degree of poverty and ferocity. They began
forthwith an indiscriminate plunder, emptied trunks, boxes,
and casks, cut open the beds, and amused themselves with
seeing the feathers fly before the wind. The sailors, in the
mean while, were endeavouring to patch up their long-boat
as a means of escape, but were greatly mortified, on the ap-
proach of dawn, to observe from their shattered wreck, on
which they had passed a melancholy night, a much more
numerous band of these merciless savages. By perfidious
gestures addressed to the captain, whom they had recognised
as commander, they now induced Mr. Riley to land; upon
which they put their daggers to his breast. He contrived,
however, by stratagem, to make his escape to the long-boat
which was attached to the ship, when the crew immediately
pushed out to sea, resolved to brave all the dangers of that
element. Accordingly they worked a little way along the
shore, incessantly employed in baling their crazy bark ; but

ris RILEY.

as the leaks increased, while provisions and water failed,
Riley and his men came to the conclusion, that by remain-
ing at sea they must perish, and on land they could do no
more. They retouched the coast near Cape Barbas on the
8th September, but finding it to consist of perpendicular
rocks, they walked four miles, and finally clambered up
broken fragments, almost at the risk of life, ere they could
reach the summit. But what a scene was there presented!
Before them extended an immeasurable plain, without a
shrub, plant, or a blade of grass; nothing that even for a
moment could support human life. They fell to the ground,
exclaiming, ‘“*’Tis enough!—here we must breathe. our
Jast!”? From such utter despair even the horrors of Afri-
can bondage appeared almost a deliverance. ‘Towards
evening a light was descried gleaming along the waste, in-
dicating that they were.in the neighbourhood of a band of
these marauders. Halls waited till morning they ap-
proached the camp, and prostrated themselves in a suppliant
attitude. The Arabs uttered a furious yell, and immedi-
ately engaged in a violent contest for the living booty thus
unexpectedly presented. This dispute ended in a division
of the sailors among the barbarians, by whom the captives
were hurried in different directions into the interior of the
wilderness. ‘The sufferings of Riley were so extreme as
made him almost regret the life which he had saved, till he
met Sidi Hamet, a respectable caravan-merchant, who, in
bargaining for his person, showed much sympathy for his
situation, and undertook to conduct him to Mogadore, pro-
vided he were made sure of a goodransom. ‘The American
soon had the satisfaction of seeing two blankets, a cotton
robe, and a bundle of ostrich feathers paid as the price of his
liberty. He prevailed on the Mussulman also to purchase
his companions ; after which they set out together to cross
the Desert with their master and deliverer. They had a
very painful journey to perform, riding with the utmost ra-
pidity on the naked backs of camels, over hills of loose
sand, while the air was filled with tempests of drift. Food
and water being moreover very scanty, they were reduced
almost to the condition of skeletons, and Riley declares
that he did not ultimately weigh above ninety pounds. His
mind also was —* with much anxiety, as Sidi Hamet,
with all his humanity, gave notice from timé to time, that,

RILEY. 119

should his expectations as to the ransom fail, he would cut
all their throats. Having procured, therefore, a reed and
some black liquid, Riley wrote a pathetic representation of
his sufferings, addressed generally to the consuls or to any
Christians who might happen to be resident at Mogadore.
After eight days of dreadful suspense, a letter arrived. His
emotion was too great to allow him to read it; but one of
his companions found it to be from Mr. Willshire, the Eng-
lish consul, expressed in the most sympathizing terms,
and with an assurance that the ransom would be provided.
This was faithfully performed ; and a hospitable reception
at Mogadore soon restored Riley to health and to his former
dimensions.

The most interesting part of the intelligence, however,
obtained on this occasion, was that communicated to Riley
by Sidi Hamet, concerning his oym journeys and adven-
tures. He had accompanied a » to Timbuctoo, and
after much exertion and suffering had arrived at the banks
of the Gozen Zair, which, running eastward through Sou-
dan, falls into the Niger. He followed its current till he
reached the capital just named, which, like Adams, he de-
scribed as being entirely ruled and possessed by negroes ;
though a smaller town, separated by a strong wall, was as-
signed to the Moors, who were only allowed to enter the
principal city by fifties at a time. He represents Timbuc-
too, on the whole, as being larger and handsomer than it
had appeared to his countryman. The shegar, or king,
happened to send a caravan southward to the city of Was-
sanah, which Sidi Hamet resolved to accompany. A ride
of two hours brought the travellers to the banks of the Zo-
libib (Joliba of Park, and our Niger). Its course for six
days was nearly due east, when it turned to the south-east,
and continued to flow in that direction during the remainder
of their journey. At length, after travelling in all about
sixty days, they arrived at Wassanah, which appeared to
Sidi Hamet a city twice as large as Timbuctoo. The inha-
bitants were pagans, but honest, hospitable, and kind-
hearted. Oleebo, the king, lived in a large and lofty pa-
lace, had 150 wives, 10,000 slaves, and a very large army
But the chief interest was excited by a report received from
the king’s brother, of expeditions which were sent down
the river, consisting of numerous boats with large cargoes

120 TUCKEY.

of slaves. They were described as sailing two months,
first south and then west, till they came to the great water,
where they met pale people with large boats, and guns
which made a noise like thunder. This relation was ea-
gerly embraced as favouring the supposition of the Niger
‘being the same river with the Congo or Zaire; and it may
even be adduced to support the hypothesis which now iden-
tifies it with the river of Benin. The south-east and
southerly course assigned to the Niger, as well as the as-
sertion that it flowed among rocks and formed cataracts,
having been since found to be correct, though contrary to
the ideas then prevalent in Europe, are facts which afford
reasonable ground to believe that this journey was not al-
together a romance. It is not easy, however, to conjecture
what was the city described by Sidi Hamet under the name
of Wassanah. ry .

CHAPTER XI.

Government Expeditions—Tuckey, Campbell, Laing, Gray,
Ritchie, and Lyon.

Tue fate of Park, notwithstanding the deep regret which
it had excited in England and in Europe, presented nothing
which could destroy the hope of future success. The
chief cause of failure could be easily traced to the precipi-
tation into which he had been betrayed by a too ardent en-
thusiasm. Nothing had even been discovered adverse tg
the hypothesis which identifies the Niger with the Cong
and which still retained a strong hold on the publie mind,
The views of government and of the nation on this subject
were entirely in unison. It was therefore determined that
an expedition on a great scale should be fitted out, divided
into two portions—one to descend the Niger, and the other
to ascend the Congo; which two parties, it was fondly
hoped, would effect a triumphant meeting in the middle of
the great stream that they were sent to explore. ‘The pub-
Kc loudly applauded this resolution; and never, perhaps,

TUCKEY. ; 121

did a military or naval armament, by which the most splen-
did victories were expected to be achieved, excite a deeper
interest than this, which seemed destined to triumph over
the darkness that had so long enveloped the vast interior of
the African continent. |

The expedition to the Congo was intrusted to Captain
Tuckey, an officer of merit and varied services, and who
had published several works connected with geography and
navigation. Besides a crew of about fifty individuals, in-

cluding marines and mechanics, he was accompanied by

Mr. Smith, an eminent botanist, who likewise possessed
some knowledge of geology; Mr. Cranch, a self-taught but
able zoologist ; Mr. ‘Tudor, a good comparative anatomist ;
Mr. Lockhart, a gardener from Kew; and Mr. Galwey, an
intelligent person who volunteered to join the party. They
sailed from Deptford on the 16th February, 1816, and
reached Malemba on the 30th June, where they met with a
most cordial reception from the mafook, or king’s merchant,
in the belief that they were come to make up a cargo of
slaves. The chiefs, on being reluctantly convinced of the
contrary, burst into the most furious invectives against the
crowned heads of Europe, particularly our own most gra-
cious soyereign, whom they denominated “the Devil,” im-
puting chiefly to him the stop put to this odious but luera-
tive traffic. A few days thereafter brought the English into
the channel of the Congo; which, to their great surprise,
instead of exhibiting the stupendous magnitude they had

- been taught to expect, scarcely appeared a river of the se-

cond class. The stream, it is true, was then at the lowest,
but the depth being still more than 150 fathoms, made
it impossible to estimate the mass of water which its
channel might convey to the ocean. The banks were
swampy, overgrown with mangrove trees; and the deep
silence and repose of these immense forests made a solemn
impression upon the. mind. At Embomma, the emporium -
of the Congo, much interest was excited by the discovery
that a negro officiating as cook’s mate was a prince of the

blood. He was welcomed with rapture by his father, and
with a general rejoicing by the whole village. The young
savage was soon arrayed in full African pomp, having on
an embroidered coat very much tarnished, a silk sash, and-
a black glazed-hat, muemdanicd by an enormous feathe .

Ad

Le hl — i ef —

‘492 TUCKEY.

Captain Tuckey was introduced to the chenoo, who, with
his huge gilt buttons, stockings of pink sarsenet, red half-
boots, and high-crowned embroidered hat, reminded him of
punch in a puppet-show. It was vain to attempt to convey
to this sage prince any idea of the objects of the expedition.
The terms which express science and an enlightened cu-
riosity did not excite in his mind a single idea, and he rang
continual changes on the questions, ‘Are you come to
trade?” and ‘“* Are you come tomake war ?”’—unable to con-
jecture any other motive. At length, having received a solemn
declaration that there was no intention to make war, he
sealed peace by the acceptance ofa large present of brandy.

After sailing between ridges of high rocky hills, the ex-
pedition came to the Yellala, or Great Cataract; and here
they met with a second disappointment. Instead of an-
other Niagara, which general report had led them to expect,
they saw only ‘a comparative brook bubbling over its stony
bed.” . The fall appears to be occasioned merely by masses
of granite, fragments of which have fallen down and blocked
up the stream. Yet this obstruction rendered it quite im-
possible for the boats to pass; nor could they be carried
across the precipices and deep ravines by which the coun-
try was intersected. The discoverers were therefore obliged
to proceed by land through this difficult region, which,
without a guide on whom they could rely, was attended
with overwhelming toil. Cooloo, Inga, and Mavoonda, the
principal villages, were separated by wide intervals, which
placed the travellers under the necessity of often sleeping in
the.open air. At length the country began to improve and
become more level, the river to widen, while the obstacles
to its navigation gradually disappeared. But just as the
voyage began to assume a prosperous aspect, indications
of its fatal termination were already perceptible. The health
of the party was rapidly giving way under the effects of
fatigue, as well as the malignant influence of a damp and
burning atmosphere. Tudor, Cranch, and Galwey were
successively obliged to return to the ship. Captain Tuckey,
after struggling for some time against the increasing pres-
sure of disease and exhaustion, as well as the accumulating
difficulties of the undertaking, saw the necessity of putting
a stop to the farther progress of the expedition. Mr. Smith
at first expressed deep disappaintment, at this resolution,

PEDDIE. 123

but soon became so ill that he could scarcely he conveyed
to the vessel. On reaching it, a sad scene awaited the sur
vivors. Cranch, Tudor, and Galwey were no more ; they
had successively sunk under the weight of disease. Mr.
Smith soon shared their fate ; and Captain Tuckey himself,
on the 4th October, added one more to the number of deaths,
without having suffered the usual attack of fever. He had
been exhausted by constant depression and mental anxiety.

From this unhappy expedition, however, some informa-
tion was obtained respecting a part of Africa which had not
been visited for several centuries. No trace, indeed, was
seen of the great kingdoms, or of the cities and armies de-
scribed by the Portuguese missionaries ; so that, though the
interior may very probably be more populous than the banks
of the river, there must, in these pious narratives, have been
much exaggeration.. The largest towns, or rather villages,
did not contain above a hundred houses, with five or six
hundred inhabitants. They were govemed by chenoos, or
hereditary chiefs, having a power nearly absolute, and by
mafooks under ‘them, who were chiefly employed in the
collection of revenue. The people are merry, idle, good-
humoured, hospitable, and liberal, with rather an innocent
and agreeable expression of countenance. The greatest
blemish in their character appears in the treatment of the
female sex, on whom they devolve all the laborious duties
of life, even more exclusively than is usual among negro
tribes; holding their virtue also in such slender esteem,
that the greatest chiefs unblushingly made it an object of
traffic. Upon this head, however, they have evidently
learned much evil from their intercourse with Europeans.
—The character of the vegetation, and the general aspect
of nature, are pretty nearly the same on the Congo as on
the other African rivers.

Meantime the other part of the expedition under Major
Peddie, whose destination it was to descend the Niger, ar-
rived at the mouth of the Senegal. Instead of the beaten
track along the banks of that river, or of the Gambia, he
preferred the route through the country of the Foulahs,
which, though nearer, was more difficult and less explored.
On the 17th November, 1816, he sailed from the Senegal,
and on 14th December, the party, consisting of 100 men
and 200 animals, landed at Kakundy, on the Rio Nunez;

124 . CAMPBELL—GRAY.

but before they could begin their march, Major Peddie was
attacked with fever and died. Captain Campbell, on whom
the command devolved, proceeded in the line proposed, till
he arrived at a small river called the Panietta, on the fron-
tier of the Foulah territory. By this time many of the
beasts of burden had sunk, and great difficulty was found
in obtaining a sufficient supply of provisions. The king
of the Foulahs, on being asked for permission to pass
through his territories, seemed alarmed at hearing of so
large a body of foreigners about to enter his country. He
contrived, under various pretexts, to detain them on the
frontier four months, during which their stock of food and
clothing gradually diminished, while they were suffering
all the evils that arise from a sickly climate and a scanty
supply of. necessaries. At length their situation became
such as to place them under the absolute necessity of re-
turning ; and all their animals being dead, it was neces-
sary to hire the natives to carry their baggage,—an expe-
dient which gave occasion to frequent pillage. They
reached Kakundy with the loss only of Mr. Kummer the natu-
ralist ; but Captain Campbell, overcome with sickness and
exertion, died two days after, on the 13th of June, 1817
The command was then transferred to Lieutenant Stokoe,
a spirited young naval officer, who had joined the expedi-
tion as a volunteer. He formed a new scheme for proceed-
ing into the interior ; but unhappily he also sunk under the
climate and the fatigues of the journey.

A sentence of death seemed pronounced against all who
should attempt to penetrate the African continent ; and yet
there were still daring spirits who did not shrink from the
undertaking. Captain Gray, of the Royal African Corps,
who had accompanied the last-mentioned expedition under
Major Peddie and Captain Campbell, undertook, in 1818, to
perform a journey by Park’s old route along the Gambia.
He reached, without any obstacle, Boolibani, the capital of
Bondou, where ‘he remained from the 20th June, 1818, to
the 22d May, 1819 ; but owing to the jealousy of the mo-
narch, he was permitted to proceed no farther. With some
difficulty he reached Gallam, where he met Staff-surgeon
Dockard, who had gone forward to Sego to ask permission
to proceed through Bambarra,—a request which had also
been evaded. The whole party then retumed to Senegal.

Ne i: aa
:

LAING——RITCHIE—LYON. 125

In 1821, Major Laing was sent on’a mission from Sierra
Leone, through the Timannee, Kooranko, and Soolima
countries, with the view of forming some commercial ar-
rangements. On this journey he found reason to believe
that the source of the Niger lay much farther to the south
than Park had supposed. At Falaba, he was assured that
it-‘might have been reached in three days, had not the Kissi
nation, in whose territory it was situated, been at war with
the Soolimanas, with whom Major Laing then resided.
He was inclined to fix the source of this great river a very
little above the ninth degree of latitude.

The British government were, meantime, indefatigable
in their endeavours to find out other channels for exploring
the interior of Africa. The bashaw of Tripoli, though he
had usurped the throne by violent means, showed a dispo-
sition to improve his country by admitting the arts and
learning of Europe; while the judicious conduct of Consul
Warrington inclined him to cultivate the friendship of Bri-
tain. Through his tributary kingdom of F'ezzan he held close
and constant communication with Bornou and the other
leading states of Central Africa; and he readily undertook
to promote the views of any English expedition which
might proceed in that direction. Such an opportunity was
not to be lost. ‘The usual means were supplied by the mi-
nistry, and the ordinary inducements held forth by the As-
sociation. Mr. Ritchie, a young man of scientific acquire-
ments and zeal for discovery, undertook the direction of this
adventure. Captain Marrayat of the navy proposed to ac-
company him; but, being prevented by private considera-
tions, his place was taken by Lieutenant Lyon, who, as a
naval officer, was expected to be useful in navigating the
Niger when the party should reach that river. The mis-
sion were perfectly well received at Tripoli, and set out on
the 22d March, 1819, for Fezzan, with Mukni, the sultan,
who gave them the most solemn assurances of protection.
This chief, however, was a ruffian, who had made his way
to power by the massacre of the late sovereign and his bro-
ther, and who supported his favour at Tripoli by annual
slave-hunts, which he extended over the whole Desert to the
frontier of Soudan. Thus he brought annually to Tripoli
4000 or 5000 of those unhappy victims, a large proportion of
whom were bestowed in presents to his liege lord. Under

7 2

126 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON; .

such guardianship the mission could not be sure of that
support of which they soon stood very much in need. M,

and surrounded by pools of stagnant water, which re aa
even the natives liable to fever and ague. The membe
of the expedition soon felt its effects, Lieutenant Lyon be-
ing seized with dysentery, and Mr. Ritchie with bilious
fever, under which they languished during the whole sum-
mer. The treacherous Mukni not only withheld all aid,
but studiously prevented others from giving them assistance.
At length Mr. Ritclfie, overwhelmed by disease and anxiety,
died on the 20th November, 1819; after which Mr. Lyon
found himself without the means of penetrating farther
than to the southern frontier of Fezzan. He obtained in-
deed a good deal of information respecting the remoter
countries, which, however, has been rendered less important
by the fuller and more recent intelligence received through
Denham and Clapperton. He passes a very unfavourable
judgment upon the territory of F'ezzan, which he considers
nearly as barren as any part of the surrounding Desert.
The cultivation is confined to a few gardens, into which
water is raised by immense labour from wells of consider-
able depth.

‘CHAPTER XII.
» Journey of Denham and Clapperton.

Noruine could shake the determination of the British go-
vernment to obtain, by some means or other, a competent
degree of information respecting the unknown countries of
Africa. The great favour and influence enjoyed at the
court of Tripoli was still regardéd as a favourable cireum-
starice. It was chiefly due, as already observed, to the pru-
dence and ability of Mr. Warrington, without whose advice
scarcely any thing of importance was transacted. The ba-
shaw was therefore disposed to renew his protection to any
mission which Britain might send. Nor could the protec-

ad

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 127

tion of any sovereign have been more efficient; for the
influence of this petty prince and the terror of his name
a ost unbounded in the greatest kingdoms of Central
A One weapon, the gun, in the hands of his troops,
gi im ali this superiority ; for the remoter nations, from
the Nile to the Atlantic, scarceiy know any other arms be-
sides the spear, the bow, and the javelin. A musket among
those tribes is an object of almost supernatural dread ; indi-
viduals have been seen kneeling down before it, speaking
to it in whispers, and addressing to it earnest supplications.

| With troops thus armed, the bashaw of Tripoli is esteemed
in Northern Africa the most potent monarch on earth ; and
it is a matter of surprise among the natives that he has not
ere now compelled all Europe to embrace the Mohammedan
faith. He could therefore assure the English, that for any
but physical obstacles, they might travel as safely from Tri-
poli to Bornou, as from Edinburgh to London.

Under the confidence inspired by these circumstances,
government prepared another expedition, and without diffi-
culty procured a fresh band of adventurers, who undertook
to brave all its perils. Major Denham, Lieutenant Clap-
perton of the navy, and Dr. Oudney, a naval surgeon pos-
sessing a considerable knowledge of natural history, were
appointed to this service. Without delay they proceeded to
Tripoli, where they arrived on the 18th November, 1821.
They were immediately introduced to the bashaw, whom
they found sitting cross-legged on a carpet, attended by
armed negroes. After treating them to sherbet and coffee,
he invited them to a hawking party, where he appeared
mounted on a milk-white Arabian steed superbly capari-
soned, having a saddle of crimson velvet richly studded
with gold nails, and with embroidered trappings. He was
preceded by six chaoushes, or officers, in white silk robes ;
while two favourite negro slaves, in glittering vest, light
burnouse, and white turban, supported him on each side.
The hunt began on the borders of the Desert, where parties
of six or eight Arabs dashed forwards quick as ‘he sl

fired suddenly, and rushed back withloud cries. The skill
with which they maneuvred their steeds, whirling the lo ne
musket over their heads as they rode at full gallop, appeared
quite surprising.

Although the English were personally well treated at Tri-

128 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

poli, they could not shut their eyes to the reigning barba-
rism. The sheik, Belgassum Khalifa, a fine old Arab, un-
derstood to be high i in the favour of the bashaw, had _ be
one evening at an elegant entertainment in the palace, w
on reaching his own door a pistol-shot wounded him in the
arm, and on his entering the passage a second penetrated
his body. He staggered into the house, denouncing his own
nephew as the author of the assassination. The murderers
rushed in, and completed their crime by stabbing him seven
times with their daggers, while his wife received two wounds
in endeavouring to save him. The three actors in this tra-
gedy instantly fled for protection to the British consulate ;
but Mr. Warrington sent notice to the bashaw, ‘that the
murderers of Khalifa would find no protection under the
flag of England.” That chief, however, either privy to the
crime, or disposed to wink at its commission, expressed his
regret that the guilty persons had found shelter in the con-
sulate ; but added, that he could not think of violating such
a sanctuary. Repeated assurance was given that he might
send any force, or use any means, to drag them from be-
neath a banner that never was disgraced by giving protec-
tion to assassins. The bashaw at length, ashamed of his
apathy, sent sixteen stout fellows, by whom the ruffans
were seized ; and in less than an hour the murderers were
seen hanging from the castle-walls.

The mission, fortified with recommendations to the sul-
tan of Fezzan, now entered upon their long and dreary pil-
grimage to Mourzouk, where they arrived on the 8th April,
1822. This prince received them with courtesy and affa--
bility, but gave himself very little trouble in making provi-
sion for the continuance of their journey. He even inti-
mated his intention of visiting Tripoli, and the necessity of
their remaining till his return. This arrangement was most
disheartening ; nor did they know what reliance to place in
the sincerity of Boo Khalloom, a great merchant, who in-
vited them to accompany an expedition which he was pre-
paring for Soudan. ‘The sultan and he soon after departed,
each with large presents for the bashaw, to intrigue against
one another at the court of Tripoli. After this there was
scarcely a camel left in Fezzan, or any other means of pro-
secuting discovery. Major Denham then saw no alterna-
tive but that he himself should hasten back to Tripoli, and

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 129 .

remonstrate with the bashaw on this apparent violation of
his promise. After atedious journey of twenty days, with
only three attendants, he arrived, and waited on the barba-
rian, who received him with his usual courtesy ; but, not

‘giving that full satisfaction which was expected, the Major

Jost no time in setting sail for England, to lodge a complaint
with his own court. This step was painfully felt by the
bashaw, who sent vessel after vessel, one of which at last
overtook Major Denham while performing quarantine at
Marseilles, and announced that arrangements were actually
made with Boo Khalloom for escorting him to the capital
of Bornou. Accordingly, on the Major’s return to Tri-
poli, he found the Arab chief already on the borders of the
Desert.

This trader, who was now to be a guide to the English
into the immense regions of the south, was a personage of
a very different character from what we in this country can
form any idea of. The African caravan-merchant has no-
thing in common with that respectable class of men who,
seated in counting-houses at London or Amsterdam, direct
the movement of their ships over the ocean, and count the
silent accumulation of their profits. He, on the contrary,
must accompany his merchandise from one extremity to the
other of a great continent, and across its immense deserts,
the scene of much suffering, and frequently of death itself.
Nor is it from a parched wilderness and a burning climate
that he has most to apprehend. His path is’ every where
beset by bands whose trade is plunder, and who find amuse-
ment in assassination. He must therefore have his pro-
perty guarded by armed men, ready to defend with their
blood what his money has purchased. These followers,
peing in continual service, and exposed to frequent fight-
ing, become practised soldiers, and are more than a match
for the roving barbarians who infest the Sahara. Even
the greatest princes view these merchant-chiefs with fear
and jealousy ; and though they contrive to draw consider-
able advantage from their trade, scarcely consider the king-
dom as their own while their troops are within its boun-
daries. The merchants, unhappily, do not confine them-
selves to self-defence ; but, seeing robbery practised on
every side against themselves, begin to retaliate, and soon
find it cheaper, and, according to African ideas, not less

130 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

honourable, to replenish their stores by plunder than by pur-
chase. Slaves, the staple of their trade, are generally ob-
tained by the most atrocious vio.ence, in expeditions called
ghrazzies or felateas, undertaken solely for that guilty pur-
pose; but, by engaging in such enterprises themselves, the
merchants enjoy the benefit, since they reckun it such, of
paying in blood instead of money. Provided they can es-
cape the dangers and casualties to which they are exposed,
their profits are immense, the value of merchandise being
somewhat more than tripled by its conveyance across the
Desert. Thus a few successful journeys enable a man to
acquire a fortune almost princely, and a high degree of in-
fluence in the Barbary States. In short, the merchant, the
warrior, the prince, the thief, are united in this extraordi-
mary character; and he is prepared, according to circum-
stances, to act in one or in all of these capacities. Yet
Boo Khalloom might be reckoned a good specimen of this
evil race. He possessed an enlarged and liberal mind, and
was honourable, and even humane, so far as a slave-mer-
chant could retain these qualities; he was dragged, too,
with reluctance into the most odious parts of his vocation,
—while at home his generosity was such as to make him
~ almost idolized.

Under the guidance of this remarkable personage Major
Denham set forth, with almost the full assurance of reach-
ing those depths of Africa from which no European had
ever yet returned. Little occurred to diversify the usual
monotony of a desert route, till they arrived at Sockna,
where Boo Khalloom, who was fond of display, determined
to make his entrance with almost kingly pomp. He rode a
white Tunisian horse, with gilded saddle and ‘trappings of
scarlet cloth bordered with gold ; his dress consisted of va-
rious caftans and robes of the richest silks, adorned with
gold buttons, lace, and embroidery: the burnouse, a present
from the bashaw, had cost 400 dollars. . The citizens meet-
ing the party with shouts and guns, and the females with
singing and dancing, formed a species of triumphal proces-
sion. Several days were spent at Sockna, Boo Khalloom
being ill, and wishing to try the eftect of various charms
and superstitious remedies. The English, meantime, wit-
nessed a great marriage ceremony, the chief pomp of which
consisted in placing the bride in a basket on the back of a

|

|

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 13%

camel and leading her round the town, while numerous
horsemen galloped up and discharged their muskets quite
close to her head; the honour of which compliment was
understood to compensate for the fear which it could not fail
to occasion.

In journeying onwards to Mourzouk the travellers passed
along the naked sides of the Gebel Assoud, which the Major
crossed now for the third time; but no familiarity could
relieve the sense of dreariness and misery which its aspect
occasioned. A rainy day came as a blessing to the whole
party, especially to the poor slaves, on whom Boo Khalloom
had only in special kindness bestowed one draught of water
in the day to cool their burning thirst. On the 30th Oc-
tober the caravan made its entry into Mourzouk with simi-
lar pomp as into Sockna, amid the shouts of the inhabitants,
whom the chief, by his liberality, had inspired with the
warmest attachment. ‘The Major, however, was much dis-
heartened by not seeing any of his countrymen amid the
joyous crowd; and his fears were confirmed by finding Dr.
Oudney just recovering from a severe attack in the chest,
and Mr. Clapperton in bed the fifteenth day with ague,—
facts which, combined with the unfortunate result of the
last expedition and the sickly look of the natives themselves,
indicated some peculiarly baneful influence, without any
visible cause, in the climate of Mourzouk.

Invalids so severely afflicted were not very fit to begin a
‘ong and laborious journey ; but their ardour was extreme,
and imagining that a change of air would be beneficial, they
contrived, even before Boo Khalloom was ready to set out,
to move forward to Gatrone, leaving Major Denham behind
at Mourzouk. On the 29th November the whole caravan
broke up from that city, and began their journey through
the Desert. ‘They were escorted by nearly every inhabitant, ~
who could muster a horse. The expedition, besides the
English, comprised 210 Arabs, ranged in tens and twenties,
under different chiefs. The most numerous were the
M’Garha, who, to the amount of seventy, came from the
barren shore of the Syrtes. These barbarians enlivened
the route by their traditionary tales, their songs, their ex-
temporary poems, in which all the incidents of the journey
itself were narrated ; in short, by an inexhaustible fund of

wit and vivacity: Their pride, their revenge, their rob-

132 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

beries, did not come into view in their intercourse with the
English, who, being received into their camp, having eaten
of their bread and salt, and being bound in the cord of
friendship, were entitled to all the ‘Tights of hospitality, and
would have been protected even at the hazard of life.

The caravan arrived in due time at Traghan, a small
town containing a fine carpet-manufactory, and ruled by a
marabout, who used the sanctity of his character to main-
tain order and promote the prosperity of the place. Pass-
ing that station they were soon in the heart of the Desert,
where they spent whole days. without secing a living thing,
even a bird or an insect, that did not belong to the caravan
itself. After painful marches under the direct action of the
solar rays, they were delighted by the stillness and beauty
of the night. The moon and stars shone with peculiar
briliiancy ; cool breezes succeeded to the burning heat of
the day ; arid on removing a few inches of the loose hot
soil, a soft and refreshing bed was obtained. Even the
ripple of the blowing sand sounded like a gentle and mur-
muring stream. Every noise was rendered doubly impres-
sive by the deep stillness, as well as by an echo from the
surface of the surrounding waste. The road derived a very
peculiar aspect from the quantity of salt with which the
soil was impregnated ; the clods were often cracked so as
to resemble a ploughed field ; and from the sides of cavities
were hanging beautiful crystals of that mineral! like the
finest frost-work. Sometimes the ground for several miles,
was glazed over, resembling a sheet of ice; but though the
surface was very hard, the interior was brittle, and the salt
fell away in flakes.

The travellers had not proceeded far when the melan-
choly aspect of the Desert was heightened by a succession
of objects which could not be viewed without the deepest
horror. The ground was strewed with the skeletons of
former travellers, who had perished in the attempt to cross
this extensive wilderness. These at first appeared singly,
but afterward increased till they amounted to fifty or sixty
ina day. At Meshroo a hundred were seen together ; and
near the wells at El] Hammar they were found lying in
countless multitudes. One forenoon, as Major Denham
was dozing on horseback, he was awakened by the sound
of something crashing under his horse’s feet, and on look-

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 133

mg down, saw the animal trampling on two perfect human
skeletons. A movement of one of the feet had separated
the scull from the trunk, and driven it forward like a ball.
In some of these remains portions of the flesh and hair
were left, and even the features were still distinguishable.
Two female skeletons lay closely twined together, having
evidently been faithful friends, who had died in each other’s
arms. The Arabs gave little proof of their boasted sensi-
bility in the utter indifference with which they viewed these
dismal objects, driving about the limbs with their firelocks,
passing coarse jests upon the dead, and deriding the sym-
pathy manifested by their English companions. Tp hey told
them these were only blacks, ‘damn their fathers,”—the
barbarous prejudices arising from difference of religion and
lineage having thus extinguished i in their breasts every touch.
of human sympathy. Major Denham appears in one place
to countenance the popular belief that these bodies were the
remains of caravans buried beneath tempests of moving
sand; but none of his facts support this conclusion, or con-
tradict the opinion of Browne, that such victims have in
most instances perished from other causes. They were
lying open and exposed, without even a covering of dust;
and the catastrophe of the largest group was too well known,
having been a body of slaves, the chief booty obtained by
the sultan of Fezzan during his last expedition into Sou-
dan. ‘The troop had left Bornou without an adequate sup-
ply of provisions, which failed entirely before they ap-
proached Mourzouk. ‘That want, or perhaps fatigue, was
the real cause of this destruction was manifest from the -
fact that the sufferers were all negroes, while their Arab
masters had taken care to reserve for themselves the means
of reaching home.
In this route the travellers had on one side the Tibboos,
on the other the Tuaricks, two native tribes, probably of
great antiquity, and having no alliance with the Arab race,
now so widely spread over the continent. The ‘Tibboos
were on the left, and it was through their villages that the
caravan passed. These people live partly on the milk of
their camels, which pick up a scanty subsistence on the few
verdant spots that rise amid the Desert, partly by carry-
ing on a small trade between Miciwnasih and Bomou, in
which they are so busily — that many ~ not spend
N

134 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON-

at home more than four months in the year. They are
black, though without the negro features; the men ugly,
but the young females possessed of some beauty, not wholly
obscured by tte embellishments of coral stuck in the nose,
and of oil streaming over the face. They are besides a
gay, good-humoured, thoughtless race, with all the African
passion for the song andthe dance; which last they prac-
tise gracefully, and with movements somewhat analogous to’
the Grecian. This cheerfulness appears wonderful consi-
dering the dreadful calamity with which they are threatened
every day. Once a year, or oftener, an inroad is made by
their fierce neighbours, the Tuaricks, who spare neither age
nor sex, and sweep away all that comes within their reach.
The cowardly Tibboos dare not even look them in the face;
they can only mount to the top of certain steep rocks with
flat summits and perpendicular sides, near one of which
every village is built. They carry up with them every
thing that can be removed, and this rude defence avails
against stillruder assailants. The savage Tuaricks, again,
were observed by Clapperton and Oudney in a journey to
the westward from Mourzouk, and were found in their pri-
vate character to be frank, honest, and hospitable. The
females are neither immured nor oppressed, as is usual
among rude and Mohammedan tribes, but meet with notice
and respect; indeed, the domestic habits of this nation
have much resemblance to the European. They are a com-
pletely wandering race of shepherds and robbers, holding
in contempt all who live in houses and cultivate the ground ;
yet they are, perhaps, the only native Africans who have
letters and an alphabet, which they inscribe, not on books
and parchments indeed, but on the dark rocks that checker
the surface of their territory; and in places where they
have long resided every stone is seen covered with their
writings.*

Bilma, the capital of the Tibboos, was found a mean town
with walls of earth, but surrounded by numerous lakes
containing the purest salt, the most valuable of all articles
for the commerce of Soudan. . The inhabitants, however,
though deeply mortified, durst not prevent the powerful
Tuaricks from lading their caravans with it, and under-

. * The group in the accompanying plate consists of a Tuarick on his
camel, with a male and female Tibboo standing beside him.

' ia hi wih si) * \ a é Poy
a My era ae gn e ‘ae bi
& r 7 tg & A ’

rn Beg pies
‘aR wine i

Wy ew

Shey

ate tuk’

a

ie

CARRERAS
EN

ASS
Cp.

=

Tuarick on his Camel, with Male and Female Tibboo.—{p. 134. ]

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 135

selling them in all the markets. About a mile beyond Bilma
was a fine spring, spreading around, and forming a little
circle of the richest verdure. This was the last vegetable
life that the discoverers were to see during a long march
of thirteen days. In these wilds, where the constant drift
causes hills to rise or disappear in the course of a night;
all traces of a road are soon obliterated, and the eye of the
traveller is guided only by dark rocks which at certain in-
tervals raise their heads amidthe sterile waste. Sometimes
the sard is formed into hills with perpendicular sides, from
twenty to sixty feet high. These the camels are made to
slide down; in which operation they can only be kept steady
by the driver hanging with all his weight on the tail, other-
wise they would tumble forward, and throw the load over
their heads. ‘Tremendously dreary are these marches ;
as far as the eye can reach, billows of sand bound the pros-
pect.” Whenever the wind was high, volumes of this sub-
stance darkened the air, through which it was sometimes
impossible to attempt a passage.

After a fortnight spent in the Desert, the expedition saw
symptoms of a return to the region of life. There appeared
scattered spots of thin herbage ; little valleys watered by
springs were filled with the shrub called swag, on which
grew delicate berries; small herds of gazelles fed in these
retreats ; even the droves of hyenas indicated the revival of
animal nature. As the travellers advanced, the country im-
proved; at every mile the valleys became more gay and
verdant ; and the creeping vines of the colocynth in full
bloom, with the red flowers of the kossom, converted many
of these spots into a little Arcadia. The freshness of the
air, with the melody of the hundred songsters that were
perched among the creeping plants, whose flowers diffused
an aromatic odour, formed the most delightful contrast to
the desolate region through which they had passed. Here
again were found Tibboos, of the tribe called Gunda, a more
alert and active people than the former; the men still,
uglier, the girls .still handsomer and more delicately
formed. ‘This sept have about 5000 camels, on whose milk
alone they support themselves for half the year, and their
horses for the whole year; the little crop of gussub and
millet being too precious for these animals, which drink
eamels’ milk, sweet or sour, and by this strange diet are

136 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

kept in the highest health and condition. The chief, Mina
Tahr, or the Black Bird, waited upon the party, and was
presented by Boo Khalloom with a coarse scarlet burnouse
and a tawdry silk caftan: these paltry dresses, being the
finest that had ever invested the person of this chieftain,
threw him into ecstasies of delight, which he continue for
hours to testify by joyful shouts and high leaps into the air.
Major Denham’s watch singularly delighted him ; but solely,
as soon appeared, from the pleasure of seeing his own per-
son in the bright metallic case; so that.a very small mirror
was deemed still more precious. |

In this approach to the territory of Soudan the English
began to witness the exercise of mutual plunder between
the caravan and the natives. Every animal which straggled
from the main body was instantly carried off; even a dog
~ had been eaten up, and only the bones left. A herald,
handsomely equipped, who had ,been sent forward to the
sultan of Bornou, was found stripped, and tied naked to a
tree. On the other hand, no sooner did the caravan come
in view of any village than the inhabitants were descried on
the plain beyond in full flight with all their effects. The
Arabs pursued, in indignation only, as they pretended, at
not being allowed to purchase what they wanted; but the
conduct of the poor natives was evidently the result of long
experience ; and Major Denham saw executed on one party
the most rapid process of plunder he ever witnessed. In a
few seconds the camels were eased of their loads, and the poor
women and girls stripped to the skin. Boo Khalloom, on this
and other occasions, interposed, and insisted on restitution ;
but whether he would equally have done so without the
urgent remonstrances of the English appears to be doubtful.

The expedition, now advancing rapidly, entered Kanem,
the most northern province of Bornou, and soon arrived at
Lari, a town of two thousand inhabitants, composed of
clusters of rush-huts, conical at top, and looking like well-
thatched corn-stacks. This place formed a remarkable
stage in their progress ; for, from the rising ground in front
of it was seen stretching out the boundless expanse of the
great interior sea of Africa, the lake Tchad, “ glowing with
the golden rays of the sun.” Major Denham, who saw
here the key to his grand scheme of discovery, hastened
down to the shores of this mighty water. These were

~

137

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

%

WW

Bee
l)
iA

\

I).
sae '

SS

fens

VY
SZ NA

« PLOY

wy, Pesoddng

C
eanowepy

(diy

Aint”

| }
Wu.

BUIUS

Jo

@ —qooet

E\\ i TS fe)

H

do
rit
Be

©
Lo]
Omen

-
de
ne

umNseye g.

———_— seo

Pe ng, “PIO

ae ae

a

‘SaLNOU

. pue weyusg

iS

yepuny

As) SO, a hee

oo
eoUTAOId ® ey

Not

—
=
=

a

oF oor.
yo som...

ee"

Nd

138 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

darkened with the varied and beautiful plumage of ducks,
geese, pelicans, and cranes four or five feet high, immense
spoonbills of snowy whiteness, yellow-legged plovers, with
numerous unknown waterfowl, sporting around, and quietly
feeding at half pistol-shot. It is not tobe wondered at, that
Major Denham should have felt reluctant to invade the pro-
found tranquillity of these feathered tribes, and betray the
confidence with which they received him. At last, over-
coming his scruples, he took up his gun, and soon filled a
large basket. It was evident here, that remarkable changes
in the bed of the Tchad had recently taken place ; for,
though this was not the rainy season, long stalks of the
grain called gussub were growing amid the waters on ground
formerly dry.

The caravan now marched along the shores of the lake,
and arrived in two days at Woodie, a large town, the first
which was found thoroughly negro. The inhabitants lived
in sluggish plenty, on the produce of a fertile country, with-
out any attempt to obtain either elegancies or luxuries. It
was resolved that the caravan should pause here, till a mes-
senger could be sent forward to obtain for them invitation,
or permission, to present themselves before the sheik of
Bornou. ‘The political state of that country was at this
time somewhat singular. ‘Twenty years before it had been
overrun and completely conquered, with the most dreadful
devastation, by the Fellatas, a western people, to whose em-
pire Bornou seemed to have been finally annexed. There
still remained, however, a spirit in the people which spurned
at a foreign yoke. ‘The present sheik, a native of Kanem,
of humble birth, but of superior talents and energy, rallied
round him a band of bold spearmen, and, animating them by
a pretended vision of the prophet, hoisted the green flag,
and attacked the invaders. His success was such, that n
- ten months the Fellatas were completely driven out of Bor- |
nou, which they had never since re-entered, though desul-
tory hostilities were still waged between the two nations.
This leader, idolized by the army who had conquered under
him, was now the real master of the country, yet the reve-
rence of the nation for their ancient line of kings was too
deep to allow the legitimate heir to be wholly superseded.
He was drawn forth from obscurity, received the title of sul-
tan, and was established in empty pomp at the city of

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 139

Birnie ; while the successful soldier, under an humbler name,
retained in his own hands all the real power of the kingdom.

After five days an invitation arrived from the sheik to
visit him at Kouka, for which city the travellers immediately
departed. In their way they passed the Yeou, the first river
of any description which had crossed their path in this long
journey, exciting considerable interest from being for a mo-
ment supposed to be the Niger flowing from Timbuctoo:
The stream was fifty yards broad, and proceeded with some
rapidity eastward into the Tchad: im the wet season its
breadth became twice as great. On the bank, for the con-
venience of passengers, lay two large canoes, rudely put to-
gether, constructed of planks fastened by cords, and having
the openings stuffed with straw. The men and goods were
ferried over on these rafts, while the horses and camels,
having their heads fastened to them, swam across.

In approaching Kouka Major Denham experienced con-
siderable emotion, in consequence of the contradictory re-
ports which he heard respecting the array and aspect of
this great central court cf Africa. Some told him that the
sheik was surrounded by a mere handful of half-armed, half-
naked negroes, fit only for plunder; while, according to
others, he was at the head of a numerous cavalry, highly
equipped and well-disciplined. The Major pressed eagerly
forward before the main body, and, emerging from the
forest, had his curiosity gratified by seeing a body of several
thousand horse drawn up in line, and extending on each
side as far as the eye could reach. He now awaited the
coming up of the Arabs; at sight of whom the Bornou
troops, who had previously stood immoveable, raised a
mighty shout or yell, which rent the air, followed by a sound
equally loud of rude martial music. Then, forming de-
tached parties, they galloped up full speed to the strangers,
never pausing till they almost touched the horses’ heads,
when they suddenly wheeled round and returned, exclaim-
- ing, “Blessing! blessing! sons of your country! sons of

your country!” They had soon completely surrounded the
party, and wedged them in so close, waving their spears
over their heads, that it was impossible for the strangers to
move. Boo Khalloom had nearly lost all patience at this
vehement and incommodious welcome ; but at length Barca
Gana, the commander-m-chief, made his appearance, re-

ee —s 7 w oe ~— ee se
»
y

140 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

stored order, and caused a way to be opened, by which t’.e
caravan, though somewhat slowly, at length made its wig
to the city.
_ But, after their arrival at Kouka, symptoms of jealousy
appeared, and only twelve of the principal persons, the Eng-
lish included, were allowed to enter. They were led
through a wide street, lined with spearmen, to the door of
the sheik’s residence. Here the principal courtiers came
out in succession, and welcomed the party with cries of
‘* Barca! Barca!” but as no one invited them to go in, the
wrath of Boo Khalloom, who held himself scarcely inferior
to the sheik, was kindled, and he declared that, unless im-
mediately admitted, he would return to his tent. A chief
merely waved his hand as a signal for patience ; but at last
Barca Gana appeared, and invited the Arab leader to enter
alone. Another half-hour elapsed ere the gates were again
opened, and the four Englishmen were called. They found,
on the present as well as on other occasions, the etiquette
of this barbarian court extremely rigid, and enforced too in
a manner the most rough and unceremonious. ‘They were
allowed to walk only one by one, and, when thought to be
going too fast, the guards grasped them by the leg so ab-
ruptly that they could with difficulty avoid falling flat for-
ward ; and when it was time to stop, instead of their being
told so, spears were crossed before them, and the palm of
the hand applied to their breast. At the close of all this
ceremony, they found the sheik quietly seated on a carpet,
plainly dressed, in a small dark room, ornamented solely with
guns and pistols, which he had received in presents from
crowned heads, and esteemed the most rare and precious of
decorations. He appeared about forty or forty-five years of
age, and his countenance was pleasing and expressive. He
inquired their object in visiting Bornou; when, being in-
formed that they had come merely to see the country, and
to give an account of its appearance, produce, and people,
he engaged to forward their views, and even to gratify their
wishes to the utmost of his power. Such motives, however,
arm re proved entirely incomprehensible to his illiterate
mind. .
Major Denham next day waited again on the sheik and
delivered his presents. A double-barrelled gun and twe pis-
tals, with powder-flask, and shot-cases, were examined by the

-

——

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 14]

chief with the most minute-attention ; the other gifts, con-
sisting of fine cloths, spices, and porcelain, were no sooner
produced than the slaves carried them off. The African
was particularly gratified on being told that the king of Eng-
land had heard of him, and said, turning to his captains,
‘This must be in consequence of our having defeated the
Begharmis;” upon which Bagah Furby, a grim old soldier,
who had made a figure in that war, came forward and asked,
“ Did he ever hear of me?” Major Denham scrupled not to
answer “ Certainly ;”» when the whole party instantly called
out, “Oh! the king of England must be a great man.”

The Major, in the course of his residence at Kouka, had
frequent opportunities of visiting the sheik. One day he
received a message that he must come instantly and ex-
hibit a musical box playing tunes by itself, which the other
understood to be in his possession. This great warrior,
who had never before shown any interest unless about grave
concerns, was quite enchanted on hearing its performance,
and raised shouts of delight and astonishment. He exa-
mined minutely the different parts of the mechanism, de-
claring he would willingly give a thousand dollars in ex-
change for it. The Major, unable to misunderstand so
broad a hint, presented the box to his highness. The dis-
play of sky-rockets also caused the utmost amazement and
joy, and was even employed to strike the enemies of the
sheik with superstitious awe. Finding that our traveller
could speak Arabic, and give much information not attain-
able from any other quarter, Barca Gana became fond of
his conversation, and invited him to pay frequent visits.

It remained that Major Denham should be introduced to
the sultan in his royal residence at Birnie, where all the
state and pomp of the kingdom, with none of its real power,
were concentrated. On the 2d March, the English ac-
companied Boo Khalloom to that city, and, on their arrival
there, the following morning was fixed for the interview.
Fashion, even in the most refined European courts, does
not always follow the absolute guidance of reason or taste,
and her magic power is often displayed in converting de-
formities into beauties ; but there is certainly no court of
which the taste is so absurd, grotesque, or monstrous, as
that to which Major Denham was now introduced. An
enormous protruding belly and a huge misshapen head are
the two features without which it is vain to aspire to the

142 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

rank of a courtier or of a fine gentleman. This form,
valued probably as a type of abundance and luxury, is es-
teemed so essential, that, where nature has not bestowed,
and the most excessive feeding and cramming cannot
produce it, wadding is employed, and a false belly pro-
duced, which, in riding, appears to hang over the pummel
of the saddle. Turbans also are wrapped round the head,
in fold after fold, till it appears swelled on one side to the
most unnatural dimensions, and only one-half of the face
remains visible. The factitious bulk of the lords of Bornou
is still farther augmented by drawing round them, even in
this burning climate, ten\ or twelve successive robes of
cotton or silk, while the whole is covered over with num-
berless charms enclosed in green leather cases. Yet under
all these encumbrances they do sometimes mount and take
the field; /but the idea of such unwieldy hogsheads being
of any avail in the day of battle appeared altogether ridi-
culous,—and it proved accordingly, that, on such high oc-,
casions, they merely exhibited themselves as ornaments,
without making even a show of encountering the enemy.
With about 300 of this puissant chivalry before and
around him, the sultan was himself seated near the garden-
door in a sort of cane basket covered with silk, and his
face entirely shaded beneath a turban of more than the usual

LARC
; i) %

| Mi
HH 1
hy

‘| |

eae’

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON, 143

magnitude. The presents were silently deposited ; nothing
passed ; and the courtiers, tottering beneath the weight of
their turbans and their bellies, could not display that punc-
tilions activity which had been so annoying at the palace
of the sheik. This was all that was ever seen of the
sultan of Bornou. The party then set out for Kouka,
passing, on their way, through Angornou, the largest city
in the kingdom, containing at least 30,000 inhabitants.
During his residence at Kouka and Angornou, Major
Denham frequently attended the markets, where, besides
the proper Bornouese, he saw the Shouaas, an Arab tribe,
who are the chief breeders of cattle; the Kanemboos from
the north, with their hair neatly and tastefully plaited ; and
the Musgow, a southern clan of the most savage aspect.
A loose robe or shirt, of the cotton cloth of the country,
often fine and beautifully died, was the universal dress ;
and high rank was indicated by six or seven of these worn
one above another. Ornament was studied chiefly in
plaiting the hair, in attaching to it strings of brass or silver
beads, in inserting large pieces of amber or coral into the
nose, the ear, and the lip ; and when to these was added a face
streaming with oil, the Bornouese belle was fully equipped
for conquest. Thus adorned, the wife or daughter of a
rich Shouaa might be seen entering the market in full
style, bestriding an ox, which she managed dexterously by
a leathern thong passed through the nose, and whose un-
wieldly bulk she contrived even to torture into something
like capering and curvetting. Angornou is the chief mar-
ket, and the crowd there is sometimes immense, amounting
often to eighty or a hundred thousand individuals. All the
produce of the country is bought and sold in open market ;
for shops and warehouses do not enter into the system of
African traffic. There is displayed an abundance of their
principal grain, called gussub, a good deal*of wheat and rice,
an ample store of bullocks, and no.small number of sheep and
fowls ; but not a vegetable except a few onions, nor a sin-
gle fruit of any kind,—the Bornouese not having attained
to the production of these elegant luxuries. The objects
most prized and rare are pieces of amber, coral, and brass,
to adorn the countenances of the females; these are sold
readily, and paid in money, while other articles are only
exchanged for cloth. Among other rarities are sometimes

(144 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

-offered young lions, to be kept as domestic favourites. The
Major found one of them enclosed by a circle of spectators,
and was invited to step up and stroke it on the mane. He
was about to comply, though with sensations which he
admits himself unable to describe, when the animal sud-
denly brushed past him, broke through the circle, and
rushed to another station. ‘The sheik was afterward kind
enough to send him a young lion as a pet, which the Major
politely returned, expressing regret at not being able to
find room for so fine a specimen of African zoology.
Bornou, taken altogether, forms an extensive plain,
stretching 200 miles along the western shore of the im-
mense lake already mentioned, and nearly the same dis-
tance inland. This sea periodically changes its bed in an
extraordinary manner. During the rains, when its tri-
butary rivers pour in thrice the usual quantity of water, it
inundates an extensive tract of country, from which it re-
tires in the dry season. This space, then overgrown with
dense underwood, and with grass double the height of a
man, contains a motley assemblage of wild beasts,—lions,
panthers, hyenas, elephants, and serpents of extraordinary
form and bulk. ‘These monsters, while undisturbed in
this mighty den, remain tranquil, or war only with ‘each
other; but when the lake swells, and its waters rush in,
they of necessity seek refuge among the abodes of men, to
whom they prove the most dreadful scourge. Not only the
cattle, but the slaves tending the grain, often fall victims;
they even rush in large bodies into the towns. The rest
of the country, placed beyond the reach of this annual in-
undation, is in many places very fertile; and cultivation is
so limited that land may always be had in any quantity by
him who has slaves to employ upon it. This service is
performed by female captives from Musgow, who, aiding
their native ugliness by the insertion of a large piece of
silver into the upper-lip, which throws it entirely out of
shape, are coveted in no other view than for the quantity
of hard work which they can execute. The processes of
agriculture are extremely simple. Theironly fine manufac-
ture is that of tobes, or vestments of cotton skilfully woven
and beautifully died, but still not equal to those of Soudan.
In every other handicraft they are very inexpert,—even in
works of iron, whichare of the greatest use toa martial people.

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 145

The Bormouese have, however, an ingenious mode, ré-
presented in the accompanying plate, of fishing with a very

Kh

|

wf

:

| a
SWF Ss es
SF LS SS MM!

simple apparatus. They take two large gourds, and fasten
them at each end to a stem of bamboo. The fisherman
seats himself upon this machine, floats with the current,
and throws his net. On drawing it up, he lays it before
him, stuns the fish with a species of mace, and piles them

into the gourds. They are afterward dried, end conveyed
over the country to a considerable distance.

The Bornouese are complete negroes both im form and
feature ; they are ugly, simple, and good-natured, but des-
titute of all intellectual culture. Only a few of the great
fights, or doctors, of whom the sheik was one, can read the
Koran. A ‘‘ great writer,” indeed, is held in still higher
estimation than with us; but his compositions consist only
of words written on scraps of paper, to be enclosed in cases,
and worn as amulets. They are then supposed to defend
their possessor against every danger, to act as charms to
destroy his enemies, and to be the main instrument in the
cure ofall diseases. For this last purpose they are aided
only by a few simple applications ; yet the Bornou practice
is said to be yery successful, either through the power of
imagination, or owing to wae excellent constitutions. In

146 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

the absence of all refined pleasures, various rude sports aré
pursued with eagerness, and almost with fury. The most
favourite is wrestling, which the chiefs do not practise in
person, but train their slaves to exhibit in it as our jockeys
do game-cocks, taking the same pride in their prowess and
victory. Nations are often pitched against each other, the
Musgowy and the Begharmi being the most powerful.
Many of them are extremely handsome and of gigantic -
size, and hence the contests between them are truly ter-
tible. Their masters loudly cheer them on, offering

high premiums for victory, and sometimes threatening i in-
stant death in case of defeat. They place their trust, not
in science, but in main strength and rapid movements.
Occasionally the wrestler, eluding his adversary’s vigilance,
seizes him by the thigh, lifts him up into the air, and dashes
him against the ground. When the match is decided, the
victor is greeted with loud plaudits by the spectators, some
of whom even testify their admiration by throwing to him
presents of fine cloth. He then kneels before his master,
who not unfrequently bestows upon him a robe worth thirty
or forty dollars, taken perhaps from his own person. Death
or maiming, however, is no unfrequent result of these en<
counters. ‘The ladies, even of rank, engage in another
very odd species of contest. Placing themselves back to
back, they cause particular parts to strike together with the
most violent collision, when she who maintains her equili-
brium, while the other lies stretched on the ground, is pro-
claimed victor with loud cheers. In this conflict the girdle
of beads worn by the more opulent females very frequently
bursts, when these ornaments are seen flying about in every
direction. ‘To these elegant recreations is added gaming,
always the rage of uncultivated minds. Their favourite —
game is one rudely played with beans, by means of holes
made in the sand.

Boo Khalloom, having despatched his affairs in Bornou,
Wished to turn his journey to some farther account, and
proposed an expedition into the more wealthy and commer-
cial region of Houssa or Soudan; but the eager wishes of
his followers pointed to a different object. They called
upon him to lead them into the mountains of Mandara in
the south, to attack a village of the kerdies, or. unbelievers,
and carry off the people as slaves to Fezzan. He long

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 147

stood out against this nefarious proposal; but the sheik,
who alsc had his own views, took part against him; even
his own brother joined the malecontents, and at length there
appeared no other mode in-which he could return with
equal credit and profit. Influenced by these inducements,
he suffered his better judgment to be overpowered, and de-
termined to conduct his troop upon this perilous and
guilty excursion. Major Denham, allowing his zeal for
discovery to overcome other considerations, contrived, not-
withstanding the prohibition of the sheik, to be one of the
party. They were accompanied by Barca Gana, the prin-
cipal general, a negro of huge strength and great courage,
along with other warriors, and a large body of Bornou
cavalry. These last are a fine military body in point of ex-
ternal appearance. Their persons are covered with iron
plate and mail, and they manage, with surprising dexterity,
their little active steeds, which are also supplied with de-
fensive armour. They have one fault only, but that a se-
rious one,—they cannot stand the shock of an enemy.
While the contest continues doubtful, they hover round as
spectators, ready, should the tide turn against them, to spur
on their coursers to a rapid flight; but if they see their
friends victorious, and the enemy turning their backs, they
come forward and display no small vigour in pursuit and
plunder.

The road that led to Mandara formed a continued ascent
through a fertile country which contained some populous
towns. The path being quite overgrown with thick and
prickly underwood, twelve pioneers went forward with long
poles, opening a track, pushing back the branches, and
giving warning to beware ofholes. These operations they
accompanied with loud praises of Barca Gana, calling out,
—‘* Who is in battle like the rolling of thunder? Barca
Gana. In battle, who spreads terror around him like the
buffalo in his rage? Barca Gana.” Even the chiefs on this
expedition carried no provisions except a paste of rice, flour,
and honey, with which they contented themselves, unless
when sheep could be procured; in which case half the ani-
mal, roasted over a frame-work of wood, was placed on the
table, and the sharpest dagger present was employed in cut-
ting it into large pieces, to be eaten without bread or salt.
At length they approached Mora, the capital of Mandara.

143 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

This was another kingdom which the energy of :ts present
sultan had rescued from the yoke of the Fellata empire;
and the strong position of its capital, enclosed by lofty ridges
of hills, had enabled it to defy repeated attacks. It consists
of a fine plain, bordered on the south by an immense and
almost interminable range of mountains. The eminences
directly in front were not quite so lofty as the hills of Cum-
berland, but bold, rocky, and precipitous, and distant sum-—
mits appeared towering much higher, and shooting up a line
of sharp pinnacles resembling the needles of Mont Blanc.
It was reported, that two months were required to cross
their greatest breadth and reach the other side, where they
rose ten times higher, and were called large moon moun-
tains. They there overlooked the plain of Adamowa,
through which the Quolla (or Niger) was said te flow from
the westward. The hills immediately in view were thickly
clustered with villages perched on their sides and even on
their tops, and were distinctly seen from the plain of Man-
dara. They were occupied by half-savage tribes, whom the
ferocious bigotry of the nations occupying the low country
branded as pagans, and whom they claimed a right to plun-
der, seize, and drive in crowds for sale to the markets of
Fezzan and Bornou. ‘ The fires, which were visible in the
different nests of these unfortunate beings, threw a glare
upon the bold rocks and blunt promontories of granite by
which they were surrounded, and produced a picturesque
and somewhat awful appearance.” A baleful joy gleamed
in the visage of the Arabs as they eyed these abodes of their
future victims, whom they already fancied themselves
driving in bands across the Desert. A kerdy village to .
plunder was all their cry, and Boo Khalloom doubted not
that he would be able to gratify their wishes. Their com-
mon fear of the Fellatas had united the sultan of Mandara
in close alliance with the sheik, to whom he had lately mar-
ried his daughter; and the nuptials had been celebrated by
a great slave-hunt among the mountains, when, after a
dreadful struggle, three thousand captives, by their tears
and bondage, furnished out the materials of a magnificent
matriage-festival.

The expedition obtained a reception quite as favourable
as had been expected. In approaching the capital they
were met by the sultan with 500 Mandara horse, wha,

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 149

charging full speed, wheeled round them with the same
threatening movements which had been exhibited at Bor-
nou. The horses were of a superior breed, most skilfully
managed, and covered with cloths of various eoloisne! as well
as with skins of the leopard and tiger-cat. This cavalry
made of course a very brilliant appearance ; but the Major
did not yet know that their valour was exactly on a level
with that of their Bornou allies. The party were then
escorted to the capital, amid the music of long pipes like
clarionets, and of two immense trumpets. They were in-
troduced next day. The mode of approaching the royal re-
sidence is to gallop up to the gate with a furious speed, which
often causes fatal accidents ; and on this occasion a man was
ridden down and killed on the spot. The sultan was found
in a dark-blue tent, sitting on a mud-bench, surrounded by
about two hundred attendants, handsomely arrayed in
silk and cotton robes.. He was an intelligent little man,
about fifty years old, with a beard dyed sky-blue. Courteous
salutations were exchanged ; during which he steadily eyed
Major Denham, concerning whom he at last inquired ; and
the traveller was advantageously introduced as belonging to
a powerful distant nation, allies of the bashaw of Tripoli.
At last, however, came the fatal question,—‘“‘ Is he Moslem ?
—La! la!—no! no!—What! has the great bashaw Caffre
friends ?”—-Every eye was instantly averted; the sun of
Major Denham’s favour was set; and he was never more
allowed to enter the palace.

The bigotry of this court seems to have vorpeadled even
the usual bitterness of the African tribes, and our traveller
had to undergo a regular persecution, carried on especially
by Malem Chadily, the leading fighi or doctor of the court.
As Major Denham was showing to the admiring chiefs the
mode of writing with a pencil, and effacing it with Indian
rubber, Malem wrote some words of the Koran with such
force that the rubber could not wholly remove the traces of
them. He then exclaimed with triumph,‘ They are the
words of God, delivered to his prophet; I defy you to erase
them.” The Major was then called upon to acknowledge
this great miracle; and, as his countenance still expressed
incredulity, he was viewed with looks of such mingled con-

_tempt and indignation as induced him to retire. Malem,

however, again assailed him with the assurance that this
N 2

150 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. —

was only one of the many miracles which he could show
as wrought by the Koran; imploring him to turn, and para-
dise would be his, otherwise nothing could save him from
eternal fire. “Oh!” said he, “while sitting in the third
heaven I shall see you in the midst of the flames, crying out
to your friend Barca Gana and myself for a drop of water ;
but the gulf will be between us :” his tears then flowed pro-
fusely. The Major, taking the general aside, entreated to
be relieved from this incessant persecution; but Gana
assured him that the fighi was a great and holy man, to
whom he ought to listen. He then held out not only para-
dise, but honours, slaves, and wives of the first families, as
gifts to be lavished on him by the sheik if he would renounce |
his unbelief. Major Denham asked the commander, what
would be thought of himself if he should go to England and
turn Christian? ‘‘ God forbid!” exclaimed he; * but how
can you compare our faiths ; mime would lead you to para-
dise, while yours would bring me to hell. Not a word
more.”—Nothing appears to have annoyed the stranger
more than to be told that hé was of the same faith with the
kerdies or savages ; little distinction being made between
any who denied the Koran. After a long discussion of this
question, he thought the validity of his reasoning would be
admitted, when he could point to a party of those wretches
devouring a dead horse, and appealed to Boo Khalloom if
he had ever seen the English do the same; but to this,
which was not after all a very deep theological argument,
the Arab replied,—“ I know they eat the flesh of swine,
and, God knows, that is worse.” Grant me patience,”
exclaimed I to myself,—“ this is almost too much to bear
and to remain silent.”

The unfortunate kerdies, from the moment that they
saw Arab tents in the valley of Mandara, knew the dread-
ful calamity which awaited them. ‘To avert it, and to pro-
pitiate the sultan, numerous parties came down with pre-
sents of honey, asses, and slaves. Finally appeared the
Musgow, a more distant and savage race, mounted on
small fiery steeds, covered only with the skin of a goat or
leopard, and with necklaces made of the teeth of their ene-
mies. They threw themselves at the feet of the sultan,
casting sand on their heads, and uttering the most piteous
cries. The monarch, apparently moved by these gifts and

ad

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 151

_ ‘entreaties, began to intimate to Boo Khalloom his hopes
that these savages might by gentle means be reclaimed and
led to embrace the true faith. These hopes were held by
the latter in the utmost derision ; and he privately assured
Major Denham that nothing would more annoy this devout
Mussulman than to see them fulfilled, whereby he must
have forfeited all right to drive these unhappy creatures in
crowds to the markets of Soudan and Bornou. In fact,
_poth the sultan and the sheik hada much deeperaim. Every
effort was used to induce Boo Khalloom to engage in the
attack of some strong Fellata posts, by which the country
was hemmed in; and as the two monarchs viewed the
Arabs with extreme jealousy, it was strongly suspected
that their defeat would not have been regarded as a public
calamity. The royal councils were secret and profound,
and it was not known what influences worked upon Boo
Khalloom. On this occasion unfortunately he was mas-
tered by his evil genius, and consented to the proposed
attack ; but as he came out ana ordered his troops to pre-
pare for marching, his countenance bore such marks of
trouble that the Major asked if all went well ? to which he
hurriedly answered, “ Please God.” ‘The Arabs, however,
who at all events expected plunder, proceeded with alacrity.

The expedition set out next morning, and, after passing
through a beautiful plain, began to penetrate the mighty
chain of mountains which form the southern border of the
kingdom. Alpine heights, rising around them in rugged
magnificence and gigantic grandeur, presented scenery
which our traveller had never seen surpassed. ‘The passes
of Hairey and of Horza, amid a superb amphitheatre of
hills, closely shut in by overhanging cliffs, more than two
thousand feet high, were truly striking. Here, for the first
time in Africa, did nature appear to the English to revel in
the production of vegetable life. The trees were covered
with luxuriant and bright green foliage ; and their trunks
were hidden by a crowd of parasitical plants, whose aro-
matic blossoms perfumed the air. There was also an
abundance of animal life of a less agreeable description :
three scorpions were killed in the tent; and a fierce but
beautiful panther, more than eight feet long, just as he had
gorged himself by sucking the blood of a newly-killed negro,
was attacked and speared. The sultan and Barca Gana

a

152 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. |

were attended by a considerable body of Bornou and Man-
dara cavalry, whose brilliant armour, martial aspect, and
skilful horsemanship gave confidence to the European
officer, who had not yet seen them put to the proof.

It was the third day when the expedition came in view of
the Fellatatown of Dirkulla. The Arabs, supported by Barca
Gana and about a hundred spearmen, marched instantly to
the attack, and carried first that place, and then a smaller
town beyond it, killing all who had not time to escape.
The enemy, however, then intrenched themselves in a
third and stronger position, called Musfeia, enclosed by
high hills, and fortified in front by numerous swamps and
palisades. This was likewise attacked, and all its defences
forced. The guns of the Arabs spread terror, while Barca
Gana threw eight spears with his own hand, every one of
which took effect. It was thought, that had the two bodies
of cavalry made even a show of advancing, the victory would
have been at once decided; but Major Denham was much
surprised to see those puissant warriors keeping carefully
under cover behind a hill on the opposite side of the stream,
where not an arrow could reach them. The Fellatas, see-.
ing that their antagonists were only a handful, rallied on
the tops of the hills, were joined by new troops, and turned
round. Their women behind, cheering them on, .conti-
nually supplied fresh arrows, and rolled down fragments of

-rock on the assailants. ‘These arrows were fatal; they
were tipped with poison, and wherever they pierced the body
in a few hours became black, blood gushed from every
orifice, and the victim expiredin agony. The condition of |
the Arabs soon became alarming ; scarcely a man was left
unhurt, and their horses were dying under them. Boo
Khalloom and his charger were both wounded with poi-
soned arrows. As soon as the Fellatas saw the Arabs
waver, they dashed in with their horse; at sight of which
all the heroic squadrons of Bornou and Mandara put spurs
to their steeds, the sultan at their head, and the whole be-
came one mass of confused and tumultuous flight. Major
Denham saw too late the peril into which he had wantonly
plunged. His horse, pierced to the shoulder-bone, could
scarcely support his weight ; but the cries of the pursuing
Fellatas still urged him forward. At last the animal fell
twice, and the second time threw him against a tree, then,

4

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 153

frightened by the noise, behind, started up and ran off.
The Fellatas were instantly up, when four of his compa-
nions were stabbed beside him, uttering the most frightful
cries. He himself was fully prepared for the same fate ;
but happily his clothes formed a valuable booty, through
which the savages were loath to run their spears. After in-
flicting some slight wounds, therefore, they stripped him to
the skin, and forthwith began to quarrei about the plunder.
While they were thus busied, he contrived to slip away,
and though hotly pursued, and nearly overtaken, succeeded
in reaching a mountain-stream gliding at the bottom of a
deep and precipitous ravine. Here he had snatched the
young branches issuing from the stump of a large over-
hanging tree, in order to let himself down into the water,
when, beneath his hand, a large [:ffa, the most dangerous
serpent in this country, rose from its coil, as in the very
act of darting upon him. Struck with horror, Major Den-
ham lost all recollection, and fell headlong into the water ; -
but the shock revived him, and, with three strokes of his arm,
he reached the opposite bank, and felt himself for the mo-
ment in safety. Running forward, he was delighted to see
his friends Barca Gana and Boo Khalloom; but amid the
cheers with which they were endeavouring to rally their
troops, and the cries of those who were falling under the
Fellata spears, he could not for some time make himself
heard. Then Maramy, a negro appointed by the sheik to
attend on him, rode up and took him on his own horse.
Boo Khalloom ordered a burnouse to be thrown over him,—
very seasonably, for the burning sun had begun to blister
his naked body. Suddenly, however, Maramy called out,
‘See, see! Boo Khalloom is dead!” and that spirited
chief, overpowered by the wound of a poisoned arrow,
dropped from his horse, and spoke no more. The others
now thought only of pressing their flight, and soon reached
a stream, where they refreshed themselves by copious
draughts, and a halt was made to collect the stragglers.
Major Denham here fell into a swoon; during which, as
he afterward learned, Maramy complained that the jaded
horse could scarcely carry the stranger forward, when Barca
Gana said,— By the head of the prophet ! believers enough
have breathed their last to-day ; why should we concern

urselves about a Christian’s death?’ Malem Chadily,

ay

A eyeEE— =

154 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

however, so bitter as a theological opponent, showed now

the influence of a milder spirit, and said,—‘* No, God has
preserved him; let us not abandon him;” and Maramy
declared,—“‘ His heart told him what to do.” They there-
fore moved on slowly till about midnight, when they passed
the Mandara frontier in a state of severe suffering ; but the
Major met with much kindness from a dethroned prince,
Mai Meegamy, who, seeing his wounds festering under the
rough woollen cloak which formed his only covering, took
off his own trousers and gave them to him.

The Arabs had lost forty-five of their number, besides
their chief; the rest were in a miserable plight, most of
them wounded, some mortally, and all having lost their
camels and the rest of their property. Renouncing their
ae they were obliged to supplicate from Barca Gana a

andful of corn to keep them from starving. The sultan
of Mandara, in whose cause they had suffered, treated them
with the utmost contumely, which perhaps they might de-
serve, but certainly not from him. Deep sorrow was after-
ward felt in Fezzan when they arrived in this deplorable
condition and reported the fall of their chief, who was there
almost idolized. A national song was composed on the
occasion, which the following extract will show to be
marked by great depth of feeling, and not altogether devoid ,
of poetical beauty :— ’

“Oh! trust not to the gun and the sword! ‘The spear
of the unbeliever prevails !

** Boo Khalloom, the good and the brave, has fallen! Who
shall now be safe? Even as the moon among the little
stars, so was Boo Khalloom among men! Where shall
Fezzan now look for her protector? Men hang their heads
in sorrow, while women wring their hands, rending the air
with their cries! Asa shepherd is to his flock, so was Boo
Khalloom to Fezzan ! }

“Give him songs! Give him music! What words can
equal his praise? His heart was as large as the desert!
His coffers were like the rich overflowings from the udder
« the she-camel, comforting and nourishing those around

im! 3 : |

‘“‘ Even as the flowers without rain perish in the fields, so

will the Fezzaners droop; for Boo Khalloom 1eturns no

more !

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 155

‘‘His body lies in the land of the heathen! The poi
soned arrow of the unbeliever prevails !

‘Oh! -trust not to the gun and the sword! The spear
of the heathen conquers! Boo Khalloom, the good and
the brave, has fallen! Who shall now be safe?”

The sheik of Bornou was considerably mortified by the
result of this expedition, and the miserable figure made by
his troops, though he sought to throw the chief blame on
the Mandara part of the armament. He now invited the
Major to accompany an expedition against the Mungas, a
rebel tribe on his outer border, on which occasion he was
to employ his native band of Kanemboo spearmen, who, he
trusted, would redeem the military reputation of the mo-
narchy. Major Denham was always ready to go wherever
he had a chance of seeing the manners and scenery of Af-
rica. The sheik took the field, attended by his armour-
bearer, his drummer fantastically dressed in a straw hat
with ostrich feathers, and followed by three wives, whose
heads and persons were wrapped up in brown silk robes,
and each led by a eunuch. He was preceded by five green

‘and red flags, on each of which were extracts from the

Koran, written in letters of gold. Etiquette even required
that the sultan should follow with his unwieldy pomp,
naving a harem, and attendance much more numerous;
while frumfrums, or wooden trumpets, were continually
sounded before him. This monarch is too dignified to fight
in person; but his guards, the swollen and overloaded
figures formerly described, enveloped in multiplied folds,
and groaning beneath the weight of ponderous amulets,
produced themseives as warriors, though manifestly unfit to
face any rea] danger. |
The route lay along the banks of the river Yeou, called
also Gambarou, through a country naturally fertile and
delightful, but presenting a dismal picture of the deso-
lation occasioned by African warfare. The expedition
passed through upwards of thirty towns, completely de-
stroyed by the Fellatas in their last inroad, and of which
all the inhabitants were either killed or carried into slavery.
These fine plains were now overgrown with forests and
thickets, in which grew tamarind and other trees, producing
delicate fruits; while large bands of monkeys, called by
Arabs “enchanted men,” filled the woods with their cries.

=

156 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

Here, too, was found Old Birnie, the ancient but now deso-
late capital, evidently much larger than any of the present
cities, covering five or six miles with its ruins. They passed
also Gambarou, formerly the favourite residence of the
sultans, where the remains of a palace and of two mosques
gave an idea of civilization superior to any thing that had
yet been seen in Interior Africa. | There were left in this
country only small detached villages, the inhabitants of
which remained fixed to them by local attachment, in spite
of constant predatory inroads by the Tuaricks, who carried
off their friends, their children, and cattle. They have
recourse to one mode of defence, which consists in digging
-a number of blaquas, or large pits: these they cover with a
false surface of sods and grass, into which the Tuarick,
with his horse, plunges before he is aware, and is received
at the bottom upon sharp-pointed stakes, which often kill
the one and the other on the spot. Unluckily, harmless tra-
vellers are equally liable to fall imto these living graves.
Major Denham was petrified with horror to find how near
he had approached to several of them; indeed, one of his
servants fell in, and was saved only by an almost miracu-
lous spring. It seems wonderful that the sheik should not
have endeavoured to restore some kind of security to this
portion of his subjects, and to repeople those fine but de-
serted regions.

The troops, which had been seen hastening in parties to
the scene of action, were mustered at Kabshary, a town
which the Mungas had nearly destroyed. ‘The sheik made
a review of his favourite forces, the Kanemboo spearmen,
9000 strong. They were really a very savage and military-
looking host, perfectly naked, except a girdle of goatskin,
with the hair hanging down, and a piece of cloth wrapped
round the head. They carried large wooden shields, shaped
like a Gothic window, with which they warded off the ar-
rows of the enemy, while they pressed forward to attack
with their spears. Unlike almost all other barbarous armies,
they kept a regular night-watch, passing the cry every half-
hour along the line, and at any alarm raising a united yell,
which was truly frightful. At the review they passed in
tribes before the sheik, to whom they showed the most en-
thusiastic attachment, kneeling on the ground and kissing
his feet. The Mungas, again, were described as terrible

SSSS=S=—_

SE ——<—$
————
—S

————
————*
——=S
——

M

——
te ———
—= =

Bornou Horseman, Kanemboo Spearman, and Mungo Bowman.—(p. 157.]

‘is ib pokes
hah te

“oh

Op ihe oad" Gada

ioe
just?

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 157

antagonists, hardened by conflict with the Tuaricks, fighting °

on foot with poisoned arrows longer and more deadly than
those of the Fellatas.* The sultan, however, contemplated
other means of securing success, placing his main reliance
on his powers as a Mohammedan doctor and writer. Three
successive nights were spent in inscribing upon little scraps
of paper figures or words, destined to exercise a magical
influence upon the rebel host; and their effect was height-
ened by the display of sky-rockets, supplied by Major Den-
ham. ‘Tidings of his being thus employed were conveyed
to the camp, when the Mungas, stout and fierce warriors
who never shrunk from an enemy, yielded to the power of
superstition, and felt all their strength withered. It seemed
to them that their arrows were blunted, their quivers broken,
their hearts struck with sickness and fear; in short, that to
oppose a sheik of the Koran who could accomplish such
wonders was alike vain and impious. They came in by
hundreds, bowing themselves to the ground, and casting
sand on their heads in token of the most abject submission.
At length, Malem Fanamy himself, the leader of the rebel-
lion, saw that resistance was hopeless. After vain over-
tures of conditional submission, he appeared in person,
mounted on a white horse, with a thousand followers. He
was himself in rags, and, having falien prostrate on the
ground, was about to pour sand on his head, when the sul-
tan, instead of permitting this: humiliation, caused eight
robes of fine cotton cloth, one after another, to be thrown
over him, and his head to be wrapped in Egyptian turbans
till it was swelled to six times its natural size, and no longer
resembled any thing human. By such signal honours the
sheik gained the hearts of those whom his pen had subdued ;
and this wise policy enabled him, not only to overcome the
resistance of this formidable tribe, but to convert them into
supporters and bulwarks of his power.

Major Denham, who always sought with laudable zeal to
penetrate into every corner of Africa, now found his way
in another direction. He had heard much of the Shary, a
great river flowing into the lake Tchad, and on whose banks
the kingdom of Loggun wassituated. After several delays,

* The group in the accompanying plate shows the three noted mili-
_ tary characters,—the Bornou horseman, the Kanemboo spearman, and
the Munga bowman. Y; be

158 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON:

“he set out on the 23d January, 1824, in company with Mr,

Toole, a spirited young volunteer, who, journey ae way
of Tripoli and Mourzouk, had thence crossed the Desert to
jom him. The travellers passed through Angornou and
Angala, and arrived at Showy, where they saw the river,
which really proved to be a magnificent stream, fully half.a
mile broad, and flowing at the rate of two or three miles an
hour. They descended it through a succession of noble
reaches, bordered with fine woods, and a profusion of vari-
ously-tinted and aromatic plants. At length it opened into
the wide expanse of the Tchad; after viewing which, they
again ascended and reached the capital of Loggun, beneath
whose. high walls the river was seen flowing in majestic
beauty. Major Denham entered, and found a handsome
city, with ‘a street as wide as Pall-Mall, and bordered by
large dwellings, having spacious areas in front. He was
led through several dark rooms into a wide and crowded
court, at one end of which a lattice opened, and showed a

- pile of silk robes stretched on a carpet, amid which two

eyes became gradually visible: this was the sultan. On
his appearance there arose a tumult of homs and frum-
frums ; while all the attendants threw themselves prostrate,
casting sand on their heads. In a voice which the court-
fashion of Loggun required to be scarcely audible, the mo-
narch inquired Major Denham’s object in coming to this
country, observing that if it was to purchase handsome female
slaves, he need go no farther, since he himself had hun-
dreds who could be afforded at a very easy rate. This
overture was rejected on other grounds than the price; yet,
notwithstanding so decided a proof of barbarism, the Log-
gunese were found a people more advanced in the arts of
peace than any hitherto seen in Africa. By a studied neu-
trality, they had avoided involving themselves in the dread-
ful wars which had desolated the neighbouring countries.
Manufacturing industry was honoured, and the cloths
woven here were superior to those of Bornou, being finely
died with indigo and beautifully glazed. There was even
a current coin made of iron, somewhat in the form of a
horse-shoe ; and rude as this was, none of their neighbours
possessed any thing similar. The ladies were handsome,
intelligent, and of a lively air and carriage; but, besides
pushing their frankness to excess, their general demeanour

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON 159

was by no means scrupulous. They used, in particular,
the utmost diligence in stealing from Major Denham’s per-
son every thing that could be reached, even searching the ~

. pockets of his trousers ; and, when detected, only laughing,

and caljling to each other how sharp he had shown himself.
But the darkest feature of savage life was disclosed, when
the sultan and his son each sent to solicit poison ‘that
would not lie,” to be used against the other. The latter
even accompanied the request with a bribe of three lovely
black damsels, and laughed at the horror which was ex-
pressed at the proposal.

The Logguneye live in arich country, abounding in grain
and cattle, and diversified with forests of lofty acacias and
many beautiful shrubs. Its chief scourge consists in the
millions of tormenting insects which fill the atmosphere,
making it scarcely possible to go into the open air at mid-
day without being thrown into a fever; indeed, children
have been known to be killed by their stings. The natives
have a mode of building one house within another to pro-
tect themselves against this scourge; while some kindle a
large fire of wet straw and sit in the smoke : but this re-
medy, if it be possible, seems worge than the evil which it is
meant to obviate.

Major Denham was much distressed on this j journey by.
the death of his companion Mr. Toole; and he could no
longer delay his return when he learned that the Beghar-
mis, with a large army, were crossing the Shary to attack
Bornou. Soon after his arrival at Kouka the sheik led out
his troops, which he mustered on the plain of Angala, and
was there furiously attacked by 5000 Begharmis, led by 200
chiefs. ‘The Begharmi cavalry are individually strong and
fierce, and both riders and horses still more thoroughly cased
in mail than those of Bornou ; but their courage, when
brought to the proof, is nearly on a level. The sheik en-
countered them with his Kanemboo spearmen and a small
band of musketeers, when, after a sharp conflict, the whole
of this mighty host was thrown into the most disorderly
flicht ; even the Bornou cavalry joined in the pursuit.
Seven sons of the sultan and almost all the chiefs fell;
two hundred of their favourite wives were taken, many of
whom were of exquisite beauty.

Mr. Tyrwhit, a gentleman whom his majesty’s govern-

” :
160 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

ment had sent out to strengthen the party, arrived on the
20th May, and on the 22d, delivered to the sheik a number
of presents, which were received with the highest satisfac-
tion. In company with this gentleman, Major Denham,
eager to explore Africa still further, took advantage of an-
other expedition undertaken against the tribe of Shouaa
Arabs, distinguished by the name of La Sala,—a race of
amphibious shepherds who inhabit certain islands that ex-
tend along the south-eastern shores of the Tchad. These
spots afford rich pasture; while the water is so shallow,
that, by knowing the channels, the natives can ride without
difficulty from one island to the other. Barca Gana led a
thousand men on this expedition, and was joined by 400 of
a Shouaa tribe, called Dugganahs, enemies to the La Salas.
These allies presented human nature under a more pleasing
aspect than it had yet been seen in any part of Central
Africa. They despise the negro nations, and all who live in
houses, and still more in cities; while they themselves re-
side in tents made of skin, collected into circular camps,
which they move periodically from place to place. They
live in simple plenty on the produce of their flocks and
herds, celebrate their joys and sorrows in extemporary
poetry, and seem to be united by the strongest ties of domes-
tic affection. Tahr, their chief, having closely examined
our traveller as to the motives of his journey, said, ‘And
have you been three years from your home? Are not your
eyes dimmed with SVE to the north, where all your
thoughts must ever be? If my eyes do not see the wife
and children of my heart for ten days, they are flowing with
tears when they should be closed in sleep.” On taking
leave, Tahr’s parting wish was, ‘“‘ May you die at your own
_tents, and in the arms of your wife and family.” ‘This chief,
it is said, might have sat for the picture of a patriarch : his
fine, serious, expressive countenance, large features, and long
bushy beard afforded a favourable specimen of the aia
aspect of his tribe.

The united forces now marched to the howl of the
lake, and began to reconnoitre the islands on which the
Shouaas with their cattle and cavalry were stationed; but
the experienced eye of Barca Gana soon discerned that the
channel, though shallow, was full of holes, and had a
muddy, deceitful appearance. He proposed, therefore, to

;

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 161

delay the attack till a resolute band of Kanemboo spearmen
should arrive and lead the way. The lowing, however, of
the numerous herds, and the bleating of the flocks on the
green islands which lay before them, excited in the troops
a degree of hunger as well as of military ardour that was
quite irrepressible. They called out, “What! be so near
them and not eat them? No, no, let us on; this night these
flocks and women shall be ours!” Barca Gana suffered
himself to be hurried away, and plunged in among the fore-
most. Soon, however, the troops began to sink into the
holes or stick in the mud; their guns and powder were
wetted, and became useless ; while the enemy, who knew
every step, and could ride through the water as quickly as
on land, at once charged the invaders in front, and sent
round a detachment to take them inthe rear. The assault
was accordingly soon changed into a disgraceful flight, in
which those who had been the most loud in urging to this
rash onset set the example. Barca Gana, who had boasted
himself invulnerable, was deeply wounded through his coat-
of-mail and four cotton tobes, and was with difficulty rescued
by his chiefs out of the hands of five La Sala horsemen
who had vowed his death. The army returned to their
quarters in disappointment and dismay, and with a severe
loss. During the whole night the Dugganah women were
heard bewailing their husbands who had fallen, in dirges
composed for the occasion, and with plaintive notes, which
could not be listened to without the deepest sympathy.
Major Denham was deterred by this disaster from making
any farther attempt to penetrate to the eastern shores of
the Tchad.

The Biddoomahs are another tribe who inhabit extensive
and ragged islands in the interior of the lake, amid its deep
waters, which they navigate with nearly a thousand large
boats. ‘They neither cultivate the .ground nor rear flocks
or herds, while their manners appeared to our traveller the
rudest and most savage even of Africans, those of the Mus-
gow always excepted. They are said to have adopted as a
religious creed, that God, having withheld from them corn
and cattle, which the nations around enjoy, has given in
sheir stead strength and courage, to be employed in taking
these Zood things from all in whose possession they may

be found. To this belief ey act up in the most devout
_

-

ill a va

*

162 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

manner, spreading terror and desolation over all the shores
of this inland sea; no part of which, even in the imme-
diate vicinity of the great capitals, is ‘for a moment secure
from their ravages. The most powerful and warlike of the
Bornou sovereigns, finding among their subjects neither
the requisite skill nor experience in navigation, do not
attempt to cope with the Biddoomahs on their watery do-
mains; and thus gave up the lake to their undisputed
sway.

While Major Denham was thus traversing, in every di-
rection, Bornou and.the surrounding countries, Mr. Clap-
perton and Dr. Oudney were proceeding through Houssa,
by a route less varied and hazardous indeed, but disclosing
forms both of nature and of society fully as interesting.
They departed from Kouka on the 14th December, 1823,
and, after passing the site of Old Birnie, they found the
banks of the Yeou fertile, and diversified with towns and
villages. On entering Katagum, the most easterly Fellata
province, they observed a superior style of culture ; two
crops of wheat being raised in one season by irrigation, and
the grain stored in covered sheds elevated from the ground
on posts. The country to the south was covered with ex-
tensive swamps and mountains, tenanted by rude and Pagan
races, who furnish to the faithful an inexhaustible supply
of slaves. The practice of travelling with a caravan was
found very advantageous, from the mutual help afforded, as
well as from the good reports spread by the merchants re-
specting their European companions. In Bornou these last
had been viewed with almost unmingled horror; and, for
having eaten their bread under the extremest necessity, a
man had his testimony rejected in a court of justice. Some
young Bornouese ladies, who accosted Major Denham,
having ventured to say a word in his favour, an attendant
matron exclaimed,—* Be silent; he is an uncircumcised
Caffre,—neither washes nor prays, eats pork, and will go
to hell ;” upon which the others screamed out and ran off.
But in Houssa this horror was not so extreme, and was min-
gled with the belief that they possessed surprising and su-
pernatural powers. Not only did the sick come in erowds
expecting the cure of every disease, but the ladies solicited
amulets to restore their beauty, to preserve the affections
of their lovers, and even to destroy a hated rival. The son

\
DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 163

of the governor of Kano,having called upon Mr. Clapperton,

stated it as the conviction of the whole city and his own,
that the English had the power of converting men into asses,
_ goats, and monkeys, and likewise that by reading in his
‘book he could at any time commute a handful of earth into
gold. The traveller, having argued with him upon the dif-
ficulty he often found in procuring both asses and gold, in-
duced him, with trembling hands, to taste a cup of tea;
when he became more composed, and made a sort of recanta-
tion of his errors.

As the caravan proceeded they met many other travel-
fers, and found sitting along the road numerous females,
selling potatoes, beans, bits of roasted meat, and water
with an infusion of gussub grains ; and when they stopped
at any place for the night, the people crowded in such
numbers as to form a little fair. Mr. Clapperton attracted
the notice of many of the Fellata ladies, who, after examin- ©
ing him closely, declared, that had he only been less white,
his external appearance might have merited approbation.

The travellers passed through Sansan, a great market-
place divided into three distinct towns, and Katagum, the
strongly-fortified capital of the province, containing about
$000 inhabitants. Thence they proceeded to Murmur,
where the severe illness under which Dr. Oudney had long
laboured came to acrisis. ‘Though now in the last stage
of consumption, he insisted on continuing his journey, and
with the aid of his servant had been supported to his camel,
when Mr. Clapperton, seeing the ghastlmess of death on
his countenance, insisted on replacing him in his tent;
where soon after, without a groan, he breathed his last.
His companion caused him to be buried with the honours
of the country. The body was washed, wrapped in tur-
lban-shawls, and a wall of clay built round the grave to pro-
tect it from wild beasts ; two sheep also were killed and dis-
tributed among the poor.

_ Proceeding onwards, the traveller came to Kisauiaas the
jarst town of Houssa Proper, in a country well enclosed
‘and under high cultivation. To the south was an exten-

‘sive range of rocky hills, amid which was the town of
‘Zangeia, with its buildings picturesquely scattered over
imasses of rock. He passed also Girkwa, near a river of
the same name, which appears to come from these hills,
aand to fall into the Yeou.

164 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

Two days after, he entered Kano, the Ghana of Edrisi,
and which is now, as it was six hundred years ago, the
chief commercial city of Houssa and of all Central Africa.
Yet it disappointed our traveller on his first entry, and for
a quarter of a mile scarcely appeared acity at all. Even in
its more crowded quarters the houses rose generally in
clusters, only separated by large stagnant pools. ‘The in-
habited part, on the whole, did not appear to comprise more
than a fourth of the space enclosed by the walls, while the

rest consisted of fields, gardens, and swamps; however, as,

the whole circuit is fifteen miles, there is space for a popu-
lation moderately, estimated to be between 30,000 and
40,000. Its market, the greatest scene of commercial
transactions in Africa, is held on a neck of land between
two swamps, by which, during the rains, it is entirely over-
flowed; but in the dry season it is covered with sheds, or
stalls of bamboo, arranged into regular streets. Different
quarters are allotted for the several kinds of goods; some
for cattle, others for vegetables; while fruits of various de-
scriptions, so much neglected in Bornou, are here displayed
in profusion. The fine cotton fabrics of the country are
sold either in webs, or in what are called tobes and turka-
dees, with rich silken stripes or borders ready to be added.
Among the favourite articles are goora or kolla nuts, which
are called African coffee, being supposed to give a peculiar
relish to the water drunk after them; and crude antimony,
with whose black tint every eyebrow in Houssa must be
died. The Arabs also dispose here of sundry commodities
that have become obsolete in the north; the cast-off dresses
of the Mamelukes and other great men, and old sword-
blades from Malta. But the busiest scene is the slave-
market, composed of two long ranges of sheds, one for
males and another for females.. These poor creatures are
seated in rows, decked out for exhibition; the buyer scru-
tinizes them as nicely as a purchaser with us does a horse,
inspecting the tongue,.teeth, eyes, and limbs, making them
cough and perform various movements, to ascertain if there
be any thing unsound ; and in case of a blemish appearing,
or even without assigning a reason, he may return them
within three days. As soon as the slaves are sold, the ex-
poser gets back their finery, to be employed in ornamenting
others. Most of the captives purchased at Kano are con-
- veyed across the Desert durin which their masters endea»

7 ~

/ :
DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 165

vour to keep up their spirits by an assurance that, on pass-
ing its boundary, they will be set free and dressed in red,
which they account the gayest of colours. Supplies, how- .
ever, often fail in this dreary journey,—a want felt first by
' the slaves, many of whom perish with hunger and fatigue.
Mr. Clapperton heard the doleful tale of a mother who had
seen her child dashed to the ground, while she herself was
compelled by the lash to drag on an exhausted frame. Yet
when at all tolerably treated, they are very gay,—an obser-
vation generally made in regard to slaves; but this gayety,
arising only from the absence of thought, probably conceals
much secret wretchedness.

The regulations of the market of Kano seem to be good,
and strictly observed. ‘There is a sheik who regulates the
police, and is said even to fix the prices,—which is going
too far. The dylalas, or brokers, are men of somewhat
high character ; packages of goods are often sold unopened,
and bearing merely their mark. If the purchaser afterward
finds any defect, he returns it to the agent, who must grant
compensation. ‘The medium of exchange is not cloth as in
Bornou, nor iron as in Loggun, but cowries, or little shells
brought from the coast, twenty of which are worth a half-
penny, and 480 make a shilling; so that, in paying a
pound sterling, one has to count over 9600 cowries. Our
countryman admires this currency, as excluding all at-
tempts at forgery; but really we should think its use very
tedious and inconvenient. Amid so many strangers there
is ample room for the trade of the restaurateur, which is oc-
cupied by a female seated on the ground, with a mat on her
knees, on which are spread vegetables, gussub-water, and
bits of roasted meat about the size of a penny; these she
retails to her customers squatted around her. The killing
of a bullock forms a sort of festival at Kano; its horns are
died red with henna, drums are beat, and a crowd collected,
who, if they approve of the appearance and condition of
‘the animal, readily become purchasers.

Boxing in Houssa, like wrestling in Bornou, forms a fa-
wourite exercise, and the grand national spectacle. “Mr.
Clapperton, having heard much of the fancy of Kano, inti-
mated his willingness to pay for a performance, which was
forthwith arranged. 'The whole body of butchers attended,
_ nd acted as masters of the ceremonies; while, as soon as

166 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON.

the tidings spread, girls left their pitchers at the wells, the
market people threw down their baskets, and an immense
crowd was assembled. ‘The ring being formed, and drums
beat, the performers first came forward ‘singly, plying their
muscles like a musician tuning his instrument, and each

calling out to the bystanders,—“ I am a hyena; Iam alion;
- Ican kill all that oppose me.” After about twenty had~

shown off in this manner, they came forward in pairs, wear-
ing only a leathern girdle, and with their hands muffled up
in numerous folds of country cloth. It was first ascertained
that they were not mutual friends ; after which, they closed
with the utmost fury, aiming their blows at the most mortal
parts, as the pit of the stomach, beneath the ribs, or under
the ear: they even endeavoured to scoop out the eyes; so
that, in spite of every precaution, the match often termi-
nated in the death of one of the combatants. Whenever
Mr. Clapperton saw the affair verging to such an issue, he
gave orders to stop; and, after seeing six pairs exhibit,
paid the hire and broke up the meeting. |

From Kano he set out under the guidance of Mohammed

Jollie, leader of an extensive caravan intended for Sackatoo,

capital of the sultan of the Fellatas. The country was
perhaps the finest in Africa, being under high cultivation,
diversified with groves of noble trees, and traversed in a pic-
turesque manner by ridges of granite. The manners of
the people, too, were pleasing and pastoral. At many clear
springs gushing from the rocks young women were drawing
water. As an excuse for engaying in talk, our traveller
asked several times for the means of quenching his thirst.
** Bending gracefully on one knee, and displaying at the
same time teeth of pearly whiteness, and eyes of the blackest
lustre, they presented a gourd, and appeared highly de-
ligited when J thanked them for their civility, remarking to
one another, ‘Did you hear the white man thank me?”
But the scene was changed when the traveller reached the
borders of the provinces of Goober and Zamfra, which
were in a state of rebellion against Sackatoo. ‘The utmost
alarm at that moment, prevailed; men and women, with:
their bullocks, asses, and camels, all struggled to be fore-
most, every one crying out, ‘ Wo to the wretch that falls
behind! he will be sure to meet an unhappy end at the
hands of the Gooberites.” There was danger even of being

> SS

—

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 167

thrown down and trampled to death by the bullocks, which
were furiously rushing backward and forward; however,
through the unremitting care of the escort, Clapperton
made his way safely, though not without much fatigue and
annoyance, along this perilous frontier.

On the 16th March, 1824, after passing through the hilly
district of Kamoon, the valleys began to open, and crowds
of people were seen thronging to market with wood, onions,
indigo, and other commodities. This indicated the ap-
eee to Sackatoo, which they soon saw from the top of a

ill, and entered about noon. A multitude flocked to see
the white stranger, and received him with cheers of wel-
come. The sultan was not yet returned from a ghrazzie or
slave-hunt; but the gadado, or minister, performed hand-
somely the honours of the place. Next day the chief
arrived, and instantly sent for Clapperton. The palace, as
usual in Africa, consisted of a sort of enclosed town, with
an open quadrangle in front. The stranger, on entering
the gate, was conducted through three huts serving as
guard-houses, after which he found Sultan Bello seated on
a small carpet in a sort of painted and ornamented cottage
Bello had anoble and commanding figure, with a high forehead
and large black eyes. He gave the traveller a hearty wel-
come, and, after inquiring the particulars of his journey,
proceeded to serious affairs. He produced books belonging |
to Major Denham, which had been taken in the dgastrous
battle of Dirkuliah; and, though he expressed a feeling of
dissatisfaction at the Major’s presence on that occasion,
readily accepted an apology, and restored the volumes. He
only asked to have the subject of each explained, and to
hear the sound of the language, which he declared,to be
beautiful. He then began to press his visiter with theolo-
gical questions, and showed himself not wholly unacquainted
with the controversies which have agitated the Christian
world ; indeed he soon went beyond the depth of his visiter,
who was obliged to own that he was not versant in the
abstruser mysteries of divinity.

The sultan now opened a frequent and familiar commu-
nication with the English envoy, in which he showed him-
self possessed of a good deal of information. The astrono-
mical instruments, from which, as from implements of magic,

3
we ae i
igi

168 DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. —

many of his attendants started with horror, were examined
by the monarch with an intelligent eye.” On being shown
the planisphere, he proved his knowledge of the planets,
and even of many of the constellations, by repeating their Ara-
bic names. The telescope, which presented objects inverted
—the compass, by which he could always turn to the east
in praying—and the sextant, which he called ‘ the looking-
glass of the sun,” excited peculiar interest. Being desirous
to see an observation performed with the latter instru-
ment, Clapperton, who had lost the key of the artificial
horizon, asked a dagger to break it open; upon which the -
sultan started, and half-drew his sword, trembling like an
aspen leaf. The other very prudently took no notice of this
excitement, but quietly opened his box, when the exhibi-
tion soon dispelled all unfavourable impressions. The sul-
tan, however, inquired with evident jealousy into some
points of English history that had come to his knowledge ;
as, the conquest of India, which the traveller endeavoured
to represent as a mere arrangement to protect the natives,
and particularly the Moslem population. The attack on
Algiers, being also alluded to, was justly declared to have
been made solely on account of her atrocious piracies.

_ Sackatoo appeared to Mr. Clapperton the most populous
city he had seen in the interior of Africa. The houses stand
more closely together than in most other towns of Houssa,
and are daid out in regularly well-built streets. It is sur-
rounded by a wall between twenty and thirty feet high,
with twelve gates, which are punctuallv shut at sunset.
The dwellings of the principal inhabitants consist of clusters
of cottages and flat-roofed houses, in the Moorish style, en-
closed by high walls. There are two mosques, one of which,
then in progress of building, was 800 feet long, adorned
with numerous pillars of wood plastered with clay, and
highly ornamented.

Mr. Clapperton, desirous to accomplish what had all
along been his main object, solicited a guide to the western
countries and the Gulf of Benin. By this route he might
investigate the course of the Niger and the fate of Park; he
might also pave the way for acommercial intercourse, which
would be of some benefit to Britain, and of great advantage
to Africa. The sultan at first gave assurances of permis-
sion and aid in travelling through every part of his domi-

4“

DENHAM AND CLAPPERTON. 169

nions; but when our countryman specified Nyffe on the
banks of the Niger, Youri where the papers of Park were
reported to be kept, Rakah and Fundah, where that river
was said to fall into the sea, the courtiers began to demur.
Professing tender solicitude for his safety, they represented
that the season was becoming unfavourable, and that rebel-
lion and civil war were raging to such a pitch in these
countries as to make even the mighty protection of Sultan
Bello insufficient for his security. Clapperton strongly sus-
pected that this unfavourable change was produced by the
machinations of the Arabs, and particularly of Mohammed
Gomsoo, their chief, notwithstanding the warm professions
of friendship made that personage. They apprehended,
probably, that were a communication opened with the
western coast, Interior Africa might be supplied with Eu-
ropean goods by that shorter route, instead of being brought
by themselves across the Desert. Perhaps these suspicions
were groundless ; for the state of the country was afterward
found to be, if possible, worse than had been described, and
the ravages of the Fellatas so terrible, that any one coming
from among them was likely to experience a very disagree-
able reception. Indeed, it may be suspected that the sultan
must have been a good deal embarrassed by the simplicity
with which his guest listened to his pompous boasting as to
the extent of his empire, and by the earnestness with which
he entreated him to name one of his seaports where the
English might land, when it is certain that he had not a town
which was not some hundred miles distant from the coast.
To prevent the disclosure of this fact, which must have
taken place had our, traveller proceeded in that direction,
might be an additional motive for refusing his sanction.
In short, it was finally announced to Clapperton, that no
escort could be found to accompany him on so rash an en-
terprise, and that he could return to England only by retrac-
ing his steps.

Here the traveller obtained an account of Mr. Park’s
death, very closely corresponding with the statement given
by Amadi Fatouma. The Niger, it appears, called here the
Quorra, after passing Timbuctoo, turns to the south, and
continues to flow in that direction till it crosses. the parallel
of Sackatoo, at only a few days’ journey to the westward ;
but whether it reaches the sea, or, making an immense, cir-

P

*
.

170 CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY.

cuit, becomes the Shary, and pours itself into the immense
basin of the Tchad, are points on which his informants va-
ried greatly. MA

Returning by a different route, Mr. Clapperton visited
Zirmie, the capital of Zamfra, a kind of outlawed city, the
inhabitants of which are esteemed the greatest rogues in
Houssa, and where all runaway slaves find protection. He
passed also through Kashna or Cassina, the metropolis of a
kingdom which, till the late rise of the Fellata power, had
ruled over all Africa from Bornou to the Niger. In its
present subject and fallen state, the inhabited part does not
cover a tenth of the wide circuit enclosed by its walls; yet
a considerable trade is still carried on with the Tuaricks, or
with caravans coming across the Desert by the route of
Ghadamis and Tuat. Here our traveller met with much ~
kindness from Hadgi Ahmet, a powerful and wealthy Arab
chief, who even took him into his seraglio, and desired him,
out of fifty black damsels, to make his choice,—a complai-
sance, nothing resembling which had ever before been shown
by a Mussulman. But our countryman, being indisposed,
only picked out an ancient maiden to serve as a nurse.

Mr. Clapperton rejoined Major Denham at Kouka,
whence they set out, and recrossed the Desert together in
the latter part of the year 1824. They reached Tripoli in
January, 1825, and soon after embarked for Leghorn; but
being detained by contrary winds and quarantine regula
tions, did not reach London till the month of June.

CHAPTER XIII.
Clapperton’s Second Journey—Laing—Caillié.

Ir has appeared, that in spite of some occasional symp-
toms of jealousy, and even of alarm, the sultan of the Fel-
latas had manifested a very considerable inclination to cul-
tivate intercourse with the English. He was even under-
stood to have promised that messengers should be kept in
waiting at Rakah and Fundah, or at some port on the coast,

CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY. 171]

to conduct a new mission to Sackatoo. ‘These promises, it
is extremely probable, were mere inferences drawn from the
empty hoasts of the sultan; he being master neither of Ra-
kah nor Fundah, nor of any place within a great distance
of the Gulf of Benin. Be this as it may, there seemed
good ground to expect a welcome for the British envoys
when they should reach his capital ; and in that direction,
it was conjectured, were to be found the termination of the
Niger, and also the most direct channel of trade with re-
gions already ascertained to be the finest in Africa.

These were views to which the enterprising statesmen
who conducted the naval government at home were never
insensible. They equipped afresh Mr. Clapperton, now
promoted to the rank of captain, and sent him to the Gulf
of Benin ; naming as his associates, Captain Pearce, an ex-
cellent draftsman, and Mr. Morrison, a naval surgeon of
some experience, whose skill, it was hoped, might be of
great avail in preserving the health of the whole expedition.

The mission, in the end of 1825, reached its destination ;
but, as might perhaps have been anticipated, they could
hear nothing of Rakah or of Fundah, of any messengers
sent by Bello, nor of any town that was subject to him on
this coast. They were not, however, discouraged; and
having consulted Mr. Houtson, whom a long residence had
made thoroughly acquainted with the country, they were
advised not to attempt ascending the banks of the river,—a
circuitous track, and covered with pestilential swamps,—but
to take the route from Badagry as the most direct and com-
_ modious, and by which, in fact, almost all the caravans from
Houssa come down to the coast.

On the 7th December, 1825, the mission set out from
Badagry on this grand journey into Interior Africa. But at
the very first they were guilty of a fatalimprudence. During
the nights of the 7th and 9th they slept in the open air, and
on the last occasion in the public market-place of Dagmoo,
without even their beds, which had been sent away by mis-
take. The consequence was, that in a day or two Morrison
and Pearce were attacked with a dangerous fever, and Clap-
perton with fits of ague. It does not appear why they did
not stop in one of the towns, and endeavour by rest to re-
eruit their strength; on the contrary, they pushed on till
the 22d, when Captain Clapperton, seeing the illness of his

172 CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY.

companions increase, urged them either to remain behind
or return to Badagry. ‘They insisted on proceeding; but
next day Dr. Morrison could struggle no longer, and de-
parted for the coast : he died before reaching it. Captain
Pearce persevered to the last, and sunk_on the road, breath-
ing his last at nine in the evening of the 27th. Clapperton
was thus left to pursue his long and adventurous journey in
very painful and desolate circumstances. He had only a
faithful servant, Richard Lander, who stood by him in all
his fortunes, with Pascoe, a not very trusty African, whom
he had hired at Badagry.

After a journey of sixty miles, the travellers entered the
kingdom of Yarriba, called also from its capital Eyeo. ‘This
country had long been reported on the coast as the most
populous, powerful, and flourishing of all Western Africa,
holding even Dahomey in vassalage. It answered the most
favourable descriptions given of it; the fields were exten-
sively cleared, and covered with thriving plantations of In-
dian corn, millet, yams, and cotton. A loom nearly similar
to that used in England was busily plied; the women were
spinning and dyeing the cloths with their fine indigo. These
African dames were also seen going from town to town
bearing large burdens on their heads,—an employment
shared by the numerous wives of the king of Eyeo; their
majesties having nothing to distinguish them from the hum-
blest of their fellow-countrywomen. Amid these laudable
occupations, they exercised their powers of speech with
such incessant perseverance as to confirm the Captain in
what appears to have been with him an old maxim, that no
power on earth, not even African despotism, can silence a
women’s tongue; yet, as this loquacity seems to have been
always exerted in kindness, he need not, we think, have
groaned quite so heavily under its stunning influence.

The English travellers were agreeably surprised by the
reception which they experienced during this journey. In
Houssa they had laboured under the most dire proscription
as Caffres, enemies of the prophet, and foredoomed to hell ;
and, as black is there the standard of beauty, their colour
was considered by the ladies a deep leprous deformity, de-
tracting from every quality that might otherwise have been
agreeable in their persons. With the negro and pagan
Eyeos there was no religious enmity; and having under-

a

CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY. 173

stood, by reports from the coast, the superiority of Euro-

peans in arts and wealth, this people viewed them almost as
beings of a superior order, to see whom they felt an eager
and friendly curiosity. A rumour had also spread that they
came to do good, and to make peace wherever there was
war. On entering any town they were soon encircled by
thousands, all desirous to see white men, and testifying re-
spect,—the males by taking off their caps, the women by
bending on their knees and one elbow. In some places
singing and dancing were kept up through the whole night
in celebration of their arrival.

The mission had now to cross a range of hills about eighty
miles broad, reported to reach the whole way from behind
Ashantee to Benin. The highest pinnacle was not supposed
to exceed 2500 feet, which is a good deal lower than Skid-
daw; but its passes were peculiarly narrow and rugged,
hemmed in by gigantic blocks of granite 600 or 700 feet
high, sometimes fearfully overhanging the road. The valley
varied in breadth from 100 yards to half a mile; but every

level spot, extending along the foot of these mountains, or

even suspended amid their cliffs, was covered with fine crops
of yams, millet, and cotton. A large population thus filled
these alpine recesses, all animated with the most friendly
spirit. Parties met the travellers on the road, or were sta-
tioned on the rocks and heights above, which echoed with
choral songs and sounds of welcome. After ascending hill
over hill they came to Chaki, a large and populous town,
situated on the very summit of the ridge. Here the cabo-
ceer had a house and a large stock of provisions ready for
them: he put many questions, and earnestly pleaded for a
stay of two or three days.

After descending to the plain, and passing througha num-
ber of other towns, the party came to Tshow, where a ca
boceer arrived from the king of Yarriba, with a numerous
train of attendants both on foot and horseback. This chief,
having shaken hands with them, immediately rubbed his
whole body, that the blessing of their touch might be spread
all over him. His people kept up through the night a con-
stant hubbub,—singing, drumming, dancing, and firing ;
and, claiming free quarters, they devoured such a quantity
of provisions that the party fared worse than in any other
place. Next morning they si out with a crowded escort

2

174 CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY.

of bowmen on foot, and of horsemen ill mounted but active,
dressed in the most. grotesque manner, and covered with
charms. On reaching the brow of a hill, the great capital
of Eyeo opened to the view, on the opposite side of a vast
plain bordered by a ridge of granite hills, and surrounded
by a brilliant belt of verdure. On reaching the gate they
entered the house of a caboceer, till notice was sent to the
king, who immediately invited them to his palace. They
had five miles to march through this spacious capital, du-
ring which the multitude collected was so immense, and
raised such a cloud of dust, that they must have stopped
short, had not their escort, by a gentle but steady application
of the whip and the cane, opened a way, and finally cleared
a space in front of the throne. ‘The king was sitting under
a veranda, dressed in two long cotton tobes, and ornamented
with three strings of glass beads, and a pasteboard crown
covered with blue cotton, which had been procured from the
coast. The mission, instead of the usual prostration, merely
took off their hats, bowed, and presented their hands, which
the king lifted up three times, calling out ‘ Ako! ako !”
(How do you do?) His wives behind, drawn up in a dense
body, which the travellers vainly attempted to number,
raised loud cheers, and smiled in the most gracious man-
ner. After an interview of half an hour, the chief eunuch
showed the party to handsome and commodicus lodgings,
where a good dinner was prepared. In the evening they
were surprised by a visit from his majesty in plain patri-
archal style, with a long staff in his hand, sayig that he
could not sleep without again inquiring after them. |
Eyeo, or Katunga, capital of the kingdom of Yarriba, is’
fifteen miles in circumference, and supplied by seven large
markets; but there are many open fields and spaces in this
wide circuit, and hence the number of inhabitants could not
even be conjectured. ‘The population of the country must.
be very great, the whole béing under cultivation, and’ the
towns large and numerous. ‘The government, in theory, is
most despotic. The greatest chiefs, when they approach
the sovereign, throw themselves prostrate on the ground,
lie flat on their faces, and heap sand or dust dpon their
heads; and the same degrading homage is paid to the
nobles by their inferiors. Yet the administration seems
mild and paternal; no instances of wanton cruelty were

&,

CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY. 175

Observed ; and the flourishing state of the people showed
clearly the absence of all severe oppression. The horrid
and bloody customs, which produce such dark scenes in
Ashantee and Dahomey, were mentioned here with detesta-
tion. At the death of the king only, a few of his principal
ministers and favourite wives take poison, presented to them
in parrots’ eggs, that they may accompany and serve him
in the invisible world. The first question asked by every
caboceer and great man was, How many wives the king of
England had? being prepared, it should seem, to measure
his greatness by that standard; but when told that he had
only one, they gave themselves upto along and ungovernable
fit of laughter, followed by expressions of pity and wonder
how -he could possibly exist in that destitute condition.
The king of Yarriba’s boast was, that his wives, linked hand
in hand, would reach entirely across the kingdom. Queens,
however, in Africa are applied to various uses, of which Eu-
ropeans have little idea. They were seen forming a large
band of body-guards; and their majesties were observed in
every part of the kingdom acting as porters, and bearing on
their heads enormous burdens ; so that whether they should
be called queens or slaves seems scarcely doubtfal.

The Eyeos, like other nations purely negro, are wholly
unacquainted with letters or any form of writing; these
are known only to the Arabs or Fellatas, who penetrate
thither in small numbers ; yet they have a great deal of ex-
temporary poetry. Every great man has bands of singers
of both sexes, who constantly attend him, and loudly cele-
brate his achievements in poems of their own composition.
The convivial meetings of the people, even their labours and
journeys, are cheered by songs composed for the occasion,
and sung often with considerable taste. Their houses are
mere clay-built cottages, yet studiously adorned with carv-
ing; the door-posts and every piece of furniture are co-
vered with well-executed representations of warlike proces
sions, and of the movements of huge serpents seizing their
prey. They have also public performances, which do not
indeed deserve the name of dramatic, as they consist of mere
mimicry arid buffoonery. The first actof apiece witnessed
by the strangers exhibited men dancing in sacks, who per
fornied their part to admiration. One of the bags opened,
and there came forth the boa constrictor, fourteen feet long

176 = CLAPPERTON’S: SECOND JOURNEY.

covered with cotton cloth, imitating the colour and stripes
of the original. Though rather full in the body, it pre-
sented very nearly the form, and imitated well the actions,
of that huge animal. The mouth was opened wide, pro-
bably by two hands, to devour a warrior armed with a sword,
who had come forth to contend with this formidable crea-
ture, and who struck it with repeated blows, till it writhed
in agony, and finally expired. Lastly, out of another sack
came the white devil, a meager, shivering figure, and so
painted as to represent an European. ' It took snuff, rubbed
its hands, and attempted, in the most awkward manner, to
walk on its naked feet. The audience, amid shouts of laugh-
ter, called the particular attention of the Captain to this per-
formance ; which being really good, he deemed it advisable
to join in the mirth,

As soon as our traveller was fixed at Eyeo, he began to
negotiate in regard to the means of advancing into Houssa,
anxious to pass through that country and reach Bornou be-
fore the rains should set in. The king had professed a de-
termination to serve him in every shape; but this proved to
be the very thing in which he was least inclined to fulfil his
promise. All African princes seek to make a monopoly of
the strangers who enter their territory. It was hinted, that
one journey was well and fully employed in seeing the king--
dom of Yarriba and visiting its great monarch.. Captain
Clapperton, having pleaded the positive command of his
sovereign, was then informed that the direct route through
Nyffe was much disturbed by civil war, the inroad of the
Fellatas, and the insurrection of a great body of Houssa
slaves,—reports suspected at the time to have been got up
merely to detain the travellers, but afterward found to
be correct. The king absolutely refused permission to pro-
ceed to Rakah, though situated on the Niger at the distance
of only three days’ journey; but he undertook to convey
them to Houssa bya safer though somewhat circuitous
route, through the kingdom of Borgoo,

_ After passing through a number of smaller places, the
mission arrived at Kiama, capital of a district of the same
mame, and containing 30,000 inhabitants. Kiama, Wawa,
Niki, and Boussa are provinces composing the kingdom of
Borgov, all subject in a certain sense to the sovereign of
Boussa; but the different cities plunder and make war or

CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY. 177

each other, without the slightest regard to the supreme au-
thority. ‘The people of Kiama and of Borgoo in general
have the reputation of being the greatest thieves and rob-
bers in all Africa,—a character which nothing in their actual
- conduct appeared to confirm. Clapperton was well received
at Kiama ; and the king soon visited him with the most sin-
gular train ever seen by an European. Six young girls,
without any apparel except a fillet on the forehead, and a
string of beads round the waist, carrying each three light
spears, ran by the side of his horse, keeping pace with it at
full gallop. ‘Their light form, the vivacity of their eyes,
and the ease with which they appeared to fly over the ground,
made them appear something more than mortal.” On the
king’s entrance the young ladies laid down their spears,
wrapped themselves in blue mantles, and attended on his
majesty. On his taking leave, they discarded their attire ;
he mounted his horse, “‘ and away went the most extraordi-
nary cavalcade I ever saw in my life.” Our traveller was’
visited by the principal queen, who had lost her youth and
charms ; but a good deal of flirtation passed between him
and the eldest daughter, who, however, being twenty-five,
was considered in Africa as already on the wane. Yarro,
the king, was extremely accommodating, and no difficulty
was found in proceeding onward to Wawa.
Wawa is a large city, containing 18,000 inhabitants, en-
riched by the constant passage of the Houssa caravans.
The people spend the wealth thus acquired in dissolute
pleasure, and have been denounced by our traveller the most
complete set of roaring topers he had ever known. The fes-
tivities were usually prolonged till near morning, and the town
resounded through the whole night with the song, the
dance, the castanet, and the Arab guitar. The Wawa ladies
paid a very particular and rather troublesome attention to
the English party. The Captain complains of being pes-
tered by the governor’s daughter, who came ‘several times
a-day, always half-tipsy, painted and bedizened in the high-
est style of African finery, to make love to him ; and on meet-,
‘ing only with cold excuses, she departed usually in a flood
of tears. But the most persevering suit was that of Zuma,
an Arab widow, possessor of a thousand slaves, and the se-
cond personage in Wawa. Being turned of twenty, she
was considered here as past her bloom, and a too ample

i78 CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY.

indulgence in the luxuries which her wealth afforded had ene
larged her dimensions till they could be justly likened to
those of a huge water-cask ; yet she had still some beauty,
and, being only of a deep-brown complexion, considered
herself white, and was in the most eager search after a
white husband. In this pursuit she cast her eyes first upon
the servant, to whom our traveller hesitates not to assign
the palm of good looks in preference to himself; and he
gave Lander. full permission to follow his fortune. But that
sage person, unmoved by all her charms and possessions,
repelled the overture in so decided a manner, that the widow
soon saw there was nothing to be made of him. She then
withdrew her artillery from Lander, and directed it entirely
against his master, the Captain, to whom she laid very close
siege. At length, in a frolic, he agreed to visit her. He
found her surrounded by every circumstance of African
pomp, seated cross-legged on a piece of ‘Turkey carpet, with
an English pewter mug for her goora-pot, and dressed in a
rich striped silk and cotton robe of country manufacture.
Her eyebrows were dyed black, her hair blue, her hands and
feet red ; necklaces and girdles of beads, coral, and gold
profusely adorned her person. She made a display of ad-
ditional finery lodged in her repositories, leading him
through a series of apartments, one of which was orna-
mented with a number of pewter dishes’ and bright brass
pans. After these preliminaries, she at once declared her
wish to accompany him on his journey, and proposed to —
send forthwith for a malem, or holy man, to read the fatha,
by which their fates would be indissolubly united. Clap-
perton, who seems to have been completely stunned by this
proposal, stammered out the best apology he could, and has-
tened away. His conduct, however, does not appear to
have been so decisive as to deter the lady from the most en-
ergetic perseverance in her suit. She even obtained his
permission for his servant Pascoe to accept a wife from
among her slaves ; but he was not aware that, according
to African ideas, she had thus acquired a sort of claim to
himself. :

Regardless of all these tender solicitations, our traveller
had no sooner completed his arrangements than he set out
for the Niger, leaving directions for his baggage to join
him at the ferry of Comie, while he went round by way of

CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY. 179

Boussa. We shall follow him at present to the former place,
where he did not find any of his baggage, but learned that
the widow, having placed it under arrest, had left Wawa
with drums beating and a numerous train; and besides,
that she claimed a full right to his person, because his ser-
vant Pascoe had accepted a wife at her hand. It was whis-
pered, moreover, that she was meditating to supplant the
governor,—a scheme which, aided by the personal bravery
of the strangers, she might probably realize,—and afterward
she meant to invite the Captain to ascend the throne of
Wawa. “It would have been a fine end to my journey in-
deed,” says he, “if I had deposed old Mohammed, and set
up for myself, with a walking tunbutt for aqueen.” Scarcely
had he received this account when a present from the widow
intimated her arrival in a neighbouring village. Our au-
thor, however, insensible to all the brilliant hopes thus
opened, set off full speed for Wawa to recover his baggage.
On his arrival, the governor refused to liberate it till Zuma’s
return,—Clapperton in vain protesting that his movements
and hers had no sort of connexion. However, next day,
the sound of drums was heard, and the widow made her
entrée in full pomp, astride ona very fine horse, with hous-
ings of scarlet cloth, trimmed with lace. The large cir-
cumference of her own person was invested in a red silk
mantle, red trowsers, and morocco boots; and numerous
spells, sewed variously in coloured leather, were hung all
round her. She was followed by a train of armed attend-
ants, and preceded by a drummer decked in ostrich feathers.
On the whole, the scene was so splendid, that our hero’s re-
solution seems for a moment to have wavered. However,
his part was soon taken. Pascoe was directed to return
his wife, and thus extinguish all claim that could be founded
upon her; and having received his baggage, our country-
man set forward without even admitting the fond widow to
any farther conference.

On his way to Comie, Clapperton had visited Boussa,
a place chiefly interesting as the scene where the career of
Park terminated in a manner so tragical. Every thing
tended to confirm the report of Amadi Fatouma, and to
dispel the skepticism with which it had been originally re-
garded. The king, however, and all the Citizens, spoke of
the event with deep grief and reluctance, and disavowed al]

180 CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY.

personal concern in the transaction. One man gave as the

reason of the attack on the discoverers, that the English

had been mistaken for the advanced guard of the Fellatas,
who were then ravaging Soudan. It was added, that a
number of natives died in consequence, as was imagined,
of eating the meat found in the boats, which was supposed
to be human flesh. That the English have no abode but
on the sea, and that they eat the flesh of the negroes whom
they purchase, are, it seems, two ideas most widely pre-
valent over Africa. Even the king of Boussa could scarcely
be brought to believe that they had a spot of land to dwell
upon. ‘The Captain and his party were received, however,
with the same kindness and cordiality which they had ex-
perienced ever since they entered the country. Seven boats
were here waiting for them, sent by the sultan of Youri,
with a letter, in which he earnestly solicited a visit, and
promised, on that condition, and on that only, to deliver up
the books and papers of Park. It is deeply to be regretted
that our traveller could not reconcile it with his plans to go
to Youri at this time, proposing to visit it on his return,
which, it is well known, never took place.

_ On crossing the Niger, Captain Clapperton entered
Nyffe, a country which had been always reported to him as _
the finest, most industrious, and most flourishing in Africa ,
but he found it, as indeed he had been forewarned by the

‘king of Yarriba, a prey to the most desolating civil war.

The succession being disputed between two princes, one of,
them called in the Fellatas, and, by giving up his country
to their ravages, obtained the privilege of reigning over its
ruins.. Our traveller, in his journey to the sansan or camp,
saw only wasted towns, plantations choked with weeds, and
a few remnants of a miserable population. This African
camp consisted of a number of huts like bee-hives, arranged
in streets, with men weaving, women spinning, markets at
every green tree, holy men counting their beads, and disso-
lute slaves drinking; so that, but for the number of horses —
and armed men, and the drums beating, it might have been
mistaken for a populous village. |

Amid this desolation, two towns, Koolfu and Kufu, being
walled and situated on the high road of the Houssa cara-
vans, had protected themselves in some measure from the
common calamity, and were still flourishing seats of tradé.

CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY. 181

All the merchants halted for some time at Koolfu, and those
from Bornou seldom went farther. The market was
crowded with the same articles as that of Kano. The
Moslem religion was the most prevalent; but it had not
yet moulded society into the usual gloomy monotony ; not
had it succeeded in secluding or subjecting the female sex,
who, on the contrary, were the most active agents in every
mercantile transaction. Our traveller knew twenty-one
female brokers living at the same time m one house, who
went about continually from market to market. Many had
amassed considerable wealth, and were persons of great
consequence,—quite in their own right: Elated with this
distinction, they claimed considerable latitude as to their
deportment, arid spent whole nights with the men in sing-
ing and drinking,—a species of indulgence very prevalent
in all these entrépéts of African trade. The English, how-
ever, experienced here none of the bigoted enmity which
they had encountered in other Moslem cities. On the con-
trary, they were the objects of much kindness; the prin-
cipal people of the place sent presents, and the lower ranks
sought to obtain a sight of them by mounting the trees
which overlooked their residence. The Koran does not
seem to have much embarrassed the Koolfuans. Their
only mode of studying it was, to have the characters written
with a black substance on a piece of board, then to wash
them off, and drink the water; .and when asked by our tra-
veller what spiritual benefit could be derived from the mere
swallowing of dirty water, they imdignantly retorted,—
“What! do you call the name of God dirty water?” This
mode of imbibing sacred truth is indeed extensively pur-
sued throughout the interior of the African continent.
Captain Clapperton passed next through Kotongkora
and Guari, two states which, united in a league with Cubbi
and Youri, had shaken off the yoke of the Fellatas. Guari,
strongly situated among hills, could bring a thousand horse
into the field. He then entered Zeg-zeg, a Fellata country,
which, especially around Zaria, its capital, seems to be one
of the very finest in all Africa. It was beautifully varie~
gated with hill and dale, like the finest parts of England,
was covered with plentiful crops and rich pastures, and pro-
duced the finest rice grown in aity part of that continent.
Rowé of talltrees, aaa gigantic avenues of poplar,

182 CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY.

extended from hill to hill. Zaria, like many other African
cities, might be considered as a district of country sur-
rounded with walls. When the Captain entered, he saw
for some time only fields of grain, with the tops of houses
rising behind them ; still such was its extent, that its popu-
lation was said to exceed that of Kano, and to amount to
at least 50,000. .

Setting out from Zaria, he soon reached his old quarters
at Kano; but he unfortunately found that great city in a
state of dreadful agitation. ‘There was war on every side;
hostilities had been declared between the king of Bornou
and the Fellatas; the provinces of Zamfra and Goobur
were in open insurrection; the Tuaricks threatened an
inroad; in short, there was not a quarter to which the mer-
chants durst send a.caravan. Kano being nearly midway
between Bornou and Sackatoo, Clapperton left his baggage
there to be conveyed to the former on his return, and set
out for the capital of Bello, bearing only the presents des-
tined for that prince. On his way he found numerous
bands mustering to form an army destined to attack Coonia,
the rebel metropolis of Goobur. ‘The appearance of these
troops was very striking as they passed along the borders
of some beautiful little lakes formed by the river Zirmie.
These waters were bordered by forests of flowering acacias,
with dark-green leaves, the shadows of which: were re-
flected on the smooth surface of the lake like sheets of bur-
nished gold and silver. ‘The smoking fires, the sounding
of horns, the beating of their gongs or drums, the braying
of their brass and tin trumpets, every where the calls on the
names of Mohammed, Abda, Mustapha, with the neighing
of horses and the braying of asses, gave animation to the
beautiful scenery of the lake, and its sloping green and
woody banks.”

At length the army mustered to the number of 50,000 or
60,000, chiefly on foot; a rude feudal host, arranging
themselves according to their provinces and chiefs, without
any military order. In a short time, they formed a dense
circle around the walls of Coonia. Captain Clapperton ex-
pected to see some brilliant exploit performed by the united
force of this great army, commanded by the sultan and Ga-
dado in person. The whole, however, both horse and foot,
kept carefully out of the reach of the arrows, which, with a

\

' CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY. 183

sure and steady aim, the enemy directed against them.
From time to time indeed a doughty warrior, well covered
with armour, rode up, calling, ‘‘ Shields tothe wall! Why
don’t you come on?” but he instantly and quickly rode
back, amid the derisive shouts of his countrymen. The
only parties who exposed themselves to real danger were a
few chiefs, in quilted armour, ornamented with gaudy robes
and ostrich plumes, and of such weight that two men were
required to lift them on horseback: several of them were
brought down by the fire of one well-directed musket from
the walls. Evening closed without any thing being effected
by this band of heroes; and in the middle of the night, an
alarm being raised of a sally from the garrison, the whole
besieging army began a tumultuous flight, tumbling over
each other and upsetting every thing in their way, thinking
only how they might soonest escape from danger. The
retreat was continued through the whole of the following
day and night, no halt having taken place till ten of the
second morning. ‘Thus closed this memorable campaign.
Clapperton, at the sultan’s suggestion, repaired to Sack-
atoo (which he now calls Soccatoo); the monarch himself
remaining behind at Magaria, a neighbouring town, which
he was raising into a new capital. The traveller’s time
was spent between the two places. He found, however,
an entire change in the feelings of kindness and cordiality
towards himself, which had been .so remarkably displayed
in the former journey. Jealousies had begun to fester in
the breasts of the African princes. They,dreaded some am-
bitious design in those repeated missions sent by England
without any conceivable motive ; for, that men should un-
dertake such long journeys out of mere curiosity, they could
never imagine. The sultan accordingly had received a
letter from the court of Bornou, warning him that, by this
very mode of sending embassies and presents, which the
English were now following towards the states of Central
Africa, they had made themselves masters of India, and
trampled on all its native princes. The writer, therefore,
gave it as his opinion that Clapperton should immediately
be put to death. An alarm had, in fact, been spread
throughout Sackatoo that the English were coming to in-
vade Houssa. The panic was groundless; no European
potentate would at present dream of attempting to conquer

Ee ~~

184 CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY,

those vast and almost inaccessible regions of Interior
Africa. However, with the imperfect knowledge possessed
by these chiefs, and the facts before them relative to India,
they had scarcely the means of judging as to the foundation
of their apprehensions. ‘The sultan, irritated doubtless at
the shameful result of his grand expedition against Coonia,
felt also another and mure pressing fear. War had just
broken out between himself and the king of Bornou;
Clapperton was on his way to visit that prince, and had
left six muskets at Kano, supposed to be intended as pre-
sents to him; and six muskets in Central Africa, where the
whole Fellata empire could scarcely muster forty, were
almost enough to turn the scale between these two great mi-
litary powers. Underthe impulse of these feelings, Bello pro-
ceeded to steps unworthy of a prince and a man of honour,
He demanded a sight of the letter which Clapperton was
conveying to the king of Bornou; and when this was of
- course refused, he seized it by violence. Lander was in-
duced by false pretences to bring the baggage from Kano
to Sackatoo, when forcible possession was taken of the six
muskets. The Captain loudly exclaimed against these
proceedings, declaring them to amount to the basest rob-
bery, to a breach of all faith, and to be the worst actions
of which any man could be guilty. This was rather strong
language to be used to a sovereign, especially to one who
could at any moment have cut off his head ; and the minis-
ter even dropped hints as if matters might come to that
issue, though, in point of fact, the government did not pro-
ceed to any personal violence. But, from other causes, the
eareer of this spirited and hitherto successful traveller was
now drawing to a close.

The strong constitution of Clapperton had till this rire’
enabled him to resist all the baneful influences of an Afri-
can climate. He had recovered, though perhaps not com-
pletely, from the effects of the rash exposure which had
proved fatal to his two companions ; ; but he had, when .
overcome with heat and fatigue, in hunting at Magaria,
lain down on a damp spot in the open air, and was soon
after seized with dysentery, which continued to assume
more alarming symptoms. Indeed, after the seizure of the
letter to the sultan of Bornou, he was never seen to smile,
and in his sleep was heard’ addressing loud reproaches to

CLAPPERTON § SECOND JOURNEY. 185.

the Arabs. Unable to rise from bed, and deserted by all
his African friends, who saw him no longer a favourite at
court, he was watched with tender care by his faithful ser-
vant Richard Lander, who devoted his whole time to at-
tendance on his sick master. At length he called him to
his bedside, and said—‘ Richard, I shall shortly be no
more,—I feel myself dying.” Almost choked with grief,
Lander replied, ‘God forbid, my dear master,—you will
live many years yet.” But the other replied, “don’t be
so much affected, my dear boy, I entreat you ; it is the will
of the Almighty, it cannot be helped.” He then gave par-
ticular directions as to the disposal of his papers, and of all
that remained of his property; to which strict attention
was promised. ‘ He then,” says Lander, “took my hand
within his, and looking me full in the face, while a tear
stood glistening in his eye, said, in a low but deeply-affect-
ing tone, ‘My dear Richard, if you had not been with me
I should have died long ago; I can only thank you with
my latest breath for your kindness and attachment to me ;
and if I could have lived to return with you, you should have
been placed beyond the reach of want ; but God will reward
you.’” He still survived some days, and appeared even to
rally a little ; but, cne morning, Lander was alarmed by a
thw rattling sound in his throat, and, hastening to the
edside, found him sitting up, and staring wildly around ;
he laid his head gently on the dying man’s shoulder ; some
indistinct words quivered on his lips; he strove, but inef-
fectually, to give them utterance, and expired without a
struggle or a sigh.
Bello seems to have repented in some degree of his harsh
conduct, especially after news arrived of a great victory
ained by his troops over the sultan of Bornou. He allowed
parr to perform the funeral obsequies with every mark
of respect. He also supplied him with the means of return-
ing home, allowing him to choose his road, though advising
him to prefer that through the Great Desert; but Lander
had already had too many dealings with the Arabs, and
therefore preferred his old track through the negro coun-
tries.
On his arrival at Kano, Lander formed a spirited and
highly-laudable design, which proves him to be possessed
of a mind much superior to ae This was nothing

186 == CLAPPERTON’S SECOND JOURNEY.

less than an attempt to resolve the great question respecte
ing the termination of the Niger; which he hoped to effect
by proceeding to Fundah, the place, every one admits, at
which the point may most easily be determined,—whether
it flows onward to the sea or turns eastward into the inte-
rior. Lander, in order to reach that city, proceeded due
south, through a country diversified with rising ground, but
still presenting the same fertile and luxuriant aspect as
that through which he had just passed. He was told,
however, that to the south there was a very elevated
mountainous region, inhabited by a savage people called
Yemyems. These are probably the Lamlam of Edrisi,
reported to be devourers of human flesh, and who were
said to have lately killed and eaten a whole caravan; since
which time no one had been much inclined to go near them,
The chief place through which Lander passed was Cuttup,
composed of five hundred little villages, clustered together,
and forming the market for avery great extent of country,
‘The king’s wives were vastly delighted to receive one or
two gilt buttons from the traveller’s jacket; and, imagin-
ing them to be pure gold, fastened them to their ears,
From Cuttup he proceeded to Dunrora, where he was in-
formed that about half a day’s journey eastward was the
large city of Jacoba, near which flowed the Shary, in a
continuous course between the Tchad and Fundah ; which
last place lay now in the direction of due west. Lander
here promised himself the satisfaction, in ten or twelve
days, of finally solving the grand African problem, when
suddenly four horsemen, with foaming steeds, galloped into
the town. ‘Their leader, followed by an immense multi-
tude, rode up, and told the traveller that he must instantly
return to the king of Zeg-zeg. Lander endeavoured to
argue the point, but could get no answer, except that they
must either bring him with them or lose their heads. It
behooved him then, of necessity, to repair to Zaria, the capi-
tal, where, being introduced to the king, and having de-
livered his presents, that prince boasted of having done
him the greatest possible favour, since the people of Fun-
dah, being new at war with Sultan Bello, would gertainly
have murdered any one who had come from visiting and
carrying gifts to that monarch. From this reasoning,
gound or otherwise, Lander had no appeal, and found no

LAING. 187

alternative but to make his way back by his former path,
In all the places through which he passed, anxious in-
quiries were made about “his father,” as the people called
Clapperton ; and when they heard of his death, they raised
loud lamentations. He reached Badagry on the 21st No-
vember, 1827; but, being detained some time there and at
Cape Coast Castle, did not reach England till the 30th
April, 1828. |

The British government were still indefatigable in their
exertions to explore every region of Africa. At the same
time that Clapperton proceeded on his second expedition,
Major Laing, who had distinguished himself in the Ashan-
tee war, and in the short excursion already mentioned to-
_ wards the source of the Niger, undertook to penetrate to
Timbuctoo, which, from the first era of modern discovery,
has been regarded as the most prominent city of Central
Africa. Tripoli was again chosen as the starting point,
from which he directed his steps south-west across the
Desert by way of Ghadamis. He set out under the pro-
tection of sheik Babani, who had resided twenty-two years at
Timbuctoo, and proved now to be governor of Ghadamis ;
but in the midst of the Desert, sixteen days after leaving
Tuat, a band of ferocious Tuaricks surprised the cafila
while Major Laing was in bed, and having inflicted twenty-
four wounds, eight of them with a sabre, left him for dead.
Through the care of his companions, however, he made a
surprising recovery, numerous portions of bone having
been extracted from his head and temples. After some
farther delays he succeeded, on the 18th August, 1826, in
reaching Timbuctoo, where he remained for upwards of a
month. Several letters were received from him dated at
that celebrated city, respecting which he stated, that, ex-
cept in point of extent, which did not exceed the circuit of
four miles, it had completely answered his expectation;
that he had found its records copious and interesting ; and
had collected ample materials for correcting and improving
the geography of this part of Africa, But his departure
was hastened by the following circumstance: Labo, or
Bello, sultan of Masina, having obtained the supremac
over Timbuctoo, sent a letter to Osman, the governor, wit
instructions that the Christian, who, he understood, was

expected there, should be forthwith expelled in such 2

188 CAILLIE.

manner as to leave him no hope of everreturning. Laing,
thus obliged to accelerate his retreat, made an arrangement
with Barbooshi, a Moorish merchant, to accompany and
protect him in the route by Sego to the coast, which he had
determined to follow. Three days after leaving Timbuc-
too, when the caravan was in the heart of the Desert, this
wretch, instigated by the basest avarice, murdered, in the.
night-time, the individual whom he had undertaken to
guard, taking possession of all his effects. Yet Major
_ Laing’s papers, it appears, were carried to Timbuctoo ; nay,
the Quarterly Review has produced strong reasons for be-
lieving that they were actually conveyed back to Tripoli,
and that it was owing to the vilest treachery, ina quarter
where it ought least to have been apprehended, that they
have not been forwarded to the British government. As,
however, the light, which is still much wanted, may per-
haps be hereafter thrown on this dark transaction, we wish
not at present to allude to it in a more pointed manner.
Another journey was now announced, which, in the first
instance, strongly excited the public expectation. The
French savans proclaimed throughout Europe, that M.
Caillié, their countryman, animated by the hope of a prize
offered by the Society of Geography, had penetrated across
Africa from Sierra Leone to Morocco, having passed through
Jenne and Timbuctoo, those two great seats of commerce
which modern travellers had sought so long to reach, and
whence none had ever returned. Caillié, rewarded with 2
pension and the cross of the Legion of Honour, was imme-
diately classed with the first of modern travellers. These
somewhat extravagant pretensions, contrasted with the de-
fects of the narrative itself when laid before the public, gave
rise in high quarters to a doubt whether there were any
reality whatever in this expedition, and whether M. Caillié
were not another Damberger. On a careful examination
of circumstances we are inclined to believe the aecuracy of
the narrative. ‘There seems good avthority for admitting
his departure from Sierra Leone; for his having announeed
the intention to undertake this journey; and, lastly, for his
arrival at Rabat in Morocco, in the condition of a dis-
tressed, way-worn traveller. His statement, too, with all
its defects, bears an aspect of simplicity and good faith, and
contains various minute details, including undesigned coin-

CAILLIE. 189

eidences with facts ascertained from other quarters. His
false reports of celestial phenomena might arise from his
ignorance of such subjects; while his inaccuracies in re-
gard to Major Laing might proceed from the defective hear-
say information on which he depended. Perhaps these
last form rather a presumption in his favour, since, in com-
posing a forgery, he would probably have brought his state-
ments into a studious agreement with those of the Quar-
terly Review, well known as the only authentic source in
this country.

Though disposed to consider M. Caillié’s expedition as
genuine and authentic, we regard it nevertheless as having
made only a limited addition to our knowledge of Interior
Africa. English travellers had already explored the coun-
try all around Timbuctoo, had traced the Niger far beyond
that city, and had ascertained its position in respect to the
surrounding regions. ‘The object now is, to obtain a de-
scription of 'Timbuctoo by an intelligent and learned tra-
veller, which M. Caillié is not. He certainly deserves com-
mendation for his enterprise; but fortune has denied him
education, and nature has not bestowed upon him any
ample share of reflection or judgment. Nevertheless it
was impossible to pass through such extensive and re-
markable countries without gleaning some valuable inform-
ation, of which we shall now endeavour to extract the most
important particulars. |

René Caillié was born in 1800, of poor parents, at
Mauzé, in the department of the Deux Sévres. The read-
ing of voyages and travels, and especially of Robinson
Crusoe, inspired him, he tells us, with such an unconquer-
able thirst for adventure as took away all relish for the
sports and occupations of his age; and, after some opposi-
tion from his friends, he was permitted to follow his in-
clination. Having got a sight of some maps of Africa, the
vast spaces left vacant, or marked as unknown, excited in
his mind a peculiar interest ; hence, in 1816, he sailed from
Rochefort for the Senegal. Some time after his arrival,
having learned the departure of Major Gray’s expedition for
the interior, he resolved to join it, and actually set out on
foot for that purpose ; but the fatigue of walking over loose
sand under a burning sun overpowered him, and he was
happy to obtain a water conveyance to Goree, He even

190 CAILLIE.

left Africa, but returned in the end of 1818. Finding at
St. Louis a party setting out with supplies for Major Gray,
he joined them, and arrived at Bondou, but only in time to
witness and share the failure of that expedition.

M. Caillié’s health having suffered severely from the
fatigues of this journey, he returned and spent some years
in France; but in 1824 he repaired again to the Senegal,
and resumed his schemes of discovery. With the aid of
M. Roger, the governor, he passed nearly a year among
the tribe of Moors called Braknas, and conceived himself to
have acquired such a knowledge of the manners and reli-
gion of that race as would fit him for travelling in the cha-
_racter of a converted Mohammedan on a pilgrimage to
Mecca. Having returned to St. Louis, he solicited from
two successive governors the sum of 6000 francs, with
which he undertook to reach Timbuctoo; but a deaf ear
was turned to his application. He then repaired to Sierra
Leone, and made the same request to General Turner and
Sir Neil Campbell ; but these officers could not be expected,
without authority from home, to bestow such a sum on a
foreigner possessing no very striking qualifications. ‘They
received him kindly, however, and gave him appointments
out of which he saved about 80/.; when, stimulated by the
prize of 1000 francs offered by the French Society of Geo-
graphy to any individual who should succeed in reaching
Timbuctoo, he formed the spirited resolution to undertake
this arduous journey with only the resources which the
above slender sum could command.

On the 19th April, 1827, M. Caillié set out from Ka-.

kundy with a small caravan of Mandingoes. His route lay
through the centre of the kingdom of F'oota Jallo, in a line

’

intermediate between its two capitals of Teemboo and Laby. |

This was a very elevated district, watered by the infant
streams of the Senegal and Niger, which descend from a
still higher region towards the south. It was a laborious
route to travel, being steep, rocky, traversed by numerous
ravines and torrents, and often obstructed by dense forests.
It presented, however, many highly-picturesque views;
while the copious rivulets diffused a rich verdure over exten-
sive tracts, on which the Foulahs fed numerous flocks,
which, with a little rice they contrived to raise, sufficed for
their subsistence. Fruits of various kinds, yams, and other

/

CAILLIE. 191

vegetables, are also cultivated with success. Their rude
agriculture, however, is conducted chiefly by slaves, who
are in general well treated, living in villages by themselves,
and having two days in the week allowed to provide for
their own subsistence. Caillié, like other writers, describes
the Foulahs as a fine and handsome people, attached to a
pastoral life, but at the same time very warlike, and exces-
sively bigoted in religion. . |

In his route through Foota Jallo, the traveller crossed
the Bafing, not far from its source, where it was still ford-
able, though it rolled a rapid and foaming stream about 100
paces broad. It is said, at a little distance above, to form
a very striking cataract. About 100 miles farther on, in
the territory of Kankan, near the village of Couroussa, he
came to the Joliba or Niger, already a very considerable
river, eight or ten feet deep, and running at the rate of two
miles and a half an hour.

Kankan, where the traveller spent some time, is described
as an interesting place, with about 6000 inhabitants, sur-
rounded by a beautiful quickset-hedge, answering the pur-
pose of a wall for defence. The market, held thrice a
week, is extremely well supplied, not only with the native
commodities of cloth, honey, wax, cotton, provisions, cattle,
and gold from the neighbouring district of Bouré, but aiso
with European articles brought up from the coast, among
which the chief are, firearms, powder, India calicoes, amber,
beads, and coral. The adjoining country is fertile and
highly cultivated. The Milo, a tributary to the Niger,
runs close by the town. To the north is the province of
Bouré, which our author represents as more abundant in
gold than any other in this part of Africa. The metallic
produce here, as well as in the districts visited by Park, is
entirely alluvial, imbedded in a species of earth, from which
it is separated by agitation in water.

_ _ M. Caillié remained more than a month at Kankan be-
fore he could find a caravan to guide him through Ouas-
soulo, a fine country diversified by numerous little villages
surrounded by fields neatly laid out and highly cultivated.
The people are industrious, mild, humane, hospitable, and,
though pagans, feel no enmity towards their Mohammedan
neighbours. The women weave a fine cotton cloth, which
is exported to all the surrounding districts; yet there was

.

192. CAILLIE.

a want of that cleanliness which, in Kankan, had formed a
pleasant feature. Beyond Ouassoulo is the town of Sam-
batikila, the iahabitants of which live in voluntary poverty,
bestowing little trouble on the cultivation of the ground,
which they allege distracts them from the study of the
Koran,—a statement justly derided as only a specious cloak
for their indolence. The traveller came next to Timé,
situated in a favourable territory, fertile, and profusely irri- |
gated, yielding abundantly various fruits and vegetables,
which are scarce or unknown on the coast. Among these
were the shea or butter-tree, and the kolla or goora nuts, —
which are esteemed a great luxury, and conveyed in large
quaritities into the interior. ‘The victuals, however, were
found insipid, owing to the almost total absence of salt,
which can only be procured by the wealthy; nor could our
traveller at all relish the plan of seasoning food by a sauce
extracted from the flesh of mice.

He was detained at Timé upwards of five months by a
severe illness. On the 9th January, 1828, he joined a ca-
ravan for Jenne, and proceeded through a district generally
well cultivated, and containing a number of considerable
villages, till, on the 10th March, he came in view, near the
village of Cougalia, of the Niger, which appeared to him
only about 500 feet broad, but very deep, flowing gently
through a flat and open country. The caravan sailed across
it, and, after travelling six miles, and passing, by rather
deep fords, two smaller branches, they entered the city of
Jenne, one of the most celebrated and important in Central
Africa, and which had never before been visited: by an Euro-
pean traveller. om

Jenne is described by Caillié as situated at the eastern ex-
tremity of a branch of the Niger separating below Sego
from the main current, with which, after passing the former
city, it again unites.. This delineation seems doubtful.
Such a branch, had it existed, would probably have been

‘observed by Park, who, on the contrary, describes the river

which passes by Jenne as a separate stream, tributary to the
Niger. The Arabic term, translated by us 7s/and, is of very
vague import, being familiarly applied to a peninsula, and
even to a space wholly or partially enclosed by river-
branches. The country around, as far as the eye could
reach, formed only a naked marshy plain, interspersed with

CAILLIE. 193

& few clumps of trees and bushes. The city was two miles
and a half in circuit, surrounded by a wall of earth; the
houses rather well built, composed of sun-dried bricks, two
stories high, without windows in front, but lighted from in-
terior courts. The streets are too narrow for carriages, but
of such breadth that seven or eight persons may walk
abreast. The population is reckoned by M. Caillié at 8,000
or 10,000; but upon this subject we-suspect he is apt to
form his estimates somewhat too low. The inhabitants
consist of various African tribes, attracted by the extensive
commerce of which Jenne is the centre. ‘The four prin-—
cipal are the Foulahs, Mandingoes, Bambarras, and Moors,
of whom the first are the most numerous, and are bigoted
adherents to the Mohammedan faith, compelling the pagan
Bambarras who resort to Jenne to conform to the rules of
the Koran during their temporary residence. The trade is
chiefly in the hands of thirty or forty Moorish merchants,
who often unite in partnership, and maintain a communi-
~ cation with Timbuctoo, in barks of considerable size ranged
along the river. The negro merchants also carry on busi-
ness, but on a smaller scale, and chiefly in native articles.
The markets are filled with the productions of the sur-
rounding country, either for consumption or exportation,
—cloth, grain, fruits, kolla-nuts, meat, fish, gold from
Bouré, and unhappily with numerous slaves, who are pa-
raded through the streets, and offered at the rate of from
35,000 to 40,000 cowries each. These commodities draw
‘in return from Timbuctoo, salt, Indian cloths, firearms,
beads, toys, and all the variety of European articles. The
merchants of Jenne were found more. polished in their
manners than any native Africans with whom Caillié had
yet held intercourse: they were extremely hospitable, en-
tertaining him at free quarters during his whole stay; but
he considers them as having driven an exceedingly hard
bargain for his goods. The mode of living, even of the
most wealthy, was extremely simple. Their houses con-
tained scarcely any furniture; and their clothes were de-
posited in a large leathern bag, generally suspended from
the roof. The chief entertamment to which our traveller
Was invited consisted merely of a huge fragment of a
sheep stewed in onions, and, as usual, eaten with the
fingers,—four cups of tea sk ein the repast.

194 CAILLIE.

On the 23d March, M. Caillié left Jenne, near which he
embarked on the Joliba, which was there half a mile broad,
in a vessel of sixty tons burden, but of very slight construc-
tion, and bound together with cords. Such barks, impelled
without sails, and deeply laden, cannot proceed with safety
when the waters are agitated by a brisk gale; therefore
much time is consumed in the voyage. The traveller
passed first through the country of Banan, which presented
a surface flat and monotonous, but abounding in flocks and
herds. On the 2d April, the river opened into the great
lake Dibbie, here called Debo, in sailing across which, not-
withstanding its magnitude, land was lost sight of in no di-
rection except the west, where the water appeared to extend
indefinitely like an ocean. Three islands, observed at dif-
ferent points, were, not very happily, named St. Charles,
Maria Theresa, and Henri, after three individuals who, the
author little suspected, would so soon be exiled from
France.

After quitting this lake, the Niger flowed through a
country thinly occupied by Foulah shepherds, and by some
tents of the rude Tuaricks. On the 19th April, he arrived ~
at Cabra, the port of Timbuctoo, consisting of a long row
of houses composed of earth and straw, extending about half
a mile on the bank of the river. The inhabitants, estimated
at about 1200, are entirely employed in lading and unlading
the numerous barks which touch at the quay.

In the evening of the 20th April, Caillié, with some com-
panions, rode from Cabra, and entered Timbuctoo, which he
‘calls Temboctou. He describes himself asstruck with an ex-
traordinary and joyful emotion at the view ofthis mysterious
city, so long the object of curiosity to the civilized nations of
' Europe. The scene, however, presented little of that gran-
deur and wealth with which the name has been associated.
It. comprised only.a heap of ill-built earthen houses, all
around which were spread immense plains of moving sand
of a yellowish-white colour, and parched in the extreme.
‘“‘ The horizon is of a pale red,—all is gloomy in nature,—
the deepest silence reigns,—not the song of a single bird is
heard ;” yet there was something imposing in the view of a
great city, thus raised amid sands and deserts by the mere
power of commerce.

Although M. Caillié resided above a fortnight in Tim

LA

ee oats

Pea fs

;
4
H

rece —————

= '

rine =

Timbuctoo according to Caillé.—[p. 195.]

CAILLIE. 195

buctoo, his information respecting it is very defective. It
_ appears, except in point of situation, to be nearly such a
city as Jenne, consisting of large houses, chiefly tenanted
by Moorish merchants, intermingled with conical straw-huts
occupied by negroes. The author has given a croquis, or
sketch of part of Fthe city, which, though very deficient in per-
spective, is yet so curious as to merit a place in this publi-
cation. There are seven mosques, of which the principal
one is very extensive, having three galleries, each two hun-
‘dred feet long, with a tower upwards of fifty feet high.
One part, apparently more ancient than the rest, and
almost falling into ruin, was thought to exhibit a style of
architecture decidedly superior to ‘the more modern build-
ings.

Timbuctoo is entirely supported by. commerce. It is the
depot. of the salt conveyed from the mines of Taudeny, and
also of the European goods brought by the caravans from
Morocco, as well as by those from Tunis and Tripoli, which

come by way of Ghadamis. ‘These goods are embarked for
Jenne, to be exchanged for the gold, slaves, and provisions
with which that city exclusively supplies Timbuctoo, the
neighbourhood being almost a complete desert. The popu-
lation is estimated at 10,000 or 12,000, which, not being in
proportion to a town three miles in circumference, i 1S pro-
bably underrated. ‘The people are chiefly negroes of the
Kissour tribe, but bigoted Mohammedans. ‘There appeared
-less bustle and activity than at Jenne,—a circumstance
which does not seem very easily accounted for. Osman,
the king, was an agreeable-looking negro of fifty-five, to

whom the traveller was introduced, without being aware

that he was only viceroy, or at least tributary, to the sultan
of Masina. ‘The country is much harassed by the wan-
dering tribe of Tauricks, who, like the Bedouins in Arabia,
levy a 2 regular tax on the caravans.*

* The map constructed by M. Jomard, upon Caillié’s routes, changes
greatly the position of Timbuctoo, especially in respect to longitude,
which it places four degrees to the westward of the site assigned by Ma-
jor Rennel. It seems impossible, however, to admit an alteration tothis
extent, which would throw Sego so far westward as to render Park’s
bearings from Jarra to Sego, and from Sego to Bammakoo, completely
erroneous. Besides, it appears to us that M. Jomard has forced to the
westward ail the positions between Jenne and ‘Timbuctoo, in a manner
quite unwarranted by M. Caillié’s own descriptions. This excess

196 CAILLIE. .

Caillié left Timbuctoo on the 4th May, and in six days
arrived at Aroan or Arouan, which he found rather a well-
built town of 3000 inhabitants, supported solely by the pas-
sage of the caravans from Barbary, and from the salt-mines
of Taudeny, which usually halt here before and after pass-
ing the desert that extends to the northwards. The envi-
rons of Aroan are of the most desolate aspect, and all its

rovisions are drawn from Jenne by way of Timbuctoo,

he neighbourhood does not afford an herb or a shrub, and
the only fuel consists of the dried dung of camels. The
springs of water, which alone render it habitable, are abun-
dant, but of bad quality, The town also carries on a con-
siderable trade in light goods directly with Sansanding and
Yamina. Walet was mentioned as a great emporium, situ-
ated to the west-south-west, in a position somewhat differ-
ent from that assigned by Park ; but the data in both cases
are very vague, and we do not see the slightest ground for
M. Jomard’s conjecture that there are two Walets.

Our traveller departed from Aroan on the 19th May, in
company with a caravan of 120 camels laden with the pro-
ductions of Soudan. He had the prospect of crossing a
desert of ten days’ journey, in which there was scarcely
adrop of water. ‘¢ Before us appeared a horizon without
bounds, in which our eyes distinguished only an immense
plain of burning sand, enveloped by asky on fire. At this
spectacle the camels raised long cries, and the slaves
mournfully lifted their eyes to heaven.” M. Caillié, how-
ever, departed in high spirits, animated by the idea, of being

‘the first European who should, from the southern side; have

becomes manifest in the line from Galia to the mouth of the Debo,
35 miles of which are stated to run north-east, without a single move-
ment in a contrary direction; yet M. Jomard has manceuvred to make
the last position the most westerly of the two, If the route from Jenne to
Timbuctoo lies as much tothe northward as M. Caillie represents, where,
indeed, he in some measure agrees with the delineation of D’Anville, it
must be somewhat farther west than our maps place it, but not nearly so
far as M. Jomard fixes it. In regard to the observation of latitude at-
tempted by the traveller, M. Jomard’s claims are indeed very moderate.
since he merely argues, that in the absence of any other, this is not
wholly to be neglected ; yet even this seems too much, when he at the
same time admits, that all the observations made by him in a similar
manner are of no value whatever. Under these circumstances, we con-
ceive that it would be premature to change, in our map, the position of
Timbuctoo from that formerly fixed by Major Rennel. |

4
WESTERN AFRICA. 197

‘

crossed this ocean of shingle. But his tone of feeling was
soon lowered when he came to experience the sufferings
arising from the intense heat, the blowing of the sand, and
‘the scanty supply of water, which was allowed to the cara-
van only twice a-day leaving long intervals, during which
the most tormenting thirst was endured. Some small wells,
from which they had hoped for a little aid, were found dry ;
so that both men and animals were reduced to the last ex-
tremity, when they reached the copious springs of Telig,
and relieved their thirst by repeated draughts.

During many succeeding marches, water again became
scarce, and Caillié had much to suffer from the insult and
neglect of hiscompanions. El] Drah, on the outer frontier of
Morocco, was the first inhabited district; but it was poor,
and occupied by inhospitable tribes of Moors and Berebbers.
Turning somewhat eastward, they passed through the fine
country of Tafilet, covered with noble woods of date-trees,
and producing a valuable breed of sheep. They then crossed
with labour a rugged limb of the Atlas, and arrived at Fez,
whence the adventurer found his way, though in a some-
what poor plight, to Tangier. He arrived on the 18th
August, 1828, and M. Delaporte, the vice-consul, received
and forwarded him to France.

CHAPTER XIV.
Western Africa.

Tue ‘whole coast of Western Africa within the tropics,
forming a wide sweep around the Gulf of Guinea, has long
been occupied by a chain of European forts, erected with a
view to the commerce in gold, iron, and palm-oil, but above
all in slaves; and since this last object has been finally
abandoned by Great Britain, these stations have become to
her of very secondary importance. The territory is in the
possession of a number of petty states, many of which
compose aristocratic republics, turbulent, restless, licen-

tious, and generally es more depraved by their fre-
2

‘

‘198 “WESTERN AFRICA.

quent intercourse with Europeans. The interior country,
extending parallel to the great central chain of mountains,
of which the principal branch is here called Kong, presents
nothing of that desert and arid character which is stamped ,
on so great a proportion of the African continent. The
soil, copiously watered, is liable rather to an excessive
luxuriance ; but, where well managed, it is highly fruitful,
There are found, too, in this tract, several very powerful
kingdoms, better organized and more improved than any
near the coast. ‘They have not, however, the slightest
tincture of European civilization; and their manners, in
several important respects, are stained with habits and
practices that belong to the very lowest stage of savage life.
Of these greater states the first to which Europeans
penetrated was Dahomey, which had distinguished itself
early in the last century by the conquest it then achieved
of the flourishing kingdom of Whidah, on the slave-coast.
The Dahomans committed the most horrible ravages that
were ever witnessed,—reducing their country, the most
fertile and beautiful then known in Western Africa, to
almost utter desolation. As the king of Dahomey con-
tinued to hold sway over this province, Mr. Norris, in 1772,
undertook a journey thither to observe the character and
position of this extraordinary potentate, and to make
‘arrangements for the benefit of the English trade. He
passed through a fine country, abounding in the usual tro-
pical productions, and rising by a gentle ascent about 150
miles inland to Abomey, the capital. He arrived at an
appalling season, that of the annual customs, when the
great men were assembled from every quarter of the king-
dom ; and he was truly astonished to see those fierce and
warlike chieftains, whose very name spreads terror through-
out Africa, prostrating themselves before the monarch, flat
on the ground, and piling dust on their heads in token of
the most abject submission. This homage is yielded, not
from fear, but from a blind and idolatrous veneration, which
makes them regard their king in the light of a superior
being. In his name they rush to battle, and encounter
their foes with Spartan intrepidity. One of them said to
Mr. Norris, “I think of my king, and then J dare engage
five of the enemy myself.” He added, “ My head belongs
© the king, and not to myself; if he please to send for it, I

i

NORRIS——DAHOMEY. 199.

am ready to resign it; or if it be shot through in a battle,
I am satisfied, since it is in his service.” The main object
contemplated in this national anniversary is, that the king
may water the graves of his ancestors with the blood of
human victims. These are numerous, consisting of pri-
soners taken in war, of condemned criminals, and of many
seized by lawless violence. The captives are brought out
in succession, with their arms pinioned; and a feiisheer,
laying his hand upon the devoted head, utters a few magic
words, while another from behind, with a large scimitar,
severs it from the body, when shouts of applause ascend
from the surrounding multitude. At any time when the
king has a message to convey to one of his deceased rela-
tions, he delivers it to one of his subjects, then strikes off
his head, that he may carry it to the other world; and if
any thing farther occurs to him after he has performed this
ceremony, he delivers it to another messenger, whom he
despatches in the same manner.

Another grand object of this periodical festival is the
market for wives. All the unmarried females throughout
the kingdom are esteemed the property of the sovereign, ©
and are brought to the annual customs, to be placed at his
disposal. He selects for himself such as appear most beau-
tiful and engaging, and retails the others at enormous
prices to his chiefs and nobles. No choice on this occasion
is allowed to the purchaser ; in return for his twenty thou-
sand cowries, a wife is handed out, and, even be she old
and ugly, he must rest contented; nay, some, it is said,
have in mockery been presented with their own mothers.
The king usually keeps his wives up to the number of three
thousand, who serve him in various capacities,—being
partly trained to act asa body-guard, regularly regimented,
and equipped with drums, flags, bows and arrows, while a
few carry muskets. They all reside in the palace, which
consists merely of an immense assemblage of cane and
mud tents, enclosed by a high wall. The sculls and jaw-
bones of enemies slain in battle form the favourite orna-
ment of the palaces and temples. The king’s apartmentis
paved, and the walls and roof stuck over with these horrid
trophies; and if a farther supply appears desirable, he
announces to his general that “his house wants thatch,”

when a war for that purpose is immediately undertaken.

4

f,

200 WESTERN AFRICA. |

Mr. M‘Leod, during his residence at Whidah, in 1803,
found the country still groaning under the cruel effects of
‘Dahoman tyranny. He particularly deplores the case of
Sally Abson, daughter of the late English governor by a
native female, who, trained in all European accomplish-
ments, added to them the most engaging simplicity -of
manners. Suddenly, she disappeared, and Mr. M‘Leod’s
eager inquiries were met by a mysterious silence; all hung
down their heads, confused and terrified. At length an old
domestic whispered to him that a party of the king’s half-
heads (as his messengers are termed) had carried her off in
the night, to be enrolled among the number of his wives,
and warned him of the danger of uttering a word of com
plaint. )

A more pleasing spectacle was presented to Messrs. Watt
and Winterbottom, who, in 1794, ascended the Rio Nunez
to Kakundy, and made an excursion to Foota Jallo, the
principal state of the southern Foulahs. This people pro-
fess the Mohammedan religion, are orderly and well in-
structed, display skill in working mines of iron, and in car-
rying on the manufacture of cloth, leather, and other African
fabrics. Caravans of 500 or 600 Foulahs were often met,
earrying on their heads loads of 160 pounds weight. ‘The
article chiefly sought after is salt, which the children suck as
ours do sugar; and it is common to describe a rich man by
saying, he eats salt. ‘The two principal towns, Laby and
Teemboo, were found to contain respectively 5000 and '7000
inhabitants. The king could muster 16,000 troops, whom,
unhappily, he employed in war, or at least hunts, against
twenty-four pagan nations that surround his territory,
chiefly with the view of procuring slaves for the market on
the coast. When the travellers represented to him the ini-
quity of this course, he replied, ‘The people with whom
we go to war never pray to God; we never go to war with
people who pray to God Almighty.” As they urged, that
in a case of common humanity this ought to make no dis-
tinction, he quoted passages from the’ Koran commanding
the faithful to make war on unbelievers. They took the
liberty to insinuate that these might be interpolations of
the Devil, but found it impossible to shake his reliance on
their authenticity. aid

A more recent ard memorable intercourse was that opened

ASHANTER. 201

with the court of Ashantee. This people were first mene
tioned, in the beginning of last century, under the name
of Assente or Asienti, and as constituting a great kingdom
in the interior,—the same that was described to Mr. Lucas,
at Tripoli, as the ultimate destination of those caravans
which, proceeding from that city, measure the breadth of
Africa. Being separated from the maritime districts, how-
ever, by Aquamboc, Dinkira, and other powerful states, they
did not come inro contact with any European settlement,
It was not, indeed, till the commencement of this century
that these states were obliged to give way before the grow-
ing strength of the Ashantee empire, which at length ex-
tended to the borders of the Fantees, the principal people
on the Gold Coast. These last were ill fitted to cope with
such formidable neighbours. They are a turbulent, rest-
less tribe, and extremely prompt in giving offence, but in
battle they are equally cowardly and undisciplined. The
king of Ashantee having, not unwillingly perhaps, re-
ceived from them high provocation, sent, in 1808, an army
of 15,000 warriors, which entered their territory, and laid
it waste with fire and sword. At length they came to
Anamaboe, where the Fantees had assembled a force of
9000 men; but these were routed at the first onset, and
ae to death, except a few who sought the protection of the
ritish fort. ‘The victors, then considering the British as
allies of their enemy, turned theirarms against the station,
at that time defended by not more than twelve men. Yet
this gallant little band, supported by slender bulwarks,
completely baffled the fierce and repeated assaults made by
this barbarous host, who were repulsed with considerable
slaughter. Seized with admiration and respect for British
prowess, the Ashantees now made proposals for a negotia-
tion, which were accepted, and mutual visits were paid
and returned. The English officers were peculiarly struck
with the splendid array, the dignified and courteous man-
ners, and even the just moral feeling, displayed by these
warlike strangers. They, on their side, expressed an
ardent desire to open a communication with the sea and
with the British, complaiming that the turbulent Fantees
opposed the only obstacle to so desirable a purpose. A
treaty was concluded, and a thoroughly good understanding
seemed established between the two nations. The Ashan-

i
t

i
»
ene

202 WESTERN AFRICA.

tees, however, made several successful incursions in 1811
and 1816; and on the last occasion the Fantees were
obliged to own their supremacy, and engage to pay an
annual tribute. The British government judiciously kept
aloof from these feuds; but in 1817 a mission was sent,
under Messrs. James, Bowdich, and Hutchinson, to visit the
capital of that powerful kingdom, and to adjust some trifling
dissensions which had unavoidably arisen.

The mission having set out on the 22d April, 1817, passed
over a country covered, in a great measure, with immense
and overgrown woods, through which a footpath had with
difficulty been cut, though in some parts it presented the
most beautiful scenery. Being delayed by Mr. James’s ill-
ness, they did not arrive at Coomassie, the capital, till the
19th May, when they were surprised at its unexpected
splendour. It was four miles in circumference, built not in-
deed with European elegance, but in a style considerably
superior to any of the maritime towns. The houses, though
low, and constructed only of wood, were profusely covered

A
atin
ie

“US,
f ey) \ TA
iy Mee : i
AN us pel

i

BOWDICH——ASHANTEE. 203

with ornament and sculpture. The array of the caboceers,
or great war-chiefs, was at once brilliant, dazzling, and wild.
They were loaded with fine cloths, in which vatriously-
coloured threads of the richest foreign silks were curiously
interwoven ; and both themselves and their horses were co-
vered with decorations of gold beads, Moorish charms, or
amulets, purchased at a high price, and the whole inter-
mingled with strings of human teeth and bones. Leopards’
skins, red shells, elephants’ tails, eagle and ostrich feathers,
and brass bells were among the favourite ornaments. On
being introduced to the king, the English found all these
embellishments crowded and concentrated on his own per-

son and that of his attendants, who were literally oppressed.

with large masses of solid gold. Even the most common
utensils were composed of that metal. At the same time,
the executioner, with his hatchet on his breast, and the ex-
ecution-stool clotted with blood, gave a thoroughly savage
character to all this pomp. The manners of the king, how-
ever, were marked by a dignified courtesy ; he received the
strangers cordiaily, and desired them to come and speak their
palaver in the market-place. On the presents being carried
to the palace, he expressed high satisfaction, as well as
great admiration of the English workmanship. After seve-
ral other interviews, he entered on the subjects under dis-
cussion, which related to some annual payments formerly
made to the F'antees for permission to erect forts, as well as
for the ground on which they stood; and the king now de-
manded, as conqueror of the country, that these payments
should be transferred to himself. The claim was small, and
seems, according to African ideas, to have been reasonable ;

but Mr. James thought himself bound to remain intrenched
in the rules of European diplomacy, and simply replied, that
he would state the demand to the governor of Cape Coast.

The king then told them that he expected they had come to
settle all palavers, and to stay and be friends with him ; but
now he found that their object was to make a fool of him.
Considering himself insulted, he broke through the ceremo-
nious politeness which he had before studiously maintained.
He called out,“ The white men join with the Fantees to cheat
me, to put shame upon my face.” Mr. James having re-
mained firm, the king became more incensed, and exclaimed,

“The English come to cheat me; they come to spy the

| ‘
204 WESTERN AFRICA.

country; they want war, they want war!” Mr. James
merely replied, ‘* No; we want trade ;” but the monarch’s
wrath increased to such a degree, that he started from his
seat, and bit his beard, calling out, ** Shantee foo! Shantee
foo !” and added, “ If a black man had brought me this mes-
sage, I would have had his head cut off before me.” A sin-
ee manceuvre now took place in the diplomatic party.
Mr. Bowdich, with two junior members, eonceiviiig that
Mr. James’s too rigid adherence to rule was endangering
the preservation of peace with this powerful sovereign, re-
solved to supersede him, and undertake the charge of the
negotiation. ‘They conducted it entirely to the satisfaction
of his Ashantee majesty, who concluded a treaty with the
English, and even made a proposal of sending two of his
sons to be educated at Cape Coast Castle.

During their stay at Coomassie, the commissioners wit-
nessed dreadful scenes, which seem to sink the Ashantee
character even below the ordinary level of savage life. The
customs, or human sacrifices, are practised on a scale still
more tremendous than at Dahomey. The king had lately
sacrificed on the grave of his mother 3000 victims, 2000 of
whom were Fantee prisoners ; and at the death of the late
sovereign the sacrifice was continued weekly for three
months, consisting each time of two hundred slaves. The
absurd belief here entertained that the rank of the deceased
in the future world is decided by the train which he carries
along with him, makes filial piety interested in promoting
by this means the exaltation of a departed parent. On
these occasions, the caboceers and princes, in order to court
royal favour, often rush out, seize the first person they meet,
and drag him in for sacrifice. While the customs last,
therefore, it is with trembling steps that any one crosses
his threshold ; and when compelled to do so, he rushes along
with the utmost speed, dreading every instant the murder-
dus grasp which would consign him to death. _ !

To cultivate the good understanding now established, the
British government very judiciously sent out M. Dupuis,
who, during his residence as consul at Mogadore, had ac-
quired a great knowledge of Africa and its people. But,
before his arrival, the ardour of their mutual affection had
been cooled by the intervention of some clouds, which he
had set out in the hope of dispelling. This mission, which

DUPUIS—-ASHANTEE. ' 908

arrived at Coomassie early in 1820, was well conducted,
and succeeded in its object. The king renewed, in the
most ample measure, his professions of desire to cultivate
- a friendly intercourse with the British nation ; withdrew
such of his demands as were shown to be inadmissible;
amd while he claimed full dominion over the coast, agreed
that the English should exercise jurisdiction within, and
even in the immediate vicinity of their own forts.

M. Dupuis found this monarch deeply impressed with
respect for white men, and also with a desire tu imitate
und rival the pomp of European kings. He was erecting
a palace, the outside of which consisted only of large logs of
timber; but the interior was to be adorned with brass,
ivory, and gold. He said, ‘‘ Now white men know me, I
must live in a great house as white kings do; then I shall
not be ashamed when white people come ;”—and on an-
other occasion, “I must have every thing suitable, and live
like a white king.” He had procured architects from El-
mina to give instructions to his own subjects, who, how-
ever, performed the task in so awkward a manner, that he
himself laughed at them, exclaiming, “Ashantees fools
at work.” But the want of skill was compensated by their
numbers ; and while engaged at work, they suggested to
M. Dupuis the singular image of a legion of devils attempt-
ing to constructa tower of Babel.

The envoy had the unhappiness of being resident during
the ‘‘ Little Adai Custom,” as it was called, and under-
stood that in one day upwards of seventy victims had been
sacrificed in the palace alone. He was not present; but
waiting on the king immediately after, saw his clothes
stained with blood, the royal death-stool yet reeking, va-
rious amulets steeped in gore, while a spot on the brow of
his majesty and his principal chiefs indicated the work in
which they had been.engaged.

The government of Cape Coast Castle unfortunately did
not ratify the treaty concluded by M. Dupuis, but under-
took to support the Fantees in an attempt to throw off the
Ashantee yoke. ‘They were thus involved in hostilities
with the latter people, whose sovereign, in January, 1824,
entered Fantee with a force of 15,000 men. Sir Charles
M‘Carthy, newly appointed governor, being ill-informed
«s to the strength of the enemy, marched out to meet him

K

~

Ss

206 ~ -' WES'TTERN AFRICA.

\

with a force of scarcely a thousand British, supported by a
crowd of cowardly and undisciplined auxiliaries, The two
armies met near the boundary stream of the Bossompra,
where the English, soon deserted by their native allies in
whose cause they had taken the field, maintained the con-
test for some time with characteristic valour, till it was
discovered, that through the negligence of the ordnance-
keeper, the supply of powder was entirely exhausted.
Thus deprived of the use of firearms, they were surrounded
by the immensely superior numbers of a warlike and des-
perate enemy, and after a fearful contest, the particulars of
which never fully transpired, the whole army either pe-
rished on the field, or underwent the more cruel fate of
captivity in the hands of this merciless foe, Only three
officers, all of whom were wounded, brought the dreadful
tale to Cape Coast Castle. ‘The Ashantees then overran
the whole open country, laid siege to the castle, and pressed
it closely for some months. Being repeatedly checked,
however, and suffering under sickness and want of provi-
sions, they retreated into their own country; nor has the
king, distracted by the rebellion of some neighbouring
states, ever since attempted to march down upon the coast.
Captain Adams, in the course of a trading voyage along
the African shore, visited Benin, the capital of which is
situated on a river coming from the north-east. The city is
large, apparently containing about 15,000 inhabitants, and
surrounded by a country extremely fertile, but not highly
cultivated. The king of Benin is F ctishepe-micieah lea by
his subjects as a god, and must not on any account be sup-
posed either to eat or sleep. Heresy against this creed is
unished in the most prompt and summary manner, by
instantly striking off the head of the unbeliever. With all
his divine and royal attributes, however, the king does not
disdain the occupation of a merchant, and drives a hard bar-
ain while exchanging slaves and ivory for tobaeco, which
is a favourite luxury in this part of Africa. He is very ac-
cessible to strangers, provided they spread before him as a
present a handsome piece of red silk damask. Human sa-
crifices are not practised to the same dreadful extent as in
some other parts of Africa ; yet a considerable number are
offered on the graves of their great men, and four annually

at the mouth of the river, as an amulet to attract vessels

SOUTHERN AFRICA. 207

but such is the pestilential character of the climate, that
this bloody charm brings now comparatively few slave-mer-
chants to Benin. ;

Captain Adams ascended also to Waree, an insular terri-
tory, enclosed by two branches of another stream flowing
through this alluvial district. It is beautiful as well as fer-
tile, is about five miles in circuit, and appears as if it had
dropped down from the clouds; for all the surrounding
shores consist of an impenetrable forest, rising out of a
swamp. Even in the dry season the water stands on the
ground a foot in depth, producing exhalations which prove
_excessively destructive to the European constitution, as well
as to all the more delicate plants and animals that happen
to be removed from the drier soils of the interior, In other
respects, this intelligent navigator did not make any mate-
rial addition to the knowledge of Western Africa previously
derived from other sources,

EEE

CHAPTER XY.
Southern and Eastern Africa.

Tue southern extremity of Africa has long attracted the
particular attention of modern navigators. ‘T'o pass this
mighty cape formed the main object of ambition with the
Pin rite in their celebrated voyages of discovery along
the African coast. After almost a century had been spent
in successive endeavours to accomplish that undertaking,
Diaz obtained a view of this great promontory ; but the
stormy sky in which it was enveloped, and the fearful swell
produced by the conflict of the contending oceans, appalled
even that stout navigator. He named it the Cape of Tem-

ests, and immediately returned with his shattered barks to

ortugal. The king, with a bolder spirit, substituted forth-
with the name of Cape of Good Hope, which it has ever
since retained; yet some years elapsed before the daring
éails of Gama rounded this formidable barrier, and bore
across the ocean to the golden shores of India.

The Portuguese, engrossed by the discovery and conquest

/

208 SOUTHERN AFRICA.

of the kingdoms of the East, and busied in lading their ves-
sels with the produce of those vast and opulent regions,
scarcely deigned to cast an eye on the rude border of South-
ern Africa, its terraces of granite, its naked Karroo plains,
or the filthy and miserable kraals of the Hottentot. ‘Their
_ fleets, indeed, stopped occasionally for water and refresh-
ments; but no attempts were made to occupy, and still less
to colonize, this barren and unpromising country.

The Dutch, a prudent and calculating people, having .

pushed their way into the Indian seas, where they first

rivalled and then supplanted the Portuguese, were not long —

in discovering the important advantage that might be de-
rived from the Cape as a naval station. In 1650, they
founded Cape 'Town,—a step which led to farther improve-
ment ; for it thereby became necessary that supplies of grain

and provisions should be drawn from the surrounding coun-'

try. When, moreover, it was discovered that on some
neighbouring hills the vine could be reared in high perfec-
tion, a new value was stamped upon the settlement. The
natives, not then destitute of bravery, but ill-armed, undis-
ciplined, and disunited, were easily driven back by the colo-
nists, or reduced to an almost complete and hopeless bond:
age; and hence the country, for several hundred miles in
every direction, so far as it afforded any herbage, was soon
covered with extensive grazing farms under Dutch masters.

Peter Kolben, who resided some years at the Cape, pub-
lished a narrative, which, though it be lable toa few excep-
tions, gives us by far the fullest account of the Hottentots,
before that race was completely weighed dewn by Euro-
pean oppression. This unfortunate tribe has become noted
and almost proverbial for presenting man in his lowest es-
tate, and under the closest alliance with the inferior orders
of creation. It must, indeed, be admitted, that they take
particular pains to render their external appearance the
most hideous that the human body can possibly present.
Grease is poured over their persons im copious streams,
which, being exposed to the perpetual action of smoke, forms
on their skin a black and shining cake, through which the
native colour, a yellowish brown, is scarcely ever percepti-
ble. Grease in Africa forms the chief distinction of rank,—
the rich besmearing themselves with fresh butter, while the
poorer classes are obliged to tear the fa. from the bowels cf

OOOO EE

°
KOLBEN. 209

slaughtered animals. They assign as a reason for this sin-
gular practice an effect which has been readily admitted by
judicious travellers, namely, that such a coating has in this
climate a most salutary influence in defending them from
the rays of the sun, and in averting many cutaneous dis-
orders. Nature seems to have aided the task of disfiguring
them, by covering the head with irregular tufts of hard and
coarse hair, and causing sia@ular prominences, composed
of fat, to jut out in parts e they are least ornamental.
Nor do their habits of life present any thing to redeem this
outward deformity. Their kraals consist of a confused
crowd of little conical hovels, composed of twigs and earth,
in which large families sit and sleep, without having room
to stand upright. The fire in the middle fills these man-
sions with thick smoke, the floors of which are deeply co-
vered with every species of filth. At festivals, when an ox
or a sheep is killed, the Hottentots rip open the belly, tear
out the entrails, which they throw on the coals, and feast on
them before the animal is completely dead. Yet they are a
friendly, merry, hospitable race, living together in the great-
est affection and harmony. The sluggish and senseless
stupidity with which they have been so generally taxed,
seems to have been in a great measure produced by their
degrading subjection to the Dutch boors. In their free
state they had a republican form of polity, and konquers or
captains of the kraal, who led them to war, which they car-
ried on with extreme fury. This commander usually sounded a
pipe or flageolet, durmg which his men fought without in-
termission ; but as soon as the music ceased they began to
retreat. The Hottentots direct their darts and throwing-
sticks with a sure aim, surround and attack wild animals
with skill.and vigour, and evade their springs with a dexte-
rity which no European can equal. They tan, dress, and
shape skins; make mats of flags and bulrushes; also twist
strings for their bows out of. the sinews of animals; and
even mould iron into cutting instruments with considerable
expertness. In their free and happy state, they displayed
the same passion for the dance and song which is general
throughout Africa. A heavy reproach lies upon this race,
as being destitute of all ideas of religion; and the atheist
has even boasted of them as an exception to that universal be-

lief of mankind, which is urged against his unnatural tenet.
Ss

ad

”
210 SOUTHERN AFRICA.

Supposing this assertion correct, such ignorance, which
roust have sprung from profound and stupid apathy, could
not form any high authority on a subject so abstruse. But
the fact itself, as in every similar case, has vanished before
the light of more accurate observation. The Hottentot had
neither temples, images, nor the pomp of a regular priest-
hood ; but he believed in a supreme good Being, whom ‘he
viewed with distant adoratior also in a little deformeu
and malignant power, a 7 sought to pacify by gifts
and sacrifices. He had the usual superstitions of unen-
lightened men, hailing the new and full moon not only by
offerings, but by shouts, cries, and dances, prolonged
throughout the night. He attached a sacred character to
certain woods, hills, and rivers, which he supposed haunted
by departed friends or by the spirits of the ancient heroes
of his tribe. Lastly, to come to the very lowest, the Hot-
tentots had a little shining beetle which they had exalted
almost into a deity.

About the close of the last century, Southern Africa ex-
cited a particular interest among the lovers of natural his-
tory, from the brilliancy of its floral productions, and from
those remarkable forms of the animal kingdom, which,
though generally diffused over that continent, could be
_ most safely and easily studied in the vicinity of the Cape.
In 1778, Captain Henry Hope, who, under the authority
of the Dutch government, had penetrated into the interior
of the colony with a caravan of eighty-nine persons, pub-
lished at Amsterdam a work containing plates of the giraffe
or camelopard, the zebra, the hippopotamus, the gnu, and
other animals then almost’ unknown in Europe. Soon
after, the whole region was carefully surveyed by two emi-
nent naturalists, first Sparrman, and then Le Vaillant,—
the one distinguished by sound sense and accurate observa-
tion, the other by the splendid colouring which he suc-
ceeded in throwing over the narrative of his personal ad-
ventures. These travellers viewed with admiration the
elegant forms of the giraffe and the zebra, the light shape
and bright eye of the spring-bok, the most beautiful of an-
telopes, and of which herds were seen covering these de-
sert plains as far as the eye could reach. ‘They were
struck also with the odd shapes of the gnu and the quagga,
combining as it were, the most opposite natures. Sparr-

- BARROW. 211

man’s hints were not very successful: he gave chase re-
peatedly to the gnu; but that animal, by its swift bounds,
eluded pursuit. Herds of zebras were seen only at a dis-
tance; and of all the hippopotami which he attacked, he
could carry off only one, three weeks old. He made a full
examination, however, of the rhinoceros and the quagga,
and brought to Europe the first precise account of that
wonderful and destructive insect, the termes or white ant.
Le Vaillant, more fortunate, conveyed to France the skin
of the giraffe, as well as that of a full-grown hippopo-

tamus. He brought also a rich collection of birds, and

many specimens of those beautiful and flowering shrubs
which spring up only amid the sands of the African desert.
Mr. Barrow, who, in 1797, while private secretary to
Lord Macartney, made a tour through the Cape territory,
communicated more important information than any of his
predecessors, and exhibited for the first time a view of the
social condition of this remote colony. He found the Hot-
tentots reduced almost universally to the condition of
slaves, not transferable indeed, but attached to the soil, and
not on that account the better treated. Frequent use is:
made of a heavy leathern thong, the lashes inflicted with
which are measured not by number but time. Connecting
this punishment with his favourite luxury, the Dutchman
orders the flogging of the culprit to continue while he him-
self smokes acertain number of pipes. Even when a Hot-
tentot engages for hire, the children born during this pe-
riod of service are destined to become slaves. Nothing, in
short, can more fully prove the cruel treatment of this un-
fortunate race, than the fact, that they do not Keep up their
numbers, but are gradually disappearing: at present there
are not supposed to be more than 15,000 in the colony.
The few kraals of independent Hottentots, which still re-
main on its outer border, may perhaps amount to 10,000.
The Dutch planters or boors occupy lots of considerable
extent, reaching usually to the extent of some miles in
every direction ; yet the nearest neighbours are engaged in
almost constant feuds respecting the boundaries of these
vast possessions. Their dissensions must doubtless be
greatly fomenied by the mode of measuring land according
to the number of steps employed in walking overit. There
is indeed an official pacer ( feli-wagt-meester), who receives

-

212 - SOUTHERN AFRICA

three dollars for every perambulation ; but this survey must
always be more or less vague; and he is alleged sometimes
to take partial steps in support of a favourite claimant.
The boor, absolute master of these wide domains, covers
them with flocks and herds, the care of which he commits
to his Hottentots,—obtaining thus the entire disposal of his |
own time, which he devotes to the most listless indolence.
He makes neither milk nor butter; nor does he produce

either wine, fruits, or vegetables. The pipe never quits

his mouth, except to take his sopie or glass of brandy, and
to eat three meals of mutton soaked in the fat of the
large-tailed sheep, without vegetables or even bread. The
good lady of the house, equally disdainful of toil, remains
almost as immoveable as the chair on which she sits, hav-
ing before her a table, always covered with hot coffee. The
daughters sit round with their hands folded, resembling ar-
ticles of furniture rather than youthful and living beings.
No diversion, no event, breaks the monotony of this insu-
lated existence ; nor does knowledge for them ever “ unrol
her ample page.” A schoolmaster, indeed, usually forms
part of the establishment; but-as it is thought too much to
maintain one for teaching only, he is expected to make
himself useful in sundry other capacities. Mr. Barrow
even saw one of this learned fraternity yoked in a plough.
Amid such varied avocations, these sage instructers cannot
be expected to convey to their pupils more than the mere
elements of reading and writing. At the same time, hospi-
tality knows scarcely any limits. With the exception of
their nearest neighbours, with whom they are probably in-
volved in boundary feuds, any person, from any quarter, is
welcome. The stranger opens the door, shakes hands
with the master, kisses the mistress, sits down, and makes
himself completely at home.
From Graaf-Reynet, at the eastern extremity of the co-
lony, Mr. Barrow pushed forward without delay to the
country of the Caffres, it being one main object of his journey
to adjust some differences between that people and the Eu-
ropean settlers. The first party he met after passing the
boundary made the most favourable impression upon him.
The females fiocked and danced round the strangers, show-
ing the utmost curiosity, and receiving with delight pre-
gents of tobacco and brass buttons, yet never trespassing

BARROW. 213

on the limits of decorum. Their persons were somewhat
short and stunted, and the skin of a dark glossy brown ;
but the features were almost European, and their dark
sparkling eyes bespoke vivacity and intelligence. The
men, again, were the finest figures that the traveller had
ever seen, considerably above the ‘middle size, robust, and
muscular, yet marked with the most elegant symmetry.
Their deportment was easy, and their expression frank,
generous, and fearless. In reply to the complaints which
were made of their encroachments upon the territory of the
colony, they asserted, and seemed to prove, that much
greater encroachments had been made by the colonists
themselves, and expressed their readiness to accede to any
arrangement which might obviate future dissension,—stat-
ing, however, that nothing could be done but through Gaika,
the great king of the Cafires. The umpires immediately
proceeded towards his residence, through a beautiful, but
uncultivated, and somewhat entangled country. He was
absent at the moment, employed in pursuing a band of
wolvés; but his wife and mother, with fifty or sixty at-
tendants, sat round the strangers, and conversed, through
an interpreter, in the most agreeable manner. At length
the monarch was seen approaching at full gallop, mounted
on a handsome ox. Alighting from this singular charger,
he graciously welcomed the strangers, and seating himself
and his attendants under the shade of a mimosa, imme-
diately entered upon business. He showed himself ex-
tremely reasonable in every respect, declaring, that what-
ever inroads had taken place on the frontier were without
his knowledge or sanction, and he agreed _at once to a code
of regulations which might put an end to future aggression.
It seems probable, indeed, that had the wise and conciliatory
measures which Mr. Barrow suggested been steadily ad-
hered to, all collision might have been avoided with this
manly and warlike race.

The Caffres are perhaps the most completely pastoral
people in existence. Their agriculture is very limited,
owing to their roaming mode of life. Game is scarce, and
they make no use of their extensive line of seacoast for
fishing; but the management of cattle is thoroughly un-
derstood, being carried on by the men, who not only tend
but milk the cows, and who, by a particular modulation of

Le ee ee ea ~

214 SOUTHERN AFRICA. :

the voice, send out a herd to graze, or recall it at pleasure
to the enclosures. A cow is never killed but on high occa-
sions, milk, with roots, forming their standard diet. Skill
is shown in several arts, such as making baskets of grass,
sharpening iron by stones, without being able to smelt it,
and dressing calf-skins for their apparel. Polygamy is
lawful; but as a wife costs an ox, or two cows, the practice
is confined to the rich.

After returning to Graaf-Reynet, Mr. Barrow passed across
the Great Karroo, or desert, covered with scanty and useless
vegetation, yet presenting spring-boks, ostriches, and other
wild animals, which roam in large herds, and the most
beautiful flowers, which spring up amid the sand. He then
came to the borders of the Sneuwberg, or Snowy Moun-
tains, the streams from which cover an extensive district
with luxuriant herbage. ‘The colonists there are kept in a
state of greater activity than elsewhere, by the dread of
wild beasts, and of the still wilder race of Bosjesman Hot-
tentots, whose kraals occupy the mtermediate valleys.
They pursue and hunt down these unhappy creatures, as
if they were the natural enemies of the human race. Mr.
Barrow mentions a young fellow who had made a journey
along part of that mountain-range ; and on his return, being
asked if he had seen many Bosjesmans, replied, with a
disappointed air, that he had only shot four. These savages,
in their turn, carry off all the cattle they can find, and put
to a cruel death every one who falls into their hands, whe-
ther he be Dutch or Hottentot.. Each party throws upon
the other the blame of this mutual hostility. Mr. Barrow
took some pains to acquire information respecting that un-
fortunate race. His party having succeeded in surprising a
kraal, the natives sprung out of their little mat-huts with
cries resembling the war-whoop of savages, and flew to the
top of a neighbouring hill. From inveterate habit it was
impossible to prevent some bloodshed; but at length, by
persevering kindness, several were induced to come for-
ward and hold: communication with the English. ‘They
proved to be the ugliest of human beings. . Their hollow
backs, projecting bellies, and prominent posteriors, caused
the body to assume nearly the form of the letter S, which,
though by some painters described as constituting the line
of beauty, produces, in its application to the human shape,

TRUTTER AND SOMERVILLE. 215

an effect very strikingly the reverse. In their condition,
too, they are, of all rational beings, perhaps the most for-
lorn and wretched. Their only mode of obtaining food is by
scrambling over the rocks after wild animals, digging the
earth for some unsavoury roots, devouring the larve of
ants and locusts, and, finally, in wild foray, carrying off
the cattle from the adjoining plains. Yet the habits arising
from this precarious subsistence create a degree of energy
which does not arise when man slumbers in the lap of ease
and abundance. Hence, this people indulge even in an ex-
travagant gayety, which forms a striking contrast to the
gloomy dejection of the enslaved Hottentots. On moon-
light nights they dance without intermission from sunset
till dawn ; and, on the prospect of fine weather, sometimes
continue this exercise for several days and nights. Their
little arrows, tipped with poison, are shot with surprising dex-
terity ; and the warriors bound from rock to rock with an
agility which baffles all European pursuit. They endure long
fasts, which render their bodies usually very lank and meager ;
but when they make a capture of cattle or sheep, they
devour the flesh in a disgusting manner, and in the most
amazing quantities. Mr. Barrow having given to three of
them a sheep about five in the evening, saw it entirely con-
sumed by twelve next day, when their formerly lank, lean
bellies were distended to an extraordinary size. The pic-
tures of animals, drawn on the rocks with no inconsiderable
spirit and correctness, showed at least the rudiments of art
and talent.

The knowledge of Europeans respecting the Cape terri-
tory had hitherto been confined by the Karroo Desert, and
the formidable range of the Sneuwberg beyond it. In
1801, a scarcity of cattle being felt, Messrs. Trutter and
Somerville undertook an expedition, with the view of ob-
taining a supply in some of the more remote districts.
Having passed the Snow mountain and the country of the
Bosjesmans, they came to the Orange river, a broad stream
flowing westward to the Atlantic, and on the banks of which
were the Koras or Koranas, a pastoral people with numerous
herds. The information here received induced them to

. proceed into the country of the Boshuanas, which continued
to ymprove as they advanced, till, to their utter surprise, in

the midst of these savage wildernessés of Southern Africa,

————

J16 SOUTHERN AFRICA.

they found a regular city. Lattakoo was composed of two
or three thousand houses, neatly and commodiously built,
well enclosed and shaded from the sun by spreading
branches of the mimosa.. The country around was not
only covered with numerous herds, but showed considerable
signs of cultivation. The king, a venerable old man, in-
vited them to his house, and introduced them to his two
wives. The travellers met every where a kind and hos-
pitable reception, and were the objects of an eager but
friendly curiosity. Their report, in fact, encouraged the
idea that the golden age had once more revived in the
centre of Africa. :

The Cape government afterward undertook to follow up
this discovery. Lord Caledon sent Dr. Cowan and Lieu-
tenant Denovan, at the head ofa party of twenty men, with
instructions to strike across the continent in a south-eastern
direction, and by endeavouring to reach Mozambique, to
connect the two great points of African geography. The
travellers passed Lattakoo, and accounts were received
from them nearly eleven days’ journey beyond it, when they
were in the midst of a richer and more beautiful country
than they had yet seen in Southern Africa. A long and
anxious interval had elapsed, when the governor sent a fast-
sailing vessel to Sofala and Mozambique, the captain of
which was informed that the expedition had come to a most |
disastrous issue. It was stated that the party, having ar-
rived in the dominions of the king of Zaire, between Inham-
bane and Sofala, had been attacked in the night, and all cut
to pieces, with the exception of two individuals. Mr.
Campbell was afterward assured, that the catastrophe had
taken place among the Wanketzens, a nation immediately
beyond Lattakoo, where the travellers, trusting to the.
friendly behaviour and professions of the people, had ne-
glected the most common precautions. The officers went
to bathe, leaving one party in charge of the wagons, and
another to guard the cattle. ‘Thus split into three divisions,
they were successively attacked and destroyed by the trea
cherous barbarians. | satel

Dr. Henry Lichtenstein, after surveying several of the
Cape districts, extended his journey to the territory of this
newly-discovered people, accompanied by one of the natives,
named Kok, who had been for some time absent from his

LICHTENSTEIN. 217

country. The first party whom they met accosted them
with such demonstrations of kindness and cordiality, as
impressed our traveller with the most favourable opinion
. of their character, and relieved some apprehensions under
which he had laboured. The inhabitants, too, of the first
village at which they arrived received them in a manner
quite frank and hospitable, though they showed rather an
excessive eagerness to obtain a supply of tobacco. Cross-
ing the river Kuruhman, and proceeding by a winding path
through a noble forest, they reached Lattakoo. The cu-
riosity excited by their arrival soon attracted a crowd so
immense, as to make it impossible for the wagons to pro-
ceed; but still the multitude appeared to be animated by
the most friendly sentiments. ‘The venerable old king next
appeared, and promised to pay them an early visit. Ona
pipe of tobacco being presented, he began to inhale the
smoke by large drafts, and after being satisfied, handed it
to his prime minister, who transmitted it to the next in dig-
nity; thus it passed from mouth to mouth, till it reached
the lowest of the attendants. ‘The king afterward intro-
duced the Doctor to his two wives, of whom the principal
one, Makaitshoah, dazzled him by the beauty which had
raised her from a low degree to the station that she now
occupied. She was loaded with a profusion of African
finery,—a mantle trimmed with rich furs, and fastened to
the shoulder by a bundle of cats’ tails, sundry necklaces of
bone, copper, and coral, and on one arm no less than
seventy-two copper rings, on which she seemed to set the
highest value; she displayed, and saw them counted with
peculiar delight. The ladies paid a very long visit, but
showed little regard for tea, which was at first presented as
most suitable to their rank and sex; while wine, and more
especially brandy, were highly relished by them. In the.
course of along conversation, the lot of European wives,
in having each a husband to herself, became, as usual, the
favourite theme ; but Makaitshoah, though she approved
of the system in general, thought that in Africa, where
the waste of war was so great, polygamy, to a certain ex-
tent, was necessary to keep up the numbers of the nation.
Dr. Lichtenstein had intended to proceed considerably
farther into the interior; but his views were changed, by a
preposal earnestly pressed _ him by the king to accom-

218 SOUTHERN AFRICA.

pany, and assist with his firearms, an expedition which

his majesty was about to undertake against his neighbour

Makkrakka. Finding that he could not remain without in-
volving himself in the deadly feuds of these African chivits
he chose rather to return to the colony.

Mr. John Campbell, animated by the benevolent duiiee
of imparting to this people the blessings of true religion,
undertook, in 1813, a mission into Southern Africa. Pass-
Ing the Sneuwberg i in the same direction that had been fol-
lowed by Messrs. Trutter and Somerville, he reached Lat-
takoo, which, by a change not unusual in Africa, had been
moved about sixty miles to the southward of its original
situation ; but the new city had not yet attained more than
half the dimensions of the old. His. reception was at first
marked by a peculiar caution and jealousy. Not a sound
was heard in the city; and he walked through empty
streets till he came to the great square in front of the palace,
where several hundred men were drawn up armed and in
battle array. All this precaution was found to have been
suggested by the fear that he and his companions were sent
to avenge the death of Dr. Cowan and Mr. Denovan ; but
no sooner were the inhabitants satisfied that he came ‘with
no commission from government, and with no hostile object,
than they crowded round him with their usual frankness,
and eagerly begged for tobacco. Soon after, Mateebe, the
king, entered with a numerous train of attendants, bearing
spears tipped with ostrich feathers. He did not, in pass-
ing, take any notice of the English strangers, but imme-
diately after admitted them to an interview, though without
giving them quite so gracious a reception as they could
have wished. He particularly deraurred to the proposal
of founding a mission at Lattakoo, on the ground or pre-
tence that it would interfere with the tending of their cattle
and other occupations ; but this being Mr. Campbell’s fa-
vourite object, he pressed it so eamestly, and represented,
in such flattering terms, the superior wealth and industry
of Europeans, that Mateebe at length gave his consent to
the establishment of missionaries, and promised to treat
them well.

Mr. Campbell’s observations finally dissipated all that yet
remained of the original illusion, which had. represented
this people as enjoying at once the innocence and the

’

CAMPBELL. 219

felicity of the primitive ages. There was, indeed, as not un-
frequently happens in uncivilized life, a courteous, kind,
and friendly spirit towards one another. But between
neighbouring tribes the enmity is as deadly, and the laws
and practices of war as barbarous, as among the rudest of
African hordes. The missionary, with the view of paving
the way for religious.instruction, having asked one of them
_ what was the chief end of man, received an immediate an-
swer, “ For commandos,”—the term by which they express
their raids or forays undertaken for the purpose of stealing
cattle. With the profit of carrying off the herds, they seek
also to combine the glory of killing the warriors to whom
they belong. The number of men whom they have slain
forms their chief boast ; in which estimate they reckon one
white equal to two blacks.

In 1820, Mr. Campbell, supported by the Missionary So-
ciety, undertook another journey into this district of Africa.
He found the Christian establishment at Lattakoo in a
somewhat flourishing state. There was a chapel capable
of containing about 400 persons, and a row of good houses
with gardens for the missionaries. But the friendly con-
duct of the natives towards that body had not been accom-
panied with any disposition to embrace, or even to listen to
their doctrines. The Boshuanas, more perhaps than any
other barbarians, seem to labour under a peculiar thraldom
to the senses, and an utter disregard for all lofty and spi-
ritual ideas. Beads for ornament, cattle for use, com-
mandos or forays for the display of valour and activity, ab-
sorb their whele attention, and leave no room for any
higher objects. ‘The number assembled to see the mis-
sionaries dine was three times greater than could ever be
induced to convene to hear them preach.

At Lattakoo Mr. Campbell met Kossie, king or chief of
Mashow, and obtained permission to visit him, which,
though expressed in rather cold and haughty terms, his zeal
induced him to embrace. The road lay through a delight-
_ ful country, consisting neither, like most parts of the Cape
territory, of a naked desert, nor, like some others, of an im-
penetrable forest, but of a boundless meadow of luxuriant
pasture, interspersed with numerous clumps of trees, .ap-
pearing at a distance like a continued wood, but gradually
opening as he approached hese fertile plains aze

220 SOUTHERN AFRICA.

tenanted only by a few roving Bushmen; for so incessant
and destructive are the wars carried on, even among the
Boshuanas themselves, that they are obliged to concentrate
in the immediate vicinity of their towns. Of these, the first
they came to was Meribohwey, the capital of a chief named
Tammahoo, where the warriors rushed forth to meet them
dressed in the skins of wild beasts, painted red, and furi-
ously brandishing their spears and battle-axes,—rather an
astounding welcome to the worthy missionaries, though it
was found to be all meant in kindness. They came next
to Mashow, beautifully situated on a hill surrounded by a
number of lesser eminences. Within a circuit of twenty
miles there were twenty-nine villages, with an almost un-
interrupted cultivation. The inhabitants are estimated at
10,000 or 12,000, and their houses and modes of life are
somewhat superior to those of Lattakoo.

From Mashow Mr. Campbell passed through a country
continually improving in richness and beauty, and inter-
sected by several streams that appeared to direct their
course to the Indian Ocean. At length he reached Kuree-
chane, which is thought entitled to the appellation of a
city; and, at all events, its construction, and the arts
practised in it, were decidedly superior to any thing yet
seen in Southern Africa. The natives smelted iron and
copper in large clay furnaces; their houses were sur-
rounded with good stone-enclosures; while the walls of
mud were often painted, and moulded into pillars and other
ornaments. Well-fashioned vessels of earthenware were
used for holding their corn, milk, and other stores ; and
considerable ingenuity was shown in the preparation of
skins. A certain extent of land, immediately round the
town, was under cultivation, while a larger portion beyond
was devoted to pasturage ; but it was necessary that the
cattle should every night be brought within the protection
of the town.

At Kureechane Mr. Campbell witnessed, on the largest
scale, the peetso or African council, where the assembled
chiefs act so extravagantly, yet speak with so much judg-
ment, as makes it difficult to say whether they are sages
@ madmen. Even in their way to the meeting these
eavages indulge in strange gambols, making immense leaps
into the air, brandishing their weapons, as if to attack and

BURCHELL. 221

sometimes to stab an enemy. The circle being formed,
they all join in a song, which the principal person often
follows with a dance. Each chief, as he rises, prefaces
his speech with three tremendous howls or yells, sometimes
imitating the bark of a dog. Several of his attendants
then spring forward and dance before him,—an accompa-
niment never omitted, even when the age and stiffened
limbs of the performers render it altogether ludicrous. At

length comes the speech, replete with frankness, courage, ©

often with good sense, and even with a rude species of elo-
quence. On some occasions the speakers do not hesitate
to pour the severest reproaches on the king, who retorts
with bitterness, but never resents in any othershape. ‘The
females, meantime, stand behind, and take an eager interest
in the debate,—cheering those whose sentiments they ap-

«prove, or bursting into loud laughter at any that they con-
sider ridiculous.

Mr. Campbell, on his return, took a direction somewhat
to the westward, and found himself on the borders of an
immense desert, which he thinks may be called the Southern
Sahara. A party engaged in a plundermg expedition
were said to have spent two months in reaching Mampoor,
its opposite extremity, which was found situated on the
ocean. His conclusion, however, that this desert reaches

nearly to the equator is very hasty, since the route which
he mentions evidently extended, in a great measure, from
east to west.

Mr. Burchell, in 1812, made a pretty extensive journey
through this part of Africa. He did not reach quite so far
as his predecessor ; and the account of his progress beyond
Lattakoo has not yet appeared. At that city he spent a
considerable time; and his diligent observations of nature
and society, animated by a fine vein of philosophical re-
flection, give a considerable interest to his narrative.

That rude equality which had been remarked among all
the tribes of the Hottentot race was found here giving
way to very marked distinctions, chiefly supported by
wealth, which those in power sought the means of in-
creasing, in their incessant wars and plunder; yet their
dignity is not accompanied with that haughty separation
from the inferior classes which exists in Europe. Mateebe,
ealled here Mattivi, chicf or king, used to squat himself

T 2

ee eee

222 SOUTHERN AFRICA. —

on the ground, chatting and exchanging pipes with the lowest
of his people. Although, of course, their manners can
boast no great refinement, they are neither boisterous nor
vulgar; but a frank and easy deportment distinguishes all
classes. Industry is held in honour; the chiefs tend and
even milk the cows, while the women build the houses, cul-
tivate the greund, and prepare clothes and furniture. On
one occasion they gave good proof of their honesty ; for,
when the traveller’s cattle had run away and mingled with
immense herds of their own, they sought them out and
brought them back to him. In begging, however, they are
most ceaseless and importunate. At Mr. Burchell’s first
entrance they observed a certain degree of ceremony, and
only one solitary cry for tobacco was heard; but this feel-
ing of delicacy or decorum soon gave way. Mattivi himself
made a private request that'the presents intended for him
should not be seen by the people at large, by whom they
would soon be all begged away. ‘They seemed to have more
pride in what they procured by solicitation than in a thing
of greater value if received as a spontaneous gift. There
was hardly any appearance of police ; even murder passed
with impunity, though among themselves it was not fre-
quent. They had no temples, and nothing which Mr. Bur-
chell thinks can be called religious worship ; but, in return,
they had every form of superstition, which is generally the
sole substitute for religion in unenlightened societies.

The last visiter to Lattakoo was Mr. Thompson, who, in
1823, found that city in a state of great danger and alarm.
Rumours poured in of an immense host of black warriors
coming from the north and the east, who were said to be
plundering and destroying every thing before them. They
had already sacked Kureechane ; and being repulsed from
Melita, capital of the Wanketzens, were marching directly
upon Old Lattakoo. whence, it was apprehended, they would
advance to the modern city. It was added that they were
cannibals, and were led by a giantess with one eye; but,
amid all this exaggeration and falsehood, the reality of the
danger was undoubted. The Boshuanas immediately sum-
moned a peetso, and formed the manly resolution of going
out to meet the invader; but all who knew them were aware
that they would fight only by ambuscade and under cover,
and would take to flight as soon as the enemy should make

THOMPSON. 223

# serious attack. ‘he missionaries, in this extremity,
made great exertions to save the nation. One of them
hastened back to implore the aid of the Griquas, a people
bordering on the English colony, and who had learned the
use of firearms from the Europeans. Mr. Thompson and
another went out to trace and report the progress of this
formidable inroad. On reaching Old Lattakoo they found
it silent and uninhabited, like the most desolate wilderness ;
while the pots boiling on the fires showed that its desertion
was recent, and that the enemy were probably at a very
short distance. Notwithstanding, they continued to ride
on, till, arriving at the top of a hill, their guide cried out,
“the Mantatees !” who were in fact seen moving in an im-
mense mass along the valley beneath. It was necessary
to put spurs to their horses, in order to escape the hazard
of being surrounded.

The arrival of Mr. Thompson at Lattakoo’ spread a ge-
neral alarm; for so rapid was the Mantatee march, that
only a little time could elapse before they would reach the
city. The queen, with her female attendants and the prin-
cipal chiefs, rushed into the house to ask the advice of the
missionaries in this fearful crisis. The general opinion
was in favour of flight. Even the warriors, who had been
poisoning their arrows and dancing the war-dance whole
nights without intermission, gave up all hopes of success-
ful resistance, and were preparing to follow the long files
of oxen, on which the inhabitants were already placing
their most valuable effects. Suddenly a cloud of dust was
seen in the south, which, on its nearer approach, announced
the first division of Griqua horse coming to their aid.
Hereupon, all who were endued with any portion of cou-
rage determined to remain and face theenemy. The allies
were received with unbounded exultation; many oxen
were killed and roasted, and even at this critical moment
the two parties gave themselves up to feasting and_jollity.
Their security mcreased, when notice was received that the
Mantatees still remained at Old Lattakoo, consuming the
cattle and provisions which they had found in that place.
Several of the missionaries then set out to endeavour to
open a negotiation. On coming within sight of the enemy
they rode forward im a peaceful manner, inviting them by
signs to a conference; when instantly that savage host

—- ——
~~

B24 SOUTHERN AFRICA.

taised a hideous yell, and rushed forward so rapidly, throw-
ing their spears and clubs, that the Christian plenipoten-
tiaries found the utmost difficulty in galloping out of cme
reach.

The allied force now came up, and on the Galeria
morning offered battle to the vast army of the Mantatees.
Their aspect was truly frightful. ‘They were almost quite
black, with only a girdle round their loins; their heads
were crowned with plumes of ostrich feathers ; they had
numerous brass rings about their neck and legs, and were
armed with spears, javelins, battle-axes, and clubs. Their
whole body, which was supposed to amount to at least
40,000, rushed forward in an extended line, endeavouring
to enclose the little troop opposed to them. ‘The Boshu-
anas gave way as soon as they were seriously attacked ;
the Griquas, on the contrary, kept up a close fire, which
stunned the enemy, who still, however, continued to ad-
vance. ‘The horsemen galloped back to some distance, then
alighted, and again alternately fired and retreated, repeating
this manceuvre for several miles. 'The Mantatees pressed
on with the utmost fury, confident, if they could once come
to close quarters, of annihilating in an instant the handful
of troops opposed to them ; but finding that all their efforts
were vain, and seeing their bravest warriors falling rapidly,
they paused, and began slowly to retire. The Griquas
pursued, but were several times exposed to extreme danger
by the enemy turning suddenly round and renewing the
combat. At length the Mantatees set fire to Lattakoo, and
retreated through the flames. ‘The missionaries were now
deeply shocked by the base and barbarous conduct of the
Boshuanas, who, after their pusillanimous behaviour in the
field, began not only to plunder, but to butcher the wounded
as well as the women and children left on the field; nor
was it without great difficulty that they succeeded in saving
some of these defenceless objects..

‘ The name Mantatee, which signifies wanderer, applies,
ft is said, in no other respect to this desolating horde. They
appear to be a Caffre tribe, inhabiting the country near
Cape Natal, along the lower course of the river Mapoota.
They were impelled to this inroad, in consequence of having
been driven from their own possessions by the Zoolas, a still
more fierce and warlike race, who, on that occasion, were

Queen of Lattakoo, Lattakoo Warrior, and two Bo
Hottentots.—[p. 225.]

sjesman

sates

wey) aia tgooy sini has Aotvigwy meee
aie hy sith eroNnignteb:

ton} . 4 Raunt d f 2 ois : ea :

hie f ; j j " ot
Ae ite VAR Pie id a Ee tea yi i ‘ ud te

eo Ne GT

ae

EASTERN AFRICA. 225

ied to victory by their king, Chaka, who can arm 100,000
fighting men, and has 15,000 constantly ready for war. A
small English settlement has been formed on his maritime
border, which is encouraged by that powerful chief with a
view to commercial advantages ; but of course much pre-
caution is required in dealing with a potentate who com-
mands so many savage bows and spears. ,

The Mantatees, after their defeat, separated into several
detachments, one of which settled among the Kureechanes,
while another advanced against the Caffres, whom they-de-
feated, and part of whose territory they have since continued
to occupy and plunder. In 1826, they came within two
days’ journey of the British frontier, where there was
nothing to prevent them from advancing upon the Scotch
locations in Albany ; but measures have since been taken, by
which these settlements are placed in full security.*

We possess only a very limited knowledge respecting the

eastern coast of Africa, washed by the Indian Ocean,—a re-
gion scarcely visited except by the Portuguese, who con-
tinued to throw a veil of mystery over all their discoveries.
In 1498, when Vasco de Gama had rounded the Cape of
Good Hope, he touched at Mozambique, Mombasa, and Me-
linda, where he found the ruling people Arabs and bigoted
Mohammedans. His object was merely to obtain pilots to
guide his fleet to India; but at the two former of these
ports he met an inhospitable and treacherous reception ;
while, on the other hand, he experienced at Melinda the ut-
most courtesy, and readily found the means of continuing
his voyage to the coast of Malabar. Cabral, who followed
in the footsteps of Gama, likewise visited Quiloa, which he
describes as the capital of an extensive kingdom, and the
‘seat of a flourishing trade; but it was not till he, too,
reached Melinda, that he could obtain any friendly as-
sistance.

The Portuguese, engrossed for some time with the more
brilliant objects presented by the shores of India, sought in
African ports only refreshment and pilots, and made no at-
tempt at conquest. As their empire, however, extended,
resentment or ambition furnished motives for successively
attacking those settlements. In 1505, Almeda, indignant

* The group in the annexed plate represents the Queen of Lattakoo, a
Lattakoo warrior, and two Bosjesman Hottentots,

:
bs

*

~

226 EASTERN AFRICA.

at the reception given to him at Quiloa and Mombasa, landed
and took possession of both these cities. In 1508, permis-
sion was obtained to erect a fort at Mozambique, by means
of which the Portuguese soon expelled the Arabs, and be-
came complete masters of the town. Attracted by its vici-
nity to the gold mines, and its convenience as a place of re-
freshment for their fleets, they made it the capital of their
possessions in Eastern Africa. Melinda also, which had
long shown such a friendly disposition to Europeans, be-
came at last unable to endure the insulting spirit of the
Mohammedans; a quarrel arose, and that city was added to
the dominion of the Portuguese. They were now masters
of an immense range of coast, fully 2000 miles in length,
on which they held all the principal positions, though
without extending their sway to any distance into’ the in-
terior. '
About 1569, the Portuguese made two vigorous attempts,
under Nugnez Barreto and Vasco Fernandez, to advance
into the country behind Mozambique, chiefly with the view
of reaching the mines of gold, the produce of which was
brought in considerable quantities down the Zambese to
Sofala. They penetrated a considerable way up the river,
on the banks of which they erected the forts of Sena and
Tete. Its upper course was found overhung by steep and
precipitous rocks, belonging to the mountainous range of
Lupala, which here crosses its channel. They arrived at
Zimbao, the capital of Quiteve, or king of Motapa, and even

at the gold mines of Manica; but, instead of the expected

profusion of this precious metal, they found that, as in other
parts of Africa, it was laboriously extracted in small quan-
tities from the extraneous substances in which it is imbed-
ded. On this expedition they had frequent encounters with

the natives, who were always beaten in the field ; but the -

Europeans were so harassed by long marches, and by the
searcity of provisions, that they fmally returned in a very
exhausted state, and without having been able to establish
any permanent dominion over that vast extent of country.
As the energy of the Portuguese government declined, its
sway over these colonies was reduced within limits which
always became narrower. In 1631, the people of Mom-
basa rose, made a general massacre of the Europeans, and
re-established their independence. About*the end of the

’

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA po Ag |

seventeenth century, the imam of Mascat, a powerful Ara-
bian prince, drove them out of Melinda and Quiloa. Their
possessions are now confined to Mozambique and Sofala,
and are maintained even there on a very reduced scale. ‘The
former of these stations, when visited by Mr. Salt in 1808,

was found to contain less than 3000 inhabitants, of ahiias
only 500 were Portuguese ; and the fortifications were in
so neglected a state, that an Arabian chief assured the tra-
veller that with 100 stout followers he could drive the sub-
jects of Portugal out of this capital of Eastern Africa.
Yet the government-house, in its interior arrangements, still
exhibits some remains of the ancient splendour of the vice-
roys. ‘The entertainment of tea, which is open every eve-
ning to all the respectable inhabitants, is set out in a service
of pure gold; and the negroes in attendance are absolutely
loaded with ornaments of that metal. Mozambique has
still a pretty considerable commerce in gold, ivory, and
slaves, brought down from the regions of the Upper Zam-
bese. These captives, since Britain shut-against them the
markets of the Cape of Good Hope and Mauritius, have
been, to the number of about 4000 in the year, sent chiefly
to Brazil.

CHAPTER XVI.
On the Social Condition of Africa.

Havine commenced this work by a general survey of
Africa as it came from Nature’s hand, we shall conclude
with taking a rapid sketch of the changes made by man,—
the societies formed on its immense surface ; its arts, its in-
dustry, its social and moral existence ; noticing, finally, the
few attempts which Britain has. made to establish colonies
on that continent.

A grand distinction must here be made between the na-
tive inhabitants of Africa and the foreign races from Arabia
and other Asiatic countries, by whom so large a portion of
= surface has been occupied. This distinction we shall

ne
|

|
|

228 SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

rest, not upon supposed resemblances of form and figure,
or faint analogies between the language of distant nations,
but upon the introduction, within the limits of authentic
history, of a people, manners, and religion belonging to
another continent. The changes now mentioned were
effected, in a great measure, by the inroads of the Arabs or
Saracens, and afterward by the conquests of the Turks,—
events which have diffused over the northern half of Africa
a social system every way different from that of the tribes
by whom it was formerly inhabited. We shall begin, how-
ever, with considering the native races who at present peo-
ple this quarter of the globe.

The native tribes of Africa exist generally in that stage
of society which is denominated barbarian. They are ele-
vated above the hunting or savage state, by the power of
taming and subjecting the lower animals, and by a certain
rude agriculture which the fertility of the soil renders pro-
ductive. Yet few of them are nomadic and wandering like
the Arabs or the Tartars : they generally have native seats,
to which they cling with strong feelings of local attach-
ment. Even the tenants of the Desert, who roam widely
in quest of commerce and plunder, have their little watered
valleys, or circuit of hills, in which they make their perma-
nent abode.

Agriculture, including pasturage, forms the most im-
portant branch of industry in every society, and more espe-
cially in one where all the finer arts are yet in a state of in-
fancy. In Africa, however, both the extent of cultivation
and the processes employed are still extremely imperfect.
This is particularly manifest from the fact that no private
property in land has been any where established. Every
city or village is encircled by an unoccupied domain of
forest or waste, belonging to the king or the state, and of
which a portion is ready to be granted to any one who will
undertake the labour and expense of cultivation ; while the
remainder forms an immense common, on which all the in-
habitants have the liberty of pasturing their cattle. There
are in Africa no country-seats, no rural farms, such as em-
bellish the aspect of an European landscape ; and which, in
fact, could not exist in safety, where each little state is be-
girt with hostile neighbours, and so.many predatory bands
are prowling in every direction. The population is col- -

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA. 229

lected in towns or large villages, fomd which a circle of
cultivation is formed; while beyond are _ peargaeebaertee
where numerous herds are fed, and watched by day as well
as by night. The space within the walls forms a pr retty
wide district, where, even in the largest cities, the houses
are interspersed with cultivated fields, and the low roofs
are seen rising behind ears of corn. All the processes of
»yreparing the ground, sowing, and reaping, are slight and
simple. The plough has not “passed the limits of Barbary ; ;
and perbaps, in tropical climates, the deep furrow which it
lays open might expose the soil too much to the parching
effects of a burning sun. Grain is raised only by means
of the most profuse moisture, which of itself softens the
earth. As soon as the periodical floods have deluged the
ground, or the temporary river inundation has retired, the
labourers walk forth; one slightly stirs the earth with a
hoe, while another, close behind, deposites the grain. Fre-
quently this toil is lightened, from being performed by the
whole village in common, when it appears less a scene of
labour than a gay festival, like our English period of reap-
ing. The village musician plays the most lively airs; the
labourers keep time to his tune; and a spectaior at a little
distance would suppose them to be dancing instead of
working. Irrigation, in all tropical climates, is the grand
source of fertility; and wherever industry has made any
progress, very considerable pains are taken to collect and
distribute the waters, which either fall in rain, or are con-
veyed by river channels. Egypt is well known to owe its
fertility altogether to the canals which diffuse over its
plains the water of the Nile; and in Nubia, where the
current remains constantly sunk in its rocky bed, there is a
succession of sakies or wheels, by which it is raised, and
conducted over the adjoining fields. In this way a belt of
cultivation, of about a mile in breadth, is perpetuated along
the whole upper course of that great river.

In all the tropical and more “arid regions, the prevailing
grains are of inferior character, coarse, and small,—rather,
as Jobson says, like seeds than grains, and fitted less for
bread than for pasie or pottage. The dhourra is the most com-
mon, extending over all Eastern Africa ; while millet in the
west, and teff in Abyssinia,. are productions nearly similar.
In the latter country and Houssa, both wheat and rice ar

230 SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

raised, but only in favourable situations, and for the tables
of the more opulent. Perhaps the greatest exertion of
agricultural industry is that bestowed upon the culture of
the manioc, which forms the main article of food in Congo
and some of the insular territories. Considerable care is
required in rearing it, and cleaning the ground round the
plants ; after the root, which is the valuable part, has been
dug up, it must be ground in a species of mill, and dried in
small furnaces, before it can be used as flour. The process
is represented in the accompanying plate.

Manufactures, in a country where men are contented
with the simplest accommodations, cannot attain any high
importance. ‘There are, however, certain fine fabrics | pe-
culiar to Central Africa; of which the most general is
cotton cloth, produced in several districts of a very beauti-
ful texture, dyed blue with fine indigo, and receiving from
the processes employed a very brilliant gloss. Leather in
Houssa is dressed and dyed in the same rich and soft style
as in Morocco; and probably, in both cases, the manufac-
ture is native. Mats, used both for sitting and sleeping on,
are the staple manufacture in many parts of Western
Africa. Gold and silver ornaments are made with some
taste ; and iron is generally fabricated, though with a vary-
ing and imperfect degree of skill.

The tribes of Africa have scarcely in any instance ar-
rived at the first rudiments of maritime commerce. The
circuit of that continent presents no spacious inlets of the
sea,-—no deep bays to cherish the growth of infant naviga-
tion. Even the great lines of river-course are little if at
all subservient to the purposes of inland communication,
but are often so situated as to obstruct. the career of the
traveller, who crosses them in canoes hollowed out: of a
single tree, or on slight and dangerous rafts. Almost all
the commerce of Africa is carried on by land. Caravans,
kafilas, or coffles, cover all the routes, and connect the most —
distant extremities of the continent. These are formed by
a union of traveliers, an arrangement strictly necessary for
mutual aid amid the difficulties and perils by which almost
every track is beset. The native traders do not employ
camels, which have been introduced by a foreign race from
Arabia into the northern deserts, for which they are per-
fectly adapted. The wagon, and indeed every species of

ANY Y
1 By) i) Za ‘

AN

A

N egroes preparing the Manioe Root.—[p. 230.]

ee ee I le On en Oe

Si ae 5 ns

-——— ———EE

Poe Tee | 231

draught, is nearly unknown, and would be ill suited to the
African roads, the best of which are narrow paths cut
through thick and entangled forests. In the hilly and
central districts, either the back of asses, or the head of
slaves and women, serves as the ordinary vehicle.

The largest branch of the native trade of Africa origin-
ates in the great demand for salt, and the longing desire
which is feit for it in all the provinces to the south of the
Great Desert. This commodity is chiefly brought from the
seacoast ; from large pits in the Western Desert ; and also
from the lakes or ponds of Domboo, in the country of the
Tibboo. In like manner, from the west are sent up cowries
or shells, the chief currency of the interior kingdoms, and
goora or kolla nuts, a favourite luxury, which, on account
of the agreeable taste they impart to the water drunk after
them, are called African coffee. The returns are made in
gold, ivory, fine cloths, and too often in slaves. The trade
with Northern Africa across the Desert consists in foreign
commodities. 'The chief imports are gaudy and glittering
ornaments; for the power of distinguishing between the
genuine and the false in finery does not seem to exist be-
yond the Sahara. Captain luyen enumerates nine kinds
of beads, silks, and cloths of bright colours, especially red,
copper kettles, long swords, powder, and ball. Antimony
to blacken the eyes, with cast-off clothes, and old armour,
find also a ready market. The returns are the same as
those sent to the shores of the Atlantic. The monetary
system of the negro countries is most imperfect ; for the
shell currency, of which it requires several thousand pieces
to make. up a pound sterling, must be intolerably tedious.
The only metallic form appears in Loggun, where it con-
sists of rude bars of iron. In Bornou, and several coun-
tries on the coast, cloth, mats, or some other article in
general demand, is made the common measure of value.

All the accommodations of life throughout this continent
are simple and limited in the greatest degree. There does
not, probably, without some foreign interposition, exist in
Africa a stone house, or one which rises two stories from
the ground. The materials of the very best habitations are
merely stakes of wood plastered with earth, built in a
conical form like bee-hives, and resembling the first rude
shelter which man framed against the elements. Many of

——————

a

\

232 » SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

these mansions afford little facility for standing upright,
and indeed are resorted to chiefly for sleep and shelter,
while the court before the door, shaded by the family tree,
is the scene of social intercourse, and of all meetings for
the purposes of business and gayety. Greater efforts in-
deed are made to form a.commodious state-room or public
hall, called the palaver-house ; yet this, too, consists merely,
as shown in the annexed plate, of alarge apartment, raised

on posts fixed in the ground, and roofed with slopmg
planks, which leave the interior open to the air on every
side. The houses and yards of persons in any degree opu-
lent are enclosed by an outer wall or hedge, sometimes pretty
high, serving the purposes both of privacy anddefence. Even
the palaces of the grandees, and of the greatest monarchs,
consist of merely a cluster of these hovels or cottages,
forming a little village, with large open spaces, and sur-
rounded by a common wall. The state-hall of the sultan
of the Fellatas, the greatest of the African princes, is an
apartment to which, in Captain Clapperton’s opinion, the
term shed would in Europe be properly applied. Slender,
however, as is the accommodation afforded by these edi-
fices, they are liberally adorned, especially in the larger
cities, both with carving and painting. |

If African houses be of mean construction, the internal

s

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA. 233

accommodations are equally scanty. Except the state-
chairs or thrones of the great monarchs, ascended only on
very solemn occasions, there is not throughout native Africa
a seat tositupon. The people squat on the ground in cir-
cles; and if the chief can place beneath him the skin of a
lion or leopard, he is at the height of his pomp. Fora
table there is at best a wooden board, whereon is neither
plate, knife, fork, nor spoon; the fingers being supposed
fully adequate to the performance of every function. If
it be necessary to separate into parts a large joint, or
even a sheep roasted whole, the dagger or sword of the
warrior is drawn forth, and very speedily accomplishes the
object.

The intellectual character of the natives of this conti-
nent presents a peculiar and remarkable deficiency. If we
except the Ethiopic language, which is seemingly of Arabic
origin, and the unknown characters, probably Pheenician,
inscribed by the Tuaricks on their dark rocks, there is not a
tincture of letters or of writing among all the aboriginal tribes
of Africa. There is not a hieroglyphic or a symbol,—no-
thing corresponding to the painted stories of Mexico, or the

_knotted guipos of Peru. Oral communication forms the
enly channels by which thought can be transmitted from
one country and one age to another. The lessons of time,
the experience of ages, do not exist for oe nations of this
vast continent.

Notwithstanding so great a deficiency, the African must
not be imagined as sunk in entire mental apathy. The en-
terprise of a perilous and changeful life developes energies
which slumber amid the general body of the people ina
civilized society. Their great public meetings and palavers
exhibit a fluent and natural oratory, accompanied often
with much good sense and shrewdness. Above all, the pas-
sion for poetry is nearly universal. As soonas the evening
breeze begins to blow, the song resounds throughout all
Africa,—it cheers the despondency of the wanderer through
the desert,—it enlivens the social meeting,—it inspires the
dance,—and even the lamentations of the mourner are
poured forth in measured accents. Their poetry does not con-
sist in studied and regular pieces, suchas, after previous study,
are recited in our schools and theatres; they are extempo-
rary and spontaneous ney in which the speaker gives

2

-

234 |= SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

. | \
utterance to his hopes and fears, his joys and sorrows. All
the sovereigns are attended by crowds of singing men and
singing worien, who, whenever any interesting event oc-
curs, celebrate it in songs, which they repeat aloud and in
public. Flattery, of course, must be a standing reproach
against this class of bards ; yet from this imputation their
HKuropean brethren are not exempted; while, from Major
Laing’s report, it appears that there is often present a sable
‘T'yrteus, who reproaches the apathy of the prince and people,
and rouses them to deeds of valour. Specimens are want-
ing of the African muse ; yet, considering that its effusions
are numerous, inspired by nature, and animated by na-
tional enthusiasm, they seem not unlikely to reward the
care of a collector. The few examples actually given fa-
vour this conclusion. How few among our peasantry could

have produced the pathetic and affecting lamentation which

was uttered in the little Bambarra cottage over the distresses
of Park! These songs, besides, handed down from father
to son, contain evidently all that exists among these na-
tions of traditional history. From the songs of the Jil-
limen of Soolimani, Major Laing was enabled to compile
the annals of this small kingdom for more than a century.

In their religion, the negroes labour under the disadvan-
tage of being left to unassisted reason, and that, too, very
little enlightened. Man has, perhaps, an instinctive senti-
ment that his own fate and that of the universe are ruled
by some supreme and invisible power; yet he sees this only
through the medium of his wishes and imagination. He
seeks for some object of veneration and means of protection, —
which may assume an outward and tangible shape. The
negro reposes his faith in the doctrine of charms, which
presents a substance stamped with a mystic and superna-
tural character, capable of being attached to himself indi-
vidually, and of affording a feeling of security amid the
many evils that environ him. The manitou of the native
Americans is founded upon the same principle; and the
similar use, by Catholics, of images, beads, and relics, per-
vertedly employed even under a pure and exalted religion,
shows the strength of this propensity in the human mind.
In all the Moorish borders, where writing is known, it forms
the basis of feticherie ; and its productions, rendered more
brilliant and sensible by being enclosed in golden or orna-

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA. 235

mented cases, are hung round the person as guardian influ-
ences. ‘The very circumstance of the characters being un-
intelligible gives to them the power of exciting ideas more
mysterious and supernatural. Where this artis unknown,
a bow, a horn, a feather, the beaks and the claws of birds,
even the most frivolous and insignificant object, is employed
and relied on with the fullest confidence. Absurd, how-
ever, as are the observances of the negro, he is a stranger
to the deadly bigotry of his Moslem neighbour. He neither
persecutes, nor even brands as impious, those whose reli-
gious views differ the most widely from.hisown. ‘There is
only one point on which his faith assumes a savage character,
and displays darker than inquisitorial horrors. ‘The hope
of an immortal destiny, dimly working in the blinded hu-
man heart, leads to the wildest errors. ‘The despot, the
object of boundless homage on earth, seeks to transport all
his pomp, and the crowd of his attendants, to his place in
the future world. His death must be celebrated by the cor-
responding sacrifice of a numerous band of slaves, of wives
and of courtiers: their blood must water his grave; and
the sword of the rude warrior, once drawn, does not readily
stop ;—a general massacre often takes place, and the ca
pitals of these barbarian chiefs are seen to stream with blood.
This horrid system is not exclusively African ; but it else-
where exists on a smaller scale, and is attached to a state
of society much more decidedly savage.

In regard to the social aspect of this continent, the unim-
proved condition in which it appears may be regarded as
that perhaps in which violence and wrong have the widest
field, and cause the most dreadful calamities to the hu-
man race. ‘The original simplicity, founded on the absence
of all objects calculated to excite turbulent desires and pas-
sions, has disappeared, while its place is not yet supplied by
the restraints of law and the refinements of civilized society.
War, the favourite pursuit, is therefore carried on with the
most unrelenting fury ; and robbery, ona great and national
scale, is generally prevalent. Brilliant and costly articles
already exist; but these are distributed with an inequality
which the needy warrior seeks by his sword to redress.
African robbery is not perpetrated by concealed or proscribed
ruffians, who shrink from the eye of man, and are the out-
easts of social life. It is not evenconfimed to the poor tribes
of the Desert, who see caravans laden with immense wealth

236 SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

pass along their borders. Princes, kings, and the moat
distinguished warriors consider it a glory to place them-
Selves at the head of an expedition urdertaken solely for
the purposes of plunder.

Slavery seems also to belong to the barbarian state. Man
has emerged from the limited wants of savage life, and sees

productions of art, which he eagerly covets, without having

acquired those habits of steady industry by which he might
earn them for himself. His remedy is to compel those whom
his superior strength, or any other advantage, enables him
to bring under subjection, to labour in supplying his wants.
Often the blind and spontaneous veneration of those tribes
for their chiefs causes them to sink into voluntary slavery ;
many again are made captive in war ; and generally a great
part of the population of every barbarous society is placed
in a state of bondage.

From the two evils above described arises a third, still
darker,—the stealmg of human beings in order to make
them slaves. This is perpetrated widely throughout Africa,
and attended with every circumstance of crime and horror.
It is an enormity also in which the greatest sovereigns do not
scruple to participate. Their troops surround a town in the
dead’of night, watching till the first dawn, when the gates
are opened ;—they then rush in, set fire to it, and while the
victims, with shrieks and cries, are seeking to escape, bind
and carry them off into slavery. It must be confessed, at
the same time, that the unrelenting and atrocious spirit of
this warfare has been in a great measure produced by fo-
reign connexion, either with the Kuropean powers, or with”
Northern Africa, Turkey, and other Mohammedan states.

Notwithstanding so many evils, however, we may again
repeat, that an unvaried cloud of moral darkness does not
hang over Africa. The negro character appears to be dis-
tinguished by some features unusually amiable, by a pecu-
liar warmth of the social affections, and by a close adhe-
rence to kindred ties. If some travellers have been ill-
treated and plundered, others have been relieved with the
most signal and generous hospitality. The negro, unless
when under the influence of some violent excitement, is, on
the whole, more mild, hospitable, and liberal than the
Moor ; it is by the latter race that the atrocities against Eu-
ropean travellers have been chiefly perpetrated.

In the political arrangements of the African states there

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA. 237

occur some singular anomalies. A bold and independent spirit
has been supposed to characterize man in a rude and un-
civilized condition ; and, accordingly, a number of petty
communities here present an aristocratic, and sometimes
even a republican form. But all the great kingdoms are
subject to the most complete and abject despotism. ‘Thou-
sands of brave warriors bend down to one of their fellow-
mortals with a profound and servile abasement, never wit-
nessed in polished or, as we call them, corrupted societies.
Examples so frequent and striking have occurred in the

course of this narrative, that we need not adduce any other >

illustration. It deserves particular notice that the nations
in this degrading condition are the most numerous, the most
powerful, and most advanced in all the arts and improve-
ments of life; that, if we except the human sacrifices to
which blind veneration prompts them, they display even a
disposition more amiable, manners more dignified and
polished, and moral conduct more correct, than prevail
among the citizens of the smail free states, who are
usually idle, turbulent, quarrelsome, and licentious. Bad,
therefore, as absolute power is in itself, there appears, ne-
vertheless, in the disposition shown by man to submit to it
in this uncultivated state, something salutary, and: which
even tends to his ultimate improvement.

The foreign races who have settled in Africa by migra-
tion and conquest are found fully established in the fine
country along the Mediterranean. The inroad of the Arabs
or Saracens, and the subsequent conquest by tke sultans,
have stamped completely their character on this vast region.
The Turkish sabre and the Moslem creed lord it over
these ancient seats of empire, light, and civilization. The
remnants of the native tribes are either sunk in degradation,
as the Copts, lurking in the recesses of the mountains, or
wandering over desert plains, as the Brebers, the Tibboos,
and the Tuaricks. The once-varied frame of society is now
moulded into one gloomy monotony, such as is always pro-
duced by the influence of Mussulman habits. Turkish
cities exhibit every where one uniform aspect ; high walls of
earth, without windows, border on narrow and dirty streets ;
and the nakedness and desolation of the exterior often form
a striking contrast with the barbarian splendour within. A
deep and grave solemnity, the absence of all gay and social

‘
ae a.

238 SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

meetings, and the entire seclusion of females, produce an
effect wholly different from that of European society. In
the country, the Arab population is simple and patriarchal ;
yet unhappily no strangers to violence and plunder in their
very worst forms.
The two races, thus strikingly distinguished, native and
foreign, Mohammedan and pagan, meet and mix in Cen-
tral Africa, on the banks of the Niger, and on the other
great rivers which water that region. Major Rennell con-
-siders the stream now named as the boundary between the
Moors and negroes, as Pliny conceived it to separate the
Africans from the Ethiopians; and the division, though
not rigorously correct, is yet, in a general sense, conformable
to fact. ‘The Moors have made extensive conversions, and
have introduced all that is known of letters or writing into
the interior regions. Yet the lurid gleam thus shed over
benighted Africa serves little more than to deepen the sur-
rounding darkness. This sublime art is prized, not as the
principal means of enlightening and enlarging the human
mind, but as a tool of the magic art,—an instrument for
manufacturing charms and fetiches, to be sold at high prices
to the deluded natives. Only a few of the great sheiks and
doctors read even the Koran. ‘The most approved mode of
imbibing its contents, as was formerly stated, is by tracing
the characters on a smooth board with a black substance,
then washing them off, and swallowing the water. Others,
having enclosed the Koran in a large silver case, bear it
constantly about, groaning under the burden, but expecting
from it the greatest spiritual benefits.
Bigotry among these negro converts rises to a still higher
_ pitch; and the future doom of the unbeliever is considered
even more assured than on the shores of the Mediterranean.
Meantime they subject him to the earthly miseries of foreign
and distant bondage; for, while it is unlawful to enslave
any true believer, the goods, the person, nay, the whole
property of the Caffre are considered as rightfully belonging
to the children of the prophet. This very circumstance
causes a secret abatement in that eager spirit of proselytism |
which burns so fiercely among the adherents of the Moslem
creed. They cannot be insensible, that if the eyes of this
host of unbelievers were enlightened, they themselves
would forfeit the ground on which they rest their only claim,

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA. 239

now in full exercise, ef driving them by thousands to the
markets of Kano and Tripoli.

In general we may observe, that white the Mohammedan
converts in Central Africa are so intensely bigoted in re-
spect to dogmas, they are more lax in practice than their
brethren of Cairo and Tripoli. The females are not so
closely immured; and the men seldom adhere to that pre-
cept of the Koran which enjoins abstinence from fermented
liquors. The bouza, or acid beer, circulates briskly in Mos-
lem as well as in pagan circles. It is true that the sove-
reigns, who are usually zealous Mussulmans, are occasionally
seized with a paroxysm of zeal, and denounce dreadful pe-
nalties against all who indulge in this beloved liquor. But
this proceeding, being extremely unpopular, causes only a
transitory emotion, which soon subsides, and affairs resume
their wonted course.

The Mohammedan religion, wherever it is established, has
abolished the horrors of human sacrifice,—a great and im-
portant good. In all other respects, the introduction of this
foreign race and foreign creed seems only to have deepened
the evils under which Africa had formerly suffered.

Colonization, which in America has been carried to so
vast an extent, filling that continent almost entirely with an
European population, has never been attempted in Africa,
except on the most limited scale. By much the largest co-
lony is that founded by the Dutch at the Cape of Good Hope,
which was transferred to the English by the events of the
last war. In 1827, it was estimated to contain a population
of 120,000, being nearly double the amount in 1798; about
47,000 were Europeans, 28,000 Hottentots, and 35,000
slaves. Cape Town, which in 1824 comprised a population
of 18,668, has probably increased to upwards of 20,000, and
is now quite an English city, having newspapers, a “ South
African Journal” devoted to literature and science, and many
intelligent inhabitants.

Ten years ago, under the severe pressure felt in Britain
from the scarcity of employment and subsistence, several
thousands were sent out to occupy the district of Albany in
the eastern part of the colony. This settlement has not
been prosperous ; and the expectation that it would prove a
thriving agricultural station has, for the present, been dis-

240 SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

appointed. The severe droughts, and periodical inundations
to which it is subject, have been found to render the raising
of grain of every kind very precarious, and obliged the co~
lonists to have recourse to pasturage ; while the lots are too
small to render the latter mode of industry sufficiently pro-
ductive. They consist, according to Mr. Thompson, of only
) 100 acres, which are not capable of supporting above twelve
oxen and cows. The Dutch settlers usually held 6000.
acres, for which they paid merely the expenses of measur-
mg and survey, amounting to between 300 and 600 dollars,
with a quit-rent of from thirty to fifty. To obtain this:
quantity of land, the British settlers must carry out fifty-
nine servants (who it is true have their passage paid by
government), depositing 10/. for each; which, with their
support for three years, would exceed six times the value
of the property. In 1825, after three unfavourable harvests,.
the distress of the colony became extreme, and a subscrip-
tion of not less than 3000/. was raised in Cape Town for
their relief. A number then left the settlement; after
which, the condition of those who remained gradually im-
proved, and is now becoming comfortable. Mr. Thompson,
however, recommends to emigrants who possess any capital:
to purchase land trom the Dutch boors in the vicinity of the
Cape; many of whom, possessing lots of nearly 100,000 acres,
would willingly dispose of part of their grants for money.
To make head against the irruption of the Caffres, a body
of military are stationed at the eastern boundary of the co-
lony, who, in conjunction with the Albany settlers, have
formed Graham’s Town, the inhabitants of which amount
to about 3000. Mr. Rose, who was lately there, describes
itas “a large, ugly, ill-built, straggling place, containing a
strange mixture of lounging officers, idle tradesmen, drunken
soldiers,,and still more drunken settlers.” Its situation is
romantic, being a deep hollow surrounded by high green
hills, separated by glens overhung by steep and wooded
precipices. ‘These glens form the roads, which branch off
like rays from a centre, and through them are seen labour-
ing heavy wagons, drawn by oxen, frequently coming from
very remote districts. They bring not only provisions and
* necessaries, but the rude products of the surrounding re-
gions,—skins of the lion and leopard, horns of the buffalo,

f

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA. 24}

eggs and feathers of the ostrich, tusks of the elephant and
hippopotamus, and rich fur mantles.

It would be improper to omit mentioning in this place
the benevolent and persevering exertions of the Moravian
and other missionaries, who, in that distant quarter of the .
continent, have made indefatigable exertions for the instruc-
tion and improvement of the miserable natives. ‘They have
not only communicated to them the light of true religion,
but have successfully laboured to better their temporal cir-
cumstances, and communicate habits of order, cleanliness,
and industry. The missionary stations now extend north-
ward to Lattakoo, and eastward into the country of the
Caffres ; and they are daily assuming a wider range.

By far the most persevering attempt made by Britain to
form a colony in Africa applies to that founded at Sierra
Leone, originating in the most benevolent motives, and con-
ducted under the patronage of highly distinguished charac-
ters. It had for its object the improvement of the conti-
nent, as well as the diminution and final abolition of the
African slave-trade. In 1772, a celebrated decision by
Lord Mansfield established the principle, that a negro, from
the moment he sets foct on British ground, becomes free.
A strong interest was thus excited on the subject; and a
great number of black servants having, in consequence of
the above judgment, left their masters, were rambling in a
somewhat desolate condition in the streets of the British
metropolis. On learning their circumstances, Mr. Granville
Sharp, an individual of unwearied benevolence, with the
advice of Mr. Smeathman, who had spent a considerable
time in Africa, formed the plan of transporting them into
their native country, to lay the foundation of a colony.
Government having concurred in the undertaking, the set-~
tlers were sent out in the Nautilus, Captain Thompson, and
landed on the 9th May, 1787, upon a district of about
twenty square miles, purchased from Naimbanna, the king
of Sierra Leone. Unfortunately these negroes, as well as
about sixty whites, chiefly females, sent along with them,
were of mixed and very indifferent characters. A great
proportion soon fell a sacrifice to the climate,—the others
showed themselves destitute of all habits of industry, and
were besides severely harassed by the hostility of the neigh

_bouring tribes ; so that, by the year 1791, the whole number
X- |

) 7

242 SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA.

was reduced to sixty-four. But the philanthropic zeal
which prevailed in Britain for the colonization of Africa
suffered no abatement. An association was formed under
the titles of the St. George’s Bay, and afterward of the
Sierra Leone Company, with a capital of 250,000/., for
the prosecution of this interesting object ; and they soon
found another quarter whence a supply of colonists might
be drawn. During the American war, a number of negro
slaves in the revolted colonies, on the invitation of the Bri-
tish government, had deserted their masters. and joined her
standard. After the unfortunate issue of the contest, these
fugitives. claimed the fulfilment of a promise said to have
been made, that they should have lands allotted for their
subsistence. The proffer now made of grants on their na-
tive shore, and in a more congenial climate, was cordially ac-
cepted. In March, 1792, they were landed at Sierra Leone,
to the amount of 1131, in addition to 100 Huropeans who
had arrived in the preceding month. A fever, however,
which the negroes had brought with them, aggravated by
the unhealthy nature of the climate, carried off a consider-
able number ; and to this latter cause of mortality half of the
European settlers fell victims. The improvement of the
colony was also much retarded by a very general spirit of
insubordination; and, in 1794, it was barbarously plundered
by a French squadron, which caused losses. amounting to
upwards of 50,000]. However, the settlement had gra-
dually recovered, and was beginning to make some progress,
when, in 1800, it was recruited with 550 maroons, or insur-
rectionary negroes from Jamaica, who had been originally
transported to Nova Scotia. ‘They arrived at a very sea-
sonable moment, when a disturbance had just broken out
among the original body of negroes, which the British
crews were busily employed in suppressing.

Notwithstanding all that had been done for the mprove-
‘ment of Sierra Leone, which had more than absorbed the
original capital of the company, very little progress was
yet made towards fulfilling its objects. No spirit of indus-
try had been infused into “the inhabitants, and no amicable
eonnexions forined with the neighbouring states. The
company had scarcely the means of supporting it any
longer; but there appeared reason to hope that the more
energetic and influential efforts of government might yet

SOCIAL CONDITION OF AFRICA. 243

overcome the obstacles which had hitherto baffled the most
strenuous efforts of individuals. Accordingly, by mutual
agreement, concluded on the Sth August, 1807, and carried
into effect on the 1st January following, the settlement was
surrendered into the hands of the crown, and placed on the
same footing with the other British colonies.

From this time a new and much more copious source of
population was opened. Since the year just mentioned,
Britain had prohibited her own subjects from carrying on
the slave-trade, and she had afterward obtained an assur-
ance from other countries, that they would discontinue it
along all the coast northward of the Line. She even re-
ceived permission to treat as pirates such of their subjects
as within those limits might be found employed in the con-
veyance of slaves. In her zeal for the abolition of this
odious traffic, she has maintained a number of ships con-
stantly watching those seas, and capturing every vessel
thus unlawfully laden. The liberated negroes are brought
to Sierra Leone, where they are located in the surrounding
villages. For some time they receive rations, and are kept
in pretty strict subordination ; but, after a certain period,
they obtain assignments of ground, from which to earn
their own subsistence. On the 3lst March, 1827, the
slaves thus liberated amounted to 11,878, of which there
were 4701 males above and 1875 under fourteen ; 2717 fe-
males above and 1517 under that age; besides 1068 settled in
Freetown, or employed on the river in the timber trade. On
the 3lst December, 1828, the number had been increased by
new arrivals to 16,886. Unfortunately, neither their pro-
gress in industry and civilization, nor the general prospe-
rity of the colony, has answered the sanguine expectations
once so fondly cherished. The efficiency of the govern-
ment has been much impaired by various errors and unfor-
tunate circumstances, and above all by the singularly dele-
terious influence of the climate on European constitutions.
This, it is supposed, is owing not so much to the mere heat,
as to the noxious exhalations arising from an ill-regulated
town, and an uncultivated country, covered with such a
mass of brush and jungle as to impede the necessary venti-
lation. The result is, a remittent fever, so malignant that
almost all Europeans are attacked with it, and not one in
three recovers These circumstances have oftener than

=

‘

244 GEOLOGY OF AFRIUA.

once led to the consideration whether Sierra Leone ought
not to be entirely relinquished. An attempt has even been
recently made to establish in itsroom a colony at Fernando
Po, a small island in the Gulf of Benin; but the expectations
formed from its climate have also been entirely disappointed.
Meantime, it is considered that the absolute abandonment
of Sierra Leone would leave full scope for the contraband
slave-trade, and frustrate all hopes of establishing a centre
whence civilization might hereafter spread throughout
Africa. The latest accounts from the governors, Colonel
Denham, in 1827 and 1828, and Major Ricketts, in 1829,
express a decided opinion that a spirit of improvement is at
last beginning to be manifested,—that the inhabitants show
a disposition to cultivate the ground, and an anxiety to be
able to purchase European. luxuries,—and that m the
villages, particularly of Wellington and Waterloo, good
churches, and a few stone houses, have been erected. The
annual expenditure has been reduced to about 40,000/., of
which 17,000/. is for liberated Africans ; and government
seems desirous to retain the settlement, till the natives shall
be so far improved as to be able to conduct their own ad-
ministration, and to afford an example of industry and order
to the neighbouring states.

es

CHAPTER XVII.
Geology of Africa.*

Arrica is distinguished from the other continents by its
nearly insular form, being connected with Asia merely by
an inconsiderable neck of land or isthmus, viz. that of
Suez. It extends from the equator to about the average
latitude of 35° north, and also to the same degree of lati-
tude south. The greatest length from north to south is
from Cape Serrat in Algiers, in lat. 37° 18’ N., to Cape

7 According to some authors, the name Africa is derived from @, neg.,
and frigus, cold; while others trace it from asmall Carthaginian district
named Frigi—A-frike-a.

AFRICAN REGIONS _ 245

Laguillas, in lat. 34° 55’ S.; andthe greatest breadth from
Cape Verde, in long. 17° 31’ W., to Cape Guardafui, in
long. 51° 15’ E. The northern portion of this continent
is fully twice the size of the southern portion, and may be
considered as about equal to South America; while the
southern half is contracted to half the breadth of the north-
ern part, and is nearly about the size of New-Holland.
The shape of the corresponding coasts of Africa and Ame-
rica would induce us to infer that the two continents of Africa
and America were once united,—the projecting or salient
part of the former fitting exactly to the Gulf of Mexico;
and the bulging part of South America, about Paraiba and
Pernambuco, being about the size and shape to fill up the
Gulf of Guinea. This great continent has but compara-
tively few gulfs, bays, arms of the sea, and promontories;
and hence, notwithstanding its nearly insular form, its ex-
tent of coast is much less in proportion to its area, than in
other quarters of the globe. The condition of man, the
distribution of the lower animals and plants, even the cli-
mate of Africa, are intimately connected with this limited
extent of coast.

On viewing Africa from its northern boundary on the
shores of the Mediterranean, to its southern boundary at
the Cape of Good Hope, the following natural divisions or
regions present themselves to our attention :—

1. The northern region, formed by the Atlas range of
mountains, hills, and plains, that extend from the coast of
the Atlantic to the Gulf of the Syrtis,—and by the range
of fertile hills and dales, and valleys mixed with deserts, in
which are some insulated spots of verdure, known under
the name oase,* that extend from the termination of the
Atlas to Egypt.t

2. The eastern region, formed by Egypt, Abyssinia, Dar
fur, &c. | |

* The word Oasis is Egyptian, and synonymous with Auasis and
Hyasis (Strabo, Ixxiii. p. AJm 1140). Abulfeda names the Oasis Al
Wahat. In latter times the Cesars banished criminals to the Oases.
They were sentenced to expiate their crimes on the islands of the Sandy
Sea, as the Spaniards and English send their criminals to the Malouin
islands and New-Holland. The latter could more easily escape by the
ocean, than the former across the surrounding deserts.

{ The Atlas of Homer and Hesiod, according to Bory St. Vincent, is
the Peak of Teneriffe; the Atlas of the: Greek and Roman geographers
the African Atlas range of rane ¢

2

246 GEOLOGY OF THE ATLAS MOUNTAINS.

3. The Desert region, which is the flat, comparatively
low tract of generally desert country, of which the principal
portion is the Great Desert of Sahara, which lies between
the 29th and 16th parallels, or about 780 miles in breadth,
and extending across the continent from the Atlantic to
the borders of Nubia.

4. The Region of Soudan, Nigritia, or the Country of the
Negroes, extending in a belt across the continent as far as

Abyssinia, and from the 16th to the 5th parallel, or about |

600 miles in breadth. It is 2 rich and fertile region, yield-
ing, with little labour, all the valuable productions of the
tropical countries.

5. Great Table-land of Africa, or High Africa.—This,
in all probability, very interesting part of Africa extends
from the zone of Nigritia to the Divi of Good Hope. It
appears to contain a lofty and extensive table-land, from

which acclivities, supporting ranges of mountains, decline -

on the east and south towards the Indian Ocean; on thé
west to the Atlantic; and on the north to the Country of
Soudan or Nigritia. Unfortunately the whole of this great
region, with exception of the Cape of Good Hope and
the Portuguese settlements on the east and west coasts, be-
tween which they are said to keep up a communication, is
unknown to us; so that there still remains a tract of coun-
try, at the least 30 degrees of latitude by 25 of longitude,
or about 2,600,000 square geographical miles, of which
nothing whatever is known. Now that the thirst for
Arctic’ discovery has been quenched, and the public feeling
has set strongly against expeditions to Central Africa, we
trust that our government will be the first to engage in the
exploration of the great table-land of Southern Africa.

Having premised this short account of the general fea-
tures of Africa, we shall now state what is known of its
geology and mineralogy, following in our account the great
natural divisions already pointed out. |

1. Geology of the Atlas, or Northern Region of Africa.*—
The northern division of Africa is principally characterized
by the Atlas chain of mountain-ranges, on some of the
loftiest points of which there is perpetual snow, which gives
them a height of 12,000°to 13,000 feet above the level of

* The Egyptian, Abyssinian, and bordering African districts will be
considered in one of the succeeding volumes of this work.

AGE OF THE ATLAS MOUNTAINS. 247

the sea. In it there are rocks of the primitive class, as
granite, gneiss, mica-slate, and clay-slate. Copper and
lead mines, said to occur in the primitive parts of the range,
were worked by the ancients in Morocco and Algiers, but
are at present neglected; and the same is also the case
with the antimony and tin (?) said to have been discovered
in these mountains. In Tunis, rock-crystals, graphite, or
black-lead, and also iron and galena, are met with in the
same kinds of rock. Although in extensive mountain-
ranges the older rocks, or those of the primitive class, gene-
rally predominate, such, according to travellers, is not the
case with the Atlas, where the most extensive deposites are
of a calcareous nature. This calcareous formation consists
principally of secondary limestones, associated with depo-
sites of sandstone. ‘The limestone abounds with organic
remains, as of shells, corals, and even fishes; and is said
to be referable to the various limestones extending from
the lias, or even the magnesian limestone, to chalk inclu-
sive. Hence in this limestone-range there are magnesian
limestones, oolite limestones, lias limestones, Jura lime-
stones, and soft limestones resembling some kinds of chalk.
Resting upon these limestones, or where they are wanting,
as is the case at Algiers, there are deposites of tertiary
rocks ; these are marly clays and limestones, with organic
remains resembling those met with in the tertiary deposites
on the north shore of the Mediterranean. Salt springs and
gypsum are mentioned as occurring in different parts of the
range. ‘These may be connected either with the secondary
or tertiary, or with both classes of rocks. |

Trap-rocks, of a modern date, also make their appearance
among the rocks of the northern African zone. ‘The most
extensive display of these Plutonian masses is in the lime-
stone in some districts to the south of Tripoli, where these
rocks alter the position and change the characters of thé
limestone.

Age of the Atlas Mountains.—It is conjectured, by some
geologists, that the great ranges of mountains of the earth ©
have risen from below, through rents in previously existing
strata, and not all at once, but at different times; and fur-
ther, that all mountain ranges having the same general
direction have made their appearance from below at the

“op

248 AGE OF THE ATLAS MOUNTAINS.

same time. Thus the Pyrenees and Apennines, the moun-
tains of Dalmatia and Croatia, and the Carpathians, whi¢h
belong to the same system,—as may be deduced from the
descriptions given of them by various geologists,—are all
disposed parallel to an are of a great circle, which passes
through Natchez and the mouth of the Persian Gulf.
Thus, whatever may have been the cause, the mountains
in Europe, which have issued from the earth at the same
period, form chains at the surface of the globe,—that is to
say, longitudinal projections, all parallel to a certain circle
of the sphere. If we suppose, as is natural, that this rule
may be applicable beyond the limits within which it has ~
been determined, the Alleghanies of North America,—since
their direction is also parallel to, the great circle which
joins Natchez and the Persian Gulf,—would seem to be-
long, in respect to date, to the Pyrenean system. Elie
Beaumont has been able to verify the accuracy of this in-
ference by a careful examination of the descriptions of
American geologists. It would appear from this statement
that we might venture to conclude that the mountains of
Greece, the mountains situated to the north of the Eu-
phrates, and the chain of Gates in India, which also come
under this condition of parallelism already indicated, must
have risen, like the Alleghanies, along with the Pyrenees
and Apennines. If we apply this reasoning to the Atlas,
which we find to have the same general direction as the
Alps of Switzerland, from the Valais to Styria, and with
that of the Caucasus, the Balkan Mountains, and the Him-
maleh Mountains, we infer that these vast ranges, and also
the Atlas, may have risen at the same period. But at
what period did this elevation take place? This can be
answered in a general way, by remarking, that in Switzer-
land the principal chain of the Alps appears to have up-
raised all the secondary, and also the tertiary strata ; hence,
according to the opinion already stated, these Swiss moun-
tains, and consequently the Atlas and other ranges, already
mentioned, may havé risen from below at a comparatively
recent period,—after the deposition of the tertiary rocks.
Allowing this hypothesis to be plausible, it could be showr
that an opinion of the ancients,—that, namely, which main
tains that the whole country between the Syrtis and th

GEOLOGY OF THE SAHARA. 249

Atlantic, over which the Atlas chain extends, was formerly
insulated, and in that state formied the celebrated Adlantis,
—is not destitute of geological probability.*

2. Geology of the Desert, or Sahara Region.—The se-
cond, or Sahara region, is eminently characterized by its
vast desert of sand, the greatest and most frightful on the
_ face of the earth. On the east it is bounded by a rocky
limestone wall to the west of the Nile, and a series of oases
and deserts extending from Darfur to the Libyan Desert :
on the north by a range of oases and the flat and interest-
ing country along the southern foot of the Atlas chain: on
the west by the ocean: and, towards the south, it ceases in
about 15° N. lat., sloping gradually down to the fertile and
well-watered country of Bornou on the east, Houssa in the
centre, and the regions to the westward of Timbuctoo.
Houssa and Bornou comprehend that region of Africa
known by the name Soudan, or Land of the Blacks.

The Sahara may be considered as divided into an eastern
and a western half. Its eastern and smaller halt.is more
varied by rocks, and cliffs, and oases, than the western and
larger, which forms a vast sea of moving sand, well merit-
ing the Arabian name, Sahara Bela-ma, or sea without
water. The Western Sahara is bounded on the east in a
line which passes through Fezzan, extending towards the
south into Soudan, and towards the north to the Atlas.
On many parts of the seacoast it extends under the sea,
forming enormous sand banks; and along the coast there
are extensive ranges of downs or sand hills. The coast is
very dangerous, and much dreaded by seamen. Ship-
wrecks frequently take place, and the unfortunate survivors
are carried off by the savages into a state of the most de-
plorable slavery. Cape Blanco, so well known to mariners,
is not a rocky headland, but a flat sandy projecting white
tongue of land, destitute of vegetation. The sand hills
continue down to Cape Verde,—a promontory distinguished
by its two lofty hills of sand, rising to a height of 600 feet,
and overlooking the smaller surrounding downs, and form-
ing a warning landmark, seen by sailors at a great distance.

* The particular geology of the Northern Region, which will include
descriptions of Morocco, Fez, Algiers Tunis, and Tripoli, will appear in
a future volume of this Library, the present volume being confined prin-
cipally to the Central and Southern Regions of Africa.

250 SUBTERRANEAN VILLAGES NEAR TRIPOLI.

From the entrance of Gonzalo da Cintra, on the coast of
Barbary, to Cape Verde, all the elevated points of solid
rock are said to be of igneous origin: thus Cape Barbas,
Cape Blanco, Cape Manuel, and Cape Verde are composed
of basalt and lava. All the islands, too, along this west —
coast are of igneous origin.

In this vast waste there are a few oases and wadeys, or
valleys, in which springs of water are. found, and shrubby
plants, chiefly acacias, and tufts of grass. It is inhabited
only by pastoral tribes, who roam about from one oasis to
another, where a little verdure may be found. Some of
these tribes add to their scanty means of subsistence the
plunder of such feeble caravans as they may venture to
attack ; and others are employed in collecting salt and natron
for the markets of Bornou and Soudan. For hundreds of
miles not an oasis is seen, the surface being one continued
plain; in some places blown up into high ridges, in others
presenting undulations like the waves of the sea. In parts
of the Desert, insulated hills, or ridges of hills of naked sand-
stone, sometimes also of granite, rise through the sandy
surface, appearing like so many islands in the ocean.

Account of the Line of Desert from Tripols to the Lake
Tchad.—The line of desert, extending from Tripoli by
Mourzouk to Kouka, has been described by our former
pupil the late excellent and intelligent traveller Dr. Oudney,
and by his enterprising fellow-travellers Clapperton and
Denham. As the account is novel and interesting, we shall
now lay some details illustrative of it before our readers ;
occasionally, also, referring to the observations of another
well-known African traveller, Captain Lyon.*

Subterranean Villages.—All around Tripoli the prevail-
ing rocks are of limestone,—partly of secondary, partly, it
is said, of tertiary formation. 'The Arab inhabitants of the
Gharian limestone mountains in Tripoli live under ground,
—a circumstance worthy of being particularly recorded, on
account of its connexion with the ancient history of man,

* To those interested in African adventure, we recommend an in-
teresting little volume just published, entitled, “‘ A Biographical Memoir
of the late Dr. Walter Oudney and Captain Hugh Clapperton, both of the
royal navy, and Major Alexander Gordon Laing, all of whom died amid
their active and enterprising endeavours to explore the interior of Africa.
By the Rev. Thomas Nelson, Member of the Wernerian Society, &c”
12mo. Edinburgh, 1830, by Waugh and Innes.

SUBTERRANEAN VILLAGES NEAR TRIPOLI. 251

and also his present condition in some countries. Captain
Lyon says,—‘* We stopped at a nest, I cannot call it a vil-
lage, where all the habitations are under ground. The
sheik, on hearing we were under the protection of the
bashaw, came to welcome us, and gave us the only hut the
place afforded, in which we placed our people and camel-
loads. As for ourselves, we preferred clearing part of the
farm-yard, and pitching our tent in it, surrounded by our
horses and camels. This place is called Beni-Abbas. As
the natives live, as I have observed, under ground, a person
unacquainted with the circumstance might cross the moun-
tain without once suspecting that it was inhabited. All
the dwelling-places being formed in the same manner, a de-
scription of the sheik’s may suffice for the rest. The upper
soil is sandy earth, of about four feet in depth; under this
sand, and in some places limestone, a large hole is dug, to

the depth of twenty-five or thirty feet, and its breadth in

every direction is about the same, being, as nearly as can
be, a perfect square. ‘The rock is then smoothed so as to
form perpendicular sides to this space, in which doors are
cut through, and arched chambers excavated, so as to re-
ceive their light from the doors. The rooms are sometimes
three or four of a side; in others, a whole side composes
one,—the arrangements depending on the number of in-
habitants. In the open court is generally a well, water
being found at ten or twelve feet below the base of the
square. ‘The entrance to the house is at about thirty-six
yards from the pit, and opens above ground. It is arched
overhead, is generally cut in a winding direction, and is
perfectly dark. Some of these passages are sufficiently
Jarge to admit a loaded camel. The entrance has a strong
wall built over it, something resembling an ice-house.
This is covered overhead, and has a‘ very strong heavy
door, which is shut at night, or in cases of danger. At
about ten yards from the bottom is another door, equally
strong; so that it is impossible to enter these houses
should the inhabitants determine to resist. Few Arab at-
tacks last long enough to end ina siege. All their sheep
and poultry being confined in the house at night, the
bashaw’s army, when here, had recourse to suffocating the
inmates, bemg unable to starve them out.” Again, at
page 29, he says,—- At noon, we arrived at a cluster of

252% SUBTERRANEAN VILLAGES. ©

nests about six miles from Beni-Abbas: all the habitations
of this place are of the same kind as those already de-
scribed.” ;

Colonel Silvertop, in an interesting memoir on the La-
eustrine Basins of Baza and Alhama, in the New Edin-
burgh Philosophical Journal, vol. ix., gives an account of
a subterranean village called Benamaurel, in Granada in
Spain, which is on a larger scale than those mentioned by
Captain Lyon. It would probably be a difficult antiqua-
rian investigation to trace the origin of these Spanish sub-
terranean dwellings, inhabited by a considerable population
of the poorer classes in various parts of the province of
Granada. ‘They may be observed in the outskirts of the
cities of Granada, Guadiz, and Baza; but are most nu-
merous in the villages of Benamaurel, Castillejos, Caniles,
and Cullar, where they have been excavated in the marl
strata, so extensively deposited in that basin, and in those
of Benabra, and another in the valley of Guadiz. In
Benabra, the entire population lives in caves,—the church,
the curate’s house, and the venta being the only edifices
seen above ground. Inthe neighbourhood of Bagnovea, in
the pope’s territories, there is a village, of which an Italian
traveller has observed, that a few stones for the purpose of
closing the entrance of the cavern, a hole for the smoke to
go out of, and an aperture to admit the light, suffice to com-
plete each habitation. In the Isle of Ponza, near the Bay
of Naples, is another town of the same description, the in-
habitants preferrmg to reside in caves, although the island
abounds in good building materials. In France, many vil-
laces of inhabited caverns still exist. Swinburne describes
a village of the same kind, which occurs in the province of
Andalusia in Spain. The natives of New-Holland and
other countries still shelter themselves in caves and ca-
verns, and in the hollows of trees. At an early period, the
inhabitants of Europe appear also to have lived principally
in natural caves and caverns, or in such as they dug in soft
rocks. pte,
The subject of caves has recently attracted considerable
attention; but more on the part of the geologist than of the
antiquarian. It has been ascertained that in caves in the
south of France human remains had been found along with
bones of quadrupeds, now no longer met with in a living

ANCIENT_GERMANS’ INHABITED CAVES. 253

state, either in Europe or elsewhere. The destruction of
the forests in which they found shelter, the drying up of the
lakes, on the borders of which they found their food, and
a convulsions of nature, sufficiently account, says Dr.

ibbert, for their extinction. In this view, the investigation
of the caves in which human bones are found is as much
the province of the antiquary as of the geologist. The
same geologist assumes as an hypothesis, that the tribes in-
habiting Europe, previous to the historical times, were in a
state similar to that of the Fins described by Tacitus,—as
leading an almost brutish life, destitute even of the ear-
liest rudiments of the arts. Such beings might well be
conceived to contend with the beasts, above ‘whom they
were so little elevated, for places of shelter they knew not
how to construct ; or, at all events, they might crawl like
the beasts, or the New-Hollanders, into caves or caverns to
conceal their dying agonies. At this period the bones
could scarcely have been deposited in caves for the purpose
of inhumation, the idea of sepulture belonging to a more
advanced state. The rude fragments of earthenware found
in the same caves belonged to an extremely rude and very
early period. The Celtic and Gothic tribes, who sup-
planted the aborigines of Europe, seemed to have reached
the agricultural state. The Germans are described as in-
habiting houses built of gross and unhewn materials, con-
structed without the aid of mortar; ; and also caves, into
which they retired for shelter from the inclemency of the
winter, as do the inhabitants of some countries in Northern
Asia at present. Traces of these ancient subterraneous
habitations are still to be met with in Germany, but much
more frequently in France and Italy, where the nature of the
rock is more favourable to the task of excavation, and they
are most numerous in the south of France. Each cave ap-
pears to have been entered by a low chink or fissure, situated
almost half way between the floor of the cave and its roof,
and differing as little as possible from the level of the avenue
by which it was approached. Sometimes the caves are
isolated, sometimes they are found in groups. These caves
continued to be used even during the feudal period, as
could be proved by descriptions of caves met with in dif-
ferent parts of Europe, particularly in the south of France.

We recommend to the particular attention of travellers

y :

254 soupAn, OR BLACK MOUNTAINS.

the examination of caves and caverns, being an investiga-
tion, as appears from the preceding details, not only inti-
mately connected with the early history of man, and of his
condition in a low state of civilization even at the present
day, but also with the geological history of our species, and
of that of several of the more powerful and interesting spe-
cies of the class of quadrupeds.

In the route from Tripoli to Mourzouk, the first change
of rock met with by Dr. Oudney was at Benioleed,* where he
remarks there is a rich valley, the sides of which are of ©
limestone hills 400 feet high, capped with greenstone and
amygdaloid. The Jibel Gulat, 600 feet high, one of the
highest hills he had met with since leaving Tripoli, is con-
siderably to the south of Benioleed. It is composed of marls
and limestones, containing fossil oysters and limpets, form-
ing a deposite which is said to resemble the tertiary rock
named calcaire grossiére of the Paris basin, which occurs
in Malta, Sicily, and on the north side of the Mediterra-
nean, on the shores of Italy and France. These limestones
continue onwards to the valley of Bonjem,t which was
found strewed with gypsum. Captain Lyon mentions gun-
fiints as occurring in the road to Bonjem; while Dr. Oud- |
ney speaks of striped jaspers and cornelans, but does not
mention gun-flints. These rocks continue onwards to
Sockna. A short distance to the south of Sockna are the
Soudah or Black Mountains. ‘These, Captain Lyon says,
rise to a height of 1500 feet, extend about 100 miles in
breadth from N. to S., and as far as the eye can reach from
E.to W. They are perfectly barren, of very irregular
forms, occasionally broken into detached masses, and some-
times rising into cones. They are composed of trap-rocks,
said to be of the nature of basait. After crossing this
range, the route to Mourzouk leads across gravelly and
sandy tracts, with frequent appearances of dolomite lime-
stone, occasionally rolled masses of basalt, and agates, pro-
bably derived from amygdaloidal trap.t The road from

* The inhabitants of Benioleed are Arabs. The water is excellent,
but some of the wells are 100 feet deep.—Lvon.

+ This is the northern boundary of the kingdom of Fezzan. Thers
are here some perfect remains of a Roman fortress, built by order of Sep
timius Severus —Lyown.

t At Sebha, a town of 800 inhabitants, the population is no longer
Arab. but black; hence Captain Lyon, in his map, says, “ Sebha, N. lat.
27° black population commences.”

is

PETRIFIED WOOD IN THE DESERT. 255

Mourzouk, which our travellers left on the 29th of Novem-
der, 1822, to Traghan, the former capital of Fezzan, pre-
sented frequent mcrustations of salt. From Traghan to
Maefen, the road lies over a mixture of clayand salt. The
path, by which all the animals move for several miles, is a
narrow space or stripe worn smooth, bearing a resemblance,
both im hardness and appearance, to ice. Near Maefen,
‘it assumes a new and more beautiful shape, being traversed
by numerous fissures, from the sides of which, and from the
roofs of cavities several feet deep, beautiful crystals of salt
were observed shooting. The road extends more than
twenty miles east and west. The water of Maefen, al-
though impregnated with soda, is not disagreeable to the
taste, or unwholesome. The continuation of the journey
from Maefen to Gatrone, which occupied two days, was
across the sand of the desert, which, it is said, was beauti-
fully fine, round, and red.* This place is surrounded by
sand hills and mounds of earth, covered with a tree called
athali. ‘Though encamped on the south side of the town,
they had cold north and north-west winds ; and the temper-
ature in the tent was from 43° to 45° in the mornings. On
the 9th December reached Tegerhy.t This place they
found pleasantly situated. On the 13th left Tegerhy, and
proceeded on the Desert: it was scattered with mounds
of earth and sand, covered with various shrubs, which
were greedily devoured by the camels. On the 16th reached
Ghad. On the 17th continued their journey over a stony
plain, without the least appearance of vegetation. The
exposed rocks were sandstones of different kinds, red and
black; fine specimens of petrified wood were found, in
which were observed, in the centre, sap-vessels, and knots
filled with caleareous matter, the woody fibre charged
with a siliceous substance; beautiful rays were observed
shooting from the centre to the circumference. The
_ depth of a well they met with, named Meshroo, was from
15 to 20 feet; the water good, and therefore free from
_ saline impregnations : the ground around it was strewed
with human skeletons of the slaves who had arrived, ex-
hausted with thirst and fatigue. ‘‘ The horrid consequences
of the slave-trade,” says Dr. Oudney, “were strongly

* Captain Lyon mentions gypsum and selenite as occurring in this
arter.
t This is the southernmost town in Fezzan.

—_S oo

256 HUMAN SKELETONS IN THE DESERT.

brought to our mind; and, although its horrors are not
| equal to those of the European trade, still they are sufficient
to call up every sympathy, and rouse up every spark of hu-
manity. They are dragged over deserts ; water often fails,
and also provisions scantily provided for the long and dreary
journey. The Moors ascribe the numbers destroyed to the
cruelty of the Tibboo traders: there is, perhaps, too, much
truth in this accusation. Every few miles a skeleton was .
seen through the whole day ; some were partially covered
with sand, others with only a small mound formed by the
wind ; one hand often lay under the head, and frequently
both, as if in the act of compressing the head ; the skin and
membranous substance all shrivel up and dry, from the state
of theair. The thick muscular and internal parts only decay.”
Ranges of hills were seen to the south and east. In the
evening the party halted near a well, within half a mile of
Meshroo. Around this spot were lying more than one hun-
dred human skeletons, some of them with the skin still re-
maining attached to the bones,—not even a little sand
thrown over them. ‘The Arabs were amused at the horror
expressed by the travellers at this sight, and said, they were
‘ only blacks; and began knocking about the limbs with
the butt-end of their firelocks. ‘Our camels,” says Den-
ham, “did not come up until it was quite dark, and we
pivouacked in the midst of these unearthed remains of the
victims of persecution and avarice, after a long day’s jour-
hey of twenty-six miles, in the course of which one of our
party counted 107 of these skeletons.” They continued
journeying until the 21st, partly through sand and among
sandstone hills, some of which were 600 feet high. On the
22d, they moved before daylight, passing some rough sand
te hills mixed with red sandstone, to the west, over a plain of
fine gravel, and halted at the matten called El Hammar,
close under a bluff-head, which had been in view since _
quitting their resting-place in the morning. During the
last two days they had passed, on an average, from sixty to
eighty or ninety human skeletons each day ; but the num-
bers that lay about the wells at E] Hammar were countless ;
those of two women, whose perfect and regular teeth be-
spoke them young, were particularly shocking ; their arms
still remained clasped round each other as they had expired,
although the flesh had long since perished by being exposed

——

NATRON AND SALT LAKES. 257

to the burning rays of the sun, and the blackened bones
only teft; the nails of the fingers, and some of the sinews
of the hand, also remained; and part of the tongue of one
of them still appeared through the teeth. They bad now
passed six days of desert without the slightest appearance
of vegetation. On the following (24th) day, they had al-
ternate plains of loose sand and gravel, and a distant view
of some hills to the west. “‘ While,” says Denham, “I
was dozing on my horse about noon, overcome by the heat
of the sun, which at that time of the day always shone with
great power, I was suddenly awakened by a crashing under
his feet, which startled me excessively. I found that my
steed had stepped upon the perfect skeletons of two human
beings, cracking their brittle bones under his feet, and, by
one trip of his foot, separating a scull from the trunk, which
rolled on like aball before him. This incident gave me a
sensation which it took some time to remove.”

On the following day, 24th, the plain was observed co-
vered with slight irregularities, and strewed with pieces of
variously-coloured calcareous spar and selenite, and thick beds
of gypsum were noticed. Halted in the evening at wells
situated under a ridge of low white hills of sandstone, called
Mafrasben-Kasaretta, where there are also beds and hills of
dimestone. The whole of the journey this day, 25th, was
through hills of a rather bold and picturesque character, of
dark-coloured sandstone. One day’s journey was also through
a tract partly plain, partly of sandstone hills, to a wadey
named Izhya. Here the travellers had a gale of wind for
three days; their tents were nearly buried with sand, and
were obliged to roll themselves up in blankets nearly the
whole time. They started again on the 30th, and on the
evening of the 3lst halted under some low brown sand-
stone halls. 'The journey from 1st January to the 6th
was partly along and across a ridge of sandstone hills, in no

_ place more than 400 feet high. On the 6th they halted at

Tiggema, which is one of the highest points of the sand-
stone range, about 400 feet high, and hangs over the mud
houses of the town. Its sides are nearly perpendicular,
and it is detached from the other hills by a chasm. On the
8th, the route still under the range of sandstone hills, they
passed a salt lake, and farther east, at Dirkee, two natron
lakes. Inthe centre of each of these lakes is a solid body
¥ 2

—————

7 uate

258 - DESERT OF BILMA.

or island of natron. In one lake the island is 15 feet high,
and 100 feet in circumference. ‘The natronis associated with
muriate of soda, or common salt. On the 12th they reached
Bilma, after passing through a wadey the greater part of the
way, which exhibited many patches of saline incrustations, ©
also beds of red. sandstone, containing numerous nodules of

iron ore. The sandstone hills exhibit, on their summits,
forms resembling ruins of towns and castles. Near to
Bilma are several salt lakes that afford very pure and well-
crystallized salt.* About a mile from Bilma is a spring of
beautiful clear water, which rises to the surface of the earth,
and waters a space of two or three hundred yards in cir-
cumference, which is covered with fresh grass ; but, pass-
ing this, the traveller must bid adieu to every appearance
of vegetable production, and enter on a desert. From Bil

ma, which was left on 16th January, the route led over loose
hills of fine sand, in which the camels sunk nearly knee-
deep. In passing the desert wilds, where hills disappear in
a single night by the drifting of the sand, and where all
traces of the passage, even of a large kafila, sometimes va-
nish in a few hours, the Tibboos have certain points in the
dark sandstone ridges which from time to time raise their
heads in the midst of this ocean of sand, and form the only
variety, and by them they steer, their course. They halted
in the evening at Kaflorum, which is a nest of hills of coarse
dark sandstone. On the 17th bivouacked under a head
called Zow (difficult), to the east of which were found se-
veral wells. ‘This day, the 18th,” says Denham, “ the
sand hills were less high, but the animals sunk so deep that
it was a tedious day for all. Four camels of Boo Khal-
loom’s gave in; two were killed by the Arabs, and two
were left to the chance of coming up before morning. Tre-
mendously dreary are these marches; as far as the eye can
reach, billows of sand bound the prospect. On seeing the
solitary foot-passenger of the kafila, with his water-flask in

* Captain Lyen says,—“I found no one who knew of the salt lakes
of Bombeo laid down in all the maps ; but there is abundance of salt.at
Agram (which is four days’ journey from Bilma, W.S.W.), and a large
lake, on the borders of which this article is collected. The Tuaricks go
there and carry away great quantities to Soudan. This agrees with the
accounts ef Demboo; and, from the circumstance of Tuaricks going toe
Agram, and the position of that place, I am led to imagine it may be the
aaime Domboo, though under a different appellation.”

we
DESERT OF BILMA. 259

his hand and bag of zumeeta on his head, sink at a dis-
tance beneath the slope of one of these, as he plods his
way alone, hoping to gain a few paces in his long day’s
work by not following the track of the camels, one trem-
bles for his safety: the obstacle passed which concealed
him from the view, the eye is strained towards the spot, in
order to be assured that he has not been buried quick in the

* treacherous overwhelming sand.” On the 20th, passed |

hills named Geisgal, of dark sandstone, and a table-shaped
hill in the wadey Dibla, of sandstone and slate-clay. Here
some fulgurites, or lightning-tubes, were observed in the
sand. A number of semi-vitrified small stones were found

on the sands, which the people collected to use as bullets.

The journey still across sandy deserts to an extensive wadey
called Aghadem, which they reached on the 23d. Here are
several wells of excellent water, and hills of sandstone.
From thence crossed the sand desert of Tintuma. On the
27th, “we,” says Denham, “ appeared gradually approach-
ing something like vegetation. We had rising sands and
clumps of fine grass the whole way, and the country was |
not unlike some of our heaths in England.” 'Towards eve-
ning the trees increased in number; and when the travellers
halted, the animals found abundance of food. The spot
where they halted is called Geogo Balwy. They continued
their route across sands and through valleys, bounded by
low sandstone hills, and by some salt lakes. As they ap-
proached the great fresh-water lake Tchad, the country im-
proved much in appearance, owing to the increase of soil,
and consequently of vegetation. On the 4th February,
they came in sight of this great lake. On February 5th,

_ reached Lari, on the shore of the Great Lake. On the 6th,

the freed slaves, natives of Kanem, left them for their
homes, three days’ journey to the eastward. One poor deaf
and dumb woman, whom the rapacity of Mukni, the former
sultan of Fezzan, who spared neither age, sex, nor infirmity,
had induced him to march to Tripoli, had shed torrents of
tears ever since she had been made acquainted, by signs,
that she was to go to Bornou. She had left two children
behind her, and the third, which was in her arms when she
was taken by the Arabs, had been torn from her breast
after the first ten days of her journey across the Desert, in
order that she might keep up with the camels. Her expres-

a |

260 BASE OF TIE SAHARA.

sive motions, says Denham, in describing the manner in
which the child was forced from her and thrown on the
rand, where it was left to perish, while whips were applied
to her, lame and worn out as she was, to quicken her tot-
tering steps, were intensely affecting. After travelling
through a wooded and beautiful country, they, on February
17th, reached Kouka. This was to the travellers an im-
portant day, as they were now about to become acquainted |
with a people who had never seen, or scarcely heard of an
European.

In a journey which was undertaken to Mandara, the
whole country to Affagay was found to be alluvial. Den-
ham crossed part of a great range of mountains, named the
Mandara hills, at the most southern limit of this journey.
He says, “On all sides the apparently interminable chain
of hills closed upon our view in rugged magnificence and
gigantic grandeur, though not to be compared with the
higher Alps, the Apennines, or even the Sierra Morena, in
magnitude ; yet by none of these were they surpassed in
picturesque effect.” This range of mountains was found
to contain granite, mica-slate, hornblende rock, and ores of
iron. There were observed on the southward lower ranges
of newer formation, consisting of conglomerated rocks
abounding in fossil oyster-shells.

On what Formation does the Sand of the Desert rest ?—It
is a question with geologists, on what formation or forma-
tions does the sand of the Desert rest? We have not data
sufficient for a very satisfactory answer to this question.
Judging, however, from the details of travellers, we would
infer that the predominating formations are of the second-
ary class of rocks. The secondary formations met with are,
red and vartiegated sandstone, with gypsum and salt, and
white and gray sandstone sometimes disposed in fantastic
forms. ‘The salt in some places is seen in thick beds, along
with red or variegated sandstones. Lumestones of various
llescriptions, that appear to belong to the Jura limestone
formation, are met with. Besides those already enume-
rated, there occur other limestones, clays, and gypsums,
belonging to the tertiary class, from which salt springs
issue. But not only these softer rocks appeared rising
through the sands of the Desert; also harder rocks, as
greenstone, amygdaloid, and granite, in some places project,

—~ ee ——————— LS ae
:

DESCRIPTION OF A TRONA LAKE. 261

although rarely in isolated rocks, ridges, and cliffs. From
these details it appears that the general basis of the Desert
consists of secondary rocks, principally sandstone and
limestone.

Description of a Trona or Natron Lake. —Natron or trona,
as already mentioned, is found in various parts of the Desert,
but principally in its eastern half. Dr. Oudney describes,
in the following terms, in a letter to us, afterward printed
in Denham’s Travels, the wadey Trona he passed through
in his journey from Tripoli to Mourzouk :—* Monday, July 8.
—We entered the wadey Trona early this morning, on
the north-east side. Near where we entered there are a
cluster of date palms, and a small lake, from which impure
trona is obtained. On the western side the trona lake is
surrounded with date-trees, and its marshy borders are
covered on almost all sides by grass and a tall juncas. It

1s about half a mile long, and nearly 200 yards wide. At

present it is of inconsiderable depth, from the evaporation
of the water; for many places are dry now, which are
covered in the winter and spring. The tronacrystallizes at
the bottom of the lake when the water is sufficiently satu-
rated; for when the water is in large quantities it eats the
trona, as the people say. The cakes vary in thickness
from a fine film to several inches (two or three). The
thickest at present is not more than three-fourths of an
inch; but in the winter, when the water begins to increase,
it is of the thickness I have mentioned. ‘The surface next
the ground is not unequal from crystallization, but rough to

_ the feel from numerous small rounded asperities. That

next the water is generally found studded with numerous
emall, beautiful cubical crystals of muriate of soda; the
line of junction is always distinct, and the one is easily
removed from the other. When not covered with muriate
of soda, the upper surface shows a congeries of small
tabular pieces joined in every direction. When the mass is
broken, there is a fine display of reticular crystals, often
finely radiated. The surface of the water is covered in
many places with large thin sheets of salt, giving the whole
the appearance of a lake partially frozen over; film after
film forms till the whole becomes of great thickness. Thus
may be cbseryed, on the same space, trona and cubical

262 SAND OF THE DESERT.

crvstals of muriate of soda: and. on the surface of the
water, films accumulating till the whole amounts to a con-
siderable thickness. The soil of the lake is dark-brown
muddy sand, approaching to black, of a viscid consistence
and slimy feel; and, on the lately uncovered surface of
the banks, a black substance, something like mineral tar, is
seen oozing out. ‘The water begins to increase in winter, ©
and is at its height inthe spring. In the beginning of the
winter the trona is thickest and best ; but in the spring it
disappears entirely. The size of the lake has diminished
considerably within the last nine years, and, if care be not
taken, the diminution will be still more considerable; for
plants are making rapid encroachments, and very shallow
banks are observable in many places. On making inquiry,
I found the quantity of trona has not sensibly diminished
for the last ten years. Perhaps it may appear so, from there
always: being sufficient to answer every demand. The
quantity annually carried away amounts to between 400 and
500 camel-loads, each amounting to about 4 cwt.,—a large
quantity, when the size of the lake is taken into account.
It is only removed from the lake when a demand comes.
A man goes in, breaks it off in large pieces, and those on
the banks remove the extraneous matter, and pack it in
large square bundles. The water in the valley is good,
teing free from saline impregnation.”—Clapperton, Den-
ham, and Oudney’s Journal, p. 57.

Fulgurite and Meteoric Iron found in the Désert.—In some
parts of the Desert, tubes of sand, resembling those: found
at Drigg, in Cumberland, and in different sandy districts on
the continent of Europe, are met with. ‘They are named
fulgurites, or lightning-tubes, by naturalists, and are sup-
posed to be formed by the lightning striking through the
sand, and partially melting portions of it. Masses of me-
teoric iron also have been met with in the Desert. Gol-
berry, in his journey through Western Africa, in the years
1805-7, mentions his having found a mass of meteoric iron
in the Desert. Fragments of it were brought to Europe
by Colonel O’Hara, and were analyzed by Mr. Howard, who
found it composed of ninety-six parts of iron and four of
nickel. :

Observations_on the Sand of the Desert.—-Having now

i

PILLARS OF SAND IN THE DESERT. 263

noticed the rocks and some of the minerals met with in the

Desert, we shall next attend to the sand of which it is
principally composed. The loose alluvial matter which
forms the sand of the Desert is principally composed of
particles of white and gray quartz of various sizes, gene-
rally very small, forming the sand, properly so called, seldom
so large as to form gravel and pebbles. Some are of opi-

‘nion that this sand is an original deposite ; others, that it is

formed from previously existing rocks through the agency
of water.
Moving Pillars of Sand in the Desert.—During the storms
that often rage in this Desert, the sand is raised into clouds
that obscure the horizon, or it is by whirlwinds raised into
pillars. Bruce describes an appearance of this kind, which
he witnessed in his journey through the eastern part of
the Desert, in his route to Abyssinia, in the following terms :
—‘ At one o’clock we alighted among some acacia-trees at
Waadi-el-Halboub, having gone twenty-one miles. We
were here at once surprised and terrified by a sight, surely
one of the most magnificent in the world. In that vast ex-
panse of Desert, from west to north-west of us, we saw a
number of prodigious pillars of sand at different distances,
at times moving with great velocity, at others stalking on
with majestic slowness. At intervals we thought they were
coming in a very few minutes to overwhelm us, and small
quantities of sand did actually more than once reach us;
again they would retreat, so as to be almost out of sight,
their tops reaching the very clouds ; then the tops often sepa-
rated from the bodies, and these, once disjoined, dispersed
in air, and did not appear more ; sometimes they were broken
in the middle, as if they were struck with large cannon-
shot. At noon they began to advance with considerable
swiftness upon us,—the wind being very strong at north.
Eleven ranged alongside of us, about the distance of three
miles ; the greatest diameter of the largest appeared to me
at that distance as if it would measure ten feet. They
retired from us with a wind at south-east, leaving an
impression on my mind to which I can give no name,
though surely one ingredient in it was fear, with a con-
siderable deal of wonder and= astonishment. It was in
vain to think of flying; the swiftest horse would be of no

264 SAND AFFECTED BY WINDS.

use to carry us out of this danger, and the full conviction of
this riveted meto the spot.” A similar account of these
moving pillars of sand is given by M. Adanson, who had
an opportunity of observing one of them crossing the river
Gambia from the Great Desert. It passed within eighteen
or twenty fathoms of the stern of the vessel, and seemed to
measure ten or twelve feet in circumference, and about 250
feet in height. Its heat was sensibly felt at the distance of
100 feet, and it left a strong smell, more like that given out
by saltpetre than sulphur, and which remained a long time.
Sand-uind.—The overpowering effects of a sudden
sand-wind, when nearly at the border of the Desert, often
destroy a whole kafila, already weakened by fatigue.
“Indeed,” says Denham, ‘the sand-storm we had the
misfortune to encounter in crossing the Desert gave us a
pretty correct idea of the dreaded effects of these hurri-
canes. ‘The wind raised the fine sand, with which the ex-
tensive Desert was covered, so as to fill the atmosphere,
and render the immense space before us impenetrable to |
the eye beyond a few yards. The sun and clouds were
entirely obscured, and a suffocating and oppressive weight
accompanied the flakes and masses of sand which, I had
almost said, we had to penetrate at every step. At times
we completely lost sight of the camels, though only a few
yards before us. The horses hung their tongues out of
their mouths, and refused to face the clouds of sand. A
parching thirst oppressed us, which nothing alleviated.”
How the prevailing Winds affect the Sand of ihe Desert.
—The prevailing winds in the Sahara are the easterly and
westerly,—the first blows nine months, the second but three
months. This circumstance is intimately connected with
the motions and distribution of the sand of the Desert. In
the eastern half of the Sahara the sand is more gravelly,
and the general cover of sand shallower than in the western
half; so that, in travelling towards the west, the depth of
the sand and the completeness of the sandy covers in-
creases. This distribution of the sand is probably owing
to the easterly wind, which blows so much longer than the
westerly, carrying the sand before it from the East Sahara.
To the same cause we may refer the less frequent appear-
ance of rocks, the gradual diminution in magnitude and of

GECLOGY OF NIGRITIA. 265

frequency of oases, even their total destruction by blowing
sand as we advance westward.*

What is the Geognostical Age of the Sahara?—Many are
of opinion that the Sahara must at one time have been the
bed of the ocean. The very frequent saline impregnation
of the sand, the rolled pebble and sands mixed with sea-
shells at the foot of the southern acclivity of the Atlas and
other parts of the Desert, are considered as in favour of this
hypothesis. At what period did this great tract rise above
the waves of the ocean? This can only be guessed at by
an attentive examination of the junctions of the sandstones,
limestones, &c. with the bounding primary ranges of the De-
sert. If they are the same on the south side as on the north
or Atlas side, then it would follow that the Desert rose above
the sea at the time when the Atlas made its appearance
from below; that is, after the deposition of the tertiary
rocks,—at a period when the earth and its animals and
vegetables were nearly the same as at present.

3. Geology of the Region to the South of the Sahara, and
to the North of the Great Table-land.—This is the Land of
the Negyoes, called also Soudan or Nigritia. The high
land on the west of this part of Africa is partly accumu-
lated around the sources of the:rivers Senegal, Gambia,
Rio Grande, and Niger or Joliba. From the sources of the
Niger the mountains run eastwards, under the name Kong
Mountains, across Africa, when at length they are said to
form a junction with the Mountains of the Moon, that range
onward and join with the vast alpme land of Abyssinia.
Parts of this boundary are very lofty, some mountains of the
Kong chain attaining an elevation of 14,000 feet above the
level of the sea. From the meager details of travellers in
regard to this part of Africa, all we can infer is, that the
nfountains on the west and along the south of this zone
contain primitive rocks of various descriptions, as granite,
mica-slate, clay-slate, quartz rock, hornblende rock, lime-
stone, &c. In different parts these rocks seem traversed
by augite greenstone or secondary traps. The secondary
sandstones and limestones connected with these ranges not
having been accurately described, we cannot venture any

* The Jong continuance of the easterly in comparison of the westerly
wind, may explain how it happens that the whole country of Egypt has
not ere this *eer swallowed up by the sand-flood of the Desert.

Z

266 AFRICAN GOLD.

conjecture as to their geological nature. At Gambia there
is only sand; but opposite the town there are islands of
red decomposed granite. At Goree the rock is a fine
basalt, which takes a regular prismatic form, similar to the
Giants’ Causeway.*

Vast tracts of flat country, partly rich and cultivated,
partly desert and sandy, extend to the eastern limit, in-
cluding Soudan, of which the great kingdoms are Houssa
and Bornou. In the flat and desert regions, salt lakes and
natron lakes, and salt and niatron springs, are met with.
Beds of rock-salt occur in different places, as at Teleg,
north of Timbuctoo, half a day’s. journey from Taudeny.
From this place is exported all the salt from Timbuctoo to
Jenne, and from that town to Soudan. The salt is there
disposed in beds several feet thick: it is mined into large
slabs, which are afterward sawn into blocks for the market.
These mines form the riches of the country.

African Gold.—This continent, as is well known, affords
a considerable quantity of gold, which i is found in the form
of rolled pieces, or in minute grains, named gold dust, in
the alluvium of rivers, lakes, valleys, and the wide-spread-
ing sand of the vast Desert. The northern parts of Africa
afford but little gold; while in the countries to the south
of the Great Desert, there are tracts remarkable for the
quantity of gold they contain. Thus the flat country, which
extends from the foot of the mountains in which are situ-
ated the sources of the Gambia, Senegal, and Niger, has,
from an early period, afforded gold. Bambouk, which is
situated to the north-west of these mountains, furilishieh the
greatest part of the gold which is sold on the western coast
of Africa, as well as that which is brought to Morocco,
Fez, Algiers, Cairo, and Alexandria. The gold, as is often
the case, is accompanied with grains of iron ore, probably
the magnetic or black iron ore. Gold mines occur to the
south of Timbuctoo. The people employed in these mines
are Bambarra negroes, who become wealthy, as all the
particles of gold under a certain weight (12 mizams) belong
to them. Pieces of gold, weighing several ounces, are
sometimes found there. The country of Kordofan, to the
south-east of the Great Desert, affords a considerable qutintity

* Geol. Tr., vol. i., New Series, p. 418.

—

—_

THOMAS PARK’S ACCOUNT OF ACCRA. 267

of gold. The precious metal found in that country is
brought to market by the negroes, in quills of the ostrich
and vulture. This territory, it would appear, was known
to the ancients, who regarded Ethiopia as a country rich in
gold. Sulphur is said to occur in Darfur.

4. Great Table-land of Africa.—Of the table-land itself
we know very little,—the geological details we are now to
lay before our readers being principally illustrative of the
mountain-ranges and acclivities that surround this elevated
plateau.

Geology of the Coast from Sierra Leone to Cape Negro.
—We shall trace the geological phenomena from Sierra
Leone to Cape Negro. The hills around Sierra Leone are
of granite, or rather of a porphyritic granitic syenite, in
which tourmaline crystals occur.* We know nothing
whatever of the geology of the Grain Coast and Ivory
Coast of Guinea. The Gold Coast is so named from the
great trade in gold dust carried on there, which has given
rise to many European settlements. We are told that in
the interior there are mountains of granite, gneiss, and
quartz, and that the gold is collected from the alluvial sands
and clays formed from these rocks. Nothing particular is
known of the rocks or soils of the Slave Coast.

Our young friend and pupil, Thomas Park, son of the
celebrated but unfortunate Mungo Park, possessing the
enthusiasm and courage of his. father, determined on tra-
versing Africa, with the view of ascertaining the history of
his father’s fate, at that time in some degree unknown, and
also of enlarging our knowledge of its natural history and
geography. He was landed by order of government at
Accra, on the west coast, in 5° N. The last letter we re-
ceived from this promising young traveller,—for shortly
after the commencement of his journey he perished,—was
as follows :—“ Accra, 17th September, 1827.—I intend to
set off to-morrow morning. I have been, as you know,
three months here, during which time I have been princi-
pally busy with the study of the Ashantee language. Some
time ago I made an excursion cf about fifty miles into the
interior, by way of experiment, and did not fail to look
around me and notice the rocks and other natural produce .

* Geol. Tr., vol.i., New Series, p. 418.

968 GEOLOGY OF BENIN AND ANGuaA

tions. I have only time to say, that the valley of Accra is
about 12 miles in breadth, and 50 miles in length; the
bottom is covered with a soft sandstone, and this sandstone,
in one place, was observed resting upon clay-slate. The
mountains forming the sides of this long valley, as far as I
could observe, appear composed of quartz rock and clay-
slate, alternating with each other, and disposed in strata
ranging S.S.W. and N.N.E., the dip from 30° to 80° (the
direction of the dip not mentioned). The quartz rock con-
tains grains of gold, as I ascertained by careful examination.
In some blocks of rock (syenzte) I noticed a good many crys-
tals of sphene, and in one place saw what I considered to
be black manganese ore. It is very hard and heavy, and
is fashioned by the Ashantees into balls The cover of
alluvium, in the bottom of the valley and extending down to
the seacoast, is of such a nature as to lead me to conjecture
that it is of marine origin, and, therefore, that the sea for-
merly extended a long way inland. The bases of the hills
are richly clothed with trees; but these diminish in num-
ber towards the coast, where there occurs only a bush here
and there.”

The occurrence of gold in the quartz rock, as prem |
by Mr. Park, is a very interesting observation, as it allows
us to infer that probably much of the gold collected in
Africa may have been derived originally from this kind of
rock, which, in its broken down and disintegrated state,
may have formed the sands and gravels in which gold dust
is generally found.

In Benin there are mountains (those of Cameroon on the
seacoast) said to be 12,000 feet high. The Congo district,
through which the Zaire flows, was examined for some dis-
tance up the river. The rocks met with were granite,
syenite, primitive greenstone, gneiss, mica-slate, aay -slate,
and primitive limestone or marble.

The kingdom of Angola contains salt pits, from which
are extracted large slabs of solid rock-salt. According to
Battel, beds of rock-salt, three feet thick, extend over a con-
siderable part of the province of Dembea.

The mines of Loango and Benguela furnish good iron.
Copper and silver ores are said also to occur in Angola,
particularly in the kingdom of Majomba. There are also
some considerable mines of copper in Anziko.

DISTRIBUTION OF MOUNTAINS, ETC. 269

’

Bamba, situated on the coast, has large salt pits. Its
mountains, rich in metals, extend as far as Angola. The
province of Sandi contains ores of iron and of yellow cop-
per ore.

‘The coast from Cape Negro, in lat. 16° S., to the mouth
of the Orange River, an extent upwards of one thousand
miles, consists of sand hills, without a tree or drop of
water, having in this great space only three bays, which
are completely exposed to the north-west wind, viz. the
Great Fish Bay, Walvisch Bay, and Angra Pequina. The

geology of this coast is entirely unknown.

Cape of Good Hope District.—This district is bounded
on the north and east by the Orange and Fish Rivers; on
the west and south by the ocean. ‘The country. extends
from S. lat. 26° to S. lat. 33° 55’ 40’, that of the Cape of
Good Hope. It includes the country inhabited by the
Hottentot race and the Boshuanas. ©

Distribution of the Chains of Mountains, Plains, and Vail-
leys or Kloofs.—Two great chains of mountains run paral-
lel with the western coast, having between them and the
coast a sandy plain from-five to ten miles in breadth. From
the most easterly of these two chains branch off three
others, running in a direction parallel with the equator,
between which are the like number of terraces, including
altogether a space of between two and three degrees of
latitude. The two southernmost of these chains are united
at several points with the western, and form the vast
‘ridges which, under the names Zwartebergen or Black
Mountains, run like a steep wall from west to east, broken
only at intervals by the streams which flow from them from
the Karroo. The two principal of these chains terminate
at Kromme Rivers’ Bay and at Algoa Bay. Smaller.
branches run down to Mossel Bay and Plattenbergs Bay.
The level country between the southern chain and the coast
constantly decreases in breadth, from the spot where this
chain branches off from the western mountains till it is lost
near Kromme Rivers’ Bay. Towards the north several
long and spacious valléys run between the chains of the
Black Mountains, the principal of which are, the Kokman’s

Kloof, Kango, the Valley of the Elephant River, and Long
Kloof. Itis only at a few points, and even at these not without
some danger and difficulty, -. the Black Mountains can
4 2

270 DISTRIBUTION OF MOUNTAINS, ETC.

ne crossed to the terrace north of them, and which is some
thousand feet higher than the other two terraces, known
under the name G7eat Karroo.* _Thetract enclosed between
these two chains of mountains is partly fertile, but inter-
spersed with tracts of arid clay-land called Karroo. This
plain or terrace, forming the third terrace of Southern Africa,
about 300 miles in length and 80 in breadth, and principally
a parched desert, occupies the whole of that very large
space lying between the Black Mountains and the third
great branch from the western hills, called the Nieuweveld
Mountains. These latter again unite themselves, after run-
ning for a long extent from west to east, with another chain
of mountains running from north to south, forming at their
junction that remarkable group of mountains called the
Sneuwbergen or Snow Mountains. The Nieuweveld and
Sneuwberg Mountains are said to be the highest in Southern
Africa, some of them being 10,000 feet above the level of
the sea. The country, from this vast range of mountains
to the northern boundary of the Cape Colony, may be con-
sidered as a lofty plain, part indeed of the great Table-land
of Africa, free from large mountains, but here and there
varied with ranges and hills of moderate dimensions, having
very few rivers, and all of these nearly dried up in summer :
quite destitute of trees and grass, but every where covered
with bushes springing out of a naked red soil, deprived of
moisture during a great part of the year. The bushes are
not more than a foot or two in height, excepting various
kinds of lycium, and almost exclusively belong to the natu-
ral order of composite flowers. One general cast of fea-
tures, not peculiar, however, to this district, pervades all
these vegetables,—a minute and arid foliage. Yet on these
all the cattle browse, and such wild animals as are herbivo-
rous. The mountains vary in form; the most prevalent

shape is the tabular; and of these splendid displays occur
in many parts of the country, which are well represented

in the plates in Professor Lichtenstein’s Travels, and also

in those of Mr. Burchell. Deep and extensive cliffs are of

frequent occurrence, exhibiting all the magnificent scenery
so characteristic of the great sandstone or quartz formation,

* The word Karroo, written Karro by Burchell, belongs to the Hot-
tentot language, and signifies dry or arid.

KARROO PLAINS. 271

which predominates in Southern Africa. The mountain-
ranges are in many places traversed by deep valleys, named
kloofs. ‘These are the passes that lead across from one part
of the country to the other, and which appear to have been
originally vast rents, which have become wider by the action
of the atmosphere and running water. The inclined plain,
or space between the most southern range of mountains and
the seacoast, varies from 20 to 60 miles in breadth, and,
reckoning from the interior of the country, forms the third
terrace of Southern Africa. The flat tract enclosed between
the southern chain and the Zwarteberg forms the second
terrace. ‘The vast tract, or the Great Karroo, contained
between the Zwarteberg and the Nieuweveld Gebirgte, is
the first terrace. The second and first terraces, which con-
tain so-much Karroo ground, may formerly have been inland
seas or lakes.. The great bank of gravel, sand, and clay
which ranges along the coast and under the sea, from the
‘Cape of Good Hope to Natal, and to south lat. 37°, may be
considered as another terrace.

Description of the Karroo Plains—The Karroo ground,
which forms so striking a feature in the external aspect of
the Cape district, is loam or sandy clay, mixed with parti-
eles of ochre of iron. Lichtenstein says it is not more than
a foot in thickness. This may apply to some, but by no
means to the greater number of localities. From the nature
of the soil, and other concomitant causes, the vegetation
must at all times be very meager; and in summer, when
the sun has dried the soil to the hardness of brick, it ceases
almost entirely. The mesembryanthemum, and some other
succulent plants; some kinds of gorteria, of bergia, and of
asters, whose roots, like the bulbs of lilacious plants, nature
has fortified with a tenfold net of fibres under the upper
rind, to protect them against the hardened clay : such plants
alone resist the destructive nature of this mhospitable soil.

As soon as, in the cooler season, the rains begin to fall
and penetrate into the hard layer of loam, these fibres im-
bibe the moisture, and, pushing aside the clay, the germ
of the plant, under their protection, begins to shoot, and in
a few days the arid waste is covered with a delicate green
covering. Soon after, myriads of flowers ornament the
whole surface. ‘‘The mild midday sun,” says Lichten-
stein, “expands the radiated crowns of the mesembryan-

270 KARROO PLAINS.

themums and gorterie, and the: young green of the plants
is almost hidden by the glowing colours of their full-blown —
flowers, while the whole air is perfumed with the most
fragrant odour. The odour is more particularly delightful,
when, after a calm day, the sun declines, and the warm
breath of the flowers rests quietly on the plain. At this
time the whole dreary desert is transformed into one con-
tinued garden of flowers. The colonist, with his herds
and his flocks, leaves the Snowy Mountains, and, descending
into the plain, there finds a plentiful and wholesome supply
of food for the animals; while troops of the tall ostrich
and the wandering antelope, driven also from the heights,
share the repast, and enliven the scene. But how soon is
the country again deprived of all its glory! It scarcely
continues more than one month, unless late rains, which
must not often be expected, call forth the plants again into
new life. As the days begin to lengthen, the increasing
power of the midday ray checks once more the lately awa-
kened powers of vegetation. The flowers soon fade and
fall, the stems and leaves dry, and the hard coat of soil
locks up the germs until the rains return; the succulent
plants alone still furnish food for the herds and flocks. The
streams soon begin to dry, the springs almost cease to flow, -
till at length the universal drought compels the colonists te
return to the mountains ; yet even then they quit the plain
with reluctance, and the flocks, accustomed to endure thirst,
still linger behind, feeding on the succulent plants, which
afford at once food and drink, and are particularly salutary
to those that bear wool. Every day, however, the Karroo ©
becomes more and more solitary, and by the end of Sep-
tember it is wholly deserted. The hardened clay bursts
into a thousand cracks, which evince to the traveller the
great power of an African sun. Every trace of verdure is
vanished, and the hard red soil is covered over with a brown
dust, formed from the ashes of the dried and withered
plants. Yet among these ashes is the seed nourished that
is to produce future generations, and the relics of one year’s
vegetation furnishes manure that is to cherish the germ till
the next year’s rain again brings them forth.”

Lichtenstein thus describes his first view of the rein
Karroo :—* The space between the mountain-ranges is the
Great Karroo, as it is called a parched and arid plain,

GEOGNOSY OF THE CAPE PENINSULA. 2/3

stretching out to such an extent that the vast hills by which
it is terminated are almost lost in the distance. The beds
of numberless little rivers cross, like veins, in a thousand
directions, this enormous space ; the course of them might
in some places be clearly distinguished by the dark-green of
the mimosas which spread along their banks. Excepting
these, nowhere, as far as the eye could reach, was a tree
to be seen, nor even a shrub, or any signs whatever
of life.”

As the geology of the country in the vicinity of Cape
Town is that best known to us of any part of Southern
Africa, we shall first describe the arrangements observed in
that quarter, and afterward notice what is known of the
rocks of other parts of this division of Africa.

Geognosy of the Peninsula of the Cape of Good Hope.—
The peninsula of the Cape of Good Hope is a mountainous
ridge, stretching nearly north and south for forty or fifty
miles, and connected on the east side, and near its northern
extremity, with the main body of Africa, by a flat sandy
isthmus, about ten miles broad, having Table Bay on the
north of it, and False Bay on the south. The southern ex-
tremity of this peninsula, extending into the sea, with
False Bay on the east, and the ocean on the south and west,
is properly the Cape of Good Hope, and is nearly the most
southern point of Africa. At this point the chain of moun-
tains which forms the peninsula, though rugged, is lower
than at the north end, where it is terminated by Table
Mountain and two others, which form an. amphitheatre
overlooking Table Bay, and opening to the north. The
mountains of the ridges extending from the Cape to the
termination of the peninsula in the north, vary in shape;
but the most frequent forms incline more or less to sharp
conical. The three mountains that terminate the peninsula
on the north are, the Table Mountain in the middle; the
Lion’s Head, sometimes called the Sugar Loaf, on the west
side; and the Devil’s Peak on the east. The Lion’s
Head, which is about 2160 feet above the level of the sea,
is separated from the Table Mountain by a valley that de-
scends to the depth of 1500 or 2000 feet below the summit
of the Table Mountain, which is itself 3582 above the level
of the sea. On the west of the Lion’s Head there isa
lower eminence, named the Lion’s Rump, 1142 feet high,

274 | GEOGNOSY OF THE CAPE PENINSULA.

from which the ground declines gradually tothe sea. The
amphitheatre formed by these three mountains is about five
‘ or six miles in diameter, in the centre of which is acer
Cape Town.

The rocks of which this peninsula is composed are faw i in
number, and of simple structure. They are granite, gneiss,
clay-slate, greywacke, quartz rock, sandstone, and augite-
greenstone, or dolerite. Of these the most abundant are
granite and sandstone ; the next in frequency are clay-slate
and greywacke ; and the least frequent are gneiss and do-
lerite. In some parts, as at. the Steinberg, the sandstone is
traversed by veins of red iron ore. Abel mentions a vein
six feet wide, and extending for upwards of one hundred
feet.

The strata of the Neptunian rocks, or those whose forma-
tion is connected with the operation of water, generally
range from west to east,—that is, across the peninsula.
The southern and middle parts of the peninsula have been
but imperfectly examined. Captain Hall remarks, that the
same general structure and relations seem to occur all over
the peninsula as in the mountains around Cape Town.
The late Dr. Clarke Abel, in the account of his voyage to
China, gives the following description of a fine display of
stratification in a mountain that faces the sea, in the neigh-
bourhood of Simon’s Bay, which was pointed out to him
by one of our pupils, an active and intelligent officer, Cap-
tain Wauchope, R. N. :—“ The sandstone forming the
upper part of the mountain is of a reddish colour, very
crystalline in its structure, and approaching, in some speci-
mens, to quartz rock. Immediately beneath the sandstone
is a bed of compact dark-red argillaceous sandstone, passing,
in many places, into slate of the same colour. This bed
rests upon another of very coarse loosely-combined sand-
stone, resembling gravel. Under this is another layer of
dark-red sandstone, terminating in a conglomerate, consist-
ing of decomposed crystals of felspar, and of rounded and
angular fragments of quartz, from the size of a millet-seed
to that of a plover’s egg, imbedded in a red sandstone base.
Beneath the conglomerate commences a bed, which I at
first took for granite, and which is composed of the consti-
tuents of granite in a decomposed state, intermixed with
green steatite, and a suflicient quantity of the red sandstone

THE LION’S RUMP. 275

to give it a reddish hue. The felspar of the bed is decom-
posed, and exactly resembles that of the conglomerate
above it. The mica seems, in a good measure, to have
passed into steatite. The quartz is in small crystals, fre-
quently having their angles rounded. This bed is several
feet in thickness, and gradually terminates in the granite ;
but the precise line of junction I was unabletotrace. The
appearances thus were in the following order :-—

1. Horizontally-stratified sandstone.

2. Bed of compact dark-red sandstone, passing into
slate.

3. A bed of coarse sandstone resembling gravel. |

4, A second layer of compact dark-red sandstone, passing,

5. Into a conglomerate, consisting of decomposed crystals
of felspar, and fragments of quartz in a sandstone basis.

6. A bed composed of the decomposed constituents of
granite and red sandstone, passing,

7. Into granite.”

The above is the only spot to the southward of the range
of mountains near Cape Town which has been particularly
described in a geognostical view. ‘To the northward of
Cape Town, it is said that the mountains are principally
composed of the same rocks as those which ocenr through-
out the peninsula, and whose characters and position have
been examined with considerable attention in the Lion’s
Rump, Lion’s Head, Table Mountain, and Devil’s Peak, by
our pupils the iate Dr. Clarke Abel, Dr. Adam, now of

Calcutta, the late Captain Carmichael, and also by Captain
Basil Hall. From the observations furnished to us by these
naturalists, and also from accounts published by them, we
have drawn up the following description :—
Lion’s Rump.—The Lion’s Rump rises by an easy
ascent, and, excepting at one or two points, is covered to
the summit with a thin soil, bearing a scanty vegetation.
Dr. Adam informs us that vegetables appeared to be most
luxuriant over the sandstone of the peninsula, but less so
on the soil formed by the decomposition of the granite, and,
least of all, over clay-slate, as on the Lion’s Rump, where
clay-slate is the predominating rock. Although this latter
hill has been cultivated in some places, yet it presents a

EE

276 THE LION’S HEAD.

stunted vegetation; while the upper part of Lion’s Head
and Table Mountain, though much more elevated, display
rich and more vigorous shrubs.* It is composed of clay-
slate, greywacke, and sandstone. The clay-slate and grey-
wacke appear to alternate, and the sandstone rests upon
the slate. The slate is distinctly stratified; the strata on
one side of the hill dip to the north, on the opposite to the
south, and in the middle or centre of the hill they are
nearly perpendicular. Numerous veins of compact quartz
traverse the strata in all directions. A quarry, which has
been wrought to a considerable extent on the east side of
the hill, exhibits a fine view of the structure of the clay-
slate, and in one place there is a bed of sandstone in the
slate. 'The sandstone, which is of a yellowish-gray colour,
is composed of grains of quartz, with disseminated felspar
and scales of mica. | '
Lion’s Head.—The strata of clay-slate continue to the
base of the Lion’s Head. Here they are succeeded by
strata of compact gneiss, composed of gray felspar and
quartz, with much dark-brown mica in small scales. It
much resembles the gneiss interposed between granite and
clay-slate in the transition mountains in the south of Scot-
land; as at Criffel, and near New Galloway in Kirkeud-
brightshire. The gneiss is distinctly stratified, and the
strata in some places dip under the next rock, which is gra-
nite ; in others, they dip from it. Numerous transitions are
observed from the granite into the gneiss; and in the same
bed of compact gneiss, one part will be gneiss, while another
will be granite. Beds of granite, in some places, appear
to alternate with the gneiss. Veins of granite, from a
few inches in width to several feet, traverse the gneiss and
clay-slate, and are observed projecting from the body of the
granite, and shooting among the neighbouring slaty strata.

* Constantia, so celebrated for its wine, is situated at the bottom of
the range leading from Cape Town to Simon’s Bay, where sandstone is
the predominating rock ; and the soil of the farms of the neighbouring
ground appears to be composed of it, in a state of decomposit:on, and of
vegetable mould. That it is the sandstone which essentially contributes
to the excellence of the soil Dr. Adam is inclined to believe, from having
observed several spots at the foot of the same range, nearer Cape Town,
with a soil richer in vegetabe mould, but whose produce was held much
inferior. The principal rock there was granite, and its superincumbent
sandstone has suffered Jess decomposition than that adjoining to Con
stantia,

TABLE MOUNTAIN. BAY

Granite forms a considerable portion of the Lion’s Head.
It is composed of pale-red felspar, gray quartz, and brown-
ish-black mica. It is more frequently coarse granular than
fine granular, and is often porphyritic. It is occasionally
traversed by veins of quartz, or of felspar, or of granite.
In some parts the granite zs traversed by veins of dolerite or
augite-greenstone, and one of these veins, as described by
Dr. Abel, appears divided and shifted. This appearance is
represented in No. 3 of Dr. Abel’s Geological Views at the
Cape of Good Hope. As weascend the mountain, we find
the granite succeeded first by a reddish sandstone, and this,
in its turn, is covered by a brown sandstone that reaches to
the summit. These sandstones are principally composed
of granular concretions of quartz, with a few disseminated
grains of felspar and scales of mica. The sandstone is
distinctly stratified, and the strata dip at a small angle all
around the Lion’s Head and the north-west side of the
Table Mountain. On the opposite side of the latter, how-
ever, from the seabeach, we may see it, beyond the gorges,
making an angle with the horizon of not less than 45°.
Dr. Adams says, ‘‘ During a ride to Constantia one day, I
observed this high inclination more particularly on the rid ze
extending from the Devil’s Peak by Simon’s Bay ; and,
having afterward visited the spot on purpose, found the
sandstone very much elevated in its position above the common
level of the strata, and, at one place, nearly perpendicular to -
the horizon, running from north-east to south-west.”

Table Mountain.-The next and highest mountain, the
Table Mountain, presents many interesting appearances.
The lowest part of the mountain, on one side, is red sand-
stone; higher up, and apparently rising from under it, are
clay-slate, greywacke, and gneiss. These rocks are dis-
posed in strata, arranged nearly i in a vertical position, with
an east and west direction. They are intermingled with
granite, which is the next rock on the ascent of the moun-
tain. The granite, at its line of junction with the slate,
both gneiss and clay-slate, is often much intermixed with
them; and numerous veins of granite shoot f*om the mass
of the granite rock itself into the bounding strata. Ata
higher level than the granite, sandstone makes its appear-
ance, and continues upwards to the summit of the moun-
tain. The lowest of the summit sandstone is of a reddish

Aa

278 “+ DEVIL’S PEAK.

4 -

colour; the next above it is of a yellowish colour; and the
upper part, or that on the summit, is of a gray or beautifully
white colour, and sometimes so coarsely granular as to ap-
pear in the state of conglomerate. Jn many places, the sand-
stone passes into quariz rock, and is very highly crystalline.
The sandstone is distinctly stratified, and nearly horizontal.

Devil’s Peak.—The most easterly mountain of the group
we are describing, named the Devil’s Peak, agrees with
Table Mountain in the nature and arrangement of the rocks
of which it is composed. The lower part of the mountain
exhibits strata of clay-slate ; these, as we ascend, are suc-
ceeded by granite; and the upper parts and summit.are of
the usual varieties of sandstone.*

* The following particulars, in regard to the mountains near Cape
Town, were communicated to us by Captain Carmichael. The Table
Mountain and Lion’s Head rest upon a base of granite; Green Point,
Table Valley, and the Devil’s Peak, on a base of slate, of which the whole
of the Lion’s Back or Rump is composed. The granite extends up to the
rocky crown of the Lion’s Head,—an elevation of nearly 1500 feet; and
the declivity of the mountain is strewed with enormous masses of it.
On the side of the Table Mountain, the space on which the granite is
visible is contracted to abont 500 feet, and occupies the centre of the decli
vity. At the spot called Sea Point, the granite and slate come in contact.
In the space of 200 yards along the shore, the reef is a mixture of these
two rocks, each predominating in the mass as you approach its respec-
tive side, where it is pure and unmixed. In some parts they form alter-
nating layers; in others, fragments of the slate, of all figures and sizes,
lie imbedded in the granite, which appears to have pervaded their mi-
nutest fissures. Between this mixed mass, however, and this pure s!ate,
there is interposed a rampart of granite, apparently different from the
common sort, which, for about 200 yards, is ‘unmixed; but, as it ap-
proaches the slate, becomes mingled with it in the same manner as the

ranite. From this to Green Point, and extending through Robben
sland, a distance Of about twelve miles, the slate is pure, and disposed
in nearly vertical strata.

Close to the path which leads from Cape Town to the summit of the
Table Mountain, there runs astream, which, at the point where the gra-
nite and slate meet, has carried off the snperincumbent earth, and ex-
posed the surface of the rock from ten to twenty yards in diameter, and
about 200 yards in length, dipping at an angle of about 30°. Along the
whole of this space the slate is i: tersected by veins of granite, varying

from three feet in width to as many lines. The veins branch off in all

directions, some straight, others twisted in the most fantastic convolu-
tions. In the face of the rampart which borders the channel on each

side, the veins are equally conspicuous. In walking along the shore, —

from Campo Bay to Sea Point, we meet with numerous veins of augite-
greenstone in the granite, varying in breadth from an inch to ten feet,
and branching in as many directions as those of the granite with the
slate. Here also are to be seen numerous fragments of slate in the
granite.
eo

-

=%

:
¥

UPRAISING OF THE PENINSULA. 279

To what Class of Rocks do those of the Cape Peninsula
belong ?—To what class or classes of formations of the geog-
nostical series are we to refer the rocks of the mountains
just described? From the clay-slate containing beds of
greywacke, we infer that the slate belongs to the transi-
tion class ;—from the granite being intermingled with the
slate, we consider it as probably belonging to the same
epoch. The sandstone is generally considered as belonging
to the secondary class,—an opinion, the accuracy of which
may be questioned ; because we find this rock in beds in the
slate, and also passing into and alternating with beds of a
transition rock, namely, quartz rock. ‘This being the case,
we are disposed to refer it also to the transition class; and
the great mass of it to the newest or uppermost portion of
the series.

At what Period did the Cape Rocks rise above the Level of
the Sea ?—This question has been variously answered, ac-
cording to the geological creed of those who have considered
the subject. The Neptunians maintain, on plausible grounds,
that all these rocks are crystallizations and deposites from
the ancient waters of the globe, which have taken place in
succession,—the’ granite being the first formed, the slate
and greywacke the next, and last of all, the principal portion
of the sandstone ; that, during the deposition of these
different rocks, the level of the ocean gradually sunk; and
that thus the mountains rose above its surface. The Plu-
tonians, or the supporters of the igneous origin of the gra-
nular crystdliized rocks, view the formation in a different
manner. Some of the advocates of the igneous system
maintain, that the slate was first deposited in horizontal
strata, at the bottom of the sea,—that these strata were
afterward softened by heat, and raised from their original
horizontal to their present highly inclined position, by the
action of fluid granite rising from the interior of the earth ;
and that in this way the granite and slate mountains were
elevated above the sea: that the sea again invaded the land
and covered it to a great depth; and that from this ocean
was deposited the sandstone strata: that the sea again

—s

The sandstone which forms the upper part of the Table Mountain,
Lion’s Head, and Devil’s Peak lies on horizontal strata, intersected by
ve tical fissures. It is of a Siliceous nature, and encloses rounded no-
dules of quartz.

280 RECENT EMERGENCE OF LAND DISPROVED.

retired, and left exposed mountains, and chains of mountains

of sandstone. Other Plutonians are of opinion that the
slate, greywacke, and sandstone were deposited, in uninter-
rupted succession, at the bottom of the sea; and that the
whole mass of stratified matter was raised gradually or sud-

denly above the level of the ocean, forming mountains, chains

of mountains, and table-lands, by that igneous agency which
sent up the granite, and probably also the augite-greenstone
rocks. This, of thetwo Plutonian views, is the most plausible,
and indeed is that explanation which may be viewed as most
in accordance with prevailing geological hypotheses. —
Vegetables incrusted with Calcareous Sand confounded with
Coral, and adduced as a Proof of the very recent Emergence,
from ihe Ocean, of the Lands supporting them.—Somewhat
to the eastward of Simon’s Town is a large bank, one hun-
dred feet above the level of the sea, formed by an accumula-
tion of sand and shells, brought there by the action of the
wind. On this bank Abel observed a number of cylindrical
calcareous bodies scattered about, which at first appeared
like bleached bones. Ona closer examination many of them
are found to be branched, and others are discovered rising
through the soil, and ramifying from a stem beneath, thicker
than themselves. ‘They are incrustations of sand and cal-
careous matter on vegetables. Similar bodies have been
found by Vancouver, Flinders, and Perron, on the shores of
New-Holland, at considerable elevations. ‘The first-men-
tioned traveller considered them all as coral, and as proofs
of the land having been lately withdrawn from the dominion
of the waters. The last has described two kinds of sub-
stances; the one he considers as coral, the other as incrusta-
tions on vegetables. Captain Flinders, at page 48, vol. 1.
of his Voyage Round the World, says,—“ The appearance
of this country along the coast resembles, in most respects,
that of Africa about the Cape of Good Hope. ‘The surface
seemed to be chiefly composed of sand, mixed with decayed
vegetables, varying exceedingly in point of richness, and,
although béaring a great similarity, yet indicating a soil su
perior in quality to that in the immediate neighbourhood of
Cape Town. ‘The principal component part of this country
appeared to be coral; and it would seem that its elevation
above the ocean is of modern date, not only from the shores
and the bank which extends along the coast being, generally

y
Q

RECENT EMERGENCE OF LAND DISPROVED. 281

speaking, composed of coral, as was evident by our lead
never descending to the bottom without bringing up coral on
its return, but by coral being found on the highest hills we
ascended, particularly on the summit of Bald Head, which
is sufficiently above the level of the sea to be seen 12 or 14
leagues distant. Here the coral was entirely in its original
state, particularly in one level spot, comprehending about
eight acres, which produced not the least herbage on the
white sand that occupied this space, through which the
branches of coral protruded, and were found standing exactly
like those seen in the beds of coral beneath the surface of
the sea, with ramifications of different sizes, some not half
an inch, others four or five inches in circumference. In
these fields of coral (if the term field be allowable), of which
there were several, seashells were in great abundance,—
some nearly in a perfect state, still adhering to the coral,
others in different stages of decay. The coral was friable
in various degrees ; the extremities of the branches, some
of which were nearly four feet above the sand, were easily
reduced to powder, while those close to or under the sur-
face, required some small force to break them from the rocky
foundation from whence they appeared to spring. I have
seen coral in many places at a considerable distance from
the sea; but in no other instance have I seen it so elevated
and in such a state of perfection.” Captain Flinders, at
page 63, vol. i. of his Voyage to Terra Australis, has the
following remarks on the same appearance :—“ Captain
Vancouver-mentions having found, upon the top of Bald
Head, branches of coral protruding through the sand, exactly
like ae seen in the coral beds beneath the sara of the
sea,-—a circumstance which should seem to bespeak this
country to have emerged from the ocean at no very distant
period of time. This curious fact I was desirous to verify,
and his description was proved to be correct. I found also
two broken columns of stone, three or four feet high, formed
like stumps of trees, and of a thickness superior to the body
of a man; but whether they were of coral, or of wood now
petrified, or whether they might not have been calcareous
rocks, worn into that particular form by the weather, I can-
not determine. Their elevation above the present level of
he sea could not have been less than 400 feet.”

Perron says, “On breaking the branches where the in-

Aagz

282 GEOLOGY OF THE TABLE-LAND.

crustation is recent, we observe the woody texture contained
in a solid case, and without any remarkable alteration ; but —
in proportion as the calcareous envelope increases, the
wood becomes disorganized, and changes insensibly into a
dry and black powder.” From this state he supposes the
centre gradually to increase in solidity till the whole mass
becomes a mere sandstone, and nothing but an arborescent
form indicates the ancient state of vegetation.

The incrustations near Simon’s 'T’own are of a similar na-
ture to those found in New-Holland, because, says Dr.
Abel, the descriptions of authors correspond with the ap- |
pearances I have witnessed, and because I have compared
a specimen brought from Bald Head in New-Holland, by Mr.
Brown, with those I obtained at the Cape, and can trace
no essential difference, either in the external characters or
chemical composition. It follows from this statement, that
Flinders and Vancouver have confounded vegetable in-
crustations with true corals; and hence the reasoning on
their supposed submarine origin, and modern rising of the
Bald Head, &c. above the level of the ocean, is incorrect.

Geology of the North and South, and East and West
Ranges of Mountains.—The ranges of mountains which
run northward from the Cape Peninsula to Orange or Ga-
riep River, inthe points where examined, exhibited granite
and slate, with vast deposites of sandstone or quartz rock
with numerous table-shaped summits,—thus showing a
similarity of composition in these mountains to those of the
Cape Peninsula. ; |

The three great ranges of mountains that run from east
to west, according to the reports of travellers, are of the
same general nature, and eminently characterized by the
vast abundance of sandstone reposing in horizental strata
upon the granite and slate, forming the middle, and very
often the higher parts of the chains. ;

Geology of the Table-land.—From the third range on-
wards to lat. 30° S., the prevailing rock in the plains and
hills is sandstone. At Dwaal River, the frontier of the
colony, there are rocks of augite-greenstone and basalt,
probably in veins traversing the sandstone. Rocks of the
same description, disposed in beautiful globular concretions
(not boulders, as stated by Burchell), occur near to Kaabes
Kraal, 29° S. lat., probably in veins traversing the horizon-
tal sandstone of that district. The Karreebergen, or Dry

THE SIBILO OF THE AFRICANS. 283

Mountains, beyond the limits of the colony, form a range
from five to ten miles broad, and range through the coun-
try to an unknown distance, from N.E. to S.W. These
mountains are principally composed of sandstone, in hori-
zontal strata, and every where exhibit beautiful table-
shaped summits. i a to Burchell, * The sandstone
rock continues onward to lat. 30° S., to near Modde or
Mud Gap, where true quartz strata and vesicular trap-rocks
make their appearance. In lat. 29° 15’ 32” S., mountains,
called the Asbestos Mountains, of clay-slate, disposed in
horizontal strata, occur; there. layers of asbestos occur in
the slate. This asbestos is blue and yellow, and the fibres
sometimes nearly three inches in length.” In the same
mountain, according to Burchell, green opal and pitchstone
also occur. A range of black craggy mountains extends
from the Kloof, in the Asbestos Mountains; the rocks are
very probably trap. Further to the north, at Klaarwater,
are vast beds of horizontally stratified limestone, without -
organic remains. ,

Account of the Sibrio of the Africans.—At Sensavan, or
Blenk-Klip, nearly in S. lat. 28°, there is aridge of quartz
rock impregnated with micaceous iron ore, which, in many
places, is collected into nests of considerable magnitude.
This ore gf iron is known throughout Southern Africa by
the name Sz/zlo. Hither all the surrounding nations re-
pair for a supply of that ornamental and, in their eyes,
valuable substance. It forms, in some degree, an article of
barter with more distant tribes, and even among them-
selves; so that the use of it extends over at least 5° of lati-
tude. It is of a reddish colour, soft and greasy to the feel,
—its particles adhering to the skin, and staining it of a
deep red colour. The skin, says Burchell, is not easily
freed from these glossy particles, even by repeated washing.
The mode of preparing and using it is, simply grinding it
with grease, and smearing it generally over the body, but
chiefly on the head; and the hair is often so much clotted
and loaded with an accumulation of it, that the clots look
like lumps of the ore.

From the north of Sensavan to Lattakoo, the rocks are
limestone without petrifactions, granite, and slate. In con-
clusion, it may be remarked, that as far as is known at pre-
sent, the whole of the table-land of Southern Africa, to the

284 é SOUTH AFRICAN LAKES.

north of the Orange or Gariep River, is composed of hori-
zontal limestone without petrifactions, clay-slate, sandstone
ur quartz rock, granite, greenstone, serpentine, and pot-
stone. ‘The most remarkable geological feature of the
country is the horizontality of the strata,—thus intimating
their undisturbed state.

Geological Survey of the Karroo Ground recommended.—
To geological travellers we recommend a particular exa-
mination of the compact clay-ground called Karroo, which,
if a deposite from ancient lakes, may prove to be a tertiary
formation. The surface only of the Karroo ground has
been described ; for, as far as our information goes, no ac-
counts have been published of its internal structure and
arrangement. It is by the study of the structure and
arrangement of its layers, and the careful examination of
the minerals, rocks, organic remains (if any) it contains,
and its chemical composition, that we can acquire a dis-
tinct conception of its true nature.

RIVERS.

The rivers of Africa, as far as connected with those re-
gions of this continent described in the present volume,
have been already particularly considered. As much, how-~
ever, still remains to be known in regard to them, we may
add, that the attention of travellers, in investigating their
natural history, should, besides their geographical distri-
bution, be directed towards the various circumstances
connected with their fall, velocity, quantity of water they
contain, their eddies, freshes, and bore, if any such occur ;
also, the nature of their beds, inundations, occultations,
temperature at the surface, or at different depths; their
cascades and rapids; their water, as to colour, trans-
parency, and chemical composition ; and they should not
omit descriptions of the river scenery considered by itself,
and also in reference to the surrounding country ; and, lastly,
the climate, and effects of the climate, and of the scenery
of the rivers, on man, ought also to form objects of inquiry.

SOUTH AFRICAN LAKES. ;
- In Southern Africa, lakes are but seldom met with, and
among these, some few are salt. The most considerable
salt lake hitherto met with by travellers, is that near to

SOUTH AFRICAN SPRINGS. 28D

Algoa Bay. It is resorted to by the inhabitants from very
distant parts of the colony, for the purpose of procuring salt
for their own consumption or for sale. It is Situated in
a plain considerably elevated above the level of the sea, is
of an oval form, and about three miles in circumference.
It is named Zoutpan or Saltpan, an appropriate name, as
the sun and wind do here what is effected in salt-works by
artificial heat. When Mr. Barrow examined it, the greatest
part of its bottom was covered with one continued body of
salt, like a sheet of ice, the crystals of which were so
united that they formed a solid mass as hard as rock. The
dry south-easterly winds of summer, agitating the water of
the lake, produce on the margin a fine, light, powdery salt,
like flakes of snow. This is equally beautiful as the re-
fined salt of England. Another salt lake, according to
Lichtenstein, occurs on the western coast of the colony near
to Elephant River, from which the inhabitants of the dis-
trict supply themselves with this necessary of life. A salt
lake of considerable extent is said to occur in about S. lat.
30°, in the upper part of the river-district of the Orange
River. The most northern, of which I have been able to
gain any intelligence, says Burchell, is one about the 27°
S. lat., eastward of Lattakoo. The ees clay, as already
mentioned, is probably a deposite from lake water, at atime
when the tracts where it occurs were covered with water.

Particulars to be attended io in investigating the Natural
Mistory of Lakes.—Travellers, in examining and describing
lakes, ought to ascertain their relations to rivers and springs,
their magnitude, depth, temperature at the surface and at
various depths, their colours, occultations, and agitations.
The water of the lake ought to be submitted to chemical
analysis, in order to ascertain whether it is fresh water,
salt water, alkaline water, calcareous water, &c. Their
mode of formation ought also to be considered, and the
peculiar characters of lake scenery and climate should be
attended to.

SOUTH AFRICAN SPRINGS.

The springs of Southern Africa may be divided into com-
mon, hot, and mineral.

Common Springs.—Although much rain falls in the
Cape district, it affords but “comparatively few springs.

286 SOUTH AFRICAN SPRINGS.

This paucity of springs may be explained, as Mr. Barrow
remarks, by attending to the nature of the rocks, and their
mode of arrangement. Where two of the formations of —
the district occur together, as sandstone and granite for
example, and the sandstone lies upon the granite, whose
upper surface is above the level of the neighbouring coun-
try, springs will occur abundantly around the line of junc-
tion of the two formations. In this case the water perco-
lates through the sandstone, which is a porous rock; but
its farther progress downwards is arrested by the granite,
which is a dense and compact rock, and therefore, when it
reaches the surface of the granite, it accumulates there, and
either remains stationary, or flows along its surface, until
it finds an opening at the surface, where it issues forth in
the form of springs. On the contrary, if the sandstone de-
posite rests upon granite, whose upper surface is below the
level of the surrounding country, the percolating water, on
reaching the granite, will accumulate there, and flow off by
rents into the lower and distant parts of the country, but
few springs will be observed issuing from the sandstone.

Hot Springs.—The only hot springs particularly de-
scribed by travellers are those of Brand Valley and Zwarte-
berg.

Brand. Valley.—The hot spring here is larger than that
at Zwarteberg. It forms a shallow pond of about fifty feet
across, of the most transparent water, in the middle of which
several strong springs bubble up through a bottom of loose
white sand, and afterward flowing in a very copious stream,
become a rivulet, which, for at least a mile and a half, con-
tinues so hot, that its course along the valley may, at any
time of the day, but more particularly early in the-morning,
be traced by the steam which perpetually arises from it.
The pond is sheltered by a.small clump of white poplars,
which thrive perfectly well, although growing at the very
edge of the water, and bedewed with the hot steam, which
ascends to their highest branches. No plant, it seems, can
grow in the water itself; but the margins of the bank are:
thickly covered with sedge, particularly cyperus fascicularis.
Royena glabra, a species of rhus, and a variety of plants,
stand within the influence of its heat. The thermometer,
when plunged into the pond, rose only to 144° Fahrenheit,
but to the hand it felt nearly scalding hot; so that the

SOUTH AFRICAN SPRINGS. 237

immersion could scarcely be endured for a few seconds. The
water is pure and tasteless, and is used for all domestic pur-
poses. Nothing resembling a deposition is any where ob-
servable ; nor are its banks or channel at all discoloured.
The hill, from the foot of which it issues, has no remark-
able appearance ; at least, there is none of that black pon-
derous iron ore, or earth, noticed at the Zwarteberg baths.
At the distance of about 300 yards from the source, two
bath-houses have been built over the stream, the heat of
which, even here, is almost greater than can be borne by a
person not gradually inured to it. Between the spring and
the bath, where the stream has run a sufficient distance in
the open air to allow it time to become a few degrees cooler,
the bottom of the rivulet is covered with a beautiful sea-
green conferva, waving gracefuily beneath the water, like
long tresses of hair. Specimens of rocks from this district,
sent me by Dr. Smith, show that the waters of this spring
issue from quartz rock, containing grains of white felspar
in the state of porcelain earth.

Warm Bath at Zwarteberg.—This is a short mountainous
ridge, running east and west, and of secondary height.
From the lower part of its southern front projects a small
flat hill, out of the upper part of which issue, in several
places, hot springs, the waters of which raise the thermo-
meter to 118° of Fahrenheit. The water deposites, in the
channels along which it runs, an orange-coloured ochre of
iron ; but, after a course of 200 or 300 yards, ceases to dis-
colour the ground. It contains iron and sulphur, and
hence has a slightly chalybeate taste. Within three yards
of these hot springs there rises another, the water of which
is pure and ‘tasteless, but is not warmer than that of the
common springs of the country. Probably the springs
here, as at Brand Valley, issue from quartz rock. In the
vicinity of the springs, as I observe by inspection of speci-
mens from Dr. Smith, bog-iron ore occurs.

Warm springs also occur in the valley of the Western
Elephant River; others near the Eastern Elephant River,
in Kamnasi Land ; and a third behind Kokman’s ¢(Kog-
man’s) Kloof; but all are of lower temperature than those
of the Zwarteberg and Brand Valley. There is also a
warm spring on the northern side of the Gariep, 1 in Great _
Namagualand.

288 SOUTH AFRICAN SPRINGS.

Springs of mineral waters, of the common temperature,
have been noticed in various places; one near Gra
Reynet, and another not far from Uitenhage, and one 80
in the Tarka; but their chemical composition has not bee
accurately ascertained.

_ Remarks on the Importance of a Knowledge of the Natural
Mistory and Chemical Composition of Springs. —The springs ~
of the African continent have hitherto been almost entirely
neglected by travellers and naturalists, either through in-
difference or ignorance. Now, however, that scientific men
have settled in different parts of that quarter of the globe,
particularly in Southern Africa, accurate details may be ex-
pected in regard to their various kinds, whether temporary,
perennial, intermittent, periodical, spouting, sublacustrine,
subfluvian, or submarine ; their magnitude and colour; the
temperature of comimon springs, at different elevations
above the level of the sea, and during different seasons of
the year; and the range of temperature of warm and hot
springs. But in order to complete the history of the springs
of the country, we must, besides, describe not only the
rock or rocks from which they flow, but also ascertain the
various relations of these rocks to those of the neighbouring
mineral formations. Chemical investigations will afford
the necessary details as to the different mineral matters that
enter into their composition. The remarkable animal sub-
stance met with in some European springs, and probably
of more frequent occurrence than is believed, and which
may be derived from the strata containing animal fossil re-
mains, through which the spring waters percolate, ought
to be looked for, because its presence will afford to the
chemist an opportunity of examining a substance of a very
curious nature; to the geologist, data for interesting spe-
culation ; and to the physician, the means of judging of the
mode of action of those waters containing it, in scrofula
and other diseases in which its use is said to be so bene-
ficial. It may happen here, as in other countries, that the
springs deposite around their sources, and at greater or
less distances from them, much of the dissolved and sus-
pended foreign matter they contained, and thus give rise to
mineral formations, the external aspect and mode of ar-
rangement of which will illustrate geological phenomena
observed among the older rock-formations of which the crust

CONCLUSION. 289

of the earth is composed. Lastly, when it is known that
hot springs are intimately connected with subterranean
igneous agency,—that power which formerly acted so ex-
tensively in forming and modifying the rocks of which the
crust of the earth is composed, and which even now con-
tinues, although on a less extensive scale, to occasion con-
siderable changes on the surface of the earth,—their natural
and chemical history becomes very interesting from the
light they shed over many important geological phenomena.
Geology of Caffraria, Natal, gc.—The geology of the
countries of Caffraria and Natal is entirely unknown. In
Sofala there are said to be mines of silver; and gold is ccl-
lected from the sands and gravels of some districts. The
kingdom of Monomotapa, as it is called, at the distance
inland of about forty days’ journey from Sofala, affords gold,
topazes, and rubies. The geology of the country from De-
lagoa Bay, in lat. 26° S., to Cape Delgado, in lat. 10° S.,
is unknown; a small quantity of gold-dust is collected in
it. From Cape Delgado to the equator, the country which
is under the dominion of the imam of Mascat, is unknown
in a geological point of view. The country from the
equator to the Straits of Babelmandeb has never been
visited by any geolugist.

CONCLUSION.

From the preceding details it results,

1. That of all the quarters of the globe, Africa has the
most truly tropical climate. .

2. That notwithstanding its nearly insular form, its ex-
tent of coast is much less in proportion to its area than in
the other quarters of the globe.

3. That the peculiar condition of the human species, the
distribution and even the aspect of the lower animals and
plants, and many of the characters of the African climate,
are connected with its comparatively limited extent of sea-
coast, its extensive deserts, and arid soil.

4. That from the maritime situation of Sierra Leone and
its colonization by Britain, and the connexion of the southern
parts of the Great Table-land with the British settlements
on the southern coasts of Africa, we may conjecture thot the
civilization of the negroes (if that interesting race ve not

destined to extirpation, as ~_ been the fate of the abori+
: | b

990 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

gines of the New World,) will be effected from these two
quarters, through the energy, enterprise, and perseverance of
missionaries, well instructed in the various useful arts of life, —
and in the simple and pure principles of Christianity.

5. That its springs, lakes, rivers, bays, and arms of the
sea are fewer in number, and present more uniformity of
aspect than is generally the case in other parts of the
world. :

6. That it is eminently characterized by its vast central
and sandy deserts, its great southern table-land, and the
vast expanses of Karroo ground.

7. That of all the rock formations, those of limest »ne
and sandstone are the most frequent and most widely dis-
tributed: that natron, 2 rare deposite in other countries, is
comparatively abundant in Africa; thet salt is very widely
distributed, though in some districts it is wholly deficient ;
but coal is wanting. And the precious stones, so frequent
in other tropical regions, are here of rare occurrence.

8. That the metals, although met with in different quar-
ters, are nowhere abundant; and that, of all the-different
metals, gold is the most generally distributed.

9. That no active or extinct volcanoes have hitherto been
met with.

10. Lastly, that Africa is less frequently sefibuted by
earthquakes than the other continents.

CHAPTER XVIII.
Natural History of the Quadrupeds of Africa.*

A KNowLEDGE of the geographical distribution of animals,
and of the laws which regulate that distribution, has excited
a considerable degree of attention since the time of Buffon,
whose writings may fairly be regarded as the first to create
an interest in favour of this branch of natural history. The

* Ithink it proper to apprize the reader that in the three following
chapters, devoted to the Zoology of Africa, several well-known and in-
teresting species, such asthe Egyptian Ichneumon, the Fennec of Bruce,

= Ma =
WE

Group of African Animals—In front, in the centre, the Rhinoceros; to
the right, the Hippopotamus and Ourang-outang. In the centre back
ground, the Giraffe ;—to the left, Antelopes and Zebra.—[p. 290.}

ate

>i,

» 7

iO | eae LA, ilk” osinon! ortho ak tat. ak +6 hii
a) Mom tion OHA at unalirong eee Bits aye
4 Aon AT ONS dpb orttaw bngeonataiy mi a

eat’ x
Fev 5. a

QUADRUPEDS. ;, —

slight observance of the physical characters and other local
‘peculiarities of countries, which prevailed prior to that
period, rendered the precise induction of general views a
matter of extreme difficulty ; and, as navigators and naval
adventurers of every class were indifferent to the accuracy of

science, and ignorant of the valuable results which might .

spring from a more correct record of the localities of species,
our knowledge of these localities did not increase in the same
proportion as the species themselves. Even at the present
day our collections are frequently rendered of little avail for
the purposes of zoological geography, by the products of one
country being intermingled with those of another: thus, the
splendidly-feathered tribes of Rio Janeiro are frequently
combined with the scarcely less brilliant birds of New-Hol-
Jand and Van Diemen’s Land; while the student of Indian
entomology labours under a similar chance of error, in find-
ing the Asiatic insects arranged by the merchant along with
an additional supply from the Cape of Goed Hope. These

and other sources of confusion have long retarded our know-.

ledge of the geography of animals.

The habits and dispositions of animals result from their
structure, and that structure is invariably adapted to the
local circumstances under which they are naturally placed.
It must not, however, be supposed that the geographical
distribution of species can ever form a proper basis for their
zoological classification. Many natural families and genera
are so extensively distributed as to be almost equally cha-
racteristic of every quarter of the globe. ‘The wolf and the
reindeer are common both to Europe and America; and the
lion occurs in the forests of Asia as well as among the A fri-
can deserts. ‘These, however, are exceptions to the general
rule ; for it will be found, on examination, that every great
continent, or extensive tract of country, though possessed
of features which, to a certain degree, assimilate it to those
of other regions, is yet distinguished by many characters
entirely peculiar to itself, and which constitute its zoologi-
cal aspect. ‘Thus the kangaroo and the ornithorynchus are
characteristic of, because peculiar to, New-Holland; the

lamas and vicunhas are only found in South America; the >

the Sacred Ibis, &c, are intentionally omitted, as being characteristic of
certain portions of the African continent, the general history of which
des not fall within the scope of the present volume.—J. W

a

“eq

292 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

ostrich and the camelopard are proper to Africa; the lemurs

to Madagascar; the pongo, or gigantic orang-outang, to.
the great Asiatic islands; and the common toad to the

western countries of Europe. So also, in the order of quad-

rumanous, or four-handed animals, such as apes and mon-

keys, the division called Platyrrhim, distinguished by the

breadth of the partition which separates the nostrils, occurs

only in South America; while another great division, named

Catarrhint, of which the nostrils are contiguous, is found

only in the Old World. A naturalist would therefore ‘find
no difficulty in determining, merely from a glance at the
muzzle, whether a species of this order was native to the
ancient continent or the new.

Wherever the observant traveller turns his steps, he finds
in every country animals peculiar to itself; and many of
these, occipying the most remote and insulated spots, are
the most inadequately supplied with the means of locomo-
tion. The mode of their original dispersion, whether from

a single position, or from multiplied centres of creation, has ~

therefore been a theme which has not unfrequently exercised
the ingenuity of naturalists. The subject, however, seems
to be one which scarcely falls within the scope of human
intelligence ; although a most ample source of interesting
and legitimate speculation may be made to flow from an ac-
curate and extended record of facts illustrative of their pre-
sent distribution, the amount of genera and species, the re-
lation which that amount bears to the animal productions of
other countries, and similar numerical details.

In the present chapter, we propose to exhibit a brief
sketch of the natural history of the greater portion of the
African continent ; and, although our limits will not permit
us to draw an extended parallel between the zoology of that
country and the animal products of the other quarters of the
globe, we shall yet have occasion, at an after-period of our
series, to survey the characteristic features of all the other
great divisions of the earth,—and, in so doing, may afford
the means of an accurate comparison between these and the
subjects of our present inquiry. In the mean time, however,
we shall not abstain from an occasional reference to the
analogous species of other countries, whenever we shall be
thereby enabled to throw any additional light upon the his ~
tory of the African tribes. |

QUADRUPEDS. 293

Most nearly allied to the human race of all the species of
the brute creation, the black or African orang-outang (Simi
troglodytes of Linnezus) may be allowed to assume the fore-
most place in our enumeration. It is native to no other
country than Africa, although we are as yet unacquainted
with the extent of territory which it occupies in that conti-
nent. Angola, the banks of the river Congo, and all the
districts which border the Gulf of Guinea, are the localities
in which it has as yet most frequently occurred. Its history,
like that of its Asiatic congener, the red orang-outang (S7-
mia satyrus, Linn. )s is still involved in considerable obscu-
rity. Its habits, in the adult state, are extremely retired
and wary; and the young alone have fallen into the hands
of Europeans in modern times. Great exaggeration pre-
vails in the narratives of all the earlier travellers regarding
the sagacity of this singular animal. Its external figure and
general conformation no doubt greatly resemble those of the
human race, and hence its actions have to us much of the
semblance of human wisdom. But a remarkable circum-
stance in the mental constitution of this tribe of animals dis-
proves their fancied alliance to mankind,—the young are
fase obedient, and extremely docile,—but as they increase

m years their dispositions undergo a striking change, and
their truly brutal nature is evinced by an unusual degree of
untractable ferocity. In the wild state they are inferior both
to the dog and the elephant in sagacity, although their ana-
logous structure never fails to impress the beholder with a
belief that they resemble man in mental character as well as
in corporeal form. ‘Two species of African orang-outang
seem to have been described by the earlier writers. These
were probably the young and old of the same species seen
apart at different times, for later researches do not lead to
the belief of there being more than one. ~

“ The greatest of these two monsters,” says Battell, ig
called pongo in their language ; and the less is called engeco.
This pongo is exactly proportioned like a man; but he is
more like a giant in stature; for he is very tall, and hatha
man’s face, hollow-eyed, with long hair upon his brows.
His face and ears are without hair, and his hands also.
His body is full of hair, but. not very thick, and it is of a
dunnish colour. He differeth not from a man but in his
legs, for they have no calf. Z He goeth always upon his legs,

b2 |

—-+ farce’ oa

294 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

and carrieth his hands clasped on the nape of his neck when
he goeth upon the ground. They sleep in the trees, and build
shelters from the rain. They feed upon fruit that they find
in the woods, and upon nuts; for they eat no kind of flesh.
They cannot speak, and appear to have no more understand-
ing than a beast.. The people of the country, when they
travel in the woods, make fires where they sleep in the

night ; and in the morning, when they are gone, the pongos
will come and sit about the fire till it goeth out ; for they
have no understanding to lay the wood together, or any
means to light it. They go many together, and often kill
the negroes that travel in the woods. Many times they fall
upon the elephants which come to feed where they be, and
so beat them with their clubbed fists, and with pieces of
wood, that they will run roaring away from them. Those
pongos are seldom or never taken alive, because they are so
strong that ten men cannot hold one of them; but yet they
take many of their young ones with poisoned arrows. The
young pongo hangeth on his mother’s belly, with his hands
fast clasped about her; so that, when the country people kill
any of the females, they take the one which hangeth fast
upon its mother, and, being thus domesticated and trained
up from their infant state, become extremely familiar and
tame, and are found useful in many employments about the
house.”

Purchas informs us, on the authority of a personal con-
versation with Battell, that a pongo on one occasion carried
off a young negro, who lived for an entire season in the so-
ciety of these animals; that, on his return, the negro stated
they had never injured him, but, on the contrary, were
greatly delighted with his company; and that the females
especially showed a great predilection for him, and not only
brought him abundance of nuts and wild fruits, but carefully

and courageously defended him from the attacks of serpents

and beasts of prey.

With the exception of such information as has been
drawn from the observance of one or two young individuals
sent alive to Europe, our knowledge of this species has not
increased. We have become aware of the inaccuracy and
exaggeration of previous statements, but have not our-
selves succeeded in filling up the picture. It is indeed sin-
gular, that when the history of animals inhabiting New-

~

QUADRUPEDS, 295

Holland, or the most distant islands of the Ind-an Ocean,
are annually receiving so much new and correct illustration,
the most remarkable species of the brute creation, inhabit-
ing a comparatively neighbouring country, should have
remained for about 2000 years under the shade of an almost
fabulous name, and that the ‘‘ wild man of the woods”
should express all we yet really know of the African orang-
outang in the adult state.

Africa produces many other species of the monkey tribe.
The promontory most familiar to the Mediterranean voy-
ager, called Apes’ Mountain, not far from the opposing point
of-Gibraltar, is so called from the occurrence of these ani-
mals; and the rock of the last-named fortress is itself the

_ only strong-hold which they possess in Europe. They do

not, however, occur in desert countries, commonly so called ;
that is, the open sandy plains of Africa are altogether un-
fitted for the dwellings of these pigmy people. Apes of
all kinds are a sylvan race. ‘Their structure being such as
to render them unfit for the exercise of rapid movements,
either on all-fours or in an upright position, the inclined and
densely intermingled branches of trees are their favourite
places of resort. Their feet in climbing being equally use-
ful with their hands, great additional power and activity are
thus derived. Among the shady and otherwise unpeopled
arbours which skirt the banks of the yet mysterious rivers
of Africa, they dwell in single pairs or in congregated
troops, according to the instincts of each particular kind ;
and seated on the tops of ancient trees, or swinging from
pendant boughs, they play their fantastic tricks, secure alike
from the wily serpent during the day, and the panther
which prowls by night.

The pigmy of the ancients is a small Ethiopian species,
resembling the Barbary ape, but smaller in size, not much
exceeding the dimensions of a cat. Its tribes were for-
merly alleged at certain seasons to wage a bloody war with
cranes.

The callithrix, or green monkey (Simia Sabea), is not
unfrequently exhibited in menageries, where, however, its
beautiful colour usually fades into a dingy olive. It occurs
in various parts of Africa, both along the western and eastern
shores. The name of callithrix, which signifies beautifu!
hair, was employed by Homer to denote the more ornamental

men een == Sees pean eae

296 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

colouring of the coat of various animals. It was applied
by Greek authors, some centuries posterior to the time of
Homer, to certain monkeys, and is now used specifically to
distinguish the species in question. M. Adanson informs
us that the woods of Podor, along the river Niger, are filled
with green monkeys. He could discover them only by the
branches which they cast down from the tops of the trees ;
for they were otherwise so silent, as well as nimble, that he
could scarcely obtain a glimpse of them in their natural po-
sitions. After he had shot two or three, the rest became
alarmed, and endeavoured to shelter themselves behind the
trunks and larger branches. Some descended to the ground ;
but the greater number of those that remained unwounded,
sprung with great activity from the top of one tree to an-
other. ‘ During this operation,” says the traveller, “I
continued to shoot, and in the space of twenty fathoms I
killed twenty-three in less than an hour, and not one of
them uttered the smallest cry, though they frequently as-
sembled in troops, grinded their teeth, and assumed a
threatening aspect, asif tliey meant to attack me.’

The white-nosed monkey (Cercopithecus petaurista of
Desmarets) inhabits the coast of Guinea. When taken
young it is easily tamed, and is then exceedingly lively and
diverting. The adult animals in the wild state are cunning
and fierce, and avoid the vicinity of mankind. ‘

The amount of species in this order of animals is so
great, that, even confined as we are to those of a single
continent, a volume would scarcely suffice for the most su-
perficial sketch of their history, were we to include the
whole of the African species. We must therefore be very
brief in what remains to be told of one or two additional
kinds. Next to the magot or Barbary ape, one of the best
known in Europe is the mona or varied monkey. It is
native to the northern parts of Africa, and appears to have
been known to the Greeks under the name of kebos. This
species is of an affectionate nature in confinement, and is
more than usually susceptible of education. Some consider
him synonymous with the Abyssinian ape deseribed by
Ludolphe, which that author saw in great troops turning
‘over stones, with entomological zeal, in search of worms
‘and insects.

It was probably a species allied to that last mentioned in

QUADRUPEDS. way

its habits, of which an amusing though tragical account ig
given by Le Vaillant. In one of his excursions he killed a
female monkey which carried a young one on her back.
The young one coutinued to cling to her dead parent till
they reached their evening quarters, and the assistance of
a negro was ever then required to disengage it. No sooner,
however, did it feel itself alone than it darted towards a
wooden block, on which hung the peruke of Le Vaillant’s
father. To this it clung most pertinaciously by its fore-
paws; and such was the strength of this deceptive instinct,
that it remained in the same position for about three weeks,
all this time evidently mistaking the wig for its mother. It
was fed from time to time with goats’ milk, and at length
emancipated itself voluntarily, by quitting the fostering care
of the peruke. The confidence which it ere long assumed,
and the amusing familiarity of its manners, soon rendered
it the favourite of the family. The unsuspecting naturalist
had however introduced a wolf in sheep’s clothing into his
dwelling ; for one morning, on entering his chamber, the
door of which he had imprudently left open, he beheld his
young favourite making a hearty breakfast on a very noble
collection of insects. In the first transports of his anger
he resolved to strangle the monkey in his arms; but his
rage immediately gave place to pity, when he perceived that
the crime of its voracity had carried the punishment along
with it. In eating the beetles, it had swallowed several of
the pins on which they were transfixed. Its agony conse
quently sbecame great, and all his efforts were unable to
preserve its life.
Baboons are fully more characteristic of Africa, as a
eneric group, than any other of the quadrumanous order.
ith the exception of the dog-faced baboon (Cynocephalus
hamadryas), a native of the environs of Mocha, and other
eastern shores of the Red Sea, we are not acquainted with
any species of the genus which is not of African origin.
They are, without doubt, notwithstanding their approxima-
tion in some respects to the human form, the most disgust-
ing of the brute creation. Perhaps it is this very resem-
blance which excites our dislike. In spite of their occa-
sionally brilliant colouring, and the length and beauty of
their fur, there is an expression of moral deformity in their
aspect which is exceedingly revolting, and they seem pos

298 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

sessed of all the most odious and degrading propensities of
the most God-forsaken of the human race. No other spe-
cies exhibit so strong a concentration of the animal propen-
sities. They are the most sensual of the brute creation.

The strength of some baboons is enormous. By mus-
cular energy alone, and without the assistance of their
huge tusks, they will tear the strongest dog to pieces in a
few minutes. During one of Mr. Burchell’s hunting par-
ties, two of his dogs were seized by baboons (Cercopithecus
ursinus) ; one of them was killed on the spot by having his
jugular artery bit through, and the other was severely dis-
abled, and a part of his ribs laid bare. Fortunately, with
all their fierceness, their propensities are not carnivorous, —
otherwise the most dreaded of the feline race would prove
less formidable foes. In a state of nature they feed princi-
pally on roots and fruits, although the eggs and young of
birds probably also form a part of their sustenance.

As in the present summary we are guided rather by zoo-
gical than geographical principles, with a view chiefly to
avoid the repeated mention of the same animal, a necessity
from which we could scarcely escape were we to trace suc-
cessively the natural history of each African district, in-
stead of that of the species or genera themselves in system-
atic progression,—we shall proceed to the next group in
our scientific arrangements, that of the Lemurs.

This singular tribe of animals inhabits the great island
of Madagascar, and the not distant island of Anjouan, one
of the group of the Comora archipelago,—countries usually
regarded as belonging to the African division of our globe.
In common with apes and inonkeys, they are quadrumanous
animals,—that is, possessed of the power of prehension
both with their fore and hind feet. ‘They differ, however,
among other characters, in having a rather long and pointed
nail, instead of a flattened one, on the first finger of the
hind foot. |

The ring-tailed lemur (Z. catta, Linn.) is the most beau-
tiful of the genus. Its motions are characterized by a
great degree of elegant lightness: its manners are mild,
and its nature very harmless. Its size is equal to that of a
large cat, and its wool is extremely soft and fine. The tail
is about twice the length of the whole body, and is marked

QUADRUPEDS. 299

by numerous rings of alternate white and black. In the
wild state it is gregarious, travelling in sma’l troops of
thirty or forty. When taken young, it is easily tamed. It
delights in sunshine ; and im a state of domestication pre-
fers the fireside to most other places. Its general attitude
resembles that of a squirrel; and it feeds on fruits. In
captivity it becomes more omnivorous, and shows no distaste
to animal food. The voice of the ruffed Jemur is remark-
able for its extraordinary strength, which strikes with fear
and astonishment those who hear it for the first time. It
may be likened to that of the Beelzebub or howling monkey,
which fills the woods of Guiana with its dreadful cries.
The power of voice in both cases no doubt proceeds from a
peculiar structure of the larynx.

Allied to the lemurs, and till lately generically classed
with these animals, is the indri, which, according to Son-
nerat, the natives of Madagascar domesticate and train up
as we do the dog to the sports of the field. It is a large
animal, measuring about three feet and a half in length;
its prevailing colour is blackish, with the visage and lower
part of the abdomen gray, and the rump white. It is dis-
tinguished by having no tail. Its voice resembles the cry-
ing of an infant, and its manners, like those of its conge-
ners, are mild ond docile.

The last of the quadrumanous tribe peculiar to Africa,
which we shall take occasion to mention, are the galagos.
The Senegal galago is about the size of a common rat.
They dwell on trees like monkeys and squirrels, are mild
in their manners, and feed on insects, which they catch
in their fore paws, and devour with great avidity. The
great galago inhabits the eastern coast of Africa, and a spe-
cies occurs in the island of Madagascar.

We now approach the more carnivorous tribes; and,
passing over the genus Galeopithecus, the distribution of
which is confined to Asia and its islands, we enter upon
the Vespertiliones, or great family of the bats, now divided
into many genera. Of these the greater proportion belong
to South America and the East Indies; so that our notice
of the African species may be short, without being really
much curtailed. Several species occur along the western

shores; but the most remarkable is the great bat of Mada- _

gascar, described by Edwards, and regarded by some as

300 NATURAL HISFORY OF AFRICA.

synonymous with the vampyre. A vampyre is in many
respects an imaginary monster, whose chief amusement
consists in sucking the blood of sleeping persons. The
name is connected with a superstition absurd in itself,
though sufficiently fearful to such as believed m it, whict:
prevailed in Poland and Hungary about the year 1732.
According to this wild belief, certain individuals were sup-
posed to rise from the grave and suck their friends and re-
lations to death. Lord Byron has alluded to the fantasy
in the following well-known lines :—

‘“‘ But first, on earth as vampyre sent,

Thy corse shall from its tomb be rent:
Then ghastly haunt thy native place,
And suck the blood of all thy race;
There from thy daughter, sister, wife,
At midnight drain the stream of life ;
Yet loathe the banquet which perforce
Must feed thy livid living corse :
Thy victims ere they yet expire

. Shall know the demon for their sire,
AS cursing thee, thou cursing them,
Thy flowers are withered on the stem.
But one that for thy crime must fall,
The youngest, most beloved of all,
Shall bless thee with a father’s. name—
That word shall wrap thy heart in flame !—
Yet must thou end thy task, and mark
Her cheek’s last tinge, her eye’s last spark,
And the last glassy glance must view
Which freezes o’er its lifeless blue;
Then with unhallowed hand shalt tear
The tresses of her yellow hair,
Of which in life a lock when shorn,
Affection’s fondest pledge, was worn,
But now is borne away by thee,
Memorial of thine agony ‘
Wet with thine own best blood shall drip
Thy gnashing tooth and haggard lip;
Then stalking to thy sullen grave,
Go—and with Gouls and Afrits rave; -
Till these in horror shrink away _
From spectre more accursed than they ”

Some vague allegations of a somewhat similar nature
(excepting the resurrectionary faculty) having been ad-
duced against certain of the bat tribe, Linneus named one
of them Vespertilio vampyrus. The general colour of the
body is deep reddish brown, brighter on the neck and
shoulders. The teeth are large and sharp; the wings

*

QUADRUPEDS. 30}

black, and measuring several feet in extent, and the tail is
wanting. This apparently formidable animal was supposed
to perform its deadly operations by inserting its sharp-
pointed tongue into the vein of a sleeping person, and in so
delicate and peculiar a manner as to occasion no pain.
The sleep of the victim was not even disturbed, and the bat,
by the fanning motion of its wings, produced a delicious
coolness around, which rendered repose the deeper, till the
sufferer awoke in eternity. .

Whatever may be the case as regards the propensities
of some of the South American species, of whose blood-
sucking disposition Humboldt does not seem to doubt, it
appears to be the opinion of naturalists that the vampyre-
bat of Linnezus is a frugivorous animal, of perfectly inno-
cuous habits. According to Edwards, it is a native of
Madagascar.

Among the smaller insectivorous quadrupeds, several
kinds of shrew mice (Sorex) inhabit different quarters of
Africa. The Cape shrew (S. Capensis) dwells in caverns,
and occurs at the Cape of Good Hope.

The chrysoclore, or Cape mole, is remarkable for the
brilliant metallic colours which adorn its fur. Its size is
rather less than that of the common mole of Europe, and
there is a resemblance to that species in its general form.
The fore feet have only three claws, of which the exterior
is the largest: the hind feet are furnished with five weaker
claws. Its true country is the Cape of Good Hope, though
naturalists have been led into error regarding its locality by
a false indication in the Thesaurus of Seba, by whom Siberia
is assigned as its native region.

The tenrec (Setiger of Cuvier), an animal formerly
classed with the hedgehogs, inhabits the island of Mada-
gascar, and may be mentioned as the only known instance
of a hibernating species indigenous to a warm climate. It
burrows in the ground, and remains torpid for about three
months in the year. It usually lies concealed during the
day, and ventures abroad after sunset in search of fruits
and herbs. Its body is generally very fat, and is eaten by
the natives of Madagascar. There are several species of
‘the genus, all confined to that island, where, from their

_ grunting voices, they are “a ground-hogs. One of these
c

302 - NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

S. ecaudatus) 1s cefended by spinous projections, and is
snown to Europeans under the name of the pig-porcupine.
The ratel, or honey-eater (Mellivora Capensis), is pecu-
liar to the southern extremity of this continent. ‘The ge-
neral colour of the upper surface of the Wody is gray—of the
under, black,—an unusual contrast, as the inferior parts of
the fur of most animals are paler than those of the dorsal
region. Its fore claws are very long. It lives on honey,
and digs up the nests of wild bees from the deserted bur-
rows of different animals. It is said to watch the flight and
motions of a species of cuckoo (the Cuculus indicator) which
preys on bees. The Hottentots indeed follow the same
guide, and are also alleged to discover wild honey lodged
in trees, by observing the bark gnawed around the base by
the spiteful ratel, which cannot climb. ‘

We are not acquainted with any animal of the otter kind,
strictly so called, inhabiting Africa; although Europe, >
Asia, and America are well supplied with several sorts.
The nearest approach, among the African forms of animal
life, is presented by the Aonyx Delalandi, remarkable for its
feet being either without nails, or for the existence of these
appendages in a merely rudimentary state on one or two
toes of the hind feet. Itis named Lutra inunguis by some
naturalists, on account of that peculiarity. This animal
measures about three feet in length, exclusive of the tail,
which extends about ten inches; the fur is soft and thick,
of a chestnut-brown colour, paler on the flanks, with a mix
ture of gray about the head. It preys on fish and crustacea,
and inhabits the salt pools along the borders of the sea in
the vicinity of the Cape..

Canine animals are very generally distributed over the
surface of our globe. Under that appellation naturalists
include not only domestic dogs, and all their interminable
varieties, but wolves, foxes, and jackals. Wolves are cha-
racteristic of the temperate and northern parts of Europe
and America. Foxes have a somewhat similar distribution,
but are more extended in a southern direction; while
sme abound in most of the warmer regions of the Old

orld, but, unlike the other two, are unknown in America.
There are three species of jackall. The Asiatic species
(Canis aureus) characteristic of, but not peculiar to the
continent of Asia, is the most widely spread. It occurs ~

te

QUADRUPEDS. 303

over a great extent of country from India to Palestine, and
from Egypt and Barbary along the shores and through the
central deserts of Africa to the Cape of Good Hope. This
is the species commonly called the lion’s provider. It
hunts in packs; and the king of beasts, when roused from
his slumbers by the yells of these creatures in pursuit of
prey, probably follows the hue and cry, and ere long comes
in for his share of slaughtered deer or antelope. ‘Tho
Cape jackall, commonly so called (Canis mesomelanus), re-
sembles a fox, and is characterized by a triangular mark of
blackish gray upon the back, broader at the shoulders, and
finishing in a point at the origin of thetail. It inhabits the
Cape of Good Hope. Another species (C. anthus) is found
in Senegal.

Intermediate between the dogs and hyenas may be placed
a curious African animal, long known to the Cape colonists
by the name of wild dog. ‘In the morning,” says Mr.
Burchell, “ Philip returned with the oxen; but reported that,
in consequence of Abram Abram’s neglecting on the night
before to secure them as usual in the cattle-pound, the wilde
honden (wild dogs) had bitten off the tails of three. One
had only lost the brush, but the others were deprived of the
whole.” This species hunts in regular packs, both during
the night and day ; and itis so rapid in its movements that
none but the fleetest animals can ensure their safety.
Sheep fall an easy sacrifice, though the larger cattle are sel-
dom attacked, except stealthily from behind for the sake of
snapping off their tails. The want of a tail, in a warm
country swarming with flies, is a source of the most serious
annoyance to any quadruped ; and the visits of this hyena-
dog are therefore much dreaded and suitably guarded
against. The animal in question is of a more slender form
than either the striped or the spotted hyena. Its general
colour is a sandy bay or ochrey yellow, shaded with darker
hairs ; and the whole body is blotched and brindled with
black, with here and there a spot of white. Mr. Burchell’s
specimen, which he kept for thirteen months chained up in
a stable-yard, was extremely ferocious in its nature. It
became at length in some degree attached to a common dog,
with which it used to gambol; but even the keeper by
whom it was fed never ventured to touch it with his hand.

Africa is the country of hyenas. The spotted species

Se

i»? +”

304 = NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

(H. Capensis, Desm., Canis crocuta, Linn.) is peculiar to that
continent, and abounds in its southern extremity. The
striped species (H. vulgaris, Desm., C. hyena, Linn.) is
more characteristic of the northern districts. It is frequent
in Egypt, Abyssinia, and Nubia, and extends into Syria
and Persia. It is a ‘lisgusting and troublesome animal
wherever it occurs. It haunts the suburbs, and even pene-
trates into the streets of some eastern cities after sunset,
preying on offal and stealing the remains of dead carcasses,
which it prefers to living prey. One of them robbed Bruce
the traveller of some pounds of tallow candles, by entering
his tent under cloud of night.

The animals called civets are found both in Asia and
Africa.

.

We now enter upon the consideration of the feline tribes,
the most ferocious and bloodthirsty of the brute creation.
Though the tiger is unknown to Africa, the lion, the king
of beasts, here reigns with undisputed sway, and is not only
more numerous, but also more magnificent in his propor-
tions, than in any other country. Celebrated from the most
remote antiquity for his courage and magnanimity, this
truly majestic creature has long been held as symbolical of
boldness; and his countenance and general bearing cer-
tainly imbody our liveliest conceptions of warlike grandeur,
combined with a certain dignity of aspect not unbefitting
his assumption of regal sway. ‘The painter, the poet, the
sculptor, and the rhetorician have alike tried in vain to
depict the terrors of this grisly king.

The southern parts of Africa present a variety of the
lion, of which the mane is nearly black. ‘The Barbary lions
are brown, with a very thick mane covering the neck and
shoulders of the male. Those of Senegal are of a more
yellow hue, with thinner manes. It is unnecessary to enter
into any minute descriptive details of this familiarly-known
animal.

The ancients sculptured a lion without a mane, which
some modern writers regard as an extinct, others as a ficti-
tious species. It occurs on the hieroglyphical monuments
of Upper Egypt; and a curious confirmation of its exist-
ence has been received from Nubia, where, it is alleged, a
very large and maneless lion has been recently discovered.

*. 305

Although the life of the lion is limited by Buffon to about
twenty years, there is no doubt that it usually attains to a
much greater age. Pompey, who died in the year 1760,
had been confined in the Tower above seventy years, and
another was known to have died there at the age of sixty-
three. Sparrman and others have impugned the character
of this noble animal, and alleged that a greater degree of
timidity exists in his constitution than is compatible with
courage. It may, however, be given as a piece of safe
advice to the inexperienced emigrant, not to place too much
confidence in the cowardice of lions.

The geographical boundaries of the lion appear to have
been greatly circumscribed within these last two thousand
years. Even where it still exists in comparative abundance,
it is an animal of rare occurrence ; and, from many districts
where it once abounded, it has now entirely disappeared.
According to Herodotus, they were once sufficiently common
both in Thrace and Macedonia; and they are known to

QUADRUPEDS.

have formerly abounded in Asia, from the shores of Syria .

to the banks of the Ganges and the Oxus. By what means
the Romans contrived to assemble those vast troops which
they sometimes exhibited at their games, it would now be
difficult to determine; but we know that Sylla fought to-
gether one hundred males, and Pompey three hundred and
fifteen. ‘Those of Sylla were sent by Bocchus, king of
Mauritania; but at present a brace of lions would be
thoug:it a very princely gift from any of the Moorish king-
doms. Even in the time of Probus, about the middle of
the third century, one hundred male lions, and the like
number of females, were exhibited. We may however
presume that even prior to this period they were considered
as rather scarce, as the hunting of the lion was forbidden
to the vulgar, lest the supply required for the circus should
be diminished. This law was abrogated in the time of Ho-
norius; though their entire destruction in so many districts
was probably not achieved till after the introduction and
general use of firearms.

As the northern parts of Africa are known to have been
thickly peopled during the time in which lions so greatly
abounded there, we may hence infer that the co-existence
of the larger carnivorous animals along with the human
race, is not, as many aay ey’ have imagined, altogether

c 2

"%

the.

‘

306 ' NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.
¥

incompatible. They imagine themselves to have seen, in
the limited actual number of lions and tigers, a guarantee
of nature, as it has been called, for our preservation, and
that of animal life, throughout the world. But’the truth
is, as Azara and others have remarked, that these tremen-
dous creatures rarely attack the human race, except in cases
of great necessity, or in self-defence.

. Africa produces two other fine feline animals, the panther
and the leopard, on the history of which we shall not at
present enter. Although they are both well known, and
frequently exhibited in our menageries, considerable con-
fusion still exists regarding their natural history and loca-
lities in the works of zoological writers. Lynxes also occur
in Africa.

Passing over the seals and other amphibious quadrupeds,
of which we know of none characteristic of this continent,
we come to the order called Gl:res by naturalists, more fa-
miliarly named gnawers. Of these the first and most
beautiful tribe which presents itself is that of the squirrels.

Few of these inhabit the country now under discussion.
The forests of America are their familiar homes, and many
species also occur in India and the Asiatic islands. But
the African woods are likewise, though to a more limited
extent, enlivened by the gambols of these graceful creatures.

The palm-squirrel is somewhat larger than our British
species. It inhabits the warmer regions of Asia and Africa,
and dwells on palm-trees. The Madagascar squirrel is
found in the island of that name ; and the Gingi squirrel,
so called from its Indian locality, is also alleged to occur at
the Cape of Good Hope.

Of the marmot tribe, numerous in the north of Asia and
America, and represented in Europe by the Alpine species,
so famous for its long-continued winter sleep, Africa pro-
duces very few examples. The only one indeed with which
we are acquainted is the marmot gundi (Arctomys gundi of
Gmelin), a species resembling the European kind in its
form, but characterized by having only four toes to each
foot. The size is that of a rabbit ; its colour reddish ; its
ears very short, but broad in their openings ; and its locality
Mount Atlas. ere

}

QUADRUPEDS. “ 307

We may here notice the genus Bathyergus, eel to
the south of Africa. The sand mole (B. maritimus), as the
larger species is usually called, occurs in abundance along
the sandy shores of the Cape of Good Hope, where it fre-
quently renders the ground hollow by its excavations, and
consequently inconvenient, if not dangerous, to horsemen.
It feeds principally on bulous roots, such as those of ixize
and antholyze. This animal is of the size of a rabbit.
It runs awkwardly on the surface, but burrows and makes
its way under ground with great facility. The other spe-
cies is known by the name of Cape rat (B. Capensis). Its
habits are similar to those of the spectes just mentioned,
but it is considerably smaller. I[t is destructive to gardens
and ornamented pleasure grounds, by throwing 1 up the
earth, like our European mole, in the course of its subter-
ranean excavations. A third species has been lately
described under the name of Bathyergus Hottentolus, by
MM. Lesson and Garnot.

Another genus found in Africa, though not peculiar to
that continent, is the Dipus or gerboa. The Egyptian
gerboa inhabits the environs of Memphis and the Pyramids.
‘This species appears to have been known to the ancients
under the name of two-footed mouse. It is a beautiful
little animal, remarkable for its extended tail and the great
length of its hind legs. It is hunted with greyhounds by
the Arabs of the kingdom of Tripoli. The Prince of Tunis
presented Bruce with a trained greyhound, which afforded
him excellent sport in that way.

The Cape gerboa (D. Cafer), now referred by naturalists
to the genus Helamys, is the largest of the tribe. It mea-
sures one foot two inches from nose to tail, and the tail is
fifteen inches long. This species is remarkable for its
great strength and activity. It will spring from twenty to
thirty feet at a single bound, and inhabits the mountainous
countries to the north of the Cape of Good Hope. It is
called the springen haas, or jumping hare, by the Dutch
colonists.

Rats and mice, like many other domestic nuisances, are
now very generally distributed over the globe. Wherever
European nations have colonized, these small but adven-
turous creatures have accompanied the merchant or the

308 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

mariner; and from the forlorn settlements of the fur traders

of North America to the populous cities of the south of.
Asia, their furtive habits of destruction are the source of

equal annoyance. The common brown rat (Mus decuma-

nus) is a native of India, and only made its appearance

among the western nations of Europe from the beginning

to the middle of last century. The original country of its
predecessor, the black rat (M. rattus), if not unknown, is at

least doubtful. It is not mentioned by any ancient writer,

and appears to have been introduced into Europe during the —
middle ages. Within the last half century it has been

nearly extirpated from most of the great European cities

by its larger and more powerful rival.

Atrica produces several species of murine animals, not
hitherto recognised in any other region of the earth. A
beautiful small species, discovered and described by Sparr-
man, is native to the forest countries of the Slangen River,
eastward from the Cape of Good Hope. It appears, how-
ever, to be nearly allied to the genus arvicola, which includes
the water-rats. Li

The dormice (genus Myozrus) are also represented in
Africa by a species communicated by Pennant to Sir Joseph
Banks, and said to have been discovered among the moun
tains of Sneuwberg, above 800 miles beyond the Cape. Its
- size is that of a squirrel; but its shape is broader and more
flattened. Nothing is known of its habits or history, or
whether, as Martial supposed of another species of dor-
mouse, it not only hibernates but is fattened by repose,—

Tota mihi dormitur hiems ; et pinguior illo
Tempore sum quo me nu nisi somnus alit,

We have seen, even in the course of the slight view
which we have hitherto taken of the quadrupeds of Africa,
that some genera are enureiy restricted to that continent,
while others are distributed likewise over Europe and Asia. ~
The genus Hystriz, which contains the porcupines, as_for-
merly constituted was remarkable for its dispersion over all
the four quarters of the globe; but, as the American spe-
cies are classed by recent systematists in a separate genus,
the true porcupines may be said to be confined to the Old
World.

The common porcupine (Hysériz dorsata) inhabits two

. QUADRUPEDS. 309 ©

very distant points of Africa, Barbary and the Cape of
Good Hope. It is also found in India, Persia, Greece, Italy,
and Sicily. Mr. Brydone informs us, in his Tour, that it
is frequent in that island in the district of Baiae, and that
he killed several during a shooting party on the Monte Bar-
baro. He dined upon his game, but found it luscious and
soon palling upon the appetite. The singular aspect of
this animal seems to have attracted the attention of the
lovers of nature at a very early period, and many fabulous
properties were added to the true character of a creature in
itself sufficiently curious. It was said to possess the power
of darting its quills at pleasure with great force, and toa
considerable distance, against its enemies. There is no
doubt, that when agitated either by fear or anger, it bristles
up its quills, rattles them against each other as an Indian
warrior might his quiver full of arrows, and that in this
temporary agitation a quill may be occasionally thrown out,
and might even settle itself in the body of an adversary ;
but they are essentially fixed, though not immoveable organs,
and can no more be parted with in self-defence than the
spines of the hedgehog. Claudian, however, observes, that
the porcupine is himself at once the bow, the quiver, and
the arrow, which he employs against the hunters,—

Ecce, brevis propriis munitur bestia telis,
Externam nec querit opem, fert omnia secum,
Se pharetra, sese jaculo, sese utitur arcu!

The porcupine feeds chiefly on roots, fruits, and other
vegetable produce. It dwells in subterranean retreats, and
comes abroad more frequently during the night than the day.

We come now to the hares and rabbits, a genus widely
distributed from the shores of Hudson’s Bay to the Straits
of Magellan, and from Siberia to Bengal. The common
rabbit (Lepus cuniculus) is supposed to have been originally
introduced from Africa into Spain, and to have been ex-
tended from the latter country over the rest of Europe.

The Egyptian hare (Lepus Egyptius) occurs also at the
Cape of Good Hope. The ears and hind legs are propor-
tionally longer than those of the European species. The
anterior legs appear to have only four toes, owing to the
thumb or inner toe being very small. Its fur, though not

310 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRivA.

entirely similar, does not greatly differ from that of our
own species. Those from South Africa are of large size.

A small species (ZL. arenarius) about one-fourth less than
a rabbit, was lately discovered by M. Delalande, inhabiting
sandy districts in the country of the Hottentots.

The singular family of the armadilloes would require no
meition in our present sketch, were it not that the laborious
though inaccurate Seba has represented one of them under
the name of the African armadillo. Suffice it to say, that
no species of the genus is found elsewhere than in America.

An animal peculiar to Africa is the Cape ant-eater ( Orycte-
ropusCapensis). ‘The ant-eaters, properly so called (genus
Myrmecophaga), are peculiar to America; so that the spe-
cies now under consideration may be regarded merely as
their African representative. It is an animal of large dimen-
sions, measuring between three and four feet in length, ex-
ciusive of the tail, which is nearly two feet long. Its habits
are nocturnal ete subterraneous, and its food consists of
ants and termites, which it seizes with its long and gluti-
nous tongue, after having disarranged their dwellings with
its paws. It occurs in the neighbourhood of the Cape of
Good’ Hope.

The animal kingdom scarcely presents us with quadru-
peds of a more marked and peculiar aspect than the pan
golins or manis tribe. Instead of hair, they are covered
with a scaly armour, consisting of numerous leaf-like plates,
lying over each other after fhe manner of tiles; and their
slender cylindrical bodies and lengthened tails give them
so much the aspect of reptiles, that they are very generally
known under the name of scaly lizards. 'They are harm-
less animals, feeding like the ant-eaters on insects, particu-
larly ants, which they collect by thrusting their long tongues
into the dwellings of these industrious creatures. ‘They
inhabit both India and Africa. The species called, par ez-
cellence, the long-tailed (Manis tetradactyla, Linn.), inhabits
Senegal and the coast of Guinea.

We now arrive at the pachydermatous, or thick-skinned
animals, corresponding to the order Betiuz of Linneus.

QUADRUPEDS. Bil

In this division are included the elephant, the tapir, the
rhinoceros, the hyrax, or Cape marmot, the pecaris, the
babyroussa, the wild boar, the African boar, the hippopota.
mus, and the horse.

The most gigantic of all living terrestrial animals, the
elephant, combines superhuman strength with almost human
wisdom, in a manner otherwise unequalled among the brute
creation. Many instances are on record of its retentive
memory, its grateful and affectionate disposition, and its
general intelligence as a discriminating, if not reflecting
creature. From the earliest ages its stupendous size and
unexampled sagacity have formed a theme of wonder and
admiration to mankind. Elephants in the wild state are
gregarious and herbivorous. They are naturally averse to
the extremes of heat and cold; and, although inhabitants
of some of the most sultry regions of the earth, they shelter
themselves from the overpowering heat of the midday sun
in the comparative coolness of those umbrageous forests
which, both in Africa and Asia, are their chosen places of
abode.

Of the Asiatic elephants, the Ceylonese are the most

celebrated. Indeed, the torrid zone seems the most favour-

able for the production of the largest races. Along the
coast of Malabar, elephants occur as far north as the terri-
tories of Coorgah Rajah ; but these, according to Mr. Corse
(Scott), are inferior to the breed from Ceylon.

The African elephant is easily distinguished from the
Asiatic, by his rounder head, his convex forehead, his enor-
mous ears, and the lozenge-marked surface of his grinders.
His tusks are also longer, and those of his female are
equally great ; whereas the female of the Asiatic elephant
has very small tusks. He inhabits a wide extent of Africa,
from Senegal to the Cape, and abounds in the forests of the
interior. ‘The African elephant has not been rendered ser-
viceable to man, like that of Asia. This, however, arises
from no defect in the docility of the animal, but rather from
a difference in the social and political conditions of the hu-
man tribes of Africa, and their inferior civilization. The
ancient Carthaginians made use of elephants, which there
is no reason to suppose were otherwise than of African
origin, in like manner as the Asiatic variety was used by
Porus and the Indian kings. In modern times, the inven:

A

812 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

tion and extended use of firearms have rendered the war-
like services of these huge creatures of comparatively little
avail; but their great strength and sobriety of conduct ren-
der them highly efficient, indeed indispensable, in eastern
countries as beasts of burden, and as accessaries in the
sports of the field.

It is not yet clearly ascertained whether the elephants of
the eastern shores of Africa are the same as those of the
interior and western districts, or whether they do not exhibit
a closer approximation to the Asiatic species. We shall
conclude by observing that the size of the elephant has been
much exaggerated. Dr. Hill, for example, asserts, that,
when full grown, it is from seventeen to twenty feet high.
One-half of the latter height is probably nearer the truth;
even for an individual of more than ysual size, and twelve
feet may be stated as the extreme dimensions.

Second in size, though widely distant in sense, is the
rhinoceros, an animal of a sour and stubborn disposition,
and in every way less trustworthy than the elephant. Of
this genus there are several species, two of which (if R.
Burchellu is entitled to specific distinction) mhebit Africa.
The others are native to India, and the great islands of Java
and Sumatra. ‘The African species (R. Africanus) is armed
with a couple of horns ; its coat is not distinguished by vo-
luminous folds, and it wants the incisive teeth. The sense
of sight is said to be rather defective in the rhinoceros:
those of smell «nd hearing are acute.

Another animal, characteristic of, though not entirely
peculiar to Africa, is the hyrax or Cape marmot. This spe-
cies is supposed by some biblical annotators to be the cony
of the Scriptures. It inhabits the rocky territories of
many parts of Africa, and occurs, with little variation in
its external aspect, in Syria. With the exception of the
horns, it bears a strong resemblance to a rhinoceros in
miniature.

The Ethiopian hog (Phascocherus Africanus) is a fierce
and savage animal, allied to the wild boar in its habits, but
distinguished by a pair of large lobes or wattles placed be-
neath the eyes. The tusks of the upper jaw bend upwards
in a semicircular manner towards the forehead. When
attacked, it is apt to become furious, and, rushing on its

QUADRUPEDBS. 313

adversary with great force and swiftness, inflicts the most
desperate, and sometimes fatal wounds. It mhabits a wide
extent of country along the western side of Africa, from
Senegal to the Cape ; and it also occurs specifically the same
in Ethiopia. A new species of this genus has been re-
cently discovered in the north of Africa by M. Ruppell. It
is named Phascocherus barbatus. The ascertainment of
the latter animal is a proof, among many others which
might be adduced, of the impropriety of denominating a
species from the continent which it inhabits. Few species
are so isolated in the animal kingdom as to exist alone over
a great tract of country, without claiming kindred with any
other ; and we may fairly infer, @ priori, that when one of
a genus is discovered, a second or a third will ere long
make its appearance. When this happens, such specific
names as Africanus, Americanus, &c. cease to be of adis-
criminating or exclusive nature, and consequently lose their
value. ;

Next to the elephant and rhinoceros, perhaps the most
bulky land animal with which naturalists are acquainted,
is the hippopotamus or river-horse. It is peculiar to Africa,
and inhabits the fresh waters of that continent. It formerly
existed in Lower Egypt, but has long since disappeared
from that district. Mr. Bruce makes mention of hippopo-
tami as existing in the Lake Tzana, exceeding twenty feet
in length. It would be hard to limit the growth of this na-
turally gigantic species ; but the largest ever killed by Co-
lonel Gordon, an experienced hippopotamist, did not exceed
eleven feet eight inches. M. Desmoulins regards the spe-
cies of Senegal as differing from those of the more south-
ern parts of Africa. ‘These animals are chiefly valuable on
account of their ivory tusks, which, being harder than those
of elephants, and not so subject to turn yellow, are much
esteemed by dentists. ‘Their hides are formed into buck-
lers by several of the African tribes.

We now arrive at the genus Equus, or horse tribe, which
consists of six species, threeiof which are peculiar to Africa,
viz. the mountain-zebra (E. zebra, Linn., E. montanus,

Burchell), the zebra of the plains (EZ. zebra, Burchell), —

and the quagga, (E.quagga, Linn.) Neither the ass nor the
common horse are aboriginal inhabitants of this continent.

Dd

314 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

The aspect of the zebra is too familiarly known, to re-
quire description. It isone of the most fancifully adorned
of all known quadrupeds; but the beauty of its external ap-
pearance is its chief merit, as its disposition is wayward
and capricious in the extreme. With the exception of one
or two instances, in which persevering individuals have suc-
ceeded in subduing the stubbornness of its nature, it has
not been rendered subservient to the purposes of the hu-
man race. It is a mountain-animal, called daww by the
Hottentots, and is scarcely ever seen on the plains.

The zebra of the plains, although only recently charac-
terized as a distinct kind, is in fact a better known and more
abundant species than the other. It ischiefly distinguished by
the want of rings upon the legs. “I stopped,” says Mr. Bur-
chell, ‘to examine these zebras with my pocket telescope:
they were the most beautifully marked animals I had ever
seen; their clean sleek limbs. glittered in the sun, and the
brightness and regularity of their striped coat presented a
picture of extraordinary beauty, in which probably they are
not surpassed by any quadruped with which we are at pre-
sent acquainted. It is indeed equalled in this particular
by the dauw, whose stripes are more defined and regular,
but which do not offer to the eye so lively a colouring.”

The quagga is more nearly allied to the zebra of the
plains than to that of the mountains. It lives in troops in
the neighbourhood of the Cape, and, in common with the
zebra, is frequently found in company with ostriches. ‘The
wary disposition of these birds, and their great quickness

ef sight, are supposed to be serviceable to the congre-—

gated group in warning them of the approach of their ene-
mies. |

The next great tribe of animals which falls under our
consideration, is that of the ruminating class (order Pycora,
Linn.) ; and of that tribe the most important member, and
the :ovst influential on the destinies of Africa, is the camel,
or ‘‘sh_p of the desert,” as it is beautifully called in the figura-
tive la.guage of the Arabs. “Of all animals,” says Buffon,
“the cariel is the most ancient, the completest, and most
laborio:.¢ slave. He is the most ancient slave, because he
inhabits ‘nose climates where men were first polished. He
is the 1 #4 complete slave, because in the other species of

—

domestiv animals, as the horse, the dog, the ox, the sheep, ©

\

QUADRUPEDS. | 315

tue hog, &c. we stil! find individuals in a state of nature,
and which have not submitted to man. But the whole spe-
cies of the camel is enslaved; for none of them exist in
their primitive state of liberty and independence. Lastly,
he is the most laborious slave, because he has never been
nourished for pomp, like most horses, nor for amusement,
like most dogs, nor for the use of the table, like the ox, the
hog, and the sheep; because he has always been made a
beast of burden, whom men have never taken the trouble
of yoking in machines, but have regarded the body of the
animal as a living carriage, which they may load or over-
load, even during sleep ; for when pressed, the load is s6me-
times not taken off, but the animal lies down under it, with
his legs folded, and his body resting on his stomach.”

There are two species of camel. The Bactrian species,
or camel properly so called (Camelus Bactrianus), is cha-
racterized by a couple of humps,—one on the rump, and
another above the shoulders. It is an Asiatic animal, and
is said still to roam wild in the desert of Shamo, on the fron-
tiers of China. It is capable of being acclimated, without
much difficulty, in comparatively northern countries, and
was introduced into Tuscany by the Grand Duke Leopold,
where it still breeds in the maremmas of the Pisan territory
It has, however, neither spread over the country, nor be-
come at all extensively useful for the general purposes of
rural labour. ‘This is chiefly attributed to the improvident
calculations of the minister Salviati, who, on their first in-
troduction demanded about a thousand francs a-piece from
such as inclined to purchase these animals for the sake of
extending the breed. They are frequently seen in the
streets of Pisa, carrying firewood,-or other articles of do-
mestic consumption, from the present Grand Duke’s farms.
It is this. species which is employed in Thibet and 'Tur-
kistan.

The other species of camel (C. dromedarius) has only a
single hump on its back. It has spread from Arabia all over
the northern parts of Africa, and has long been essential to
the commerce of those dry and desert regions. It is also
found in Syria, Persia, &c., and was known under the
name of Arabian camel to the ancient writers. The tcrm
dromedary (from the Greek Jdpouds), originally applied to a
variety of this species, remarkable for its swiftness, as the

316 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

name imports, is now for the most part bestowed on the spe-
cies itself.

“To the wild Arab of the desert, the camel is all that his
necessities require. He feeds on the flesh, drinks the milk,
makes clothes and tentsof the hair; belts, sandals, saddles,
and buckets of the hide; he conveys himself and family on
his back, makes his pillow of his side, and his shelter of him
against the whirlwind of sand. Couched in acircle around
him, his camels form:a fence, and in battle an intrenchment
behind which his family and property are aabetinghette and
often successfully defended. All these advantages are a
necessary result of the constitutional faculties and struc-
ture of the camel when residing in the locality assigned
him by nature: under another atmosphere, his qualifica-
tions become less important, and his conformation less ap-
plicable. In Tartary and Southern Russia, where the Bac
trian species (longer of body and shorter of limb than the
Arabian) is harnessed to wheel-carriages, and even to the
plough, the elevation of his shoulders evidently produces a
waste of strength ; and, in a country where herbage and
water are proportionally abundant, his sobriety is not re-
quired. If the camel is transferred to rocky and moun-
tainous regions, his feet soon wear, and he ascends and de-
scends with great awkwardness. If he be brought into
temperate regions, the frequent mud, and above all, the
thawed snows, soften his feet, and ie is unable to work;
as is at least partially experienced in Central and Northern
Asia, notwithstanding that the Bactrian camel, again pro-
vided by nature for his particular locality, has soles of
greater hardness than the Arabian, and the dissolution of
the snow is excessively rapid when once begun. ediienihsevaior
Animal Kingdom, vol. iv. p. 40.

The ancient authors do not seem to take notice of the ca-"
mel as an inhabitant of Northern Africa. It is, however,
mentioned in Genesis (chap. xii. ver. 16) as among the
gifts bestowed by Pharaoh on Abram, and must therefore
have been well known on the banks of the Nile at a period
anterior to the oldest of the Greek or Roman writers. It has
indeed been remarked as a singular circumstance, that the
Romans, who carried on such frequent wars in Africa, should
not have thought of mentioning these animals, till Proco-.
pius noticed camel-riding Moors in arms against Solomon,

QUADRUPEDS. , 317

the lieutenant of Belisarius. Their uses in modern times
are so well known, and all books of African travel are so
frequent in tneir description of these docile beasts of burden
that we deem it unnecessary to dwell any longer on the
subject. ;

Very few animals of the deer kind, properly so called, are
found in Africa. The red deer, however (Cervas elaphrus),
one of the noblest of the tribe, and the most stately of all the
wild animals still indigenous to Britain, occurs in some of
its northern quarters. But to these it was not improbably
imported, at some unknown period, from Europe.

Before proceeding to the more abundant family of the
antelopes, of which Africa is the great emporium, we shall
mention, as a species entirely peculiar to-this continent, the
giraffe or camelopard, the tallest and, in every other respect,
one of the most singular of quadrupeds. Its appearance is
too familiar to our readers to require description. We shall
merely state that it is a timid and gentle animal, feeding
principally on the leaves of trees (especially those of the
genus Mimosa), and inhabiting the plains of Central and
Southern Africa. Its gait, or mode of progression, is de
scribed as extraordinary by Mr. Lichtenstein. ‘ We had
scarcely travelled an hour when the Hottentots called our
attention to some object on a hill not far off on the left
hand, which seemed to move. . The head of something ap-
peared almost immediately after, feeding on the other side
of the hill, and it was concluded that it must be that of a
very large animal. This was confirmed, when after going
scarcely a hundred steps farther, two tall swan-necked
giraffes stood almost directly before us. Our transports were
indescribable, particularly as the creatures themselves did
not perceive us, and therefore gave us full time to examine
them, and to prepare for an earnest and serious chase. The
one was smaller and of a paler colour than the other, which
Vischer immediately pronounced to be a colt, the child of
the larger. Our horses were saddled, and our guns loaded
in an instant, when the chase commenced. Since all the
wild animals of Africa run against the wind, so that we
were pretty well assured which way the course of these
objects of our ardent wishes would be directed, Vischer, as
the most experienced hunter, separated himself from us, and

Dd2

318 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA,

by a circuit took the animals in front, that he might stop
-heir way, while I was to attack them in the rear. I had
almost got within shot of them when they perceived me,
and began to fly in the direction we expected. But their
flight was so beyond all idea extraordinary, that, between
laughter, astonishment, and delight, I almost forgot my de-
signs upon the harmless creatures’ lives. From the extra-
vagant disproportion between the height of the fore to that
of the hinder parts, and of the height to the length of the
animal, great obstacles are presented to its moving with any
degree of swiftness. When Le Vaillant asserts that he has
seen the giraffe trot, he spares me any farther trouble in
proving that this animal never presented itself alive before
him.* How in the world should an animal, so dispropor-
tioned in height before and behind, trot? The giraffe can
only gallop, as I can affirm from my own experience, having
seen between forty and fifty at different times, both in their
slow and hasty movement, for they only stop when they are
feeding quietly. But this gallop is so heavy and unwieldy,
and seems performed with so much labour, that in a distance
of more than a hundred paces, comparing the ground cleared
with the size of the animal and of the surrounding objects,
it might almost be said that a man goes faster on foot.
The heaviness of the movement is only compensated by the
length of the steps, each one of which clears, on a moderate
computation, from twelve to sixteen feet.” A tolerably
good horse overtakes the giraffe without difficulty, especially
over rising ground. |

Camelopards were known to the Romans, and were ex-
hibited in the Circean Games by Cesar the dictator. The
Emperor Gordian afterward exhibited ten at a single show ,
and tolerably accurate figures of this animal, both in a
browsing and grazing attitude, have been handed down by
the Prenestine pavement. During the darker ages, and for
some centuries after the revival of learning, it seems to
have remained unknown to Europeans; but, about the mid-
dle of the sixteenth century, the emperor of Germany, Fre-

* Jt would be more proper, and equally logical, rather to infer that
Le Vaillant misapplied the term which he made use of to designate the
movements of the camelopard, than that he imagined himself to have
an animal alive which had never presented itself to him in that con
tion. —Ep.

- QUADRUPEDS. 319

dericus Ainobarbus, received one from the sultan of Bapy-
lon. Lorenzo de Medicis was also presented with a live
camelopard by the bey of Tunis; and in our own times
they have been received by the kings both of France and
England from the (late) dey of Algiers.

Africa is the country of antelopes. These creatures are
the most lively, graceful, and beautifully proportioned of
the brute creation. Wherever known, they have attracted
the attention and admiration of mankind from the earliest
ages; and the beauty of their dark and lustrous eyes affords
a frequent theme to the poetical imaginings of the eastern
poets. Their names are of frequent occurrence in the most
ancient of the eastern mythologies, and their figures occur
among the oldest of the astronomical symbols. Naturalists
are more or less acquainted with about fifty species, the
greater proportion of which are peculiar to the African con-
tinent.

The blue antelope (Antilope leucophea), formerly met with
in the Cape colony, is now so rare in South Africa, that no
specimen has been killed there since the year 1799. ~ Its his-
tory and manners are little known. The roan antelope (A.
equina) isa very large animal, measuring nearly eight feet in
length. It was found by Mr. Burchell among the moun-
tainous plains in the vicinity of Lattakoo. The Caffrarian
oryx (A. oryz) is an animal equally remarkable for the
vigour as the beauty of its form. It inhabits elevated forests
and the rocky regions of Southern Africa, and is exceed-
ingly fierce during the rutting season, especially when
wounded. A friend of Major Smith’s having fired at one
of these antelopes, it immediately turned upon his dogs, and
transfixed one of them upon the spot. They afford the best
venison of any of the species found in the south of Africa.
The small white buffalo mentioned by Captain Lyon as oc-
curring in the Great Desert south of Tunis, was no doubt a
species of oryx. Another animal of very showy aspect be-
longing to this tribe is the addaz, recently transmitted from
Nubia by M. Rippell. They reside in pairs on the barren
deserts, and, extending over the whole Sahara, are found as
' far west as Senegal. The white-faced antelope (A. py-
gorge) is inferior in size to the stag of Europe. According to

ajor Smith, this species does not seem to be known in

QP re IO

cei SE pala me a

t

320 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

Central Africa. It is found in the regions which border the -

colony of the Cape, and is called blessbock by the Dutch.
In manners it resembles the gnu, and lives in small families
of seven or eight. | ie
The springer antelope (A. ewchon) is named springbock
by the Dutch. It inhabits the plains of Southern and Cen-
tral Africa, and assembles in vast flocks during its migra-
tory movements. ‘ These migrations, which are said to
take place in their most numerous form only at the intervals
of several years, appear to come from the north-east, and in
masses of many thousands, devouring, like locusts, every
green herb. ‘The lion has been seen to migrate, and walk
in the midst of the compressed phalanx, with only as*much
space between him and his victims as the fears of those im-
mediately around could procure by pressing outwards. ‘The
foremost of these vast columns are fat, and the rear exceed-
ingly lean, while the direction continues one way; but
with the change of the monsoon, when they return towards
the north, the rear become the leaders, fattening in their
turn, and leaving the others to starve, and to be devoured
by the numerous enemies who follow their march. At all
times when impelled by fear, either of the hunter or the
beast of prey darting among the flock, but principally when
the herds aré assembled in countless multitudes, so that an
alarm cannot spread rapidly and open the means of flight,
they are pressed against each other, and their anxiety to es-
cape impels them to bound up in the air, showing, at the
same time, the white spot on the croup dilated by the effort,
and closing again in their descent, and producing that beauti-
ful effect from which they have obtained the name of
Springer and Showy-bock.”—Grifith’s Animal Kingdom,
vol. iv. p. 209. | | .
The kevel (A. kevella) ia nearly allied to the dorcas, but
does not appear to occur to the north of the Atlas, with the
exception, perhaps, of the western coast of Morocco. In
Central Africa, across the banks of the Congo, and south-
wards as far as the country of tlie Caffres, it forms nu-
merous flocks. The pallah (A. melampus) is a beautiful
species, mentioned by Lichtenstem. It is described as a
model of elegance and vigour, and is a native of Caffraria,
especially the Boshuana country. It never appears to the
south of the Koorges Vallev |The klipspringer (A. orem

QUADRUPEDS. 32]

tragus) was formerly very abundant near the Cape, but is
now rare, except in the interior of the country. They
dwell among rocky precipices, and spring from cliff to cliff
with surprising strength and agility. The steenbock
(A. rupestris) likewise dwells.among the rocks. It is found
near Algoa Bay, but is now rare in the Cape colony. The
vlackti steenbock (A. rufescens) is among the most beautiful
of the smaller antelopes of Africa. The name of vlacktz is
bestowed upon it, in consequence of its inhabiting the plains
or open country. The bush-antelope (A. silviculériz) is
found at Sierra Leone, where it is called the bush-goat. It
usually quits its cover in search of food about sunrise.
The four-tufted antelope (A. qguadriscopa) is a native of
Senegal. The duicker bock (A. mergens) is a timid species,
fearful »f thunder and other unaccustomed sounds. It in-
habits bushes, and rises every now and then upon its hind
legs for the sake of surveying its vicinity. It then stoops
down and darts under cover, from which custom it has no
doubt obtained the name of duicker, or the stooper. The
guevei (A. pygmea) consists of two well-marked varieties,
if two distinct species have not been confounded under a
single name. At present we shall allude only to the
smaller, which is remarkable for its diminutive size. A
female in Bullock’s Museum scarcely exceeded the general
dimensions of a Norway rat, and the legs were no thicker
than a goose’s quill. The gueveis are brought from the
coast of Guinea, and are sometimes observed to occur in
the vicinity of the Cape of Good Hope.

One of the largest of the African antelopes is the bubale
(A. bubalis of Pallas), equal in size to a stag. It congre-
gates in troops, among which frequent and sometimes fatal
combats take place. This species was well known to the
ancients, and is represented among the hieroglyphical
figures of the temples of Upper Egypt. It inhabits Barbary
and the Great Desert of Northern Africa.

We may here mention the gnu, as an animal classed by
Sparrman and others among the antelopes. It assembles
in large herds among the southern, and probably the central
deserts of Africa. It is not now found nearer the Cape
than the great Karroo district. Of this animal there ap-
pears to be more species than one.

iF s
322 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

The next group which demands our notice is the bovine
tribe, including all the larger kinds of horned cattle. Of
these, the only\species peculiar to Africa is the Bos caffer,
or Cape buffalo, the qu’araho of the Hottentots, a fierce and

vindictive animal of great strength. This species is cha-

racterized by the dark rufous colour of its horns, which
spread horizontally over the summit of the head, with their
beams bent down laterally, and the points turned up.
They are from eight to ten inches broad at the base, and
divided only by a slight groove, extremely ponderous, cellu-
lar near the root, and five feet long, measured from tip to
tip along the curves. The hide is black and almost naked,
especially in old animals. This buffalo lives in herds, or
small families, in the brushwood and open forests of Gaf-
fraria. According to Sparrman, he is not content with
simply killing the person whom he attacks, but he stands
over him for some time in order to trample him with his
hoofs and heels, at the same time crushing him with his
knees, and tearing to pieces and mangling his whole body,
and finally stripping off the skin with his tongue. The
surest way to escape is, if possible, to ride up a hill, as the
great bulk of the buffalo’s body, like that of the elephant, is
a weight sufficient to prevent his vying with the slender
and fine-limbed horse in swiftness. It is said, however,
that in going down hill, this formidable animal gets on
much faster than the horse. |

The goat and sheep tribe, so valuable, especially the lat-
ter, to the human race, present respectively a species pecu-
iar to the continent of Africa. The Egyptian goat, by
some however regarded as nothing more than a variety of
the domestic breed, is distinguished by the great convexity
of its facial line, and a depression between the face and the
forehead. The lower jaw projects beyond the upper; the
ears are long and flat, and the horns are either very small,
and arched slightly backwards, or are entirely wanting.
The female scarcely differs from the male in external ap-
pearance, with the exception of the straighter outline of
the face. It inhabits Upper Egypt. The other animal
above alluded to is called the bearded sheep (Ovis tragela
phus). It inhabits the desert steeps of Barbary and the
mountainous portions of Egypt.

BIRDS. 323

We have now enumerated, with occasionzt brief descrip-
tions and interspersed notices of their history and habits,
the greater proportion of the more remaykable quadrupeds
of Africa. To extend the list would have been both easy
and agreeable ; but we trust that the preceding sketch will
suffice to exhibit the prevailing and peculiar features of
this branch of African zoology, even though our confined
limits should have excluded many minor details, not in
themselves devoid of interest, though unessential to our
present undertaking. The great preponderance of the
antelope tribe, the existence of the giraffe and the hippopo-
tamus, andthe numerous troops of equine animals, such as
the zebra and the quagga, may be stated as forming the
principal zoological characters of this extensive continent.

CHAPTER XIX.
Nature! Mistori y of the Birds of Africa.

We shall next take a rapid survey of some other depart-
ments of the natural history of Africa; and continuing, as
we have commenced, with a certain degree of systematic
arrangement, the second great class which attracts the
attention of the traveller is that of birds.

The arid and wide-spread plains which compose so large
a portion of this continent, are unfavourable to the existence
and multiplication of the feathered race. Yet the more
umbrageous banks of rivers, the extensive forests which
here and there prevail to check the drifting of the desert-
sand, and those green and grateful oases ‘which towards
evening cast their far shadows across a waterless land,
harbour in their cool recesses many a gorgeous form of fea-
thered life. Nor can we suppose that the mountain-summits,
and those Sierras which occasionally interrupt the horizontal
view of the bleached wilderness, are uninhabited by birds of
prey, eagle-eyed and swift of wing, there perched securely
amid their rocky fortresses, but ever ready to descend with
eager cry, when the blast of the simoom overwhelms the

|
|
1
:

Sat “-
ee

B24 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

ae

exhausted caravan, or the weary camel “ship of the
desert” is seen to stoop its mast-like neck, and the glassy
hue of death suffuses its gentle eye, not from the turbulence,

_but the want of waves. And if, as has been supposed,
some of the great African rivers empty their translucent

:

streams into an interior and sea-like lake, many an un-
known but beautiful aquatic bird must haunt its mysterious
and long-sought-for shores, and revel in the crystal depths
of those delusive waters which have already led on to death
so many of our brave and devoted countrymen. ‘To these,
however, so long as heroic enterprise is valued, they will
likewise prove the waters of immortality, though, to their
surviving and deploring friends, bitter as the fountain of
Marah.* | i , |

If the multiplicity of species, even in the class of quad-
rupeds, be found an insuperable obstacle to a detailed ac-
count in such a publication as the present, far more must
we curtail our remarks when treating of the feathered race,
the number of which, not unfamiliar to the ornithologist,
does probably not fall far short of 6000 species. Let us
commence with the carnivorous tribes. .

Several species of vulture occur in Africa, where, as in
other countries, they follow troops of armed men,

“ Sagacious of their quarry from afar,”

in the hope of ere long preying on their slaughtered bodies.
It is, however, by the sense of sight, and not by that of
smell, that these birds so quickly discover and assemble
round their victims on the battle-field.

The eared vulture ((’oricou of Le Vaillant) is a gregarious
species which inhabits the southern parts of Africa. Their
nests are placed very near each other, and the birds are seen ~
sitting in vast numbers about the caverns of the rocky moun-
tains where they breed. ; |

A doubtful species called the armed vulture, is mentioned

* The writer of these notices dwelt at one time, during his boyhood,
for many months in the family, and constant companionship of the late
Jamented Major Laing, and was in habits either of personal intimacy or

‘correspondence with the unfortunate Bowdich, Oudney, Capea

the younger Park, who so lately perished following his father’s footsteps

-

BIRDS. 325

by Browne in his African Travels, and is said to be ex-
tremely frequent in the country of Darfur, where it flies
about in thousands.

The African snake-eater (Falco serpentarius, Linn.) is
usually placed between the vultures and hawks. It is a long-
legged species, of peculiar aspect, resembling in some re-
spects rather a wader than a bird of prey. It inhabits dry
open plains in the lower parts of Southern Afriea, and feeds
on reptiles. Le Vaillant found in the craw of a single bird
twenty-one young tortoises, three snakes, and eleven lizards,
and, besides these, there was a large ball in the stomach
formed entirely of the scales of tortoises, the vertebre of
snakes and lizards, the legs of locusts, and the wing-cases
of coleopterous insects.

Of more noble habits are the eagles, hawks, and other
birds of prey, which, for the most part, disdaining the cor-
rupting carcasses, whether of man or beast, overcome by
speed of wing, and pounce with their talons on all such
living creatures as they are able to subdue.

Among the eagles of Aftica may be mentioned the grif-
fard eagle (Falco armiger), native to the country of the Na-
maquas, and the imperial eagle (F. zmperialis of ‘Temm.)
described by Savigny i in the splendid French work on Egypt.
This latter species also inhabits the mountains of the south-
ern parts of Europe.

Of the numerous hawks, or smaller species of the falcon
tribe which inhabit this continent, we shall mention in the
first place, the chanting falcon (F. MUSICUS; Daudin). We
must not suppose, from the name of this species, that its
notes in any way resemble the harmonious tones of the
nightingale, or those of even our less celebrated songsters.
Its voice is merely a little clearer than usual, although it
seems impréssed with a high idea of its own powers. It
will sit for half a day perched upon the summit of a tall
tree, uttering incessant cries, which the darkness of the
night is sometimes insufficient to terminate. It builds in
woods in the interior of Caffraria, and commits great havoc
among quails and partridges. The crested African falvon
(F. galericulatus) resembles the peregrine falcon of Europe.
It dwells by the seashore and the borders of lakes, and feeds
on fish, crabs, and the testaceous tribes. The ranivorus, or
frog-rating falcon (F. ranivorus) is a native of the Cape of

Ee

326 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

Good Hope. It appears to be allied to the moor-buzzards
in its manners. It builds its nest among rushes, with the
stalks of the leaves of water-plants, and feeds chiefly on
frogs and young waterfowl. |

&
The next family of carnivorous birds are the nocturnal
tribes called owls, which may be said to bear the same re-

lation to the more active and elegant hawks that moths do
. to butterflies. Africa is by no means rich in owls, at least

very few have attracted the notice of travellers in that
country. We shall here mention only the very beautiful
falconian owl of Latham (Strzx Africana), which appears

- during the short-lived twilight, and moves with rapid flight.

We may place, as intermediate between the regular birds
of prey and the passerine species, those called butcher-birds,
of which Africa produces a great variety of kinds. The
habits of the collared shrike (Lanius collaris) are described
by Le Vaillant. When it sees a locust, a mantis, or a small
bird, it springs upon it and immediately carries it off, in or-
der to impale it on a thorn, which it does with great dexte-
rity, always passing the thorn through the head of its vic-
tim. Every animal which it seizes is subjected to the same
fate ; and it thus continues all day long its murderous ca-
reer, apparently instigated rather by the love of mischief
than the desire of food. Its throne of tyranny is usually
a dry and elevated branch of a tree, from which it pounces
on all intruders, driying off the stronger and more trouble-
some, and impaling the inexperienced alive. When hun-
gry, it visits its shambles, and helps itself to a savoury
meal. The Hottentots assured Le Vaillant that it does not
love fresh food, and therefore leaves its prey on the gib-
bet till it becomes putrescent. But beneath the scorching
sun of Africa this process of decomposition sometimes does
not take place, from the rapid exhalation of the animal
fluids in a warm and arid atmosphere ; and, consequently,
whatever spiny shrub may have been chosen by the butcher-
bird as the place of execution, is frequently found covered
not with sweet-smelling and many-coloured blossoms, but
with the dried carcasses of singing-birds, and the bodies of
locusts and other insects of the larger size. This unamia-

blecand irascible bird is figured and described in the fourth. _ } |

BIRDS. | 327

part (plate 52) of the valuable “Illustrations of Ornitho-
logy,” so well conducted by Sir William Jardine, Bart., and
Mr. Selby. Several species of shrike likewise occur in the
island of Madagascar.

With species pertaining to the beautiful and melodious
family of the thrushes, Africais by no means abundantly sup-
plied. The Cape thrush (genus Brachypus, Swainson) is
found, as its name imports, in Southern Africa, and another
species (7. Phenicopterus, 'Temm.) occurs in Senegal. Its
plumage is ofa fine bronzed black, glossed with blue and violet
the wings and tail are dull black, with all the feathers edged witk
metallic green ; the wing-coverts are bright red ; the beak and
legs are black. If, however, we were to regard the genus
as formerly constituted, we should here name some of the
most splendid of the feathered race ; forexample, the shin-
ing thrush, and that other species called the blue and green
daw by Edwards, both of which probably belong to the
genus Lamprotornis, the greater proportion of which seems
peculiar to Africa. The rose-coloured ouzel, one of the
rarest and most beautiful of British birds, is also found in
Africa, where its love of locusts is more amply gratified
than we hope it will ever be in this cold and cloudy clime.

Passing over the extensive family of the sylviade, which
includes the finest song-birds of temperate countries, we
shall here present the remark that the feathered tribes
of tropical and other sultry regions are in general more
distinguished for their gorgeous plumage than the harmony
or varied intonation of their voices. Itis chiefly among the
obscure and monotonously-plumed species that we find the
most accomplished warblers, such as the sombre nightin-
gale, which in the leafy arbours of France and England
makes such rich amends for his unadorned and quaker-like
attire :

“The wakeful bird

Sings darkling, and, in shadiest covert hid,
Tunes her* nocturnal notes.”

Among the Fringillid@ we may notice the buntings, of
which the Whidah-bird, or long-tailed bunting (genus Vidua,

* We are not awarethat the female nightingale sings,—but the words
of Milton are sacred.

#4
it

.
|
|
)

328 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

Cuvier), is remarkable for the changes which the male bird
assumes at certain seasons of the year, and which, from the
dropping away of the lengthened feathers of the tail, and
the alteration in the colours of various parts of the plumage,
produce a total difference in the appearance of that sex,
Angola is its native country, ‘There is anearly-allied spe-
cies from the Cape of Good Hope.

The Greeks applied the name Kodows to a small species
of crow, probably the jackdaw. The same term has been
used in later times to designate a genus of birds found in
Africa, though not peculiar to that continent;,—the genus
Colius, These birds, though the structure of their feet
offers no analogous formation, climb trees like parakeets,
dwell in large troops, build together numerous nests on the
same bushes, and are sometimes found sleeping together in
masses, suspended by the feet, with their heads downwards
They live on fruits, and occur both at the Cape of Good
Hope and in Senegal.

Of the genus Buphaga, peculiar to Africa, there are only
two species, called the African and the red-billed beefs
eaters. The former is a singular bird, both in its aspect
and manners. It is frequent in Senegal, and its food con-
sists of the larve of cstri or gadflies, which it picks from
beneath the skin of the larger cattle. Le Vaillant also ob-
served it in the country of the Namaquas, and he states
that it is usually seen in flocks of six or eight together.

Several species of roller inhabit the African continent.
The European roller, commonly so called (Coracias gar-
rula), is in fact an African species, although it sometimes
beautifies the woods of more northern countries with its
azure hues. Other species are found in the Angolese and
Abyssinian territories.

Of the goat-sucker tribe, generically distributed over
almost every country of the world, Africa also possesses a
few species, of which one of great beauty was lately dis-
covered by Riippell, the Frankfort traveller, in Nubia and
Sennaar. It is the Caprimulgus eximius of M. Temminck,

The last-named genus conducts naturally to the swallow
tribe, of which Africa, if not the native country, is at least
supposed to share with us the society for one-half the year.
Besides its migratory species, it possesses several of a less
restless character, which dwell there throughout the entire

BIRDS. 329

season, and remain for ever in ignorance of those cool and
refreshing waters into which our own delightful visitants
are so often seen to dip their slender wings.

The hoopoes resemble the swallows in their migratory
movements, but they are classed with the Tenwirostres, on

account of their slender bills. The common hoopoe, though |

an African bird, has been several times shot in Britain ;
and the marcheur largup of Le Vaillant appears to belong
to the same genus, and inhabits the country of the Caffres.

Nearly united to the last-named species are the prome-
rops, a limited but magnificent group, different species of
which are found in Africa, India, and New-Guinea. ‘The
most remarkable of the African kinds is the red-billed
promerops (P. erythrorhynchus), probab:y first described by
Dr. Tatham, from a specimen in the collection of the
Dutchess of Portland. [ts length, including the tail, is 15
inches. The general colour is black. olossed with red,
violet, and golden-green; the red predominates on the
head, the golden-green on the wing-coverts, and the violet
on the back and tail. All the tail-feathers, except the two
in the centre, are marked near the tip by an oval white spot
on each side the web; and several of the quill feathers of
the wings have also a white spot on their inner webs, near
thetip. The bill is long, slender, moderately curved, and
of a red or orange colour. The legs are also red.

Although Africa cannot boast of possessing any of those
jewels of urnithology, the fairy humming-birds, which dart
like sunbeams among the ere parterres of the western
world,—

“ And on their restless fronts
Bear stars, illuinination of all gems ;”

yet the eye of the naturalist who has studied the unsur-
passed splendour of the soui-mangas, or sugar-eaters, will
scarcely desiderate any other beauty. These birds, b-long-
ing to the genus C1 ynniris of Baron Cuvier, were formerly
classed with the creepers. They are distinguished bv their
long and slender bills, the mandibles of which are ‘finely
toothed or serrated on their edges ; and their tongues, which
are capable of considerable extension, are terminatec by a
small fork. Several of the species occur in the Indian

archipelago, but the sage proportion are of African

330 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA

origizi, and may be said to form the most signal and ade
mired feature in the ornithology of that country.

The superb creeper is an elegant bird, described and
figured in the magnificent work of M. Vieillot. Its length
is six inches: the crown of the head, upper part of the
neck, smaller wing-coverts, back, and rump, are bright
greenish-gold ; the throat is violet-blue, glossed with gold ;
across the upper part of the breast runs a bar of bright
gilded-yellow, beneath which the whole upper parts are
deep-brownish crimson; the wings and tail are blackish-
brown; the legs are also brown, and the bill is black.
This species was discovered in Malimba, by M. Perrien,
and is one of the rarest as well as most beautiful of the
genus.

_ Another highly-adorned species, such as

‘“‘Limners love to paint, and ladies to look upon,”

is called, par excellence, the African creeper. It is a native
of the Cape of Good Hope, and is found in woody situa-
tions. In addition to a splendid plumage, it is highly ad-
mired for its musical powers, and its song is by some
esteemed equal to that of the nightingale.

The spotted-breasted ereeper (C. maculata) dwells in the
forests of Malimba, and frequently approaches the habita-
tions of the natives, allured by the flowers of the cytisus
cajan, commonly called the Congo pea, which, according to
Dr. Shaw is much cultivated by the negroes. The violet-
headed creeper (C. violacea) is a native of the Cape of Good
Hope. It likewise dwells in woods, and is said to build a
nest of singularly elegant and ingenious structure. Our re-
stricted limits will not admit of our expatiating on this de-
lightful tribe.

The next African genus which claims our attention is
Merops, which mcludes the bee-eaters, a group not more
remarkable for beauty of colour than gracefulness of form.
These birds feed on insects, and build their nests in the
holes of banks. ‘The common bee-eater (Merops apiaster),
notwithstanding its designation, is one of the rarest of Eu-
ropean birds, and is certainly one of the most beautiful. It
occurs in Africa, and spreads from thence into Greece and

the Mediterranean Archipelago. Many other species of

BIRDS. ~ Boil

bee-eater inhabit this continent; but for these we must
refer the reader to Le Vaillant and other writers.

Amid the infinitely varied forms and colours which cha-
racterize and adorn the feathered race, we know of none
more worthy of admiration than those exhibited by the
great family of che kingfishers. The size and length of the
bill are indeed somewhat disproportioned to the dimensions
of the body; but the shining silky lustre of the plumage,
and the finely varied hues of the most brilliant green and
blue, contrasted with different shades of orange, black, and
brown, render this genus one of the most showy and at-
tractive within the range of the ornithological system.
The continent which forms the subject of our present dis-
quisition is rich in the genus. We shall’at present, how-
ever,» mention only the Smyrna kingfisher (A. Smyr-
nensis), which, when in perfect plumage, is one of the most
brilliant of the feathered race.—‘‘ The lucid blue of the
wings,” says Dr. Shaw, “scarcely yielding in lustre to
those of the splendid butterfly called Papilio Menelaus.”
Its colours seem to vary in different individuals. Several
fine species of this extensive genus occur in the island of
Madagascar. : :

Among the more remarkable of the African birds we
must not omit to mention the species of the genus Buceros,
_ commonly called hornbills. These occur also in Celebes
and the Philippine Islands, but many species are peculiar
to Africa... The hornbills may be said to occupy the same
station in the old world as the toucans do in the new.
Both are alike distinguished by the enormous size of their
bills, and by a mixture in their dispositions of the carni-
vorous with the frugivorous propensities. The African
hornbill (B. Africanus) is entirely black, and nearly as large
as aturkey. The only other species of this singular genus
which we shall mention, is the crowned hombill (B. coro-
natus). Compared with the preceding it is a very small
bird, scarcely equalling the dimensions of a magpie. Le
‘Vaillant saw a flock of more than five hundred of these
birds assembled in company with crows and vultures, and
preying on the remains of slaughtered elephants. The
crowned hornbill is figured by Mr. Swainson in the third
volume of his beautiful illustrations.

We shall now take a brief view of the scansorial or

i ra Ee

332 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

t

climbing birds of Africa. Several woodpeckers inhabit this
continent. The double-bearded wocdpecker (Picus dio-
phrys) inhabits Southern Africa; ana the crested wood-

_ pecker (P. minutus, Temm.) is ‘found in Senegal. The

gold-shafted woodpecker (now placed in the genus Colaptes)
is likewise an African species. a cnnts

Many kinds of cuckoo occur in Africa. The old Lins
nean genus Cuculus has been greatly subdivided by modern
writers. The group included under the genus Centropus
are remarkable for the long claw with which the inner hind
toe is furnished. ‘They are found in India, Africa, and the
island of Java. The didric or shining cuckoo (Cuculus
auratus) is probably the most beantiful of the tribe. The
upper parts of the plumage are of a rich golden-green; on
the head are five stripes of white, two above the eyes, like
eyebrows, passing behind ; two more, shorter and narrower,
beneath the eyes; and one on the middle of the forehead.
The wing and tail coverts, and the secondary quills are
tipped with white. Most of the under-parts are likewise
white. This bird was found by Le Vaillant, inwards from
the Cape, near Kok’s Kraal. He named it didric, from its |
continually uttering these syllables in various modulations,
when perched on the extremities of large trees.

While recording the names of so many species remark-
able for their lustrous plumage, we must not here omit to
mention others not less notable for their singular instincts
and modes of life. Among these the indicators or honey-
guides, by some authors classed with the cuckoos, are de-
serving of special notice. One species described by Dr.
Sparrman is said to attract the notice of the Dutch and
Hottentots by a shrill cry of cher, cher; and when it per-
ctives itself observed, it flutters onwards to the hive of a
wild bee, in hopes of partaking of the plundered honey.
**T have had frequent opportunities of seeing this bird, and
have been witness to the destruction of several republics
of bees, by means of its treachery. -I had, however, but
two opportunities of shooting it, which I did’ to the great
indignation of my Hottentots.”

__ We may here observe, that naturalists themselves seem
occasionally to belong to that irritable genus, of which
poets are said to form the principal cumponent parts.
‘Though Sparrman asserts that he was a frequent eyewil-

i BIRDS. 333
ness of the curious instinctive habits of the honey-guide,
yet Le Vaillant doubts if that traveller ever saw the bird at
all. He says that the account is merely a repetition of a
fable that is known and believed by credulous people at the
Cape, and that it is false to suppose that the bird seeks to
draw man after it for the purpose of sharing the plundered
sweets ; the fact being that the bird calls not the man, but
that the man knows by attending to the natural cry of the
bird in search of food, that he will be sure ere long to find
the stores of the bee. According to Bruce, the moroc, for
so this singular species is sometimes named, occurs in
Abyssinia; but he also throws discredit on Sparrman’s
relation. We have seen, in the preceding chapter, that
Lichtenstein doubted the truth of Le Vaillant’s account of
the camelopard; we now find Le Vaillant himself equally
skeptical of the accuracy of the Swedish traveller, and
joined therein by Bruce, whose own statements were at
one period scarcely credited at all. However, to conclude
a subject which has already too long detained us, we shall
observe that Mr. Barrow, a most careful and accurate in-
guirer, though not a professed zoologist, confirms Dr.
Sparrman’s account, as follows:—‘‘ Every one in that
country (the interior of the southern extremity of Africa) is
too well acquainted with the moroc to have any doubts as
to the certainty either respecting the bird or its information
of the repositories of the bees.”

The sagacious and imitative family of the parrots (Pszt-
tacid@) is the next to demand a brief record. Though one of
the most numerous groups of the feathered creation, it is by
no means abundant in species, when considered merely in
reference to its African relations. The gorgeous maccaws
are peculiar to South America, the cockatoos to New-Hol-
land and the Eastern Islands, the lories to the East Indies
_ and the Moluccas; and the greater proportion of parrots
and parakeets, commonly so called, are more truly charac-
teristic of the tropical regions of other countries than of
Africa. Yet here also this noisy and loquacious race are
not unknown, although the far-spread forests are its chosen
dwelling-places rather than the barren sands. Africa, how-
ever, has also her shady bowers as well as thirsty Saharas ;

“For He, at whose command the parched rock
Was smitten, and poured forth a quenching stream,

(334 NAIURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

Hath softened that obduracy, and made
Unlooked-for gladness in the desert place
‘l’o save the perishing.”

The Greeks and Romans became acquainted with the
parrot kind, in consequence of certain ‘species of these birds
having been imported from the East soon after Alexander’s
Indian expedition. The Alexandrian parrot, especially, so
remarkable for its elegant form and docile disposition, is
generally supposed to have been brought to Europe about
that time from the island of Ceylon, the ancient Tabrobane.
In the reign of Nero, the Romans introduced other species
from different quarters of Africa. They were highly prized
by that luxurious people, who jodzed them in superb cages
of silver, ivory, and tortoise-shell ; and the price of a parrot
in those days frequently exceeded that of a slave. Nor did
Ovid think it beneath him to write a lengthened elegy on
the death of Corinna’s parrot,—a bird, which, in the love it
bore its mistress, seems to have emulated that of the dying
Greek for his country :-—

“‘ Clamavit moriens lingua, Corinna, vale! ©

It is only in these degenerate days that the keeping ot a
cockatoo is brought forward in a court of justice in proof of
an alienated or imbecile mind.* We trust, that in some
instances, at least, such inference may be fairly classed as
a ‘“‘ non sequitur.”

One of the earliest imported of the African species ap-
pears to have been the gray or ash-coloured parrot (Psit--
tacus erithacus), still remarkable for its easy loquacity and
general imitative powers. To this species probably be-
longed the individual mentioned by Celius Rhodoginus, and

-which belonged to Cardinal Ascanius. ‘I cannot,” says
that author, “‘omit an extraordinary wonder seen in our
times. This was a parrot at Rome, belonging to Cardinal
Ascanius, who purchased it for a hundred gold pieces, and
which, in the most articulate and uninterrupted manner,
recited the Apostles’ Creed as well as the best reader could
have done, and which, as a most extraordinary and won-
derful thing, I could not pass unnoticed.” 7

* See the case of Dundonald versus Roy, as lately reported at length
in the Scotch newspapers.

BIRDS. 335

We shall mention only two other Afr.can species of this
tribe, viz. the damask parret (P. ifuscaius), of which an
interesting account is given by Le Vaillant, and the Guinea
parret (P. pullarius), apparently figured on the 40th plate
of the second volume of Seba’s Thesaurus.

That division of the Linnean genus Bucco now called
Pogonias, is peculiar to Africa. It contains about six spe-
cies, of which the manners are little known. That called
the Abyssinian barbican by Latham, was observed to cling
to the branches of trees like a woodpecker.

Gf the Trogons, an extensive tribe, of brilliant plumage
but ungraceful forms, the greater part are proper to Asia
and America. We are indebted to Le Vaillant for the
figure and description of an African species discovered by
him in the country of the Caffres, and called Narina, which,
it seems, in the Hottentot language signifies a flower. It
is the Trogon narina of systematic writers.

We come now to a limited tribe, entirely peculiar to
Africa,—the plantain-eaters, genus Musophaga. These
are large birds, elegantly shaped, and richly coloured.
The species are few in nuinber, and their history is still ob-
scure. Allied to the preceding are the Touracos, likewise
characteristic of the African continent. One of the most
beautiful was classed by Linneus with the cuckoos,—the
Cuculus persa of that great observer. Le Vaillant says that
there are great numbers of touracos in the country of the
Kottinquas,—that they are very difficult to shoot, as they
perch only on the summits of the tallest trees, and rarely
suffer any one to come within gunshot,—but that they are
easily caught alive by snares, baited with such fruits as are in
season. He adds that they are excellent eating. Another
species of this genus which it is delightful to look upon,
is the Pauline touraco, Corythaix Paulina. It inhabits
Southern Africa. M. Vieillot had one alive, and he informs
us that its manners were mild and familiar: it lived on
succulent fruits, and was fond of sugar; its habits were
active, and its voice sonorous and apparently ventriloqual.

The different tribes and genera belonging to the great
order of gallinaceous birds are the next to claim our regard.
The sympathies of such of our readers (if such there be) as
are regardless of that beauty of form and splendour of

ae

336 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

colour to which we have already so often attracted their
attention, would probably yield more readily to certain cue
linary associations connected with poultry, turkeys, phea-
sants, grouse, &c.; all of which, and many more equally
dear to the late Dr. Kitchener, belong to the present exten-
sive division of our subject. It happens, however, that
cocks and hens are of eastern origin, that turkeys are native
only to America,—that pheasants come from the banks of
the Phasis,—and that grouse are peculiar to northern
countries. We must therefore, in the mean time, be con-
tented with a few pigeons.

The genus Columba is widely diffused over both the tem-
perate and tropical regions of the earth. Its species abound
in Europe, Asia, Africa, and America; and, even in the
forests of the far-distant islands of the Southern Ocean,
their radiant plumage

“ Fijls many a damp obscure recess
With lustre of a saintly show.”

One of the most magnificent of the tribe is the hackled
pigeon (C. Francie). It is distinguished from all others
by the irregular form of the feathers on the head, neck, and
breast, which are long and narrow, and terminate in a
shining appendage resembling in consistence, though not
in colour, that with which the wing-feathers of the Bohe-
mian chatterer are furnished. The species inhabits Southern
Africa and the island of Madagascar. A still more singular
bird is the parabolic pigeon (C. arquatriz). It was dis-
covered by Le Vaillant, and is figured in his splendid
work on the birds of Africa. The flight of this species is
very remarkable. It never proceeds in a straight line, but
on commencing its route it describes a parabola, and con-
tinues forming a series of arcs during the whole time, fre-
quently uttering a peculiar cry. It inhabits the forests of
Anteniquois, and is a great enemy to the white eagle.

The Guinea fowls, or pintados, are entirely peculiar to
Africa as native species, though they now breed freely as
domestic birds both in Europe and America. There are
three kinds of this bird known to naturalists, viz. the Guinea
pintado (Numida meleagris), common in our poultry-yards ;
the mitred pintado (NV. mitrata); and the crested pintado
(N. crisiata). - ;

BIRDS. 337

Quails are remarkable for a certain compactness of form
and neatness of plumage, which, in the absence of brilliant
colouring, produces a highly pleasing effect. In regard to
the African species, we shall content ourselves with naming
the Madagascar quail (Coturnix perlata), which is about
twice the size of our British visitant. It is also distin-
guished from the others by the strength of its beak.

Very few partridges, properly so called, occur in this
sandy continent. ‘The Barbary partridge (Perdriz petrosa)
is abundant along the African shores of the Mediterranean.
It also occurs in "Teneriffe, and along the western cvast as
far as Senegal. Of the genera Pterocles, Francolinus, and
Turnix, there are likewise representatives in this country.
Cranch’s Francolin (F. Cranchiz) was discovered by the
indefatigable and unfortunate collector whose name it bears,
during the ill-fated expedition to explore the source of the

‘Congo under Captain Tuckey. It is described by Dr.
Leach in the appendix to the published narrative of that
disastrous voyage. 3

Of the African grouse, we may say, as Horrebow says, in
his brief chapter “On the Rats of Iceland,”—‘ There are
no rats in Iceland ;” so neither are there any grouse in
Africa.

A few lines may now be devoted to a species w1ich not
only forms the most remarkable character in the ornitho-
logy of Africa, to which country it is now believed to be
entirely peculiar, but presents in itself the most singular
example of the feathered race. This extraordinary bird is
the ostrich, the tallest of its class, and probably the swiftest
of all running creatures. It is distitiguished from every
other bird by having only two toes on each foot. It in-
habits the open and sandy plains of a great extent of
Africa, from Barbary to the Cape of Good Hope; and
being consequently native to one of the most anciently-
peopled countries of the earth, it has excited the attention
of mankind from the remotest periods of antiquity. It is
frequently mentioned in the Book of Job, and in other por-
tions of the Old Testament. Herodotus, among the early
Greek writers, was acquainted with its history and appear-
ance; and in after-times it was not only frequently ex-

ibited by the Romans in their games, but the brains of
f

338 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

hundreds at atime were scooped out, and served up as a
choice delicacy on the luxurious table of Heliogabalus.

To exemplify the great strength and swiftness of this
gigantic biped, we shall transcribe the following circum-
stance, narrated by Adanson, as having taken place at
Podor, a French factory on the southern bank of the river
Niger :—** Two ostriches which had been about two years
in the factory, and, although young, were nearly of their
full size, were so teks that two little blacks mounted both
together on the back of the largest: no sooner did he feel
their weight, than he began to run as fast as possible, and
carried them several times round the village, as it was im-
possible to stop him otherwise than by obstructing the
passage. This sight pleased me so much that I ordered it
to be repeated; and, to try their strength, directed a full-
grown negro to mount the smallest, and two others the
largest. ‘This burden did not seem at all disproportioned
to their strength. At first they went at a tclerably sharp
trot, but when they became heated a little, they expanded
their wings as though to catch the wind, and moved with
such fleetness that they scarcely seemed to touch the ground.
Most people have, one time or other, seen a partridge run,
and consequently must know that there is no man whatever
able to keep up with it; and it is easy to imagine that if
this bird had a longer step, its speed would’be considerably
augmented. ‘The ostrich moves like the partridge, with
this advantage; and I am satisfied that those I am speak-
ing of would have distanced the fleetest race-horses that
were ever bred in England: it is true they would not hold
out so long as a horse, but they would undoubtedly be able

‘to go over the space in less time. I have frequently beheld

this sight, whichis capable of giving one an idea of the pro-
digious strength of an ostrich, and of showing what use it
might be of, had we but the method. of breaking and ma-
naging it as we do a horse.”

Greatly inferior in size, but not very dissimilar in form,
are the bustard tribe, of which the most recently discovered
African species is designated Otzs Denhami by Mr. Vigors,
in honour of the late intrepid and accomplished traveller of
that name.

We now arrive at the Grallatores, or long-legged birds,

BIRDS. - 339

commonly called waders, on account of the semi-aquatie
propensities by which so many of them are oe Cae
Of these the most gracefully formed are the demoiselles,
lady-birds (Ardea pavonia and Ardea wirgo, Linn.), both of
African origin. They are not unfrequently exhibited in
menageries under the name of crown-birds, or Balearic
cranes.

‘The flamingo tribe are remarkable for the length of their
legs. The species occasionally found in Europe (Pheni-
copterus ruber) is native to the warmer regions uf Asia and
Africa. The bird described under that name by Alexander
Wilson, in his American Ornithology, is a distinct species,
mentioned as such long ago by Molina, in his Natural His-
tory of Chili. It is alluded to by Thomas che eg in his
Gertrude of Wyoming :—

“Then, where of Indian hills the daylight takes
His leave, how might you the flaminge see
Disporting like a meteor on the lakes.”

The lesser flamingo (P. minor of Vieillot and Temminck)
is a species discovered of late years as an inhabitant of
various parts of Africa, from sees to the Cape of Good
Hope.

The gigantic stork (Ciconia argala) though well known
in Bengal, is likewise an African species. This bird is
sometimes upwards of six feet in height. It is very com-
mon in many of the interior parts of Africa, and 1s called
marabou in Senegal. According to Major Denham, it is
protected by the inhabitants on account of its services as a
scavenger. Its appetite is most voracious, and nothing
comes amiss to its omnivorous propensities. Smeathman
has given a long account of a tame bird of this species. It
regularly attended the hall at dinner-time, and placed itself
behind its master’s chair. It frequently helped itself to
what it liked best; and one day darted its enormous bill
into a boiled fowl, which it swallowed in an instant. It
used to fly about the whole country, and generally roosted
high among some silk-cotton trees. From this station, at
the distance of two or three miles, it could see when the
dinner was carried acress the court, when it immediately
took wing, and flying with great swiftness, arrived in time
to enter the house with some of those who carried the dishes.

———

340 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

It sometimes remained in the room for half an hour after
dinner, turning its head alternately from side to side, with
an appearance of unusual gravity, as if listening to the
conversation. It one day swallowed a cat. Is this the
Ardea dulna of Gmelin ? .

Let us here insert the name of the umber (Scopus um-
bretta, Linn.), an African species,—the only one of its
genus, of the manners of which we are still spain ig-
norant.

Of the snipe and woodcock kind several species inhabit
Africa. Of these we shall mention no more than the Cape
snipe (Rhynchia Africana of Lesson), which occurs speci-
fically the same, or at least apparently identical, in Bengal.

Of the sandpiper tribe (Peladna, Cuvier) a few occur along.
the African shores, and a new species of phalarope (Ph.
Fimbriatus) has been recently described by M. Temminck
as native to Senegal.

The genus Cursorius is found in all the quarters of the
globe, with the exception of America. 'The double-collared
courier (C. Bicinctus) inhabits the interior of Southern Af-
rica; Temminck’s courier (C. Temminckii, Swainson) is
found at Sierra Leone ; and the violet-winged courier (C.
chalcopterus, ‘Temm.) comes from Senegal.

The plover family are numerous in almost all parts of
the world. Africa possesses nearly a dozen species, of
which we shall mention merely the crowned plover (Chara-
drius coronatus), one of the largest of the genus, which oc-
curs at the Cape of Good Hope.

Of the Palmipedes, or web-footed water-fowl, we know
of no great number peculiar to Africa. These birds are of |
wandering habits, and being possessed, in addition to their
great power of wing, of the faculty of resting on the water,
we can place no limits to the extent of their migratory
movements. They thus become more cosmopolite than
many of the other tribes, and are therefore less entitled to
our attention during an exposition of the peculiar and more
characteristic features of a particular continent.

The first of this order which we shall name is the Cape
penguin (Spheniscus Capensis). This bird is found on
several of the southern portions of our globe, especially at

‘the Cape and the Malouin Islands. It lives in immense —

|

BIRDS. | 34]

numbers, congregated together in spots called rookeries by
our voyagers. ‘The eggs are much esteemed.

The pelican (P. Onocrotalvs, Linn.), common alike to
Asia and the eastern countries of Europe, is also found in
Africa, where it has been observed both in Egypt and the
Cape of Good Hope.

Of the singular genus called plotus or darter, Le Vaillant
made us acquainted with a species from Senegal and the
Cape. It was also found i in the interior of the country by
Major Denham.

The elegant and long-winged terns or sea-swallows may
be enumerated among the African tribes. The slender-
billed tern (Slerna ltenwirostris, Temm.) is found upon the
western coasts, and the white tern (S. candida, a ee
inhabits the Cape of Good Hope.

The buoyant and pearly-plumaged gulls, though more
characteristic of the northern regions, are occasionally seen
along the African shores. Weare not, however, acquainted
with any species peculiar to this continent.

The genus ‘albatross (Diomedea) probably contains the
largest and longest winged of all the aquatic species. The
wandering albatross (D. exulans) is equal in size to a swan,
and its wings extend about ten feet. This bird is princi-
pally met with in the seas adjacent to the Cape of Good
Hope.

The Cape petrel (Procellaria Capensis), as its title implies,
occurs also near the last-named locality. It is common in
the southern seas, but more especially in the vicinity of the
Cape, where it flies in immense flocks. It is extremely
voracious, and feeds on fish and the dead carcasses of whales.
When caught, it squirts a quantity of oil from its nostrils.

The spur-winged goose (Plectropterus Gambensis) is a
singular species inhabiting Gambia and other parts of Af-
rica. The anterior angles of its wings are armed with
sharp projecting spines.

The mountain goose (Anser montana) is a large species,
with the wing feathers, and those of the head, of a bright
shining reddish green. According to Latham, it inhabits
the Cape of Good Hope, where it keeps mostly on ~ hills,
and feeds on grass and herbs.

Among the larger of the web-footed tribes we sat not

omit to mention the aki (Chenalopexr Egypiiaca,
3

342 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

Stephens), so remarkable for its strong attachment to its
young. It was worshipped by the ancient Egyptians, and
Its sculptured figure is still recognisable among the hiero-
glyphical representations of the Theban temples. It also
occurs in the southern regions of Africa, and has not un-
frequently been imported into Britain to beautify the waters

‘of our pleasure-grounds ; but the love of liberty is deeply

implanted in this bird, and it is with difficulty that even the

young, born and bred in northern climates, are retained for

a continuance in a state of satisfied domestication.

The crimson-billed sheldrake (Tadorna erythrorhyncha)
inhabits the Cape of Good Hope; and a species of musk-
duck (Anas Nilotica of Gmelin) is found in Upper Egypt.
It is easily tamed, and lives on good terms with other poultry.

From the preceding summary, the student of ornithology
will be able to form a sufficiently correct idea of the pre-
vailing features which characterize this branch of science
in Africa; and, by comparing the present sketch with those
which we purpose to exhibit of othercountries in the future
volumes of our series, he will likewise be enabled to esti-
mate the peculiarities by which the continent in question is
distinguished from all the other quarters of the globe,

CHAPTER XX.

Natural History of the Reptiles, Fishes, Shells, Insects, &c.
of Africa.

INTERMEDIATE between the birds and fishes are the reptile
race, divided by naturalists into four principal branches, the
Chelonian, the Saurian, the Ophidian, and the Batrachian
reptiles. Of all these, Africa, “ fruitful in monsters,” pro-
duces some remarkable examples. - :

In regard to the geographical distribution of repules, the
first and most general observation is, that they augment
in number as we advance towards the equatorial regions.

While Sweden possesses scarcely a dozen lizards and

REPTILES. 343

nakes, about three or four frogs and toads, and not a single
tortoise, the temperate parts of Europe produce about forty
snakes and lizards, and several of the tortoise tribe. As
soon as we gain the southern extremity of Spain, the num-
ber of species im these tribes greatly increases, and in An-
dalusia the African complexion of the country is still further
manifested by the appearance of the chameleon. On pro-
ceeding further south, not only does the number of reptiles
increase, but they also augment in size, till, from the Tro-
pic of Cancer onwards, and beyond the Line, we meet with
the crocodiles, caymans, boas, and other giants of the reptile
race. Forthe present, however, we must confine ourselves
to a brief allusion to a very limited number of the African
tribes.

Ist, Chelonian reptiles or tortoises and turtles. Several
of this division occur in Africa, such as the T'estudo Greca,
the Testudo triunguis, &c. bans

2d, Saurian reptiles. 'To this division belong the croco-
diles and lizards, the geckos, chameleons, and many others.

The common crocodile (Lacerta crocodilus), celebrated in
the ancient history of Egypt, is spread over a considerable
extent of this continent.

‘“‘ Erewhile, emerging from the brooding sand,
With tiger paw he prints the brineless strand ,
High on the flood, with speckled bosom swims,
Helmed with broad tail, and oared with giant limbs ;
Rolls his fierce eyeballs, clasps his iron claws,
And champs with gnashing teeth his massy jaws.
Old Nilus sighs through all his cane-crowned shores,
And swarthy Memphis trembles and adores.”

There are several different kinds of crocodile in the old
and new world, and their tempers and dispositions seem to
vary in different localities. Humboldt and Mungo Park
regarded them with fear and trembling, while Audubon
and Mr. Waterton hold them in little consideration either
as friends or foes. Though seldom tamed, they are not by
any means incapable of domestication, as has been demon-
strated by many examples, both in ancient and modern
times.

Many lizards occur in Africa. We shall only mention
one found near Mourzouk. It is called aselis, and, if not a
tue lizard, resembles one in form. When alarmed, it

~
’

344 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

buries itself in the sand; and when dropped fark a
height, it immediately sinks beneath the surface of the
spot on which it fell. ‘* These little creatures,” says Cap-
tain Lyon, “are eagerly bought by the girls and married
women, for the purpose of ascertaining how many children
they shall have. By stretching them the skin will innome-
diately crack, and the women ‘Most religiously believe that
for every sound they shall bear a child.”

One of the most remarkable families of the saurian tribe
is that which contains the chameleons. The common
species (Lacerta Africana) is found in Egypt, Barbary, and
the south of Spain. The changes of colour in these ani-
mals, though by some deemed fabulous, are now beyond
dispute. The causes of these changes, however, and their
mode of action, may still be classed among the more ob-
’ secure points of natural history. They seem independent
of external objects, and vary within a certain | Tange, almost
every hour.

“Non mihi tot cnltus numero comprendere fas est*
Adjicit ornatus proxima queque dies.”

3d, Ophidian reptiles, or serpents. Among the most re-
markable of the African species of this division, is the ce-
rastes, or horned viper. It is characterized by a small
curved horn over each eyelid. It lives in the sand, and
was well known to the ancients. Another singular ser-
pent is the haje (Coluber hae, Linneus). The Egyptian
jugglers, by pressing the neck of this creature between
their fingers, produce a kind of catalepsy which renders it
stiff and motionless. This is rather a curious fact when
considered in connexion with the scriptural narrative in the
seventh chapter of Exodus, where the rods of the magicians
when thrown down are converted into serpents.

This species was regarded by the ancient Egyptians _ as
the emblem of the protecting divinity of the world, and its
figure is frequently sculptured on each side of a globe, on
the outer gates of their temples.

Ath, The Batrachian reptiles, such as frogs, &c. Africa
produces comparatively few species of this division. ‘The
soil is probably too dry. We shall here mention only
the short-headed toad (Rana breviceps) described by Line

FISHES. 345

meus in the Amenitates Academica, vol. i. It is a very

small species, native to Senegal and some other parts of
Africa.

The great and almost inexhaustible class of fishes next
demands our attention.

Our acquaintance with the laws which regulate the geo-
graphical distribution of this class is extremely meager: in
other words, the facts illustrating the greater or less ex-
tension of their localities are few, and have never been
properly generalized. From the immeasurable extent and
continuous nature of the fluid which they inhabit, they are
supplied by nature with greater facilities of dispersion than
most other animals; while the greater equality of the
temperature of water, when compared with that of either
earth or air, admits, in several instances, of the same spe-
cies inhabiting almost every latitude from pole to pole.
Those races especially, which, travelling together in vast
shoals, speedily consume the natural food which each par-
ticular spot affords, are obliged, like the pastoral tribes of
old, or the woodland hunters of America, to remove from
place to place in search of additional supplies, and thus the
species acquires a more widely extended geographical dis-
tribution. It is thus that the cod and herring are spread
over the whole extent of the Northern Ocean, and in undi-
minished numbers, notwithstanding the war of extermina-
tion which man and other voracious animals appear to
wage against them. Those species which lead a solitary
and, as it may be called, a stationary life are frequently
confined within very narrow limits. The Cheivdons, for
example, which delight in rocky coasts covered with madre-
pores, attach themselves to the torrid zone, which produces
so abundantly those magnificent ornaments of the sea.
But though thus confined to particular spots, from which
the individuals of the species never wander, the species
itself may be said to be repeated again in different and
distant regions, separated from each other by almost in-
surmountable obstacles. Thus, many of what may be
termed stationary species are found identically the same
along the coasts of Brazil, in the Arabian Gulf, and over
the multiplied shores of Polynesia. It has hence been
concluded that such species, incapable of colonizing them-

346 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

selves by leaving their accustomed shores, and hazarding
a journey across unknown oceans, have either been created
in more places than one, or have been enabled to transport
themselves by means different from any of those which are
now available in the ordinary course of nature.*

If the natural means by which the more powerful species,
inhabiting the saline waters of the ocean, have spread
themselves from clime to clime, be in some measure within
the reach of our comprehension, it is otherwise with those
peculiar to rivers and the waters of inland Jakes. How
these have contrived to migrate from one region to another,
and to people with identical species the depths of far-re-
moved and solitary waters, separated from each other by
chains of lofty mountains, or wide-extended wastes of desert
sand, is a problem which, in the present state of our
knowledge, we seek in vain to solve.t

Of the genus Murena several specics occur in 1 the African
seas. ‘lhe spotted murena (M. guttata) was observed by
Forskall in the Red Sea. A small species of goby, scarcely
exceeding an inch in length, is found in the Nile. It is the
Gobius aphya of Linneus. We may here mention, that the
name aphya, by which this species has been distinguished,
seems to have been applied by the ancient writers to such
small fishes as they vaguely supposed to have been produced
rather from the foam of the ocean than according to the
usual process of nature.{ Several species of bull-head
(Cottus) are described by Commerson, and the genus Scor
pena, sv eccentric in its forms, is represented in the African
seas, among others, by the Cape scorpena (S. Capensis),
mentioned ‘by Gronovius. A magnificent fish, called the
opah dory (Zeus luna), inhabits the African shores. Dr.
Mortimer exhibited a fish of this kind to the Royal Soctety
in 1750, which was taken “ onthe coast of Leith ;” and he
adds (in the Phil. Trans. for that year), that the Prince of
Anamaboe, being then in England, immediately recognised
it, and said it was common in his country, and was excellent
eating.

* See Gaymard’s Mémoire sur la Distribution Géographique des
Poissons. °

+ See further on this subject the 5th number of my Illustrations of
Zoology.

$ See Shaw’s General Zoolog’s, vol. v.\p. 245

FISHES, . 347

The Remora, so remarkable for its faculty of adhering to
other fishes by a peculiar sucker-shaped organ on the top
of its head, is found in the Mediterranean and other saline
waters which wash the African shores. The olive-green
remora (Echeneis cauda rotundata of Bloch) is common on
the coasts of Mozambique. A species of Labrus (L. Nilo-
ticus) inhabits the Nile; and the star-eyed Bodian (Bodz-
anus stellifer) is native to the seas about the Cape. The
silvery mackarel (Scomber crumenophthalmus) is found in
considerable plenty about the coasts of Guinea, and the
Scomber chloris is also an African species.

The surmullet (Mullus ruber) so famous as an epicurean
delicacy among the Romans, and so highly, though not very
humanely, admired for the splendour of its dying hues, is
found both along the African and European shores of the
Mediterranean. ‘* Vide,” says Seneca, ‘‘ quomodo exarserit
rubor omniacrior minio! vide quas per latera venas agat!
Ecce! sanguinem putes ventrem ! quam lucidum quiddam ce-
ruleumque sub ipsotempore effulsit ! jam porrigitur et pallet,
et in unum colorem componitur !”? The flying gurnard ( T72-
gla volitans) may likewise be mentioned as a Mediterranean
species of singular habits and great beauty. Itswims in shoals
and delights the voyager by its short and frequent flights.

The electric silure (Silwrus electricus) dwells in the rivers
of Africa. It was observed by Forskall in the Nile, by
whom, however, in his Fauna Arabica, it is improperly
named Raja torpedo. Another species of Szluwrus called
platte-kop, or flat-head, occurs in the fresh waters of South-
ern Africa. Mr. Burchell observed two boys of the Bush-
men tribe fishing for this species. 'They stood by the wa-
ter-side, motionless as herons. After waiting patiently for
half an hour, a fish came within their reach, and was in-
stantly pierced through with their spears or assagays. It
was nearly three feet long, entirely of a lead colour, but ap-
proaching to white underneath. The head was very broad
and flat, the eyes pale yellow and extremely small, and the
mouth was bearded with several very long strings. The
flesh was white, rich, and nutritious. This fish seems to
occur only in those rivers which run to the western coast
(that is, to the northward of the Cape of Good Hope),
while, on the other hand, eels have never been seen in any
but those which fall into the ocean eastward of that cape.

as

348 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

Of the salmon genus, the Salmo fulvus, a fierce and hun-
gry fish, ismuch esteemed as an article of food by the inha-
bitants of Guinea. The notable genus Polypterus was first
scientifically distinguished by M. Geoffroy. Its shape is
long, cylindrical, and serpentiform; the head is defended
by large bony plates; and the body is covered by strong
scales, resembling those of a coat of mail. This fish is
called bichin by the Egyptians, and is considered as very
rare. It is said to dwell in the soft mud of the Nile, and is
the finest flavoured of allthe Nilotic fishes; but as it is
hardly possible to open the skin with a knife, the fish is first
boiled, and the skin afterward drawn off almost entire. The
tooth-tongued argentine (A. Glossodonta) is a beautiful spe-
cies, native to the Red Sea; and the pearl-bladdered argen-
tine (A. Sphyrena) is a Mediterranean fish of the same ge-
nus. The air-bladder of this species is equally bright and
beautiful with its external parts, and along with these is
much used in the preparation of artificial pearls.

The flying-fish (Exocetus exiliens) is remarkable for the

eat length of its pectoral fins, which enable it to sustain
itself above the waves for several hundred yards. The
silvery polyneme (P. Niloticus) is a very elegant fish, of

reat excellence as an article of food. Its mode of capture
in the Nile is described by Bruce. The ten-fingered poly-
neme (P. decadactylus), likewise esteemed a very wholesome
and agreeable fish, occurs along the coasts of Guinea, and
occasionally enters the rivers of that country. Of fishes
allied to the herring, Africa produces several species. The
Clupea Africana is said to be extremely plentiful during the
summer months in the last-named district ; and the dorab
herring (C. dorab) is described by Forskall as native to the
Red Sea. Among the carp tribe we shall merely mention
the Cyprinus gonorhynchus, mentioned by Gronovius as an
inhabitant of the Cape seas. We may observe in passing,
that a great variety of fish are caught in the salt. waters
which environ the Cape; but fresh fish are there so rare,
that Mr. Burchell “does not recollect having seen any at
table except eels, and these were regarded as a curiosity.””*
OR genus Mormyrus seems almost entirely peculiar to the
Of the cartilaginous fishes, several species of ray inhabit
* Travels, vol. i. p. 79. '

FISH. 349

the African seas. For example, the Raja gulicia was seen
by Commerson along the coasts of Madagascar, and the
lymna and pearled rays (R. lymna and sephen) both occur
in the Red Sea. It is from the skin of the last-named
species that the beautiful substance called Galluchat by the
French is prepared. It is tinted with blue, green, or red,
according to the taste of the artist, and being afterward
polished, is used in the manufacture of different kinds of
cases, telescope-tubes, &c. The younger specimens, ac-
cording to La Cépéde, are preferred,—the tubercular coat
of the full-grown individuals being rather too rough for the
desired purpose. Several species of shark inhabit the Af-
rican seas. ‘They are disagreeable to bathers.

The extraordinary genus Ostraczon, or trunk-fish, distin-

ished by the peculiar bony crust or covering in which it
is enveloped, is widely distributed over the Indian and Ame-
rican oceans. Of the African species we may name the
tuberculated trunk-fish (C. twberculatus), by some regarded
as a mere variety of Ostracion triqueter, a kind much
esteemed for the uses of the table inthe East Indies. The
not less remarkable tribe included in the genus Tetrodon

are represented in Africa by the lineated species (T. line- ,

atus) which sometimes occurs in the Nile, where Hasselquist
was assured by the fishermen, that on seizing this fish
in the water their hands were frequently stung as if by
nettles. *
_ The last genus to which we shall allude is that called
Syngnathus, or pipe-fish. Some of these are found in the
northern seas, others in the equatorial; while the most
remarkable of all is the foliated pipe-fish (Hippocampus fo-
hatus, Cuvier), which has hitherto occurred only along the
shores of New-Holland and Van Dieman’s Land. The
pelagic pipe-fish (S. pelagicus) is found in the African seas.
We shall close our ichthyological department by two
short extracts. ‘I was present,” says M. Adanson, “at a
very extraordinary capture of fish, made the same month
(March, 1750) on the coast of Ben, within a league of the
island Goree, by the company belonging to one of the East
India ships, which had anchored in the road. They haa
only a net of about sixty fathoms, which they threw at a
venture into the sea; for they were not so lucky as to espy
any of those shoals of fishes: yet they had such surprising

Gg

350 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

success, that the shore was covered the whole length of the
net with the fish they caught, though the nct was in a bad
condition. I reckoned part of them, and judged that they
might in all be upwards of 6000, the least of them as large
as a fine carp. There you might see pilchards, rock-fish,
mullets, or gull-fish, of different sorts; molebats, with other
fishes very little known. The negroes of the neighbouring
village took each their load, and the ship’s crew filled their
boat until it was ready to sink, leaving the rest on the sea-
shore. In any other country, such a capture of fish would,
without all doubt, pass for a miracle.”’* :

The fossil fish of Africa are scarcely known. The fol-
lowing passage, in illustration of that curious branch, is
from Lichtenstein’s Travels -—“‘In the slate-stone from
which the spring rose were the impressions of an innume-
rable multitude of fishes. We perceived this extraordinary
appearance first upon the surface ; but the impressiuns were
larger, more distinct, and finer in proportion as we broke
deeper and deeper into the stone. The form of the fish
resembled that of the eel, and the length of the largest was.
about three feet. The brittleness of the slate made it im-
possible for us to get out a single specimien elitire ; and the
fragments which we preserved, for the purpose of examin-
ing them at our leisure, were afterward destroyed by the
jolting of the wagon. ‘The more I made myself acquainted
with this country by my subsequent travels, the more re-
markable did the phenomena appear to me, as being the
only remains of a former world which I found throughout
the whole of Southern Africa.”+ We must riow proceed to
the next division of our subject. | :

The Mollusca and Conchifera of Africa next demand our
attention. To these extensive classes belong whatever
species are known under the general names of shellfish
and shells. The precise localities of African conchology
are, in truth, so superficially ascertained that, even if
the portion of our present volume originally allotted to
the zoological department had not been already much more
than exhausted, we should have found great difficulty in

* Voyage to Senegal, p. 178.
t Travels in Southern Africa, vol. i. p. 93.

SHELLS. 351

satisfying either ourselves or our readers. In the absence,
however, of fuller and more circumstantial information, we
must rest contented with tle following brief details :—

The shells of the warmer regions of the earth, as well as
the birds and insects, are generally distinguished from those
of colder countries by the greater beanty of their forms and
colouring ; and those of Africa, while they participate in
this splendid character, are yet more highly valued in con-
sequence of their comparatively rare occurrence in collec-
tions. ‘The productions of the African seas are probably
less known than those of any other quarter of the globe.

The Meditetranean affords very numerous species, al-
though the very slight changes of level which its waters
undergo render its testaceous productions less easily, ob-
tained than in more northern latitudes,

“Where the redundant seas wash up fresh stores.”

A few of the more remarkable animals of these classes
which occur in the Mediterranean are,—several kinds of
cuttle-fish, such as Sepia officinalis, Loligo vulgaris, and L.
sepiola ; Argonauta Argo, Janihina commumns, Isocardium
globosum, Cardita sulcata, and ajar; Spondylus gederopus,
Avicula tarentina, Cardium costatum, Anatina globosa, Pholas
dactylus, and several Pinne. The Tyrian purple of the
ancients is supposed to have been obtained from the Purpura
patula, common in this sea. The use of that splendid
and regal die is now superseded by the discovery of the
tinctorial uses of the cochineal,—a small and obscure insect,
which the skill of the chemist has rendered indispensable
even to the garments of kings.

Egypt and the Valley of the Nile were first correctly ob-
served by the skilful Savigny and the other naturalists of the
great French expedition ; afterward by Olivier, and at a
still later period by Cailliaud. A few species mentioned by
Poiret, those described by Chemnitz, and the collection
made by the Danish naturalist Grove from Morocco,
form the chief materials of our knowledge of this de-
partment along the Barbary coasts. The Red Sea, so
full of shoals and coral reefs, is said to be peculiarly rich in
shells ; but with the exception of the work of Forskall, and
the more recent travels of I.ord Valentia, we can scarcely

4
(352 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

indicate any proper sources of information regarding that
quarter.

The eastern shores of Africa are, in respect to this, as
well as all other branches of natural oe almost entirely
unknown.

With the species of ihe western coasts we are somewhat
better acquainted. Adanson described many of the shells
of Senegal, and Bowdich a few from the Gambia. Maugé,
Von Buch, and Bowdich made small collections from Ma-
deira, Teneriffe, and Porto Santo. Those islands are said
to be rich in peculiar species, and therefore merit more
particular attention than has yet been bestowed upon them.
Along the western coasts numerous species also occur which

‘are common to the tropical seas ; such as Cyprea Tigris,
moneta, and. helvola,—several Olives, Cones, and Volutes,
the pearl-oyster, Meleagrina margaritifera, &c.

Of the land and fresh-water shells of the imterior of this
continent scarcely any thing is known. Le Vaillant de-
scribed only a single species from Caffraria, though Dela-
lande afterward collected many in that country; and
Bruce and Burchell have incidentally noticed a few from
Abyssinia and the more southern districts.

At the Cape of Good Hope the quantities of shells whitoh
‘cover the beaches are immense, and the natives frequently
employ them for lime. But the heavy surf which so often
thunders along the shores of this promontory (the Cape of
Storms) seems to prevent the shells from being frequently
gathered in a perfect state; and South African specimens
are therefore more rare in collections than might be expected.
The coasts of Madagascar are said to be particularly rich
in fine shells, although we have acquired as yet but a very
meager knowledge of the testaceous productions of that
great island. If its climate and political circumstances
admitted of a closer and more assiduous search, treasures
of great value would no doubt reward the toils of the con-
chological collector.

The northern and western coasts, though separated by
so wide an extent of barren sands, offer in this department
a few remarkable analogies. The Anadonta rubens of the
Nile is found specifically the same in Senegal, and the
Helix flammata of Nubia has been observed along the banks
of the Gambia. Among the African shells, a few occur

INSECTS. 353

extensively distributed over other countries. The Bulla
striata is found in Egypt and Senegal, along the coasts of
France and England, in the Antilles, and South America.
The Turbo pecreus, well known in Europe, is equally fami-
liar to the sun-burnt collector at the Cape. The Helix as-

ersd, so abundant in all the temperate countries of Europe,
ha also been found in Africa, and as far west as the Canary
Islands. Another species, the Helix candidissima, frequent
in France and Spain, has been found in Tripoli and other
parts of the African continent. The Helix agira of Egypt
and Barbary is found in Provence, though ‘not in Italy ;
while the Helix lactea of Spain and Algiers is unknown in
_ Provence, yet extends northward as far as Rousillon.

Of other African shells we shall mention merely the
Cassis Madagascariensis, Patella grana.ina and testudinaria,
Conus amimira.is,—a species highly prized by collectors, -
Voluta armata, Halioitis striata, and Oliva er ythrostoma.

The fossil shells of an extremely limited portion of Africa
are partially exhibited in the great French work on Egypt; and
those of Mount Barkal have been iliustrated by M. Cailliaud.

Our knowledge of the geographical distribution of Insects,
notwithstanding the more careful study of the subject which
has prevailed of late years, may be said to be still in its
infancy. Latreille’s little work, however imperfect, is the
most complete with which we have as yet been furnished.*

It is easy to suppose that if certain plants are peculiar to
certain climates, so also insects, the greater proportion of
which not only feed on plants, but are each according to
its kind almost restricted to particular species, must in
like manner be characteristic of special localities. The en-
tomological characters of the southern shores of Europe
strongly exhibit their geographical approach to the African _
continent. The Ateuchus saucer, various specics of Scaurus
and Akis, the European scorpion, several Cigale, Termites,
and others, may be regarded, in the southern countries of
Europe, as the avant-courriers of those more exclusively

* “Introduction 4 la Geographie Générale des Arachnides et des In-
sectes, ou des Climats propres aces Animaux.” This memoir was read
to the Academy of Sciences in 1815, and forms part of the third volume
of the Memoires du Mus¢um d’Histoire Naturelle.” It was republished
in a separate volume by the same author, entitled “ Memoires sur divers
Sujets de Histoire Naturelle des Insectes,” &. Paris, 181%

g2

ae

304 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

African forms which have their centre of dominion in the

burning deserts. Along the Mediterranean shores, the ~

traveller may study the habits of many curious insects be-
longing to the genera Mygale, Onitis, Cebrio, Pimelia,
Brachycerus, Brentus, and Scarytes, and may also enrich his
collection by the capture of many beautiful butterflies, and
other lepidopterous insects, which are more truly charac-
teristic of Northern Africa. Spain especially exhibits many
features of African zoology. The European entomologist
there finds, for the first time, several species of the following
genera :—Erodius, Sepidium, Zyyia, Hemoptera, Galeodes,
Brachinus, and Pimelia. But it is only after crossing the Me-
diterranean, and traversing the African shores, whether north
of the Atlas, or eastward towards the coasts of the Red Sea,
that our eyes are delighted with the hitherto unknown forms
of Anthia, Graphipterus, Siagona, and numerous other spe-
cies unknown to the colder and moister shores of Europe.
But no sooner do we leave the Mediterranean coasts of
Africa, and enter upon the more weary and disastrous pilgrim-
age of the great deserts, the apparently limitless expanse
of which so soon greets the eye of the yet undaunted tra-
veller, than almost all vestiges of European life, whether
human or brute, disappear ; and Nubia, Ethiopia, Senegal,

and a great part of Guinea exhibit entomological forms,

cognate in character when compared among themselves, but
separated, in every sense of the words, “longo intervallo,”
from those of Europe. As we proceed further southwards,

where the chariot of the ‘“‘ Great Apollo” rolls on with a -

still fiercer and more fiery lustre, and the beams of a. verti-
cal sun induce even the tawny Moor and the woolly-headed
negro to avoid his scorching and sometimes fatal rays, we
discover many extraordinary forms of insect life, called into
existence through the instrumentality of that bright efful-
gence which the pale-faced European has so often sought
to withstand in vain. From the burning regions of Guinea,
and the parched shores of the Congo, we derive the finest
of those magnificent coleopterous insects, named generically
Goliathus, by Lamarck. 'The western and equinoctial parts
of Africa also yield us the species of Petalocheirus and En-
celadus ; while the Cape of Good Hope is remarkable for
the genus Anthia and Brachycerus. ‘The last named district
is almost the exclusive domain of Manticora and Pneumora ;

—

INSECTS. 355

and the southern parts of Africa in general present us with
Sagra, Diopsis, and Paussus, although it may be observed
that some of these also occur in the East Indies. The last-
- named genus is remarkable for the very peculiar form of the
antenne. The genus does not exist in the twelfth’ edition
of the Systema Nature, but was published by Linnezus in
- a separate dissertation in 1775. Only a single species was
known at that period, and another was added in 1796, by
Dr. Adam Afzelius, then residing at Sierra Leone.* The
etymology of the name is supposed by Afzelius to be from
the Greek avo, signifying a pause, cessation, or rest ; for
Linneus, now old and infirm, and sinking under the weight
of age and labour, saw no probability of continuing any
longer his career of glory. ‘He might, therefore,” adds
Dr. Shaw, “be supposed to say ‘hic meta laborum,’ as it in
reality proved, at least with regard to insects,—pausus being
the last he ever described.”+ It was ages ok in the lan-
guage of Young,—

“ An awful pause prophetic of his end !”

Both Madagascar and St. Helena present a few insects
which to a certain extent demonstrate the African com-
plexion of those islands; but the latter especially is also
allied by its entomological features to some of the south-
western countries of Asia. According to Latreille, Africa
furnishes no species of the genus Passalus, although it is
elsewhere widely distributed over America and the East
Indies. The genera Graphyptera, Eurichora, and Pneumora
are probably peculiar to Africa.

Among the hemipterous insects of Africa we may men-
tion the Mantis precaria, an object of superstitious venera-
tion among the Hottentots, who hold in the highest respect
the person on whom the insect happens to alight.

““T here became acquainted,” says Mr. Burchell, in his
Travels in the Interior of Southern Africa, “ with a new
species of Mantis, whose presence became afterward suffi-
ciently familiar to me, by its never failing, on calm warm
evenings, to pay me a visit as I was writing my journal,
and sometimes to interrupt my lucubrations by putting out

* Linn. Trans., vol. iv. + General Zoology, vol. vi. p 43

356 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA,

‘the lamp. All the mantis tribe are very remarkable insects s

and this one, whose dusky sober colouring well suits the
obscurity of night, is certainly so by the late.hours it keeps.
It often settled on my book, or on the press where I was
writing, and remained still, as if considering some affair of
importance, with an appearance of intelligence which had
a wonderful effect in withholding my hand from doing it
harm. Although hundreds have flown within my power, I
never took more than five. I have given to this curious
little creature the name of Mantis lucubrans; and having
no doubt that he will introduce himself to every traveller
who comes into this country in the months of November
and December, I beg to recommend hin as a harmless little
companion, and entreat that Kindabes and ieeeities may be
shown to him.”*

Locusts are of common occurrence in whee parts of
Africa. Mr. Barrow records, that in the southern districts
which he visited, the surface of an area of nearly 2000
square miles might literally be said to be covered by them. —
The water of a wide river was scarcely visible in conse-
quence of the innumerable dead locusts that floated on its
surface, apparently drowned in their attempts to reach the
reeds which grew along its shores. Except these much-
wished-for reeds, they had devoured every other green thing,
Their destruction on a former occasion was sudden and
- singular. All the full-grown insects were driven into the
sea by a tempestuous north-west wind, and were afterward
cast upon the beach, where they formed a bank three or
four feet high, and extending nearly fifty English miles.
The smell, as may easily be supposed, was abominable,
and was sensibly felt at a distance of 150 miles.

The migratory flight of the locust, and its desolating
effects upon vegetation, and consequent injury both to man
and beast, have afforded a frequent exercise to the pen of
the poet ; but by none have their injurious inroads been so
magnificently treated as by the Prophet Joel. ‘A day of
darkness and of gloominess, a day of clouds and of thick
darkness, as the morning spread upon the mountains; a
great people and a strong: there hath not been ever the
like, neither shall be any more after it, even to the years of

* Burchell’s Travels, vol.i. p. 418

4

INSECTS. 357

many generations. A fire devoureth before them, and be-
hind them a flame burneth: the land is as the Garden of
Eden before them, and behind them a desolate wilderness ;
yea, and nothing shail escape them. The appearance of
them is as the appearance of horses; and as horsemen, so
shall they run. Like the noise of chariots on the tops’ of
mountains shall they leap, like the noise of a flame of fire
that devoureth the stubble, as a strong people set in battle-
array.” ‘The earth shall quake before them ; the heavens
shall tremble: the sun and moon shall be dark, and the
stars shall withdraw their shining.” ‘ How do the beasts
groan ! the herds of cattle are perplexed, because they have
no pasture; yea, the flocks of sheep are made desolate.”

One of the most formidable of the insect tribes of this
continent is the Termes bellicosus, or white ant. ‘This spe-
cies dwells in congregated troops, consisting of labourers,
soldiers, and sovereigns. ‘They build conical nests of mud
_and clay, from 10 to 12 feet high, and divided in the interi--
by thin partitions into a variety of cells. These nests are
often very numerous, and appear like villages from a dis-
tance. Jobson, in his History of Guinea, alieges that they
are often 20 feet high, and he states that he found them
extremely serviceable in screening himself and his com-
panions while engaged in the pursuit of antelopes and other
wild game. ‘The queen-mother of this species becomes in
the pregnant state of so enormous a size, that her abdomen
exceeds by two thousand times the bulk of the rest of her
body. When the ova are fully formed, they are obtruded
at the rate of 60 in a minute, or upwards of 80,000 in 24
hours.

Of the butterfly tribe, of course, many beautiful species
inhabit this far-spread continent ; but as little is known of
their habits and history, and we would seek in vain to ex-
press by words the splendid colours, the elegant and varied
forms, and the exquisite pencilling by which they are
adorned, we shall not here enumerate any of the African
species ; :

‘* Nameless in dark oblivion they must dwell,”

except in the minds of those who have studied their gorgeous
hues in the illumined pages of natural history, or in those far

358 NATURAL HISTORY OF AFRICA.

more brilliant pages of the book of nature’s self, where the
-most successful effort of art is transcended by a feehle
insect’s wing ;—for the imagination of the poet and the ©
painter cannot boast

‘‘ Amid their gay creation hues like these,”

Several species of bee inhabit Africa. The banded bee
(Apis fasciata) is an object of domestic cultivation ; and in
some parts of the country a particularly delicious honey is
derived from the labours of this industrious insect. Wax
is an object of considerable consequence in the commerce
of Africa.

Scorpions and centipedes of enormous size and most for-
bidding aspect lurk beneath the stones, or glide with nu-
merous feet over the sterile soil; and the poison of these
creatures seems to exist in a stronger and more deadly state
of concentration than in colder climes. Children frequently
die from the bite of the scorpion in less than three days,
In regard to the smaller domestic nuisances of the entomo-
logical class, we have few data from which to form an opi
nion. We doubt not that dirt and indolence produce here
as elsewhere their disgusting concomitants. Captain Lyon,
however, observed, that although bugs were numerous,
there were no fleas in Fezzan. ,

We come now to the last class of the animal kingdom,
called Zoophytes. These, Professor Jameson has else-
where remarked, ‘although the lowest in the scale of ani-
mated beings, are yet highly interesting in the sublime
plan of creation. Their numbers exceed all calculation,—
the minuteness of many species\is such that they are not
to be discriminated by the aid of our most powerful micro-
scopes,—they form one extremity of the zoological scale of
magnitude, of which the other is occupied by the gigantic
whale of the Polar Regions. The coral-reefs, rocks, and
islands of the tropical seas are formed by very minute zoo-
phytes. These reefs, in some regions of the earth, have
been traced for a thousand miles in length, forty or fifty
miles in breadth, and to depths sometimes unfathomable ;
yet they are the work of the most minute animals in
the creation, We find, too, whole beds of rocks, even en:

ZOOPHYTES. 35%

tire hills, of very old formation, extending for hundreds of
miles, characterized by the corals they contain, thus proving
that these animals also existed in countless numbers in a
former condition of our earth, and that then as at present,
they assisted materially in adding to the solid matter of the
globe. Zoophytes, from the simplicity of their structure,
and the geognostic relations of the rocks in which they are
occasionally found, appear to have been called into exist-
ence before the other classes of animals.”’* 3
The red coral (Coralliwm rubrum), of which are formed
so many beautiful ornaments of female dress, and the value
of which as an articie of commerce is consequently great,
occurs abundantly along the coasts of Tunis and the shores
of the Red Sea. It is of comparatively slow growth, and
is never found in such splendid masses as the madre
pores. Light effects a powerful influence on its growth.
‘‘'Thus, at a depth of from three to ten fathoms, it grows
one foot in eight years; at the depth of from ten to fifteen
fathoms, the same length in ten years; at the depth of one

hundred fathoms, same length iti twenty-five or thirty years ;

and at the depth of one hundred and fifty fathoms, the same
length in forty years. It is also remarked, that in general
the colouy is deeper and richer in shallow than in very deep
water. The coral of Barbary is not reckoned so fine as
that of Italy or France.’’+

The common sponge (Spongia officinalis) forms also an
article of traffic along some of the African shores.

We shall conclude our sketch of African zoology by a
brief notice of a dangerous and disgusting animal (Filaria
medinensis), commonly called the Guinea worm. This
gigantic parasite conitrives, in a way best know to itself, to
enter beneath the skin of the human race, especially that
of the legs, where it will remain for several years, attaining
in the mean time to the enormous length of ten feet, and to

the thickness of a pigeon’s quill. According to the place and

manner of its abode, it occasions pains more or less severe;
and in the more unfortunate and disastrous instances, its
continued presence is followed by convulsions and death.

* Murray’s Historical Account of Discoveries and Travels in Afritay
vol. ii. p.471 _ : } Ibid, p. 473.

‘i ‘be wy ei te | ie ye
loti a) et i sidiodtord hee, Sita

i i ~e afi 95h ‘av ane at
y ay ie - p it ; vAAY: mn ats Byles a tau wa" uy ie el
ee RE a aa Nap actors. Oey aa iM ‘yo of aoa sine
HAY . ; ; N eee : 2
. CA i aie Lee 4 iN ip ier Pe ity tm pans eg a
| ay hatta't i ‘3 ie ofe® ed 7
; - . bi ty he iol Figs uf

r
hh
#
a '
7 SHOT. POT TWO A eee PUR FE
! ? wom Sia cath
Ha} eh anges ee eo Seer ae eee,
ae Yili iar EM OSD AES OE hs ne I
Xx p ¢ a Fe ¥ 4 a See ;
\. j hge'y 04 REA ees Leni, wiht b eT a SaRe el: PEE a4 re”

ve quate: tH, ‘maby she ik Labeda EE
' a. Mibbil§ (re OI ES. LL el ae

£, y j ty bs q

f y wast m¢ (ats 3 “tho wi hay

ie ea ne ith \e aii

4 \, Aumann, eiioanpnily | Ts
; resto, AE eect) ' ey) Fal bin i)
es ot pant od venereal. ea DS daaeas Sr eNBON 8

ir Mi
7
i

MA Hh b vi vi HG S582 RG | onal B ie cle, ai a

: i rants) ra ya OQ kegyp’ - ae ql CT Bee hie i, ;
oy) keane wert end, ho cere, nus AATEO HM, alt MOd..
iia i A. 44 a: @t qiabroa ve pry a ‘aaagging st

| ) gin an anak ad apo. ethan weotaapog I. ap

| fg BH iaodentent ausorsrasnenls has otacuaed

“e if tei tit snnialnrynen nd bowoltal ws

i : | aes, Sosa 4 the wn "
t bt Hi ahi oy % nes
i ; ; Aig! re i Ni)

pg

iii
0 020 126° 414 5